1, ■\:'ll!:.,nh;-.u,. 7 ^/ .> V . ^*-r A GRAMMAR OF THE GERMAN ILAMGUAGE. * GRAMMAR OF THE GERMAN LANGUAGE BY GEORGE HENRY NOEHDEN, L. L. D. PH. D. Memberofthe Greek Society at Athens, of the Latin at Jcnai F. L. S. H. S. Min. Jen. THE THIRD EDITION, REVISED. lonoon PRINTED rOR J. MAAVMAN, 39, LUDGATE STREET, Jiy J. D. G. VOGEL, 7. Castle Street, Falcon Square. ^KtU^^^ ADVERTISEMEN T. K This THIRD EDITION does not appear be- fore the Publick^ without having undergone an at- tentive revisal ; by which some inaccuracies have been amended, and, it is presumed, the general tenour of the work improved. That it is still very far from being faultless, is not an affectation of mo- desty in the author to say, but a conviction^ strongly impressed on his mind. How near a similar pro- duction may be brought to such a state, it is diffi- cult to define: it must be deemed to suffice, if what has been done, is not done negligently, and tends to utility. The author does not venture to flatter himself, that an opportunity will again be affi)rded him of correcting what may yet be ermneous, and of supplying what is defective : he has, therefore, the greater cause to recommend his book to the in- dulgence of the Critick. When it was first published, he little thought, that he should have the honour of presenting a second edition : but his expectations have been still more surpassed, by the demand for a third. This encouragement he has great satisfac- tion in ascribing to the increased regard and atten- Advertisement* tion, which are bestowed, in this country^ upon the German language. The two former editions did not consist of small impressions : but to calculate the extent to which that study prevails, it must be farther considered, that there are, besides, other grammars in circulation, which, from the advan- tage of being more immediately under the protec- tion of the book- selling interest, have, probably, even a larger sale. It hence appears likely, that the knowledge of the language, and consequently of the literature, of Germany, will be more diffused^ in England, than it hitherto has been ; a circum- stance justly desired by those, who see in the learned intercourse, between different nations, additional means for the advancement of science, and the pro- motion of reciprocal civilization. The Germans have, up to this period, been more benefitted by this communication, than the English : for the English language is much attended to, in Germany, and English literature is well known, and understood. On the other hand, German literature has not made a like progress in England: an acquaintance with it can be attributed comparatively but to a few persons ; and it must, in general, be confessed, that its com- pass, and substance are very imperfectly estimated. It may, however, be hoped, and expected, that it will, together with the language, become more fa- miliar : and if there be any merit in contributing to this object, the author will not hesitate to claim Advertisem^t. his share. He has, by several publications, en- n deavoured to facilitate, to the English student, the ' acquisition of the German tongue. The Grammar, Elements, Exercises, and Dictionary owe their origin to that motive. These works, with which a German Reading- book, may, perhaps, shortly be associated, will, in conjunction, not fail to open an easy access to a language, that can only be called difficult, when it is perversely taught. They stand in a certain relation to one another, and are de- signed to co-operate, in order that the intended purpose may be the more completely attained. The instruction should begin with the Elements, the use of which little book has not been duly appreciated. It furnishes the first principles of the language, and is best adapted to the wants of a beginner. The declensions, and conjugations, and other prelimi- nary matters, upon the thorough possession of which an accurate knowledge of the language de- pends, will be most readily acquired from that source. The Grammar itself, will, after this preparation, be taken in hand, with greater profit, and its details more quickly comprehended. The Exercises, (and the Reading-book, if that be added,) by practically illustrating what has been learnt in theory, will ac- complish this course of study. It will be observed, that the pages, in this new edition, have occasionally double numbers : those in brackets are the numbers of the second edition. Advertisement. When any alteration made a difference in the page, it was thought expedient thus to note the numbers of the second edition, with a view that the referen- ces in the Exercises, and the Elements, (sometimes, also in the Dictionary), which were accommodated to that edition, might not be found inapplicable to the new one. This edition will, therefore, be as fit to be used with the Exercises, and the other books alluded to, as its predecessor; and no difficulty, ^ith regard to the quotations, is to be apprehended. For where the pages of the third edition vary from those of the second, the numbers of the latter are subjoined to those of the former, so that he who k)oks for a reference, cannot be disappointed. G. H. NOEHDEN. LONDON, Albany, Piccadilly, August 26th, 1816. INTRODUCTION, CONCERNING THE LANGUAGE WHICH IS THE SUBJECT OF THIS GRAMMAR, X HE Language, which this Grammar proposes to teach, was originally a dialect, peculiar to a small distrki in Germany, and is to this day distinguished, from lti€ other modes of speech, by the name of High Ger- man. It began first to rise into notice at the time of the Reformation ; but, since the sixteenth century, it has been cultivated in different provinces, and ultimately adopted, as their common tongue, by all. It is be- come the language of literature, and of general commu- nication, whereas the remaining idioms are confined to the colloquial intercourse of their own provinces, and even there, in a considerable degree, excluded from the practice of the well-educated and higher classes. It is the language of the whole nation, and must, by preference, be understood, when The German is mentioned. It is my design, in the following pages, briefly to exhibit the history of this dialect, and to say a few words 'on its nature and properties. B 2 Introduction, Jhe Electorate of Saxony was the place that gave it Uirlh. That part of Germany had, at an early period, been inhabited by people ofSlavonick descent*; who were, in the tenth century, mixed with a colony of Ger- mans from Frauconia, established among them. The Franconians eventually became the masters of the ; country, and as such introduced their language. But 4t experienced some change, by being communicated to i. the prior inhabitants. Their tongue, as that of other / Slavonick tribes, was probably soft and harmonious; and had consequently a tendency to smooth and mol- V lify any new language, which lliey might acquire. The dialect of Franconia belongs to those of Upper (or South) Germany ; which are all, more or less, spoken with broad, guttural, and hissing sounds. They differ, jn this respect, from the pronunciation of Lower (or North) - Germany, which is more simple and easy. But the idiom, formed in the Electorate of Saxony, l>esides that ad- mixture of softness, derived from the Slavonians, was alpo modified by the intercourse, which the people of thaft district maintained with other parts of Germany. Their industry, and superior civilization, brought them into contact with numerous strangers, whose customs 9fld language, to a certain degree, mingled with their own. 1" this manner, nmch of the original roughness )of .the llp^f^r German wzs worn away ; and the High GftSian moiieiled^iqto a form, better calculated for the ( * It borders upon Bohemia, where the mass of the popu- lation is Slavonick, and where, to this day, a pure Slavo- nick 4ialect is spoken. In my journey through Bohemia, in the spring 1815, I was much struck witn that lan- guage, the sounds of which are so soft and harmonigus, that I do not hesitate to say, they rival the Italian. History of the High German. 3 ^urp^ses of literature, and conversation, than its prede- ^ eessol', the Upper German. Before we proceed fat-C tber in our remarks, it will be proper to advert to the ) name which was given to this idiom, in contradistinc- tion to the others. It is by that appellation discrimi- nated from the Low German, which is the native lan- guage of the northern parts of Germany.* That of \he south of Germany was called Upper Germanf ; \ from this the High German likewise differs. But the- name seems to have been chiefly assigned in opposition to the Low German, because that new dialect apper- tained to a country situated higher up, that is to say, ' more to the south. In this manner there existed, about the time of the Reformation, three grand divisions of ) *h*i Grerman language, viz. the Upper German (Ober i^ Deutsch), the Low German (Nieder JDeutsch, or -^ Piatt Deutsch), and lastly theJHjglj^jj^rman {HhH \ Ihutsch)X. I Before that era, every literary production, which \ * These are the circles of Westphalia and Lower Saxony; and the norihern provinces of ttie Upper Saxon cirele, vii. Pomerania, and Brandenburgh. The Low German is also spoken in Prussia, and traces of it are found in a part of Transylvania, which was peopled by a colony from the north of Germany, in the thirteenth century, See Biisching^s Geography, t This belongs to Franconia, Austria, Bavaria, Suabia, , the southern part of the Upper Saxon circle, Silesia, and some of the Rhenish coimtries. X Koch Deutsch. signifying High German^ is pronounced Hoch Doitch. This is sometimes erroneously rendered, into English, by High Dutch, a mistake which must have arisen from the similarity of the words Deutsch and Dutch ; thoMigh they are essentially different in meaning,- the form«rdea«$- ing German, and the latter JJollandish. B 2 (^ 4 Introduction. was composed in the German tongue, was wriUen [iTthe Upper German: this was the veliiclc of llte- ( rature, in that country. The High German was ) t|ie native dialect of Luther, and by the influence ( of his example, it began to be raised to a competition '^ » with the fornjer idiom, and was soon spread through- out the whole nation. The Bible, and other works of high interest, at that period, published in this dialect, and the number of proteslant divines which is- sued from the Electorate of Saxony, tended to make it known, even in the remoter parts of the country. '; Itwas read and understood every where, and, by de- / grees, cultivated as the general language of all Ger- l many. It drove the Upper German from that pre- eniinence, which it had hitherto occupieil, and, in its / stead, possessed itself of the fields of literature and ^ science. The effect of those circumstances*, which had concurred to exalt the Uppt r German above tbe other dialects, had ceased ; and it was compelled to give way to a new rival. The Low German was at f . no lime much used in writing, though this idiom, if it had been attended to, might perhaps have produced a language, for softness and harmony far superior to the two others. • In the 11th, 12th, and 13th centuries, the age when the modern languages of Europe began to he used in writ- ing, the crown of the Empire was enjoyed by natives of the. Soutli, oi Upper Germany. See Pvtte?s History of the Ger^ man Empire. The Up}»er German, therefore, was the lan- guage ot the court; — this was one reason. The vicinity of J'ranee and Italy gave the southern provinces of Germany, at the revival ot letters, a great advantage ay reciprocally have their peculiarities, likewise in opposition to the law pre- scribed. This law is, that the pronunciation should \ be brought as near to the orthography of the language, as it is possible, that the sounds should correspond with the letters, and that the farther any province re- redes from that line, the more distant it is from the praise of a good pronunciation. in drawing a comparison between the claims of i\it pronunciation of the Upper Saxons, 7 Upper and Lower Saxons, it is my wish to act witii tlie utmost fairness, according to llic preceding ob- servalious. 1 shall, therefore, enumerate the principal faults of both competitors, and carefully weigh them against one another, which will, in the surest manner, lead to such a conclusion, as may enable the foreigner lo form his opinion. The erronrs of the Upper Saxons are these : \ 1. A want of distinction between soft ao(lJi^^^ let- hard sounds, in general, prevail. B is pronounced by ' ihem like P, D like 7', and G hke K. The nature^ of this misnomer will readily be nnderslood by the English reader, who will recognise in it his friends. Cap- tain Fluellen*, and Mr. Morganf. But it is a grievous defect! Baum is metamorphosed into /*««»?, Bnch into Puch,' Ball into Pall. In the same manner V they speak fer, tie, tas, for der, die, das; tienen Sor dienen ; tnnim for dumnu Tiius they substitute /i for G, and say Kott instead of Gott, kehen instead of . gehen, &c. It may be answered, that such certainly are the popular irregularities of pronunciation, with the Upper Saxons ; but that the High German should be considered according to the slate, in which it exists among persons of letters, and the higher orders. This, indeed, is just ; yet it does not seem to remove the ob- jection : for that default appears to be radical, coni- nion to all, and incurable. At least so 1 have found it, in the course of my observation ; and I hardly think it possible, that I should be mistaken ; if I am, all that ♦ See Shakspear's Ilcnry V. t See Roderick Random", and peregrine Pickle. 8 Introduction, is said upon this point, falls of itself to the ground. Bi»t what, is singular, it has often struck me, as if the Upper Saxons (I speak of literary and well educated peo- ple) were incapable of perceiving, by the ear, any difference between the hard and soft sounds, though their tongue, by chance, sometimes produres the for- mer. In this case, I have remarked, the soft sound is, r for the most part, misapplied, by being placed not where it Ought to be, but perversely substituted for a hard ^ one, as B for P, in die Bost, for Post ; der Blatz, for ^ Platz, &c. / 2. The hissing aspiration (like, the English«A) which { iL&*^*IK l<* **'^ '*^*tc"*.,'5. hefore p and . (^ especially in ) the beginning of words, 1 consider as the second ob- \ jeclion. Stihen*, for example, is made to sound like shteken; sprechen^ hke skprechen ; DiirstX hke Darshf. When the orthography of the language dictates an S, )whal can be the ground for uttering this consonant ( otherwise, than simply as an S? For that hisf^ing as- / piralion a particular sign is appropriated, namely sch ; ( and why should a similar confusion of the alphabetiek / characters be tolerated 1 If that aspiration is to be expressed, for what reason may the type, assigned to it, not be employed in writing 1 But where the ortho- graphy revolts at the sch, what charms can this sound possess for pronunciation 1 It surely has nothing to recommend it, on the score of euphony ; nor can wc yield so much to the paramount authority of one pro- vince, as, after its example, to establish a mode of speaking, which is contrary to the general rule, and affords, by its intrinsick merit, no compensation for such To sta nd. t To speak. J Thirst, Pronunciation of {he Lower Saxons. 9 an irregularity. It is the foreigner whose opinion may, ©n this point, be consulted with impartiality ; but it will be difficult to persuade him (I allude to such fordgn- crs as belong to the most enlightened nations of Europe) that the hissing sound of Sch is a desirable substitute for that of the simple S". It is a peculiarity, which has been retained from the Upper German, and ought to be dismissed from the general language, both upon princi- ple, and on the ground of couveniency. The Lower Saxons are always disposed to avoid it, and it would, in this instance, certainly be unreasonable to require of thein, that they should exchange their belter pronun- ciation for one, which nuist be allowed to be worse. 3. In the third pluce we may notice the want of dis- crimination between the diphthong ii, and the vowel i, which seems to prevail among the Upper Saxons. Thcx pronounce both alike, namely, as the rf of ihe English ; but ii should be sottu^f|vtice, against one an- other, and determine, by reasoning, which of the two modes of pronunciation is least objectionable, or, in other words, which of the two provinces is to be pre- ferred, with regard to this question. The exceptions, which have been made to the pro- nunciation of the Upper Saxons, are, as I think, in Best Pronunciation: 1 1 themselves more considerable, llian those which are al- leged against the Lower Saxons. We will not, how- ever, discuss them singly, but limit ourselves to the fol- lowing obfervation^, The provincial habits, which eiiiat in the Electoral^ of Saxony, and those in particular, which we have ad- verted to, are derived from the Upi>er German. This produces the singular disadvantage, that, where they are once rooted in the organs of speech, it is difficult to remove them. The Upper Saxons, tlierefore, find it a task of inconceiveable hardship to divest themselves of those blemishes : and their pronunciation of the High German will, probably for ever, remain defective. It is otherwise with the inhabitcinls of Lower Saxony. They can, with ease, adapt their speech to various sounds; and though any particular mode of ullerance should not be familiar to them, it is not beyond their capacity to acquire it. They have, of lale years, proved this by their manner of speaking the High German. Those individuals who are acquainted with the rules of a right pronunciation, have, in general, well succeeded in ob- serving them : when they fail, in some instances, it is more from inatteniion, than any incorrigible deficiescy. That inattention may, with moderate exertion, be en- tirely overcome ; and their language, as far as the act of speaking is involved, be brought very near the line of perfection. To this the Upper Saxons will never be able to aspire, at least not, while they labour under those peculiarities, which distinguish them from their neigh- bours. The High German, as spoken by the Lower Saxons, is, besides, in a certain degree mellowed by that softness of tone, which the native dialect of this tribe possesses. This is a <^reuBlstance of which foreign- 1 2 Introduciiort. ers readily become sensible : and I may add, that the natives of Upper Saxony tliemselves are not uucon* conscious of it*. This I remarked, during a late resi- dence in Up|>er Saxony (in the spring of the year 1815), chiefly at Leipzig and Dresden, where I met with some individuals, who did n6t hesitate to declare the Lower Saxon pronunciation preferable to their ownf. Hence it is obvious, to what part of Germany it will be ad- visable for a foreigner to repair, who wishes to acquire • I will here again quote a passai^e, cited in the two foi- mer editions, from Mn. Piozzis t)bservations and Refiec- tions in the course of a Journey through France, Italy, and Germany, Vol. II, p. 137. That lady distinauislics IIa«- over (in Lower Saxony) as the si>t;(nces, to b^ pronounced asitisin the pro- noun they. tTo sound like the acute e of the Ocimans. See the next scciicn. $ See the pro- nunciaiiuu of this tetter, ia the next section. I Refer to tli« »ound of these (liphthongA, in the next section. Sect, I. On the Alphabet. 19 OBSERVATIONS. 1. In the printed alphabet some letters are apt to be mistaken by beginners, and to be confounded one with another. To facilitate the discrimination, I will place them here together, and point out the ditFerence. 25 (B), and S5 (V). The latter is open in the middle, the former joined across. 6 (C), and @ (E). (§, (E)has a little horizontal stroke in the middle, pro- jecting to the right, which (5 (C) has not. © (G), and (S (S). These letters, being both of rather a round form, are sometimes taken for one another, particularly the ® for the ©. But © (S) has an opening above, @ (G) is closed, and has besides a perpendicular stroke within. ^ (K), ^ (N), ^ (R). ^ (K) is rounded at the top, 91 (N) is open in the middle, SR (R) is united about the middle. m, (M), and SK (W). 9Jl (M) is open at the bottom, SSS (W) is closed. b (b), and !) (h). b (b) is perfectly closed belowj \) (h) is somewhat ope». 20 On Orthography/ Sf Pronunciation. Part I, Chap. 1 . and ends atjthe bottom, on one side, with a hair stroke. I have known b (d) confounded with b (b), but the dif- ference between these letters is sufficiently marked, even for the commonest attention. f(0, andfCO. f (f)hasa horizontal line above. m (m), and n> (w). m (m) is entirely open at the bottom, to (w) is partly closed. r (r), and y (x). y: (x) has a little hair stroke below, on the left. t) (v), and t) (y). t> (v) is closed ; t) (y) is somewhat open below, and ends with a hair stroke. 2. The copperplate exhibits three Alphabets of Ger- man hand-writing : No. 1. Is known by the name of gractur ©d^dft, i. e. the Broken Letter, because the characters are formed by interrupted touches of the pen. It is used for inscrip- tions, and for the first lines of any formal writing. No. 2. Called GanjlcV) ©djrift, i. e. Chancery writ- ing, serves commonly for engrossing. No. 3. Is the current hand. Of these three alphabets, both the capital and small letters are represented ; and an example is added, to show them in connection. Sec. 2. On Orthography, 21 SECTION 11. ON ORTHOGRAPHY. Orthography has in the German, as in other lianguages, been exposed to variety, and change. To avoid these, and to give to the external form of the language a proper degree of consistency, the followhig rules should be kept in view. First, such characters, in writing, should be used, as by their import, approach the nearest to the best pro- nunciation*. But Secondly, a regard must, at the same time, be had to derivation, and etymology. In the third place, we ought no4, without necessity, and preponderating reasons, lo depart from the general practice, whicli has been once introduced. If these rules had been followed, those many innova- tions, which have emharassed German Orthography, would not have taken place. It was the ignorance of * It may be thought that, in laying down this rule, I am proceeding in a circle : for I have elsewhere said, that you should speak as you write, and here it seems to be re- commended, that you should write as you speak. Orthogra- ) phy and pronunciation must reciprocally assist each other; V and it will happen that, in the case of a difference, the one may be ascertained, when the other appears doubtful ;, or, it is sometimes moreoa^y to fix the one, than the other. / That which is first established, will lend its assistance to the ' other. In this manner, I think, there reniaints no fallacy. The rule itself is sanctioned by the authority of Quintilian, who says, Inst. Or. J. 7. Ego (nisi quod consuetudo obtinu- erit) sic sci'ibendum guicgue judico, quompdo son»t. Hie enim iisusest liter arum, ut cuatodiant voces, et velut depositum red- dant legcntibns ; itaque idexprimere dehenl quod dictvri sunms. \ S2 On Orthography 4* Pronunciation. Part J.Chap.1, those principles, that led to imaginary reforms. Most of them were but misconceived changes, which had their source in the fancy, perverseness, and vanity of individuals. It would not be fit to enter into a detail^ of these deviations ; let it suffice to put the student on , his guard. The books, with which he is first brought ( acquainted, should be models of a just orthography : the variations, which he will afterwards notice, in hi» ; reading, he ought to examine according to the foregoing rules. We have now to advert to some peculiarities, which exist in German orthography. 1. All nouns substantive are written with capital letters, that is to say, the letter which begins any such noun, must be a capital. And not only words which are pro- perly substantives^ fall under the operation of this law, but likewise all^hat are employiid^ at an^ time, in that quality. They assume this particular appearance of sub- stantives, wherever they supply their place. Of this description are : (a J Adjectives, ct'Mfr wh^n . a substantive is under- stood, as: bet SBcifc, the wise (man); bcr ©roge, the great (man) ; btc @C^)5nc, the fair (woman) : or when they are themselves employed abstracted iy^. with the power of a substantive, as : t>a§ ©C^Warj, tlit- black, t. e, the colour black ; baS ©rim, the green, t. e. the colour green; baS 9^unt», the round substance, rotundity. To the adjectives may be added the possessive pronouns, as: t>ic9)ldni9en, my friends; t)ic£)eim9cn, thy friends; bic©citugen, his friends; t>ic UufdCjen, our friends, or our people; t>ic (Surigen, your friends; tU 3t)rigen, their friends. Thus ba6 5!}?Ctn, that which is mine, Cmetim) ; baS £>cin, that which is thine, (tuum), &c. Sect, 2. On Orthography. 2^ ^b) The Infinitives, when they are made to express the jsulijsiaotive acts of their verbs, for which the English make use of the participle. ^a^Sefen, the act, or em- ployment, of reading ; t>a§ ©d^retbCH, the act of writ- ing ; bflg ®c()Cn, the act of walking ; ba6 Sfleifen, the act of travelling. (c) Any other pari of speech which, by an ;5»rticle, or pronoun, prefixed, assumes the cliaracte_r_ of a substan- tive. ^aS 2(bcr, the word but ; baS Sd), the pronouu /, (ego), &c. 2. German Orthography coincides with the English in this point, that it frfquenlly marks any word with a capital letter, which is to attract the notice of the reader, or to be distinguished from the rest. In English the first personal pronoun is always written capitally (/) : in Ger- man it has not this prerogative, except where it begins a sentence, or is to be distinguished by an emphasis. On the other hand the pronouns of address, such as thou, yoUf which in English have, usually, only small letters, are begun with capitals, in German, as : ^u, S()r, (5v, ^ie*. This is the effect of an imaginary polite- ness, by which also possessive and demonstrative pro- nouns, when they are used as the means of speaking to another person, are decorated with capital letters. For example, in these sentences, I have received your letter, I have seen your falher, &c. the pronoun Your would be written with a capital. 3. The Punctuation in German Orthography differs only in some trifling particulars from the English. The dissimilarity refers principally to the comma, and is as follows : ♦ Set Chap. III. Sect. 1. ^ ' <''^ ^'^'^ ^^t*^^ //^-^ ^St'*-^^ it^^^t^^/itX^su.-^ t ?4 On Orthography Sf Pronunciation. Pari /. Chap A, (a) Tlie English frequently confine adverbs, conjuuc- tions, and prepositions ^vith their cases, between com- mas, as in these examples : *' He was extremely as- tonished to see his dominions overwhelmed, on a sud- den, with such an inundation of licentious barbarians/*^ Hume. — " It is, accordingly, this steady, inflexible virtue, this regard to principle," &c. Blair.—" Those who have great affairs to manage, intricate plans to pur- sue, many enemies, perhaps, to encounter in the pur- suit." Blair. — " Let us cease, therefore, from looking up with discontent and envy to those, whom birth or for^ tune has placed above us." Blair. — ** The world appears not, then, originally made for the private convenience of me alone." Harris. — ** The fact, certainly, is much otherwise. If sensibility, therefore, be not incom- patible with true wisdom," &c. Melmoth's Cicero.— " In this, however, as above, numbers of the most beau- tiful crystals were formed." Goldsmith.—" There is not, in my opinion, a more pleasing and triumphant consi- deration," &c. Addison. — " He made preparations for recovering England of which, duiing his absenct, be had, hy Hcnry*s intrigues, been so unjustly defrauded." /Hume. — In these, and similar instances, the usage of f Oerman orthography would admit no comma before, and - /after, the words printed iu Italicks. (b) The Germans rarely put a coram j, in the middle of a sentence, before the conjunction unb, and; where Ihe English generally add that sign of distinction. . (c) In German, a comma is invariably placed before ja relative pronoun, which is, in JSkiglisb, very often / omitted. - (d) The infinitive mood with the preposition jii, to. Sect. 2, On Orthography, 25 preceding it*, is always separated by a Ciomma from 7 the verb, which governs it. Examples : gd) frcue ml^, \ ©ie ju fe()en, I rejoice to see you. (gr furc^tet \\6:)f feinen 23ater jii beleibigen, he fears to offend his father; cr cli graphy. Their scliemes have been as unsuccessful, as they were useless. ^ 4. The sign of Apostrophe ( ' ) is to be used ) (a) In the genitive cd'^e of proper names. It is then prefixed to the genitive termumtion, which generally i ut, 8ometim.'s ns, antd)te, Holty'r* poen»s: ®6^e'n6 ^rctigtcn. Gotee's sermons ; U^'cnS ©i)riftcn. Hie writings ot Ua. The application of the apostrophe is often to be ^ recommended, on the ground that it leads to an easy , discrinrination of proper names. For example, by means of this siyn, we are enahled to ascertain, that the nomi- ( native case ot ©oijc'llg is ®5^C, and not ®66en; of ( U5'en6, U5, not UjC, or Ujcn. But to gain this advantage, it roust be carefully and accurately placed, before the ' genitive tennination. As it is certainly useful in some proper names, 1 see no reason, why we should not ad- mit it in all, though the practice is, as yet, not gene- rally established ; and the more so, as it might serve for a distinction to proper names from common appellatives. SfCt. 2. On Orthography. 27 (ft) The apostrophe should be employed, when the vowel e is, by contraction, thrown away, where properly it ought to remain. For example : er fprad)'§5 for fpra^ cS, hespokt'it; fa^e mir'5, formireS, ieii!el^'c§, for tjet- ftcl^c c6, 1 iiudersiaiid it ; gmmt)' unbgdnbe, ^»r grcunte unb geinbe. irienHs and foes ; bo§" unb l^alftarrig, for b6fc, bad and obstinate. In the infl**rtion b«.ih of nouns and verbs, a similar contraction is freqtifitt ; but, in general, not indicated by (he apostrophe: as, bc6 S5ud>f » for ^ud^e§. of the b«M>k ; cr lobt. for lobet, he praises; Ct lobte, for Uhiti\ gclobt. for geli^bet. Only where the pronunciation might sufivr a rhaiige, if (he omission of the f wi re not understood, it slionid be marked, as in ec rcif't, for reifct, he travels ; in which the letter s should > be pronouncetf soft, as it would be before the e, previ- ouslv to the coutraction. If the word were written rciff, without the ap general, to teach pronunciation by writing, without the ^j assistance of a teacher's voice. You act upon the eye, instead of the ear, which is the proper organ tor this spe- cies of instruction. The only way of imparling it, in that manner, is by comparing the letters and sounds of the language which is to be learnt, with those of a language already known. Such a comparison, however, is not always to be obtained. One language may have sounds, to which nothing similar is to be found in another. In sucb circumstances, some have thought, that a delineation, or description, of the form and changes, which the organs of speech assume, in pronouncing, would lead to a suc- cessful imitation of the sounds ; but, on experience , it will be found, that this is a very precarious help to de- pend on. The task is much facilitated, when a com- parison with several foreign languages may be resorted to ; and of this expedient we shall, to a certain degree, avail • Inst. Or. I, 11. Vt expressa sint verba, ui iuis quttqut litera sonis enuntientur, D 3 so [29] On Orthography Sf Pronunciation. P.LC.l, ourselves, throughout this section. The whole attempt { will still remain imperfect ; and the student cannot ex- ) peel to possess himself fully of the pronunciation, ua- ( less by an intercourse with the natives. But notwitJisland- iog these discouraging circumstances, the contents ofthe \ present division will not appear to be without their use. They will induce a more attentive consideration of the subject, than perhaps would be afforded by oral instruc- tion alone. This will undoubtedly be wanted to sup- ply the deficiencies ofthe former; but the written rules will, reciprocally, prove a beneficial support to the lessons ofthe master. On this persuasion, I have thought it worthwhile, to enter, with some degree of minuteness, into the following details. VOWELS. ^, 6/ 3, o, n, 5>. % (A). / This vowel has, I believe, in no language of Europe, ) that acute sound, which is assigned to it in English : I mean that, which, for instance, is heard, in hate, state, Tnale, gale, and is, in English granimar, called the long sound. r In German, the A is pronounced, as it is in the ^Pfench, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, and other lan- guages : which seems to be between the short A of the English in hat, man, and their broad one, in haU, halL It approaches the sound of a in ah, father, and that of «tf, in aunt, gauntlet. A is in some words doubled, by which no other change is effected, in the pronunciation, thau that of Sect, S, Pronunciation of Letters. [30] 31 rendering the vowel more fuli, and long. Examples ; ter %a\, the eel ; baS ^aax, the hair ; bic ^lkMi)U, the throat; t)a§ 9)?c()I, the flour; jctjCH, ten. The Upper Saxons also sound the e broad, btfore A, in the following*: t)e()nen, to stretcli : bre()cn, to turn; bie %ii)'Oi, the feud, or warfare ; Ie()ncn, to lean ; tic ®cl)ne, the sinew; fic^ fcl)ncn, to long after; tjcrfefjreit, to damage ; n)c()Cn, to blow ; vre^VCn, to guard against; jc()rcn, to consume. The Lower Saxons abitie by the \rule, and pronounce the words, last mentioned, with the (acute sound. In the following wordj, the broad sound is heard, though E is not at the end of tliA-^^jIable : SSCQcgncit, to meet; bcquem, commodious; ba6 SSrct, the board ; t?ie aSvc^cl, the bun; ber, bcm, ben, artich- ; bie ^rbc, the earth ; erjl, first ; ba§ ©rj, the ore ; l)|r, hither ; bcr Jg)crb, the hearth; bag ^cbSnJCib, Iheco.Mubme; ncbjl, besides, prep, bag ^fevb, the horse ; qucr, awry ; reg- ncn, to rain; ber@C^mcr, the grease; bag ©c^rrcrt, the sword; fe^nen, to bless; ber ©teg, the path; wer, who; wetben, to become; wertl), worth; ber 2Bert(),. the value ; bag 9Ujl, the nest, (according to the Upper S^on wayjof pronounciiig.)f •See Adelung's System (Lehrgebiiude der Deutscheii Sprache) Vol. 1. p. 262. t The Lower Saxons pronounce several of the words, mentioned in this exception, with the acute sound, as, rrf?, €rg, <&ct)mcr. ^W-^. 2. Pronunciation of Letters [32] 33 WJjen a contraction has taken place, E r<5tains its broad sound, though it should be in the middle of a syllable : as, cr lebt, he lives, contracted from, cr lebct. Wheijjl]e]i„k -doubled, the sound is always acute, though the Upper Saxons speak it broad, in ^ie Seere, the berry; tag »g)ecr, the host, or army: t>a6S!}?ecr, the sea ; fccr (£^ccr, the spear ; fcer %t)^X, the tar. 2. The acute sound o£ JE is that of the Italian unac- cented e, and the French ^ JermL I believe, this sound exists in the English language, though I am at a loss to elucidate it sufficiently by examples. If I may trust to my ear, I think, it is beard in the pronoun they ; and perhaps also in Aoy, dried grass. The acute sound has its place before the letter h : as, t)ic^1)re: the honour; fcic @'l)e, matrimony; j!e1)Cn, to y stand. However, in some words which have been enumerated before, the broad sound prevails, though an h should follow. The acute E is also heard before th, because this stands for ht, as will be shewn hereafter ; for instance, in tie aSetl^e, the name of a plant ; baS ^at^^et, the professor's chair, or desk. It moreover sounds aculely^ when it is doubled; as, in bie ®ec, the sea ; t>cr ^^ce, the tea ; ba§ 35ect, the bed in a garden, &c. But the Upper Saxons pronounce the following words broad: bic^Becre, the berry; ba^ ^cer, the host, or army ; bet ©|)eer, the spear ; baS SSeer, the sea ; bcr %\)ilx, the tar. See above. Observe, that ee is no more than e long, and must be utt€redjis.^D C sound . It is used in monosyllablesj> 34 [33] On Orthography Sf Pronunciation. P, LC,\, especially when c is the final letter. Likewise in ble23cere, the berry ; bic ] 35 ber2Ct^cm, the breath ; o0Jt, open; ba§5!)^c{Ter, the knife; similar to the Enghsh e in ope7i, shape n, thistle" , metre. And thus obscure it ren^ains, though one or more conso- nants should follow after the liquid : as Itebenb, loving ; ein Siebenbcr, a loving person ; t)tc SKugcnb, virtue; iw genbl^aft, virtuous : tie 3Biffenfd^aft, the science ; ge^ lautert. purified ; gcldutertcS ®olt), purified gold. At the end of a word of more thaii on*^ syllable, llie. E has a kind of half sound, which somewhat resembles the final er of the English, as in water ^ and the final a, as in umbrella, sopha. Examples of this sort are nu- merous, as there is a great variety of words ending in e ; for instance, the first person of most verbs and tenses; also many substantives, and adjectives. 3d) Hebe, I love; id) (icbtc, 1 did love; fete Siebe, the love; tit ^dnbe, the hands; bie QUtcgrau. the j^ood woman; ba^ gUtC^inb, the good child; gute Scute, good people. The Enslisb, when tliey hear the e so pronounced, sometimes mistake ii for their er final, which shews that there must bi* a resemblance between those two sounds. Therefore, following the sound of lob^, they would spell it lober ; bie i-eg. But in those parts they also give this double sound to the t, when e is not added ia writing, as ba§ ^i-'id:)t, for t»a6 Cici^t, the light. The simple t is restored, when, in declining, the word receives an additional e. For it is not usual to write i, with two e*s after it. Therefore, bic ^ocfic, the poetry, in tl»e plural t)ic '5)oeften, pronounced ^ocfi-cn, because it stands for ^oeffc-cn; bic ($pjjic, the transcript, plur. (Sopi'Cn; t)ic9Rclot>ic, the melody, plur.bie9JicIobt.cn; bag ^nie, the knee, plur. bic .Ktli'C, for bie .Kniee. Thus id) frf)ric, I cried; fi'c fd}n;cn, they crit'd, for fie fc^dccn. In such instances, t and e are sounded by themselves. Likewise in the following words: baS «^t ctoglppl^y the Sect. 3. Pronunciation of Letters, [S6] 37 liierogl^vphick ; bte .£>if!on e, the history ; t>{e Som6bt»e, the comedy ; Sili=C, tlie lily ; (5cl)lefi-cn, Silesia ; (Spani: en, Spain ; ber ©^ani'Cr, the Spaniard ; bie TixU, the air, musick. i is also lengthened by the addition, of the letter h, especially, when a consonant follows after it, in the same syllable: as, 5^m, to him, it)n, him; i^r, you, ij^neit, to you ; ii)rc, Ihciis; if)rcn, to theirs. The A, is however, not frequently used, as a sign of length, after i ; and hardly in any other words besides those, just now mentioned. Among the various innovations which have been pro- jected, in the German language, the omission of those signs of length has been attempted ; but they were too well established to lose their ground. The simple i is used long in some" words, for the sake of distinguishing them from others of the same sound, written with ie. For example: X)h Sibei*, the fibre, to be discerned from ba6 gicber, the fever ; wiber, against, to be different from wicbet, again ; tic SKine, a mine (in fortification), bic §DZicnc, a feature of the countenance, ^ie S3ibcl, the Bible, is also written with a mere t. When more than one consonant follow after t>, the sound becomes short ; as in ber ^iettftag, the Tuesday ; ba§ SStertcl, the quarter ; ^jier^ef)!!, fourteen ; mcrjig, for- ty ; i^ gicng, I went ; tc!^ t)Un^, I hung ; er giebt, he gives: though it would be more regular, in such words, to make use of the sinipl^j'. ( 38 [37] On Orthography Sf ProHunciation. P. /. C. 1. S), (O), yjtojlfe sound of tl^e English .0^ viz. \rhcn ioBg. that \Vhich is heard, in bone, stone, over, obedient ; or of oa in ^oflf, oat, coal: >vlienshort^i I. resembles lliq o, in ^Jpt, got, trot. The German O always keeps its, genuine soiuicl, and admits of no such variations, as occur_ in seme English words, for example, in son, come, done, attorney, in /which is pronounced like a short, or close, u ; or in ^ move, behove, where it sounds like double o ; or in off, where the sound is between o and uu. O is sometimes repeated, to shew, that the sound islqn^;_or A ada§ ^l)r, the ear; t>er ©O^H, the son. Ik®- This vowel is the sanie inlheGerm_aii,.asin the Ita- lian, Spanish, and Portuguese languages ; that is to say, when long, it sounds like the English o, in to, do, more, prm: ov like oo, ill hoot, boot, cooler; or like om, in soup, youth. When short, i( resembles tiic obtuse u* olthe linglish, in bull, full, bushel. It is never pronounced like the long u, in use, mule, fticl; nor like the short, in dull, gull, custard. * See Lindley Murray's English Grammar, p. 16. L Sfct.3, tk-onunciation of Letters, [38] 39 It was formerly doubled in some ^words, when the souud was to be lengthened, as in Ttuu^, jam ; but, at present, this reduplication is out of use. .MY). agji^ vowel, by itself, has the sound of thejpi^gflch jvfigc! Uie German u, of which see below. Thus it is, gene- rally, pronounced in words derived from the Greek, in which it stands for the t;^J/»^ov *. It occurs, however, but seldom, and, I believe, only in foreign terms, and proper names. The Dutch have it in their language, and pronounce it as the long English i. The French assign to it the sound of their £, (English ee,) and call it the Greek t, Igrec, In imitation of them, it is by some Germans spoken in the same manner, via. like i. But the other mode is, undoubtedly, to be preferred f. * ItJ^ P^*^^^^^?' S^^ RjQPi^"*. Cronoun^ed it iq the same -^ jnQtfJ3££rj^..JEpc tliey ppaiou 7/, which seems to have had the sound of the French u. This we see in the word Sj/lla, which was also spelt 5i«/^; and in lacty- rnas, which was likewise written lacruma, from the Greek ^axgi/a. Thus Swrm, for Syria in some editions of Tacitus, Ann II, 77, 78, 70, 81, 82, 83. Clupeus, for clypeus, or in an abbreviated state (upon some ancient coins) Clu for Cly. See a note by Gruter to Tacit. Ann. II, 83. ed. Gronov. Amstet ; 1685. U seems to be that sound, which Quinti- JjanXInst. Or. I, 4) describes as being between m and i. Me-- 4imcsJ^quidam U et I lit era sonus. t Mr, Adelung, the chief of the German grammarians,--^. ^ does not seem to have made up his mind upon this subject. In his Orthography, p. 26, he decidedly asserts that 5/ should, in sound, be exactly the same as i; this he contradicts p. 245, by saying, that in words taken from the Latin, and derived from the Greek, it ought to be pronounced almost like 'li. £ 2 40 [39] On Orthographi/ Sf Pronunciation. P. I. C. 1. j^ost frequently I he p is seen in coalition with llie vowel e, and it thus forms a diphthong, equivalent to the German ci* or the long i of the English. As it expres- ses no other sound than the last mentioned, for which the language alrt- ady has a sign, it appears to be super- fluous. And we may observe of this letter in the German Alpiiabet, what Johnson * said of it in the English, namely, that " we nught want it wiihout incon- venience, but that we have it." It seems to have been ( introduced into German orthography as a substitute for ^^ long?, being originally written ii or t/f. Hence it is, K^n the vulgar v'.chools, sometimes, called «, or double i ; / and by common penmen often marked with two dots, \x). Thus they write Sum;. Sulp, instead of Junii, Julii, f which properly are the Latin genitive cases. The power of t, beiuii uiven to t), is evident in the following words : .§0^a, «§0«cr§tt)cvt>a, names of towns; and in the inter- jections, l)up, denoting a rapid motion, pfut), denoting shame, j€/ which are pronounced as ^oia, or ^o\Ci, §oicr§n>crba, or »g)oicr§n?crt»a, a»d f^ui, pfui. This explains the nature of tlie y, in composition withr; t and accounts, at the same time, in some degree, for its { use in the English language. '^ But as this letter might be dispensed with, would it f not be advisable to discard it from the alphabet ? It ' , must be retained in proper names, and foreign words, /and on tliat ground it claims a place. And when it stands for t, custom pleads in its favour. It remains ( for us to ascertain, when it ought to be admitted iu that '^ Grammar of the English Tongue. t The Dutch retain the double i, y, in their orthography : tlie Danes likewise in some words, as in the pronoun hijn. %L m Sect, 3. Pronunciation of Letters. [40] 4rl capacity: and this we sliall attempt, when we speak of) the (liphlhongs «/, fl'^ ; e/, ^y. DIPHTHONGS. Closing wilh e : 1U, ^C, Uc ^ With i or y : Zi, 2{t), ^i, (Sp, Oi, Dt), Uu With u: 2(1], 2reu,(5u. The diplhongs are, in German, pronounced less broad, than some of them are, in other languages*. The soundsjpf which they are comppsed, are, for the most part, s o melted together, that they be?ix the semblance of mere vowels. For this reason, the propnely of cal- ling them diphthongs has been questiQiiei; and those especially J which cjose^-ijjh^e^ ba^^^^^^^^ Ihiit - najjug, But^ important as this argument may appear, ■■'■■ from the zeal of those who are engaged in its discussion, it will be found, that nothing by it is altered in sub- slance. For itJn coa>pliance willi custQjri, any one >| choo9£5utp distinguish, in the alphabet, the compound / w^ * sjgns^ of yovyels, b^ the denominatioB of diphthongs, where can be the harm ? So the French name their ai, though it hardly differs from their ^ or e ; and the Eng- lish bestow that appellation upon their a§ and oe, the same in sound as e ; and upon ai, ay, the same as a. It should be recollected, that an alteration in the termino- logy does not always profit the science, and may fre- quently embarrass it. • For example, the am, aw, ou, of the English ; the au^, eu, of the Italians; andflu of the Portuguese. k3 42 [41] OnOrthography and Pronunciation. P.I. C,\, With respect to the diphthongs that close with e, it is usual, in the German characters, to put the e jibove the small letters, d, 6, U. In large letters, it is at the side, as 2Cc, £)C, Uc Instead of the eat the top, two dots arc often emploved, to indicate the diphlhong, as a, o, \i. These dots I hold to be a corruption of ther, from the current hand-writing, which, when hastil)' written, resembles two small perpendicular lines; and being transferred into the printed alphabet, it has thus degenerated*. 2{e, a, a, (Ae). This diphthong, when long, that is to say, when spo- ken with the full accent, is like the English a, in mane; or like ai/, in rfay, prai/. Consequently, it coincides with the French ai, \n faimai, and the ^ ouvert ol" the same; likewise with the accentuated i of the Italians. It is, therefore, the same with the open e of the German* themselves, of which see before. When two, or more, con|pnanls follow after it, the broad sound is exchanged for the slender, equal to the English f,in held, vex, sell, rent: as, bie^dubc, the hands, pronounced rfic Hende; erldft, he lets, or leaves, pr. lest; cr fdUt, he falls, pr./f/^. The broad sounds are, in such instances, always abandoned, the accent of the word being supported by the double consonant, as will be shewn in the section on the accent. De, i 0/ (Oe). The English have nothing to answer to this sound, when long. But when short, it resembles their u, in gull, dull, • Mr. Adelung, however, remarks in his Orthography, J). 13 J, that the dots wcreuse^, in printing, previous to theV. Sect 3. Pronunciation of Letters. [42] 43 custard, us, concussion ; or llieir i, in Jlirf, bird ; or the 0, ill son. Thus the German 6 is pronounced, when it is followed by more than one consonant : as, bic ^oUc, hell, pr. Hvile; t>er S^ol^et, the boor, pr Tufpel; ber ^t6))fc(, tilt- mallet, pr. KlupfeL The lont» sound of this diphthong is nearly the same as the French CM ; and may be proluced by the English long a bein^ uttered with the lips rounded, and con- tracted: as, bic »§6l)(e, the cavern; obc, deserted, solitary. Ucd, U,(Ue). Here also the English language leaves us destitute of a comparison. This diphthong resembles the French «; and may be imitated, in English, by uttering the long e, or ee, with rounded, and projecting lips. — In soiiie provinces they pronounce u like {, or the English long e ; but this is erroneous. It may be observed, that the sounds 6, U, or the French eu and u, are acquired by the English with some difficulty. The reason is, that they have nothing correspondent, in their own tongue. The only way to facilitate' the attainment of them, seems to be that mode of uttering a and e, which has been pointed out. 3(i;^r 2Ct?, (Ai, or Ay), spuiuHs like the English i, in kite, or like y, in sky; and_ is, therefore, the same as the German ei, ey ; though some maintain, and perhaps not without reason, that it is different, and ought to be pronounced broader. It oc- curs only in a few words, such as ber ^aifcr, the Empe- rour; bet Safe, the layman; bcr fOZaitl, the river Main; tie ©nite, the chord, or string, of an instrument ; bet 44 [43] On Orthography and Pronunciation. P. I.C.I, Olain, the brim, or brink; t)er ^ain, the grove; bic 2Baife, the orphan; S5aieiU Bavaria; t>er SSaicr, the Bavarian; ber ?[l^av, the month of May. Injjic nijddle jtJ5 to be written ct, at the end ay. Sometimes lliis diphthong is written, in bcr SBai^en, the wheal; ba6 ©etraibe, llie corn in general ; bd^en, to hunt, or bail; Ihougli ei is more usual. gi, or ^V), (Ei, or Ey), is pronounced as the long i of the English, in Jine» kind^. ^X), shouhi be put: 1. at the end of words. 2. For the purpose of distinguishing terms of the same sound, and of different significations: as, fein, his, and fcpn, to be. 3. In compounds, when the component has tlie i/ before the composition, as bcV)jlcf)Cn, to assist ; from be\), and ftel)cn. Pi9r Sp» (Oi, oro^v), tlie same as in English. It is only met with in a few pro- per names: for instance, ®roiijfd% SSoitgCnburg; and in bic S5ov> it sort of woollen cloth, baize. Ui, (Ui), has, by some writers, been substituted for u, with which it had the same sound : but, as ihe innovation was unne- cessary, it very deservedly has been neglected*. ^ui§= burg, the name of a town, is sounded like X)U^bur9t. * Properly speaking, there was nothing new in it: for this diphthong occurs m the most ancient German writings. It was, however, broached as something novel. t See Adclung's Orthography, p. ii3. Scvt. 3. Pronunciation of Letters. [44] 45 . ai)proaclies Ihe sound of tlie English ou, or ow,m_ptir, j£ud^cow^^ower ; and of the Italian au : yet it is nei- ther so broad as the former, nor drawn out so much, in pronouncing, as tlie latter. In the Italian au, both vow- els may be distinctly perceived, whereas, in the German, they coalesce so closely, as to produce one consolidated sound. This, however, may not be sufficient to enable the reader to speak that diphthong with accuracy ; and he must, therefore, have recourse to the assistance of a na- tive. In the mean time, he may, without great crrour, give to it the sound of the English oil, or ow. 2tcu, aUf (Aeu), has nearly the same sound as the German cm, resembling the English 01, It ought perhaps to be uttered, with lips more contracted and rounded, than eu. ttt.CEu), similar to the oi, and <>y, of the English, in boil, toil, ^ , joint, point, hoy, toy; and to the eu of the Italians. Yet there is a difference between these, and the German sound ; for which the pronunciation of a native must be consulted. CONSONANTS. 1 . Simple : b, c, b, f, 9, 1), j, f, I, m, n, p, q, r, f §, t, i>, 2. Compound : d), c^6, fd), cf, gtT, fn, pi), pf, pf, t(;, f, ai^ iO [45] On Orthography Sf Pronunciation. P. 1, C. L ^ Al the beginning of a syllable, or before a vowel*, it is ) like the English b. But when it ends a syllable, or stands ' next to the final consonant, or consonanls, not being t liquids, it generally is pronounced like p : as, ah, off, like np; ob, whether, 1. op; ba6 2ob, the praise, 1. lop; taS it.glb, the calf, 1. kalp; cr tcbt, he lives, 1. lept ; cr (obte, he praised, I. lopte ; bet 2(bt, the abbot, 1. apt ; bcr ^XiU, the crawfish, 1. kreps; bcv »§crb)T, the autumn, 1. herpst ; ba6 £)bl!, fruit, 1. opst ; ()llbfd), pretty, 1. hiipsh. Something similar is to be met in other languages; for instance the French, in which the compressed and close sound of b, al the end, is, in pronouncing, frequently exchanged for the more easy one of />f . The original sound, however, is retained in German, at the end of a syllable, when the next begins with a b, ^s in biC 6bbc, the ebb ; bic ^rabbe, the crab ; bic gkbbe, bic £abbc, large hanging lips ; or with a . — Quari sold in scrihendo, prapo- sitionci sonum qua juTU'ta efficiunt, an qur.m separate observare conveniat : ut cum dico, oblinuit : sccundam enim b literam ratio poscitfaurcfmagis audiunt p. Sect, 3. Pronujiciattoft^ii^mepsr- [46] 4,7 ill which the letter e, afler b, is, by a contiaclion, omit- ted : as, ba§ 2)ieb69cfinbel, a pack of thieves; t>ie @d)reibgebii{)r, the clerk's, or copist's fee; bie ®d)mlv' axtt the style of writing; bic ^cbamnic, the midwife; bag ^nabtetn, the infant-boy ; \>Ci^ ^uoblauc^, garlick : for bag :©iebe§9eftnbel, bie (Sc^rcibegcbulvc, "ok @d)vei= bcart, bic .^cbeamme, \>a^ ^nabcUin, bn§ ^nobe(aud). Bui wlien t follows after &, it is pronounced like 77, though a similar omission of tliee had taken place: for instance, ©elicbtcr, for ©eliebetcr, a beloved person, sounds like gdiepterx id) lobtc, for tobetc, I praised, 1. lopte. The sound of h may vary in tlie same word, when by an additional letter, or syllable, its situation is altered : for example, ba§ 8ob, the praise, is spoken lop, because h concludes the syllable ; the genitive case, bc§ Sobe6, of the praise, is not to be pronounced lopesy but lo-hes, be- cause a vowel follows after the &, aud, with this, it begins a new syllable. B, in the pronunciation of some English words, is left •> out before /, as in dthty doubt \ but such elisions do not ^ exist in German. before the vovl^el§JaJ^^Oi^Ui_audJhe.dipllU^ong ait, anci ber fQ»rfiL_ajConionani, is 3;QUftunced likejtrjivhkii is the same as in English, same as the 5 of the German, and the sharp z of the Ita- lian, language. Thus, (Setltaur soimds like tsentaur ; (Sicero, 1. Tsitsero ; (^t)linbev, 1. tsylinder ; deplon, 1. Tsey- lon; ^dfar, 1. Tsaesar; the Latin coelum, I. tsoelum. In some proper names, it is pronounced like k, before a, 0, U: as in §aiTltt)cn, Carinthia, ^oln, Cologne, 48 [4r] On Orthographi/ Si" Prominciation. P. I.C. I. ^^t()Cn, (Suftrin, names of places. Not unfrequently ^er ($6rpcr, tlie body is written instead of ^orper, c ^ having the power of A:. In these instances, it would perhaps be belter to substitute k. From the above it appears, tliat C partly shares the force of iiC, and partly that of Z; and, consequently, / may be considered as superfluous, in the alphabet. On , this ground, it has been condemned by some writers, / who, in its room, adopt k and 2, as the occasion requires. T It must, however, be preserved in foreign words, and proper names ; and it is also wanted for the composition of some double consonants : so that it cannot be entirely relinquished. It should, therefore, be suffered to re- main, where it is established by long continued practice, though no other reason should be obvious. 2), (D). Xhis consonant is of a similar nature.\vilb_B^_najiicIy^ it sounds like the English d, at the beginning of a sylla-_ ble, or before a vowel in the same word* ; and like t, at the end of a syllable. Therefore ba§ S5ab, the bath, is pronounced bat ; bic »^ant), the hand, hant ; t»er »g)unb, the dog, hunt ; ber 2£bt)0Cat, the lawyer, aivocat. That difference of pronunciation is also to be met with in other languages. When a word, ending with d, is, in declining, aug- Miented, so that d no longer remains at the end, but be- gins the next syllabic, (hen the soft sound is restored. For instance, bic ^anb, is pronounced hant ; j)lur. bie VPrQ^vid.edjhcworil is not J^^compound. For in these, feHCh component has its separate pronunciation : as, b\( J^anb* arbeit, the work of the hand, 1. hant-arbeU; Mc ^tUn^avt, tlie dialect, 1. munUart, See note to letter 13. Sect. 3. Pronunciation (tf Letters, [48] 49 t^'^nbc, pr. hdn-de, not ^ ^nte, because d is no longer at the end of the first syllable, but commences the second, or, which is the same, stands before a vowel, in that word. Tims, ber ^unb, pr. hunt; pi. bfe »g)Uttt»e, pr. hun-de, not hunte.- This letter keeps its original power, when another d, JoUowsj^as, ber SBibber, the ram ; ©bberi^, ^bbeffe, Sb- bitjaufen, names of places; ^Ilbba, 3^ibbcr, names of rivers. And_Ulye\vijejjivhen„e, or i, is left out, by con- tr^tioiK as, bu fajibf!, thou didst find ; ber Stabler, one who finds fault ; ber 2(blcr, the eagle ; ber »Sd)ulbner, the debtor; bie ^rbnung, order, arrangement; bic ^anblung, the deed, action ; bem SBurbgen, to the de- serving:, &c. for fanbeft, 2)abeler, 2(belaar, ©c^ulbemr, ^rbenung, SBurbigen ; in which it would be false to pronounce d like f. To_these may be added_. ^anie words ending m ling: as, ber Ji^^'^ing, the foundling ; ber grembling, the stranger; blinbling^, blindly; in which «r^ag, gen.be§ S^age^; tcr^rieg, dat. bem^^riege; id) trug, ftc trugen. But, in truth, itjhouldeverj where keep itsplace. Between the vowels i and f, it is scarcely heard : for example, tie ©elt^en, the blessed, sounds almost like Selien ; bic SiJ^einigcn, my family, 1. Meini-en ; bie %iU tigc, the wings, 1. Fitti-e, When preceded by w, it is, at I he end of some words, pronounced like a gentle A:, as, in bcr Sling, the ring ; , ber ©efang, the song, or hymn ; ba6 ^ing, the thing ; • ber ^tang, the sound ; ic^ fing, I caught ; ber ®ang, - the manner of walking! ; jung, young; long, long: — ^• like Rinkt Gesank, Dink, Klank,Jink, Gank,junk, lank. But when a vowel is added, by inflection, to any such word, g resumes its own sound, as bc§ ©efitUgeS, bcUT 9tingC, fie ftngen. It maintains the same, according to some authours, in the middle of the following words, bie Sungfrau, the virgin, ^ergdttglic^, perishable, cmpfang- lid}, susceptible, tangfam, slow. In my opinion, it would he_ an advantajge Jojhe pronunciation, never to \^ry it*. G, in the middle of a word, cannot begin a syllable. Therefore, ber Singer, the linger, must be pronounced finger I ^inge, things, ding-e ; ^offnungen, hopes. I • I would, however, not venture to speak so positively a? the writer in the Monthly Review (for May, 1808), who says, that the former is decidedly a faulty pronunciation. For it is impossible to disregard the prevailing usage of the country. F 2 52 [51] On Orthography &^ Prmuncial'wn, P.J. C.l. %hoffnung-en. Compound words are excepted from this observation. For example, angencl^m*, agreeable, being a compound, is read an-genehm; angcfaugen, begun, an-gefangen ; ungebulbig, impatient, un-geduldig. When n follows after it, in the middle of a word, that letter is, in pronunciation, repeated before tlieg-. This applies chiefly to foreign words, for instance the Latin magnuSf which is spoken as if written mang-ntis ; lig- ?ium, as if ling-num. In the word ba6 ©CUic, the genius, it has tiie soft sound of the French gy which somewhat resembles the English sh. For the word itself is French, though it is generally received. is aspirated, as in the EngUsJbLWords, kave^ hoId^Aelnigi^ Between two vowels the aspiration is less strong, and sometimes hardly perceptible: as, in bic^Diul^c, the trou- ble; blll()Cn, to flourish; tic ©d;ul;C, the shoes. Wheii il ends a word, it has no sound at all : ,as, in fril(?, early; ber (£d)ui\ the shoe; ber glo^. the flea; t)a6 ©trolp, the straw ; id) fal), I saw. IJut Jis |]LCLX^:firJ:fi&! turns, when i|ie word increases by inflection ; as, bic Qii}ni)i, tlie shoes; tie gl6l;C, llie fleas; fie fal)Cn, they saw. L&a^^J -JiiflecUon, not by composition : for llic latter alters nolJiing in the 4)ronuncidtion. For example, inbiee meal, or banquet ; feet (^{]X%1, the stool, or cl^air; jal^m.tame; t)ie 25a{)n, the path, or career; \>\t %O^XiZy the ensign, or standard; bie ^^rc, the honour ; mdjr, more ; ij^m, to him ; i!)n, him ; il^r, you ; bie UjlV, the clock, or watch ; ful)(cn, to feel. Iii^ all t li ese exaiTipl ea, X\\c h shews ijia t I he yp wels .are long ; and it is always to be considered as a sign of length, when it does not begin a syllable. When a < is in the same syllaj)le, h is generally unite(| jxillLjJiis_lett£r, preserving its,m|luence over the next vowel^dlher antecedent or subsequent: as, in t()lin, to do ; ber 9)hltl), the spirit, courage ; tqtl;, red ; bie %\}at, the deed. Ija^iyie words, ber J?^urnuJhe,iQ.vy,er^ ^irtb, the landlord, the vowels are not lenglhjq^ae^Jjy the h, wliich must be considered as exceptions. The lengthening h is observed to have been introduced "\ into writing, since the 15th cenlury, and to have gra-v dually obtained authority, till in the 17th it was univer-( sally established. It most probably arose from the as pirate, or Adl breath ; which, when inserted in the mid- dle of a syllable, must naturally prolong it. Something like this may be perceived in the elocution of the Irisli, and perhaps existed in the ancient Greek*. After the ] German language had begun to be cultivated, it seems*/ to have been one of the successive improvements, to di- vest it of many of its rough, and guttural sounds. This appears in several instances ; for example, words which \ * The spirltus asper in Greek, is, for instance, exprcbsed in the middle of a syllable, before or after f. f 3 54 [53] Oti Orthography Sf Pronunciation,^ P.LCA, /had formerly been expressed wilh a strong guttural ch, ) were, by degiees, written without it; for ba§ SSicd^, the eattle, \\as substituted ba^ S^ict) ; rau(^, rouiih, was suc- /ceeded bv rau^*. In the same manner, the original "sound of hf in the n»iddle, or at the end, of a syllable, whatev* r it nn^ht be, whether a guttural, or a mere aspi- rate, seems »(> have been given up : and though it was preserved m writing, nothing of its nature remained, ex- ] eept wliat before was only adventitious, I mevin, the at- \ tribute of makinj; the adjoining vowel long. Even now this alteration may be traced in some words, v^djmdf)' len, to chide, is pronounced without soundina the J) be- tween d and I; but it is ascertained, that this word was formerly fd)md!)elen, with the seconesl; ber ^Cbf/ &c. In compoiiiid words the cA remains, as in btx .podtjmutb, haughtiness, bt'r .j3cd?DerrtUt>, high-treason, &c. t Mosheim actually adopted this mode of writing. v^ t Adelung (Orthogr. p. 104, 246, 248, J 68), supposes that this h took its origin from the ///, which, he says, existed at first as a mere modification of the letter^, and afterwards served to give more tone to the vowels near it. Sect. 3. Prontmciation of Letters. [54] 55 sign of length, without any regard to derivation. Yet it is not admitted as such throughout the language. The orthography of many words was too firmly established to receive it. Of this kind are the monosvUables: as, fd)On, aheady ; bic gluv, the fields, the plani ; bic (S^IUV the vestige ; bcr iU«^^4 of j^'h y every language, the if being more or less heard. In English, the pronunciation dwells long on the u, and produces a broad, or extended sound : this is also the casein Italian; but the Germans utter it short, which makes the sound of qu more slender, than it is in those tongues. Yet th^jf J§ not e ntirely omitted , as is done d^, injlfinch. Tliis consonant is, in a great degree, deprived of its natural force and shrillness, by the English mode of pro- nunciation; but it has them full and entire, iu,(jrerman, where it is uUereilvvith a strong vibration of the toijgue. In English, this sound is particularly slight at the end; whereas the Gerntans puonounceit very distinctly. / In bet 9ll)ein, the Rhine, t'ic 8ftl)0tie, tfte Rhone, the R \ is followed by h : which is copied from the Latin Rhe- \ nuSf and lihodumia. Sect. 3. Pronunciat'iQn of Letters, [56] 57 lias two sounds, as in English, .the sharp, and the soft. ^ X. V The sharp sound is that which is heard in sink, sit, salt, saX^and at the end, in this, thus, yes, surplus, stress, bliss, assjfurss. Tiie soft sound resembles the Enghsh s, in the words, bosom, wiadom, desire, present, and, at the end of ej/es, trees: or the z, m zeal, zonej^brazen» freeze, prize. But the German s is not so close, and compressed, as the English 2. It may be said to lie between the sharp* of the English, and their z. Xiie sliarp sound takes place before a consonant, and at the end of words, and syllables. Tl»e English pro- nounce the final s, for the most part, soft, as in was, is, eyes, frees; which is the reverse in German. Before a vowel, or diphthong, in the beginning of a ^?!lijy*-^J?^^^'^^" *^^*^' '" '^*^ '^I'^'die, f is always soft,: 4s, bic @eclc, the soul; fagem to say; t>icfcr» this; bicSlofc, the rose. 41*9 between a liquid consonant,. and a vowel : ^s, bie ^ulfe. the Imsk ; bie 2(mfe(, the ousel ; t)ic ®dnfe, the geese ; ^\x\i, millet ; tie ^crfoU, the person. To which may be added such instances, in which e is thrown out after the s: as, er bldf't, he blows, for bldfct; Cr raft, he raves, for rafet. The sharp souml may be doubled, and is then ex- pressed by^jj in the iwiddle,and g at the ei d, of ^y/QXiX: as, bag SBaffer (VVas-ser) the water; laVfen, to leave, or let; wiffen, to know; bciffctt, to bite; bet *g)af , hatred ; baa (Sd)(0g, the castle, also the lock ; ()dptid), ugly; cr if t, (for iffct), he eats. 58 [57] On Orthogmphi/ Sf Pronunciativn. P.I. C.l. >. The so und of vowtis and diplilhong , licfore ffj, ag . befor jB any d ( n i ! > 1 e cpnsqnanl^ (sec tlie next seclionVis ^geuerallv slioit, or slender,. .But in ujany instanrrs, tins double f is employed, in tlie middle of words, with the power of the simple sharp f: where, namely, if [were put by ilself, Ihe sound would be soft. In those casesj the vowe ls keep their original fulnjp§9. For example, Wrdffen, we did eat, pronounced Wkt ds-en\ bie @rof- fen, the great people, I. gros-en ; t)ic 9}iuffe, the leisure, ]» Mils-e; flicffcn, to flow, h flies-en; Qtuffen, to greet, 1. grus-en. _^ This has been considered as so peculiar a modification f of the letter f, that it has been marked with a distinct ^ sign, f , and a particular appellation, namely sz. Such a Mnode of distinction does not seem to be superfluous, V though the name may be deemed objectionable. We /should, therefore, write f, wherever the letter f departs C from the rule, in the manner described : for instance, agcn, SD^ugc, flicfcn, grftfen. When ^ is found at the end of some monosyllables, in which the vowels are pro- nounced long, it is employed with a view to the inflec- tion, and changes, of such words : as, id) af , I did eat, ficdfcn, they did eat; grop, great, ein grower 9}?«nn, a great man ; ber 9flug, the soot, gen. bc^ diu^i^. 5 appears, 'frecjuently, united with ch ; and thus produces a strong hjssing sound, equal to the Eng- Hsh sh, in shade, she, show. But even when sin0, an Italian coin, as Shcudo, Like- wise, in the middle and at the end of words, between the letters rand t: as, ber2!)urft, the thirst, siniifer to Diirshi; bie S3utjle, the brush, as Biirshte; bie @erjle, the barley, as Gershte ; ber ^uvf» the prince, or sovereign, as Fiiysht; . garjltig, nasty, a'sgarshtig. To this latter, however, they admit, that there are sonte exceptions, as the second person of certain verbs, bu \vax% thon wast, bu Vrirfl, thou beconiest, bu hi)X^, thou teachest : and the ending of the superlative degree in fie, bet crf!c, the first, bcr fd)Vt)crftc, the beavicst, &c. This way of pronouncijigx tlie^ is, chiefly, prevalent anuHig^ the Juliabitau^ {)er^Saxony : but it has also been adopted by others, ■ who have thought it a peculiarity of the High German.' It is, in fact, nothing more than a provincial mode of^' speaking, in Upper Germany. There, this hissing aspi- y ration is attached to the S, not only in the instances men-j tioned, but in many others ; such as, ishtj hisht, Chrish- tiis, Versh, Marsh, for ij!, bif!, Gf)riftU§, SRiU'^. Hence ( it has transmigrated into the High German; but \\.^ should be more regarded as an unwelcome intruder, ^ than a desirable guest. It has nothing to recommend it to favour: neither analogy, nor euphony, can be alledged , in its defence. The. Xower Saxons, in their native idUom^areJgiiorant pLthisL^spiraU^^^ letter ** and '\, it would, indubitably, Ije an advantage for the pronun- ciation of the High German, if their practice were, ia ^ this particular, universally imitated. Co [59] On Orthography Sf Pronunciation. P. T. C.l. the same as in English. Before j, willi a vowel follow- ing, il sounds like ^ : as, bic HuctiOYl, the auction ; tie Section, the lesson; bie gaction, the faction; bic portion, the portion. Thus in pronouncing Latin, zs gratia: — which words are read Auctsion, Lectsion^ gratsia, &c. But when an s precedes, t keeps its proper sound, as qucestio, S5, (V). There is not the sniallest difterence be t»£€.n„lJUi^ Jai- ler, iiud I' : so that one of tiiem might be removed from the alphabet. Words, even of the same origin, are pro- miscuously spelt with one letter, and the other: for in- stance, t?Dll, full, and fullen, to fill ; t?or, before, and fur, for. Between, two vo\vel§,. or diphlhoiigs, it is_bv spnie pronounced like the English v : as, in ber grctJcl, the crime; ber ^tut>er, a German coin; ber <2cUt?e, the slave. SB, (W), reseuibles the Fof the French, Italians, Spaniards and others, but not so exactly that of the English. For the F of the latter has in it a considerable mixture of the/*^ of which the German ff^ is destitute. The English F is emitted with a strong pressure of the upper teeth to the lower lip, but the SB of the Germans comes forth with only a slight contact of the teeth and the lip. It is very different from the English W, which is uttered with the » Hence it is justly considered as the flat/, and as bearing the same relation to this letter, as * to/», rf to t, hard i: to'/c, awd ztos. Sect. 3. Pronunciation of Letters. (5l lips contracted, or rounded, without touching the teeth ; and sounds nearly like oo. The sound of the German §£3 seems to be^J^elween the V and w of the English. It demands particular at- tention ; for the inhabitants of this country often fail m its pronunciation. Examples: ^a6 SBaffcr, the water; not to be spoken as Fasser, nor as Wasser, English ; but the German 2B to have a sort of middle sound, between the English Tand W; — thus, bcr SOBcg, the way; tic • fSkiU ihe world ; bie SBoEe, the wool ; i?a6 SQSuttter, the ' wonder ; ett)i(J, eternal, &c. gLisjil"^^, in English, before the kUerr, as in write, wrap, wrong; and in some other instances, as, answer, sword, wholesome : buytjsjievigr^so^jnjG^rraan. 3E, (X), sounds like ks: as, in bie 2()Ct, the ax; bic »^eK, the - witch ; baS @):cmpet, the example : like Jkst, Hekse, . .J^ksempeL is^_5vilhjout aiiy exception, pronounced as ts : for in- stance, bie ^a\)U the number ; ju, to ; §ci)en, ten : like fsaf, tsu, tsehen. Consequently, it resembles the z of the Italians. 2^is prejRixfid to 3^ for thj^ purpose of doubling jfe sound; therefore, ^ is equivalent tozz, whidl tiie.JLla- lians mak^„u§e of, This consideration will determine, when fought to be employed. It is never required ^fter a consoQant, because there can be no need of a double letter; but it may, in most case?, be admitted after a vo^ycl. It is proper to write fe^CH, to put; but it would be less accurate to insert a f in \>a^ ^^h *^* * 62 On Orthography <5r Pronunciation. P, LC,\* heart, Heitz, because, in the latter, a consonant already precedes the z. The occasions, where j and ^ should be used, have not always been justly distinguished ; and some degree of confusion has thence arisen, respecting this letter. But the matter is very plain, if considered hi the point of view, which has been stated. $ome per- sons, in the mean time, have by these irregularities been provoked, entirely to deprive the ^ of its function ; and where the double sound of j is unavoidably to be ex- pressed, they write Jj. But it will appear, from what has been said, that they have been too hasty in their pro- ceeding. The English language furnishes nothing, with which the sound of this character jji^y be con>pared. I can, / therefore, not hope, in describing it, to be understood by those, who are barely acquainted with their native tongue. This sound is twofold, ) guttural, and ' palatiok. The guttural is entirely formed in the throat, and answers, in a great degree, to the Welch f or ch, the . Scotch cA, in LocA, and the Irish ^A, in Lough; also to \ the Spanish x, m dexar, and the j of the same, in irfos. The German (51), however, is not so deeply guttural, as the examples adduced. It takes place^ when joined to the vowels a^ 0, U, aud the diphthong an. Examples ; ad), alas! t>a§3)ac^, the roof; nod), yet; t)a^ S'od), the yoke ; {j^d^, high ; taS ^IX^, the book ; t»cr ©erucl), the Miiell ; ber ©traud), the shrub ; fccr diand% the smoke. Those vowels are in some words full sounded, as, brdd), Sect 3. Pronunciation of Letters, 6$ f^rad), ()0d), ^uc^ ; in others they are slender, as in nc^d^, The palatick sound arises from a strong appiilse of the « breath against the palate ; and is assigned to cJ), when in conjunction with c, X, d, 6, 1% ail. Examples: ^et ^t&)i, the pike ; fc^ledjt, bad ; ba^ '^i&}U the light ; t)er - ^id)tcr, the poet ; bie ^ad)cr, the roofs ; tie Socl)er, the holes, from tlie singular, ba§ Sod); bteS5ud)er, the books, fete ©trdud^e, the shrubs. It is also adnnlted with other vowels, when between them and the d) a liquid inter- venes, as, in weldjer, burd). In general, d)st«inds at the end of a syllable.; some- ") i*E^^ i"Jll?-J^*^si9J?j."i»A_?s in mattd)cr, matxct}crlct). -The '\ pronunciation, whether guttural, or palatick, is then re- ( gulated by Ihe vowels that follow. "^• Between i and e, it is scarcely audible : for instaiKe, bem ]^err(id)en, bcm trcfflid)cn; spoken like herrlUen, treffli-en*. At the beginning of some words it. sounds like ^; as, Qtjti^U^f Christ; ber (5()nj!, the christian; ei)n)iiiJn, 6!)rif!op{), proper names ; c^rijjlid), christian, adjective ; ber (5()aractev, the character; bte (5()arte, the map, or chart ; bie (5t)arn)0C^e, passion-week ; Q^axfxtitd^, good Friday; ba§ (ii)OX, the qwve ; bte ^^romcf, the chro- nickle ; bie ^()ronoI09ie, chronology ; \)k 6{)UV, the elec- tion ; ber (S|)urfurf!, a prince Elector of the German empire ; bte S()umtirbe, the electoral dignity— and other words beginning with (5()Ur« In words, borrowed from foreign languages, for ex- ample from the French, it keeps the sound, which it has ,^ * The Monthly Review (May 1808) objects to this ob- servation ; but it is founded upon the practice of the natives. G 2 (74 On Orthography^ Pronunciation. P. L C. 1 . in those languages, as ^()arlottc, (5()agnn, 6i)tcrtne, ^^e^: Valier, (Sljarlatan ; in whicii it is pronounced like ll>e [English sh. \ In old writings it is often.put for K. Foreigners, I who afe not acqtiainted with the true purport of this character, or unable to pronounce it, in the n)anuer be- fore mentioned, generally attribute to it the sound of k» ( This sound it has always, when an s follows. For a()6,(chs), ^isprecisely the same as ks, or d^. This, fo rjnslance^ perceived in the words, ba^SOSa^Sy.lhe.wax; t)crX»ad)§, the badger ; ber guc^6, the fox ; bag glad)§, the flax ; bic S5uc^fc, the box; t)ic2Cd)fel, the shoulder: which are pronounced like Waks, Daks, Fuks, Flakst Biickse. But it is to be understood, that the three letters must constitute one character, and consequently all belong to the same syllable. For they may by chance meet, and have the same appearance; but, being without those requisites, their pronunciulion differs, as in wacl)fam, vigilant ; m6:)\ci)^n, lo connive at : whpre the s does not appertain to the same syllable, in which the ch slandfe. For these words are read, wach-sam, nach-sehen. When an elision of any vowel has happened belweeii ch and s, these characters must likewise be uttered sepa- rately: for example, bc§ S3ud>§, for S5ud)e^, gen. case, from bag S3ud?, the book ; bc§ 2od)6, for go^Cg, from i>a§ Cod), the hole ; cr f^)rad)g, for fprad) e§, he said it: which are not to be pronounced bucks, locks, spraks ; but with the guttural, and s following, Buch-s, Lochs, sprach-s, ttke the_ English sh, in she, shine, dish, dashing^ The Sect. 3. Pronunciation of Lettei^s, 6$ vowels, before lliis character, are often pronounced long, asinfte nJUf^cn, lliey washed; ftc t)rafc^en, they thresh- ^ ed ; but more frequently short, as in VO(i[d)Zn, to wash'; , t>re'fd)en, to thresh ; He ^jfd)C, the tables ; bic 50^U'fd)e(, , the shell, or muscle. It is to. be observed, that sch must form one charac- ^ ter, in order to authorize that mode of pronunciation. ( Sometimes an « will accidently come before ch, with- / out coalescing with it. Examples: ba^ -S^ioC^en, the little ) bit; ba^ 9fj66d)cn, the little rose; spoken Bis-chen,\ Roes-chen. . m, (Ck), see % (K). %/iGif), and ^n, (Kn), are n£t to^ be sj^ok^^^ the nose, as foreigners are generally disposed to do; but in such a manner^ as jf a very light # were inserted before the n : for instance, bie ®nabC/ the mercy, as if Genade ; ber ^nabe, the boy, as if Kenabe. The insertion of this e will, at lirst, be a great assistance in the acquirement of those letters, and may afterwards easily bgljiid, aside.* 2s_qiuvalenJtJp_JJ; as, ber ^^^ilofop^, the philosopher, like Filosof; ber ©:p{)eu, the ivy, 1. Efeu. ■» The critick in the Monthly Review (for May, 1808) magisterially asks, " woud he really have us pronounce GenadeV'—tio, I would not; nor would the Reviewer have thought so, if he had read the above with attention. T suggested the insertion of a slight e to those who are awkward in pronouncing those letters, as a means of faci- litating the operation : and as such, I have found, from long experience, it is of essential advantage to beginners. G 3 66 On Orthography Sf Pronunciation. P. L C.l, The pronunciation of 5)f, (PO, 9)f, (Ps),and2BiV (Wr), may be facilitated by tlie interposition of a very short e, in the same way, as was recommended in gn and fn : for example, tcr ^'ab, the path ; "Oa^ ^fcrb, the horse ; bcr ^falm, the psalm ; SSriSberg, a proper name ; simi- lar to Pefad, Peferdf Pesalm, Werisberg. is pronounced like T, and has never the sound of the Eng^lish T/t, or the Greek 6. The A added to t is merely a sign of length to the vowel next preceding, or next foliowing. See letter ^, (H), p. 32. See letter 3, (Z,) p. ^i. SECTION IV. ON THE PRONUNCIATION OF WORDS, OR THE ACCENT. Besides the sound of the single letters, another ^ branch of knowledge is required, for the purpose of a ^ right pronunciation, namely the Accent. By this is understood that stress, which marks a particular sylla- ble, in speaking, and distinguishes it from those, with Sect, 3. Pronunciation of Letters, 6/ vvhicli it is connected. In tlie words, iron, Julne8s,\ hctzard, the first syllables have that prerogative; in upon, \ resist, helow, it is assigned to the last. / The accent is indispensible to the art of speaking. It ,/ is, in this respect, as essential to langnage, as the helm is to a ship, withont which its movements wouM be wavering, and uncertain. It must, therefore, iiave existed in every tongue, that was ever spoken by mankind. The Greeks and Romans, though they possessed a well established prosody, which, in some degree, influenced the cadence and modulation of their speech, ineontrover- tibly made use of accent. Tiie poctick cpjantity alone would have been inadequate to the ends of elocution. As soon as language proceeds, from mere articulation, to coherency, and connection, accent becomes the guide of the vpice. It is founded upon an obse^re perception of symmetry, and proportion, between the , (JiiFerent sojinds that are uttered*. The notion of that ^ syrnmetry and proportion must, of course, vary accord- ing to the diversity, whicli may be inherent in the primitive and elementary sounds of different languages, and constitutional organization of the people, that speak them. It is a kind of mechanism, if I may be al- lowed to use a metaphor, which adapts itself to different nations, difierent habits, and circumstances. Con- * We are speaking of the verba^ accent, which regulates \ the pronunciation of words: besides which, there may be said / to exist the oratorial, or declamatory, accent, by which the' tone of whole sentences is commanded. The former deter- " " mines the force of certain syllables, the latter modifies the relative energy of words. Ttie oratorial accent depends upon the will, and intention, of the speaker; and is, ac-/ cordingly, arbitary, and variable : the verbal accent is sub- \ jcctto ti.xed rules. ^ 6s On Orthography S^ Pronunciation, P. 1, C. I. ^ formably to tliis, we observe a cliaracteristick variety, with regard to accent, in comparing the languages of Europe. Each of them has its peculiar mode of accen- tuation : the Italian, for example, generally lays th stress of tone on the middle syllable ; the French, fq the most part, removes it to the end ; and in Gen it is commonly attached to the beginning, of the W( But the laws, upon which this depends, seem to have no other foundation, than the bent and tendency of ike organs of speech, to which the ear has been habituated. In the German language, I consider partly the locality of the syllables, partly the quality of the vowels, con- tained ill (hem, as the ground of the accent. Some of the vowels are, in certain combinations, held to be less su8ceptil)le of the energy of the voice, than others ; of this description are e and i, as will be shew«, in the pro- gress of tiris section, But locality chieily determines the accent : by it I mean the place, which a syllabic occupies, in a word. The tone, at first> awUnied v by aii"' ^ miUillHiM UTipulse, jMi II i»T «»b«;uf e -geBsat » q%\^ o t htness, "^ i£S*proporlToiVV Lut this w««, n\ the gradual forinafiou of tiie language, settled HnVo permanent custom; and constituted what is now called the accent. This appears to be the simple, and natural way of explaining its origin. Some ingenious men have accounted for it in a man- ner, very different from the foregoing. It is said by one*, that it is always the rad^ical syllable of a word, which bears the accent ; and by auotherf, that which * Mr. Adelung, in his system of the German Language, his Grammar, and his. Treatise on Orthography. t Moriz, in his Essaj on German Prosody. 5fc/. 4. Tht Accent, 69 X has most meaning, and signification. Those syllables^ then, are called the principal ones, and as such, it is \ pretended, they are dignified, above the rest, with thes^ accent. But let it be recollected, that the accent must(^ '^'» have been of an early original ; that language could not CJL ^ proceed far, without this conductor; that it must be *^J* referred to one of the first stages of civilization, in which f^Jr-i not much was to be expected from grammatical specula- ^^^^ tion ; and that, consequently, the source from which it flowed, could not be remote and hidden, but must have been obvious, and easy of access. To ascertain what syllable is the root of the word, which we are going to utter, to determine which has the most significancy, and power of meaning, and, according to this, to^fix the ^ accent, presupposes so much abstruse research, in one i.^^,C case, and so much philosophical judgment and precision, ^^^z^*^ in the other, that we cannot, in sober reflection, attri-^^jj bute such a process to the untutored miods^of ,a rjjde ^^*»^^ nation.^ They made use ofjhjat aujiiliary o? speecly ^e- v' f .r^ fore they were conscious of i4»^«Kist«a€e : they might have a latent perception of its influence. 4M»t-«otM4-Hot possess a distinct idea of its operation, H iuch4o8 is invent, ^ and establish it, according to the rules of science. We I ^*t»^« could only imagine such a contrivance, as having takeiiC^^;,; place on similar grounds, by supposing a society of wise, ^^:^^ and learned men, who had entirely created ihe language. ).5f«^ For how are we to reconcile it to common sense, that notions, which are now attained only by a few, should, in the earliest times, have been current, and familiar with the multitude. They nmst have accurately understood |it~] the anatomy of language, and known how to appreciate /C ' Ihe relalive value of the parts of speech*. Upon these if»A.T Mr. Moriz arranges the parts of speech, according to f ; fO On Orthography and Pronunciation. P, /. C. I . niceties of discrirainalion the tlieories, !o which wc -^ have alluded, are built. Bui the nature of language is, I fear, little comprehended by him, who can admit > such a proposition. No search for radical syllables, no estimate of their innate power, led to the accent : it was rather the production of something like a mechanical process. The maxim, which Mr. Adelung himself sanctions*, namely " that, whatever exists in a language in tlie forni o/ general practice, and usage, has arisen from a»-ebseu*e^ensatio»>^^ perception) of expediency, ( M^BOfieMky, common to those who first employed the ■ language ; and that, therefore, the principles, upon ^^ ( wbicli such practice and usage are founded, can neither their intrinsick weight, and importance : in proportion to which, he sa3's, they are more or less entitled to the accent. See his Prosody, p .139 & 184. Hence the inference is natural, that, if that is the basis of accent, those, who first employed it, must have been aware of that principle. But this is more than improbable. He is not contented with that distinction of the parts of speech, but he remarks the various shades of difference, which each part may assume in pecu- liar situations. Thus he talks, p. 227. of one pronoun as the mere reflection of another pronoun, or as the pronoun of a pronoun. Such speculations are, indeed, ingenious, and subtile; but that qualification alone cannot give them any claim to our approval. *See his System of the German Language (Ce^r^cb^ubc ter 2)eutfd)en ©prncbc); his work on tile German style (ilbf r ben ^CUtfchen ©til) ; and his Introduction to German Orthography' CHntt?fifunA jur 'i^futfrfjfiiOrthOArapfjie). In the last work p. 13 bi 1^. — So says Quintilian, Inst. Or, 1, 6. Nun enirn cum prinunn fin pk, in mental, merci/y Miter, the first syllables bear the full accent, but the last have none : in meekness, softness, ointment, the first are likewise possessed of the full accent, but the last are pronounced more dis- tinctly, than in the former words. This may be called the half, or demi-accent. , We shall first treat of THE FULL ACCENT (').♦ I. In monosyllables it does not exist, when they are ^ by themselves. For in one insulated utterance there can be no comparison of length, or brevity. But when two, or three, monosyllables meet together, one of them may, according to its importance, be measured against the rest, and have an emphasis similar to accent, though, in fact, it is not the same. For instance, tet: 5Jlann, t>ie Sra'u, tag ^inb : here the article and sub- * What I term the ftdl accent, corresponds with Quin^ tilian's Sylkha acuta. See Inst. Or. I, 5. H 74 \J[%\^n(>rtho^afhy9i^Pr(munciation. P, L C, l. /stanlive constitute, as it were, one word ; and the accent )is affixed to the latter, being superior in signification. ^ If the stress were laid on t)cr, t>ie, t>a0, it would be un- \ derstood, that the attention was to be chiefly directed /to those words, consequently, that ,they were used )M)int- edly, or as demonstratives. This is farther exemplified )in the following : (gr ifl i)kx, ®ic fint> t>a, gr ijat baS : ^ each of which phrases may be looked upon as a word /of three syllables, and may, therefore, receive the full 1 accent; but where it is to be placed, is determined by the intention of the person speaking. For Qt i\t {)ier, ( may be accentuated in three diverse manners, at the /option of the speaker. If the pronoun is the principal object of attention, it will be thus: ^'t if! I;icr/Ae is here; \if the verb, thus : gr i(! f)kx, he is here ; it the place, f it will be, @r ifl i)Ur/ \\t inhere. It is Hie same with the other instances : as, ^ic finb bfl, thej/ are there ; @ic finb t>a, they are there; @ie finb btf, they are ( there. S<> @V hat bag, he has that ; @r f:)dt ba§, he hai \ that; QxJ)at t)d^, he has that. This, is however, not ( the verbal, hut oratorial aefeent, of which notice has been taken, in the beginning of this section.* The verbal / accent, with which we are engaged, is not arbitrary as , the latter. Monosyllables, therefore, are only suscepli- , ble of the oratorial accent. Where that is not applied, (^ their tone remains arabiguous.f r _ ^/ .. . . >■- * P. 67, note. t Moriz cla>-ses the monosyllables in regard to their value, as parts ofspeech, by wiijch, he maintains, that their ca- pability of accentuation is determined. They are arranged oy him, in the following manner: substantive, adjective, verb, interjection, adverb, auxiliary verb, conjunction, pronoun, preposition. As they are here placed, so they are Sect. 4. The Accent. 7^ II. Words of two syllables have the full accent on n the first : as, ba§ S^'^1^^^/ ^^^ window ; t){e gdber, the ( fields ; bic ©a'ffc, the street ; t)ic (Stu'be, the chamber*. ( said to have a respective claim to accent, one in preference to the other. See Essay on German Prosody (2?erfud^ eitlCt Xeutfcfjen ^rcfcble), p. 1S7 & 189. But this assumption is not supported by fact : frequent deviations occur from t^e line that is drawn. In !Su unb i^, thou and I, unb, being acor»juiiction,ought, according to that classification, to have the accent, rather than the pronouns, that stand near it: but it certainly has not. In these words, Uttb iX fpracb, it might be thought to he accented. These arc contradictions, which allow of no explanation, though our authour attempts it, by saying that the same conjunction appears in a different point of view, when it connects sen- tences, and when it merely connects words. Perhaps our>> rule ot' locality would afford a more uniform reason. For by combining monosyllables into imaginary words of more syllables, you may place the accent, where the doctrine of'^ locality points it out, and you will probably often be right. But the truth, nevertheless, seems to be, that, properly* speaking, monosyllahles can only have the oratoiial 'acC(Enlr In a succession of monosyllables, I believe, it invariably, happens, though wf may not be sensible of it, that one of') them is thus ac the accent was affixed in a similar manner. For Quintilian \ observes, that words of two syllables always bore it on the ^ first. Inst. Or. I, 5. Est autcm in omni voce utique acuta^ sed (^ nunguam phis und : nee ultima : ideoque in dissi/llabis prior. * Thus Adelung accentuates it: see his Orthography, p. 113. Sect. 4. The Accent. [76] 77 tei* ^itfar, the hussar ; t>a§ ^oinel, the camel ; ber ^a^ l^'un, the capon ; bag ^Itjjiier, the clyster; bcr ^ra!e>(, tlie quarrel ; t)cr Met), the lackey ; t>er jO^pra'f!, the morass ; bcr ^lobicfi, the radish ; t>a6 9lei^ier, the district, or quarter; bcr Slubin, the ruby; ber Slubtcc'll, or()er, t)oi1)in» wo: woU\), tt)ot>urci), n>omU, woran, tt?ova'u6, woriit, zu: suerft, jutel^t, suna^c^f!, jutJoV* It somelimes liappens, that the accent varies in simi- lar words, according to the view of the person speak- ing ; for instance, in those beginning with da, hier, wo: as, t)a'()er, {)ierau§, WorauS. The accent, being laid on the first, makes them strong demonstratives. 4. Tilt' prefij^esj be, finp, entf erj £€, yerj zer^ ar£ not ^vSU^ceplible of any accent j therefore, words, beginning / with such prefixes, have the ^ccent^pn the last : as, betiaf^ ^cmpfing, cntf^va'd), crfci)ra'f, g,z\6ht, verjo'g, jerra'nn* A caution is necessary in tlje application of this rule, \ with reference to be and ge. In some words, these are not prefixes, but radical syllables, and consequently can- not be deprived of their accent, if their place entitle^ them to it. Of this kind are: bebctl, to tremble; bctcn, J to pray ; ber S3eYem, the broom ; geben, to give ; gegcn, V against ; ;^ii)zn, to go. III. Words of three syllahles have the full accent on the first. Except : 1. The following: balfa'mifc^, Icbenbig, J)antb»t:ctt, jlol^ircn* 2. Words from the Greek and Latin, that have been germanized, by a change in their termination, as: bttS 2():iom, the axiom; t)ic '2(ctio'n, the action ; tie ?!}^illion, the million ; bic 33iUidn, S^ritlidn, the billion, trillion ; ber Sle^^rfnt, the elephant; bcr ?)atriot, the patriot; tJCr ©cnetiif, the general ; ^piciir, a proper name, &c. I Sect. 4. The Accent, [7^] 79 from actiOf million billio, Irillio, elephantus, pafriofa, generalisy Epicurus, 3. A few foreign words, which bear the accent in the middle: as, '^\i%a\iiz, a kind of beau {L?iX. phaseolus)-, t>a§ S^egifter, the register ; baS ^apitel, the chapter ; bie (^ahdiz, the cabal ; bie ?OlC(^amcf, the science of mecha- iiicks. 4. Spme proper names, as Uh/fcc^/ 2(cl;Hle6, &c. 5. Certain compounds, namely, such as begin, with : all: alltrifTenb/ allgcmein, allberdt, aUcmal)l, allenfatt^, allcrbinga, oXUxUx), allerevj!, aUcr^dnb, allcm>aVtS, aMz^ ftfmt, allc^cit, allcrna'd}|!, 2Cllwei§l)cit, allmd'd^tig, all^ ma'()(ig, alltd'gig, allptjiet, an5ufel)r* aus : au6brii'cf (ic^, au^nef)menb, au6fpred)(ic^4 %, 6/s: bepfammen, M^tDcUen^ da: bal)intev, baru'nter, barukr, batriber, bajn)ifd)ett* der, des : ber^a'lben, berma^kn, bermat)teinjl, be§()a{ben, be6g(eid)en* i9 : an«fo*nmieti; aiifi fl^ren, lin^^U'tlA, Utlsiia^btiyl. The two last syllables are then prononnccd by Rule II. It is not practicable to do justice to the dc mi-acccnt, before the full accent, in any other manner. Words beginning with «?* are thus spoken. It should, therefore, be utt;ba'nfbar, as it is un^freu'nb' lidh; not irtlbatlf bar, ('"*'), a; it is sometimes pronouucedL Sect. 4. The Accent. [80] 81 obliegen, olJivaltcnt), u'nbdnfbar, unfreunblicb, ufngiVtig, unenblic^, u'nfd)d'^bar, u'nja'fjlfg, t>o'rj!ellen, ^tyrfM)ti9, ^uwentien, ju'bringlic^* 7. The [)refixes be, emp, ent, er, ge, ver, zer, as lias been already mentioned, never admit an accent; for example: bcfe()lcn, empfhiten, entfallen, crbred)cn, 3«* ifjorcben, t)crt'erben, jerreiffcn* IV. Words of four syllables, and more, in order to facilitate their accentuation, may be bisected, that is to say, divided into halves, each of which then will have its own accent, as a word by itself, according to the fore- going rules. — Observe, 1. If they are compounds, the section is to be made where the components are joined, as in DJJcrfs^WJuVbigf cit, S^bbeer-bd^utnc, gdj!nac^ter, u'nfd?d>baVe, u'nf*d>baVe9. In certain compounds, beginnmg with dissyllabick prepositions, sucb as, uber, unter, Wiber, the division cannot be made use of, because those prepositions are accentless; for example^ iSbcvre'ben, utuerbre'cfcen,n>ibcrilrc'beti. 82 [81] OnOrtkograph^Sf Pronunciation. P.I. C. 1. tiaturally be unequal, as in SSert^ci-fciguugcn, t^ergcfciU fcljaftet. 3. In words of four syllables that partition does not take place, when tlie two first are totally void of accent, us in 2Cgam 'mnon ; the stress is then laid upon the third, or the last syllable but one : nor, when the two last, or first and third, syllables are unaccented ; for in this case, the second has the tone, as in frcu'nbfdjaftlid)e, 50?cla'ntl)u§, S:eWmad)Ui^, verfu fjrerifd^ 4. The same principles are to be applied to words of six or seven syllables, if any such occur. For example, @€rcd)ti9!cit6Ucbc, which may be divided into three parts, ®crcc^t^9!citS:=Hc'be« The melhod of thus dividing long words, for the pur- pose of giving facility to accentuation, seems to answer that object in most instances, according to the foregoing observations. It will be found practically useful, what- ever difference of opinion there may be in theory. For though it ma\ he said that, even in the longest word, there is but one chief accent, it will be found more easy \o conceive this in mind, than to express it by voice. THE DEMI-ACCENT (')• It has been explained before, what is meant by that term; namely, the tone of a syllable, which, though it has not the strongest sound if» a word, is yet pronounced more forcibly, and distinctly, than others, which are said to be totally void of accent. Of this some examples have been adduced. For instance, to the last syllables of, rudiment, caiistick, fulniss, idlrncss, outitf, tlie denii-acceut is assigned, because they are discriminately ultered : whereas in heavy ^ temporary ^ moral, C()ndo\n\ I ^ecL 4. The Accent. [82j 83 temple, they are ligliily passed over, so as not to pro- duce a precise, and accurate, sound of the vowels, which they contain. The demi-accent, in German, is peculiar to 1. All monosyllables, whether terminating with a vowel, or a consonant. 2. Tiie vowels at the end of words: as, ?D^ine'r\?a, @op^a', alfo', li^ii, U'()u'» Except c, which is unaccented, as greuoc, lo*bc^ 3. The syllables fl/if, ^ 4. The same syllables, in the middle (unless they become liable to the full accent) as rd'tl;fcl^aft, lo'bete, ,fleifd)id)tc* Before the subject of the accent i§ dismissed, it will be necessary to add a few words concerning the vowels, and diphthongs. THE SOUND OF THE VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS is either broad and long, or slender and short. A for instance, is broad, or long, in the English words, a//, call, fall; and slender, or short, m father, fancy , glass. The t is long in field ; and short in fill, fin. The o long in note, hone, home, over ; and short in lot, trot, got. This difference is also observable in diphthongs, as in the words receive, seize, in which ei, is long ; and in forfeit, wliere it is short. I. The vowels and diphthongs have, in the German language, a long, or hoad, soimd : 1. At the end of a syllable, as in ):)dhi\\, bcten, loben, lXugcnt>*« The e at the end of words is excepted. * Though this principle generally prevails, it is not Secf,4. The Accent, [«4.] 85 2, When a syncope, or contraction in the middle, has taken place, which chiefly happens by an ejectment of the letter e. Examples ; Sabft, Idbt, Idbte, Qeldbt, for kkjl, labet, labete, gelabct. ^objl. lohU lobtc, gctobt, for lobejl, lobet, (obete, gclobel. ©^drjl, fpdrt, f^drte, gefpdrt, for fparcff, f»aret, f^arete, gefparet* ©c^onfl, fd)ont, fc^ont£, gef^ont, for fc^onejt, fc^onct, fd)oncte, ge^s fd)onct* 3. When a sign of length is added. Tliis may be either a reduplication of the same vowel, as in Ttdi, 9}lcer, SBoot; or an adjection of another vowel, as e to f, in (Bpklt fptclt ; or the letter h (see the 2d. sect.) in |)a^n, ga^nc, fc{)r, tl^m, iJ)r, &c. As exceptions from this rule may he considered the following words : Vierjtg, forty, baS SSiertel, the quarter, bcr t)ierte*, the fourth, bicg, this, ^icnjlag, Tuesday, n)a()rUc!^, verily ; which, though provided with the signs of length, give to their vowels the short or slender sound, as if they were written virrzig, virrtel, diss, dhtS" tag, warrlich. always duly regarded. A proof of this is the word 9Jame, name, which some persons, and among them Mr. Adelung, (Orthography, p. ^9.) insist upon writing ^a'^mt. The lengthening h is here erroneously inserted, "because a, from its situation alone, receives the full and long sound. By omitting the A, the original appearance of the word, and its similarity to other languages (for instance to the English nume^ Swedish Ttamn, &c.) is preserved, and it is, besides, distinguished from natnn, prelerimpf. ofncl^ttien, to take. Thus Mr. A. writes, unnecessarily, tetb tXi, to pray ; biet^en, lo bid, (Orthography, p. 258); for beteit, bktett. * I think it proper to quote to this word Mr. Adelung's authority, (Orthography, p. 76,) who joins it with the rest, mentioned under this exception, though it is not, iu every province, pronounced with the slender sound of the vowel. S6- [85f On Orthography Sf Pronunciation, P, L C\ 1. 4. In monosyllables, as in txdt, Wer, fcl)on, nun. Except, a. The following, ab, an, bin, U^, ba§, bc§, c§, gib, grob, f)at, i)in, im, in, man, mit, ob, ®d)mib, urn, t)on, was, weg, sum. b. And when two consonants follow after the vowel, as in hclU>, ta'nn, (^lt>, wo'Ut, (Sd)i^(t), wcnn. Before f[, however, the vowels are frequently long : as, af , grof , Jll^, fit?. Before d) they arc also long in some words, as in @C^mdd), l)dc^, 55ud) : and thus, sometimes, before fc^, as brdfd^, n)ufd)» 5. In the last syllable of foreign words, where the main accent is at the end : as, ^atm, Dtgdn, ^onxit, ^Ordj, &c. See above. II. The vowels, antl diphthongs, have a shcrt, or c/e- vated, sound Before two consonants : as In aU ga'cfcl, (^cfe, o'ft, §uflb, ^a'nt),^d'nbe, ©tofn^, gld'n^cn, ^ib'Ui^, Except : a. The following words: 2C't>kr. Trt, S5a'r§, (a fish, the perch), S3a'rt, S^ort, S5ortc. S36'rfc. S3ra~tfd)e, bu'llcr, ^'rbe, crfl, glo't^, ©cberbc, ©ro'bS, ^drj, ^cib, v^crbc, ^uftcn, ^eb6, (m the compounds, ^eb§c()e, .KcbSwcib, &c) ^loftcr, itrebS. ^O^a'gb, Sf)?onb, ncbji. ^"bfl. S)'flen, STjlcrn, ^[crb, ^a>ft, ^ro>fl, rD'j!en, @ci)drtc, ©d^ufler, @d)Wdrtc, ©d}wcrt. @tdltc, jlctS, tobt, Slrofl. S£rubfa(, ?809t, Wcrbcn, wiTjl, SBifjTc, ^axU According to Ade- luug*, these also are to be added : Sd9^> ^WU jQudrj, • Orthography, p. 65, 232 & ^33. Sect, 5, On Prosody, [^61 87 (Sd)mu^, which some, especially the Lower Saxons, pro- nounce with the slender sound. h, 'Hiose, which have undergone a syncope, or con- traction in the middle: as, (obj!, lobt, (obte, gclobt, for, lobeft, (obct, lobetc, gelobct; f^drjl, offcnbdrt, o^i\}Ox% gel^o'rt, fd)6n j!cr, t)er fc^o"n|!e, for f^arej!, offcnbaret, ges: Jjowf!, geit)orct, fc^6"ne(!er, bcr fd^o'nelfe* «. Those which are supported by a sign of length. SECTION V. ON PROSODY. ■ This is the eleraeKlaix science of versification. As verse is the compass of a certain number of words, mea- sured by their syllables, the nature of these syllables is the principal object of prosody. They constitute metre, ) by their capacity of being either long, or short. A v combination of such syllables makes a foot, several feet c prodttce a verse. But to use these constituent parts with correctness, and propriety, it is necessary to understand their length and brevity, and the reasons, by which they possess those qualifications. Jii-lh^jGceck and^R^maiL^J^^^^^ tliejiieasure of ^ il>?Jj)|ables, or their_^Maw/i7^^ was accurately fixed. Every syllable had acquired its invariable character, of being long, or short, either from the nature of the letters, which composed it, or from antient and unalterable usage. The dimension of its sound was ascertained, I 2 ^S [S7] On Orthographi/^ Pronunciation. P.I, C. 1. and established, and, according to that ouly, th« poet, ot versifier, was at liberty to employ it. The modern tongues of Enrope baye, sLricHy speak- \ing# !Jt.o law$ qf quantity. Their metres contain a limi- ( ted portion of »\llaJile8, arranged togelher, more accord- . ing to number, tljan by any jjrecise rules of length, or shortness. Tltfe on!XJ^^![gJt'.L""P^'K.<^.i J?a !19^ ^Q violate ^ the accent, which. conj:x,oyj.?> 9yd |i;overns the pronuQqia^ tion*. The poet cannot be permitted to change the audible eftect of the language ; hut, conforming to this restriction, he may, as far as the mechanical part of ver- sification is concerned, make use of the syllables, ac- cording to his will, and convenience. Such is the nature of modern prosody, in general, and of the German, in particular, as will appear from the subsequent investiga- tions, ^ THE_AccKNTi therefore, is the standard, by which ( metrical composition must be guided. It has been am- ply discussed, in the foregoing section, and here some application will be made of those disquisitions. Aj^l- lable, that has the ful|accen!,„ .in. Gtmiau^ cannot be . used olh«'rv\ iseJlianioJOS. For, that accent consists in an ascension of the voice, whicli, while it is in the act of rising, requires a greater length of time for the complete emission of the sound, than is necessary in a s> liable, y that is not elevated above its level. Inji¥i?j'di_pf Uyo pr \ te*?^lL4b]!?3_QILe.8jllable riiust inevilahly M lon^j, be- (^ cause oi)emusMiecessariIy btar the full accent. Of ♦ It wouid be exceedingly faulty to accentuate any word, in a manner different from tlic universal custom : to read, for instance, metaphor, metaphor ; philosopher, philosopher ; diametrically, diamttrically ; again, again; below, biloa: ; liberty, liUrtj^ ; library, libidrjf ; oiinstrelsy, minstri.1^. Sect. 5. On Prosody, [$8] 89 tlipse syllables, Avlnch have not that accent some are en-'^ ilowed with the denii-acceiit, and others are accentless. / The latter are in tlieii nature short: those that are half \ accenled, or that have the denii-accenl, being between / the full length, and shortness, niust be r^ garded^^^ambi- \ ^u^uS;^^pr comjnqn, half inclining to length, and half to / brevity; and, consequently, as fit to be used in either ^ capacity, as occasion may demand. As to he accentless ^ syllables, or tliose that are properly short, it might per- haps be recomniended, as a metrical accuracy, to those who write verse, never to employ them with tlie quality of length : but even the best poets transgress this line of correctness. They use those syllables long, without much scruple, when the necessity of the verse invites it*. But f^w limitation must be observed, that by transform- ing a short syllable into length, the full accent of the word must not be destroyed : if that suffer, the fault is unpardonable. Monosyllables J'cannot have the full, but must have the demi-accent : for the former consists in a comparative elevation of voice, in one syllable over the tone of another, which comparison cannot be instituted, when there is only one syllable by itself. Nor cai. they possibly be accentless ; because it is necessary to pro*- nounce them distinctly, and, in a manner, sonorously, to render them intelligible ; and where the vowels in any syllable are thus heard, that syllable is said to be half- accented, or to have the demi-accent. Now the derni-") accent has, in prosody, a quantity between long and ] * It is not difficult to meet with examples. The prefix ^e, in the preterite participles, is accentless, and entirely short ; but you will see it with a long quantity in Voss's Translation of Homer^s Odyssee, 12th B©ok, v. 134,fln^e' flr^ngt : 166, gerattgtf, I 3 / 90 [89] On Ortho^aphy S^ Pronunciation, P, L C, l , i' short, or in olher terms, is common: monpsvllables, therefore^ are common, that is to say, may be used either afjqn^, or short. Two or three of them may be read together, as in one word, and the stress of declamation may assign to one the full accent, or main tone, wiiicli then becomes long in quantity, in coniparison to the / others. This is ttie oratorialy or declamatory accent^ \ which is at the will, and depends entirely upon the feel- ( ing, of the writer, or speaker. It determines the tone in syllables of ambi«;uous quantity, bestowing length of tound wherever it falls, thouuh it does not necessarily ioUow, that this accent should be exerted, whenever there is occasion to make a conmion syllable loKg. iLis^sel- doni 0«ci Ji:aJ>le jo fix t he full accent in words oC four syllableSj, or^juyre. When pronounced, such words sound, as if they were divided into parts, and the accent established according to these divisions. In fact, it ap- pears, as if there were no full accent: and the absence of this leaves the syllables in a state of ambiguity. I am thert fore inclined to say, that the syllables in words, which contain four or mort', are conmion, that is, liable V to been»ployed with the quantity of length, or shortness, / as it may suit the purpose of th«' poet. The accent, accordmi: to what has been stated, is to be regarded as the source of quantity ; nor can it be con- ceded, as some woidd assert, that the latter is independ- ent of the former. With the accent, in our acceptation, is not to b'.' rotifounded that distinctness, or acuteness of voice, with which, from some impuNo of feeling, or meaning, the sound ol a syllable may happen to be emitted. If in this example: gcrcdjtcr ®Ott, oUgutig fl'ut> teine 3Bcgc, the syllables gc and all should be heard with something like an emphasis, this is not to be taken Sect. 5. On Prosody. [90] ^i for the accent, which, as the 4th Section has abuudantlv proved, rests upon a very difFerent foundation. Xhe foilo\viu^ rules^rox^ quuiUit^^ in Qer!i).an.pjjo.sody, are the result of tlie precedini; observations. IU[H3I9X^l?..9-f*^V« or three syU long , whicji bears the full accent*. JU*4n3:ords.offaur syllables, or more, the full aocfiut can seldom be distinctly fixed ; but there generally re- mains a sort of equilibrium betweeji the syllables, which seems lo render them common. As such they may be often regarded, and employed at the will of the poet. Certain con)pound words retain, in a great degree, tlue stress of tone, which one or the other of the component parts had before the composition : and they are to be looked upon as exceptions from this rule of common quanlity. For example 2f(l9Utfger, composed of all and gutigcr, has a prevailing accent upon the 2d, which could not possibly be equalized with the quantity of the preceding, or subsequent syllables. III^MonpsjllabJes are coin mon. They are parti- cularly liable to be affected by the oratorial, or arbitrary, accent. .jy* t^ylJable*^, that^jLllglf^^CgSSiA^^ which is ihe same, have Jd|e demj-acceiitj-^jr(^ c^ajimxQRj ' V. Accentless syllables^ that is to say, those,^ which never admit an accent]:, ough,l always iQ pre^eoifi-^a ^jrt^uantily. But so far does the established free- * Concerning the accent, the 4th section of this chapter must be referred to. Here, p. 71, 7 f, 30. t See Sect. IV, p. 81; + See Sect. IV, p. 82. 32 [91] On Orthographi/ Sf Pronunciation. P. LC,\, (.lorn of the poels extend, that even lliose syllables are not uiifrequeutly used as loiip. , The. Geriuau language is cajvable of producing all \ \he niclriral ft.et, and consequently all the species of ver» /\jjficati()n, ujuch vvt'ie known to Ihe.ancients. It is suited \to hexameter, and pentameter*; and avails itself of a / variety of measures, in lyrical compositionsf. I speak ^ here of verse, without rhyme : though this auxihary of modern poesy is likewise current, and as nmch in prac- tice, as in any other tongue of Europe, ^^word pf.tw) syllables must, iiuGeriiiani.ac«)rdiug_- Joihe jccent, fuinjsh.^^*'**^*' a trochee ""', or an iambick"". If the accent be on the tirst, it will be a trochee, if on the second, an iambick. But as one of the syllables must, of necessity, have a paramount accent, tjiey can- iigt both have the same quajililj' A dissyllabick word can, therefore, not naturally form eillifir,^,^ spondee "' J, or a pyrrhich ' ". However, by the assistance of mom>- syllables, these feet may be easily accomplished. A vvordjotfjlhree syllables way make either a dactyl"'", which is most common; (»r an anapaest """, or an am- phibrachys'^": but from the constitution of the Ger- man accent, it will not so readily yield a creticus, or am- phimacer'""; though, if the last syllable happen to be half-accentuated, it would be practicable. It would be . * The Jiiiglis^h,.Ianguan;e_rgv:pltii at tbuBse jne^es. In German, some of the most exceJIent poem sTiave been com- posed ill them. Klopstock's Messiah, Stolberg's and Voss's Translations of Homer, arc written in hexameter: Herder and others have successfully made use of the pentameter. f l^c, for instance, the odes of Klopstock. X The illustrious Klopstock has celebrated this peculia- rity of the German language, in his Ode to Sponda, a nymph, whose absence, or concealment, the poet laments. Sect, 5. On Prosodi/, [tyz] 93 difficult to shape it to a bacchius"'", or an anlibacchius""" ; and impossible to turn it into a molossus"", or tribra- chys""". \Vhen those fe^ijtrejya^^^^^^ they must be made by a ^omb[nalieu.Qf diffierentEs^Js, Tims the feet of four syllables nre likewise to be produced ; for of words, which have that extent themselves, there is not a great number. Among the tetrasvUabick feel, the choria«i-'\ bick is most familiar to the German language; and itC is also the most pleasing. It is, frequently, effected by a / concurrence of dissyliabicU words, and, occasionally, by^^ words of fou'-, or five syllables. The proceleusmati- J cus , dispondaeus , dijambus"""", ditroch*us , artispast '""", iouicus a major« '" ", ionicus a minore " , th« first pajon *'"'"', second pseon , third pajon"""", fourth p«oii ; the first epitrite"'"", second fepi- trite , third epitrite , fourth epitrile : all) these feet may be had, by an association of syllables,^) which the language, without much difficulty, is able to) furnish. — — ~- In this manner the substance of German l*rosody has been stated : but I deem it necessary, before I quit this topick, to lake notice of a theory, more artificial than ^J^ ours, which has been set up by an ingenious author*. As h-^'^- the principles of his system are entirely different from |^f j ■ those, which we have adopted, our doctrine would lose "U/^ much of its validity, unless we were able to shew, that ""'^'* any vther, at variance with it, could not, upon examina- tion, maintain its ground. The writer, to whom I allude, * Mr. Moriz. The title of the work, in which it is deve- loped, is 2?erfuc^ einer ^eutf^en :; [9S] On Orthography Sf Pronunciatiou. P. I. C. 1 y gives the result of his notions, in nearly the following ( words*: " The length and shortness of syllables, in the "^ German language, is not determined by the number and cjuality of the letters, or individual sounds, of which they consist ; but by their prosodical value, as parts of y speech, of more or less significancy : consequently, the ) rules of prosody, in that language, can only be drawn from a grammatical knowledge of the j)aris of speech, and their respective subordinacy, according to the weight, / and importance, of their signification." The -foundation on which that edifice is reared, is a gradation of the parts of speech, according to their sense and meaning, with which their prosodical quantity is said to correspond. This maxim, if admitted, can only be api-licable to monosyllabick words; for in those» which contain more syllables, accent and quantity arc established on another basis. So it seems to be under- stood by our author: and he, therefore, appears to nar- row his sphere, l)y confining the operation of his prin- ciple, in the passage adduced, only to one class of words. It is true, that he had previously spoken of words, con- taining more syllables than one, and assigned the long quantity, or the prosodical accent, to what he stales the significant syllables; but his hypothesis, relative to the parts of speech, can only embrace monosyllables. From being thus contracted, it must, at first view, appear inade- quate, and imperfect. But we will enter into a more ac- curate enquiry concerning its merits. The parts of (^speech are thus arranged f : Substantive, Adject iit, J\rU^ • P. 'Z'i6. ^ Moriz Prosody, p. 185. Read also from p. UJ5» to 1'13 ; aiul 213, with the following pages. Sect. 6. On Prosody, [94] 95 Interjection f Adverb, Auxiliary verb, Conjunction, Pro- \ noun, Preposition, Article, According to the order, in which they are here drawn up, they are tol)e considered, in prosody, as of the 1st, 2d, 3d, 4lh, 5tli, 6lh, 7lh, 8lh, 9th, 10th rank; the following always yielding, in po-, tency, to the preceding. Tiie substantive, thereforej J invariably surpasses, in quantity, any other part of speech i\ it is long, while the adjective, verb, and the rest, com- pared to it, are short. The same pre-eminence the ad- jective maintains over those behind it ; the interjection likewise, and so forth, every one rising, in importance, over that which it precedes, and yielding to that which it follows; till, at last, the article concludes the train, and like the 5th class of citizens, or the capite censi at Rome, only exists, to shew, by its inferiority, the superior qua- lification of its neighbours*. The whole of this doctrine is founded upon an arl/i- ^ trary assumption, and the imagination of the author; it{ lias otherwi;^ troy the metre, and read Schuert in des , as a dactyl or at least" ', as a trochee. Btit has the poet acknowledged your laws, and auih(jrized you to do so ? (4) e, a most acceniless syllable, is employed here with a long quantity. (6) Wenii vory"', a conjunction short before a preposi- tion, which is against M.'s system. Query, ought it to b« reail'"? Ask the poet. (6) Undwir,", a conjunction short before a pronoun, a similar irregularity with the preceding one. Sect, 5. On Prosody. 1 03 SSSctt (7) urn un§ {)cr, bann ftegen wir 5)lit 9luf)m fur§ SSatcrlanb! ^ann trctcn n?ir mit l)ol)cm ^ritt 2Cuf M^namzn (8) baf)cr ! X>a$ Qtl)t bur^ ?[J?arf imb S3ein ! Ung preiftmit frot)cm Ungcftum 2)cr aSrdutgam unt> bie SSraut ; gr fiei)t bic ()of)nen gaf)nen n?c]()n, Unb bru(f t ii)x fanft bic »§anb, Unbfprid)t5u iljr: ©afommenfic, 3)ic ^ricgeggottcr, Ijev ! ©iejlritten in ber tjciffen (Sd)tac^t 2(ucl?fuvun§beibemit« Un§ prcij! bet greubent{)rancn "ooU. S){c 3}iuttcr, unb i{)r ^inb I (gie bru(f t ben ^nabcn an i^v ^crj, Unb \ki)t bcm ^aifcr nad> Un6 fol^t cin Sdui^m, ber cwig bleibt; SBennwir g^orbcn finb, @e|!orbcn fur "oa^ SSaterknb £)en cI)ren^oUen5£ob! (7) Weitum^'y an adverb short before a preposition! A difficulty even greater, than the two former ones. (8) crt, an accentless syllable long : that which precedes it, Twm, has the demi-accent, and is here used short. 104 CHAPTER II. ON THE NOUN. CONTAINING 1. The Article, 2. The Gender. 3. The Declension of Suhstantivet. 4. The Declension of Adjectives. 5. The Comparison of Adjectives. 6. The Numerals. SECTION I. THE ARTJCLE. There are two articles in the German Iang^ua|;e, a^ in llie English, the definite, uhicli answers toihe English the, (tlie man) ; and iImj indefinite, answering to a or an, (a house, an oak). The English arlicles are not dech'ned ; but the Ger- jnan are varied, in their terniination.s hy four cases, the nominalivc, genitive, dative, and accusative. The^defiuile article has two numbers, the singular and_ Ihe plural. The indefinite can, from its nature, only have the singular number. Sect.i, The Article, 105 4lliil?.Mugul3r, both tbe arlicles have distinct ending?, Jbr Jhe three genders of grammar, the masculine, the feminine, and neuter. In the plural of ttejkfii^iSjuJIl* termination serves for, all. DEFINITE ARTICLE. Singular. Masc. Fem. Neat. ^ // "\ Nominative. 2)er, ^ic, Da6, the (raan).\fcfr*i^-) (f^J -* .* Genitive. ^e§, ^cr, ^c6, of the. ^ Dative. 2)em, Dcr, £)em, to the. Accusative. :^en, X)k, ^a^, the. Plural. Nom. ^ie, Gen. ^er,(^^^^^jj^^„^^^^, Dat. ^en, Ace. ^lie. INDEFINITE ARTICLE. Singular. Masc. Bern. Neut. Nora, (gin, Sine, ^in, a (man). Geu. Sinc§, (Sincr, Sinc6, of a. Dat. ginem, Stner, Sinem, to a. Ace. ©incn, ^ine; (Sin, a. iVo Plural, 106 On the Noun. Part I. C/utp, 2, SECTION II. THK GENDER. / The. Nouns SubstantLve^,are distinguished by three igfiiulcrs, the masculine, the feminine, and the neuter: ' ^ach of which, as has been stated in the foregoing sec- .tion, has, in the singuhir number, itsjii)£ropriale article, (We can, therefore, not join a substantive with an article ; /nor, as afterward will appear, with an adjective or a pro- vnoun, unless we are certain of its gender. It serves be- sides, as will be seen, as a criterion for the declension. For these reasons, it seems to be proper, previously to discuss that subject, before we speak of the substantives, the adjectives, and pronouns. "^^ It is an unfortunate circumstance, t-hat tfiis part of Grammar, which is so important and necessary, for cor- rectness of speech, should be so little encompassed by general laws, as it actually is, in the German language. Tlie rules are. very few, while the exceptions, and irregu- larities, are exceedingly nuixierous, Of most words the gender is only to be acquired by individual experience, and it is, therefore, to be reconmiended to the foreigner, that, whenever he learns any new substantive, he should be anxious, at the same time, accurately to impress upon his mind the proper article, belonging to it. A. OFjrUE MASCULINE GENDER, ar« J^ All male names and appellations: as, ber 3}?antt, the man; \)ix SSater, the father; t>er ^6nig» the king. S9Ct, ^» Tlie Gender. 107" &c. Except dimiiiulives, which are neuters ; and some compound words, in wliich tlie last component is of a different gender*, as bie ?|}lann§perfon, and \iCi^ ^(m\\^^ bilb, both denoting a man ; from bie ^crfott, the person, feminine, and ba§ SStlt), the figure, neuter. 2. The name of God ; the names of an^lvaodjle- mons, (as bcr ©ngcl, the angel ; bcr 5£eufel, the devil, &c.) ; of winds, (as bcr ^llorbwinb, the north wind ; bcr @ubtt){nb, the south wind, &c.); qLigasORS, (as bcr gru{)lin9, '^^^ spring ; ber @ommcr, the summer, «Scc.) ; of mgnUis^ and days, (as bcr ;^anuar, January ; ber ge^: bruar, February ; ber flO^ontag, Monday ; ber 2)ienfta5, Tuesday, &c.)— ^a§ S'J^^* ^be year, is neuter, whence "^(i^ %X\x\)\ Ihe onyx ; ber @a^f)ir, the sapphire ; ber Stubin, the ruby, &c. 4f. All words ending in ing and ling: except bag :^ing, the thing; bag SJlcfftng, brass, (by some called bersO^effingO 5. Most substantives ending in er. Except, among others, the following : bag 50^effer, the knife ; bag ^\X^ ber, the oar ; bie goiter, the rack, an engine of torture ; bie »^al|ter, the halter, a cord, or strap, to tie up horses; bie geber, the pen; bie belter, the wine-press; bie ^(atnmer, a hook for holding things together, cramp ; bie flapper, the rattle, an instrument ; bie Seiter, the ladder; bie ^d)(euber, a sling to throw with; bieSiter, the guitar, &c. * See additional remarks on the gender. 108 On the Noun, Part I, Chap. 2. ^^gjjtoiy w^49 eiidinjj in^e^, jAcepiians-iujinerO-y'- a. The following : X)a^ 2C(mofcn, alms ; t>aS S5e^en, the basin; baS Sifcn, the iron; bag Jtiffcn, the cushion ; bag 2;el)en, Uie fief; bag SQSa^en, or 2Ba^^en, ihe coat of arms ; bag 3ci<^cn, the sign. 6. The infinitive moodf, when turned into substantives. Tliey are of the neuter gender: as, -Dag ®el;cn, the going, or walking; bag ffintcn, the riding ; bag Sjjcn, the eating, or the meal ; bag S^nnfen, the drinking, or drink, &c. To which may be added, bag ^rbbeben, the earthquake ; bag ©e? bved^en, the failing ; bag £cibcn, the suffering ; bag SSers^ gniigea, ll»e pleasure; bag SScrmogcn, the power of doing a thing, also estate, or fortune ; bag S5er]j)altcn, the demeanour, conduct; bag SSorl^abcn, the purpose, intention ; bag SBcfctl, the being. For these are, pro- perly speaking, the infinitives of certain verbs, c. The diminutives in en, are neuters. 7. Some words beginning with the prefix g-fr, and being derivatives : as, £)cr ®cban!c, bcr ®cfdl}rtc, bcr ®et)ulfe, bcr ©cbraud^, ber ®ef)alt, bcr ®ct)orfam, bcr ®cla§, bcr ©cnoffe, bcr ©cnuf , bcr ©cruc^, bcr ®cfd)macF, bcr ®c^ f!anf , bcr ©cfcUc, bcr ©cwinn, bcr ©cwinji, bcr ©cf^ann, bcr ©cfpiclc, bcr ©cbraud), bcr ©cfang, bcr ©ct)attcr« B, OP THE FEMININE GENDER, are 1. All female names and appellations : as, ;Dte Srau, the woman; bic SKltttcr, the mother; bic glirftinn, the princess, &c. Except a. The diminutives, which are neuters. b, ^ag 2Bcib, the woman, or wife; t>a$ fOlenfd), a low, common woman. And these compounds : ^a"g SBcibgbilb, the female ; bag graucnjimmcr, a fe- Sed. !2. 'J^e Gender, 109 male, a lady ; ba6 2Bc{bc6jlucf, an eipreasion of con- tempt, for a woman. Q. Tlie names of trees, fruits, and flowers, when ending in e : as, t>{e^id)C, the oak ; tie %id^Uf the pine ; Vit S5u(^c, ilie beech ; W S^anne, the tir ; t>tc S3tme, tlie pear ; bic ^flaumc, the plum ; bie 9lofc, the rose ; t>ic 9lclfe, the pink. Foreign names keep iiieir original gender : as, ba§ ©erartium, the geranium. 3. The names of rivers : as, bte Slbe, the Elbe ; blC SQSefcr, the Weser ; bie 2)onau, the Danube ; bfe S^^mfc, the Thames ; bic XxhtX, the Tiber. Except the following : ber 2Cnto, bet 2)njeper, bcr 2)nie|ler, t>er 2)on, ber ^ouro, ber Sbro, ber (5u^()rat, ber Snn, ber Sei^, ber Wlain, ber Wlin\)Of bcr ijlcdfer, ber ^il, bcr ^0, ber Sl^cin, ber Sdubico, ber 3)ejo» 4. All words, ending in ei/ (or ei), heit, keit, schaft, andwwo-: as, bic CRafcrct), madness; bie grcil^eit, free- dom, liberty; bic ftuflbarfcit, the entertainment, party of pleasure ; bic ©cfcUfc^aft, company, society ; bie Seitung, the tiding. Except: bcr S3rct), the pap, pulp ; ba^ (i\), the egg ; ha^ ®efd)ret), the clamour ; berSd^aft, the wooden part of a spear, also the stock of. a gun ; bcr ©prung, the leap. 5. All substantives, ending in e, which are derived from adjectives : as, bie £dngc, the length, from laWQ, long ; bic ©roge, the magnitude, size, from grop, great; bic ®ute, the goodness, from gut, good ; bie ©C^WCrc, the weight, heaviness, from fc^wer, heavy. 6. Many other words in e: as, bic @d)cere, the scis^ sars; bic ^a^c, the cat; bic ^rd{)C, the crow; bie Mll^t, the cap ; bic 2Be|!e, the waistcoat. 7. Words in uchtf and unft : as, bie 95ucl^t, the bay; biegluc^t, the flight; btcgruci^t, the fruit; bic (5U(^t, 110 On the Noun. P. I. C. 2. unreasonable zeal, or passion, mania ; bit 3^^^/ disci- pline, also the breeding of cattle ; bic S^nft, a corpora- ration, guild ; bie 2Cnfunft, the arrival. 8. Words in muth : as, tie "KxiXWltf), poverty; bic ®tof mutif), uiagnanimily — though some express Ihem by different genders : as, ba0 2Crmut^, tcr ©rogmutl)^ ^cr ^0&)m\lt\), haughtiness, is, I believe, always used as a masculine. 9. Several in iit«: as, bie S3cbrdn9mg, distress, or embarrassment; bic SSegcgnig, occurrence, fate; bic ^cforgnig, apprehension ; bic SSetrubnif , sorrow ; bic Smpfdngnig, conception, the act of becoming pregnant; bic Srfcnntnig, tiie knowledge ; bie (Srlaubnif , the per- mission ; bic (Stf^avuig, savings, (according to some, a neuter); bie gal)rnig/ challel, (also used as a neuter); bicgdulnig, putridity; bic ^enntnig, knowledge; bie Jtummcrnig, grief; bic ginjlcrnig, the darkness; bic 5Berbammnig, damnation ; bie SQSilbnif , the wilderness. But as many, or more, of this termination, are neuters; mnd in some the gender is ambiguous. XO. Some words, beginning with ge, being, for the most part, derivatives: as, bie ®ebuf)r, the due, the fee ; bic ©eburt, the birth ; bie ©ebulb, patience ; bie ®efaf)t, the danger ; bic ©enuge, tiie state of being s;itis- fied; bic ©efc^ic^te, the history ; bie ©cfc^WUlft, the tu- mour; bic ®e(talt, the form, or shape; bic ©ewalt, the force, or power. C. OF THE NEUTER GENDER, are 1. The letters of the alphabet: as, ba$2(; ba§ fd* 2. The names of metals : as, ba§ (SJolb, the gold ; ba§ @iU>cr/ the lilver; ba^^Upfer, the copper. BUcept Sect, 2. The Gender, 1 1 1 t)ic ^tattna, platina; ber@ta^(, the steel; betXombacf, the pinchbeck ; ber 3^^^/ ^•"^* 3. The names of countries and places, when the gen- der is discernible from a word, connected with them, which may be the article, the adjective, or the pronoun*; as, ba6 aufgefldrte Suropa, enlightened Europe; bag gcfittctc ^eutfd^lanb, refined Germany; ba6 reid^e Conbon, llie rich town of London. Except: bfe ©C^WCi^, Switzerland ; bie ^fal^, the Palatinate ; and those which end in e^ : as, bic S^urfet), Turkey. 4. Words ending in (hum: as, ba§ gut|lentl)Um, the principality; ba6 (5I)n|!cntt)Um, Christianity. Except: t>Ct 3rtt()Um, the errour ; bcr 9?cid)t]^um, the riches. 5. The infinitive moods, which have acquired the na- ture of substantives, by the article prefixed : as, bdS @c^en, bag fUtittn, bag (Sffen, the going, the riding, the eating.f 6. All parts of speech, not being substantives, when accompanied with the article, to point them out, are assigned to this gender : as, bag 3*^/ the (word) I ; bag Unb, the (word) and; bag ©run, the (colour) green; bag ^d)war§, the (colour) black; bag 9tunb ber^rbe, the round (i. e. the globe) of the earth ; bag fiebcWO^l, the farev/ell. 7. All diminutives are neuters : to which belongs bag ^O'labc^en, the girl, or maid ; being the diminutive of * The relative pronoun, as well as any other, must ceiv respoiul with such names, in the neuter gender, for exam- ple: ^^encbig, welcbe^ an btv ©ee liegt, Venice which is situated on the sea coast ; Wil^^i, is the neuter of the rela- tive pronoun. t See p. 396. 4«0. L 2 112 On the Noun, Part J. Chap. 2. tieSiJ^agt), Ihemaid.* (How ihe diniinulives are formed, will be shewn in the second declension.) 8. Several words beginning with ge : as, tia§ ©cbdlf, t>a§ ®ebct, ba6 ©ebict, bag ©ebot, bag ©cblut, bag ®e:= hi^, bag ®ebid)t, bag ©efdf , bag ®efu^(, bag Oe^cig, bag ®el)6r, bag ©elubbc, bag ©ernad), bag @emdi)lbe, bag ©emurmel, bag ®emut(), bag ®efct)6^f, bag ®cfd)og, bag ©efprdd?, bag ©efuc^^ 9. Several ending in niss: a», bag 2Cer9crnif , bagS3c* fugnip bag SSegrdbnig, bag 33cfcnntnig, bag SSilbnig, bag S3unbnig, ^a^ ^inverfldnbmg, bag(Srforbcrnig, bag ©cfjcimnif, bag ©ebdd^tnig, bag ©efldnbnip, bag ©Idc^ nif , bag ^inbcrnif , bag $Kigver|idnbmg, bag S$cr()dlts: nig, bag fBer^dngnig, bag SSerlobnip, bag SScrmdc^tnig, bag §8erfdumnig, bag SSerglcic^nif, bag a$crpdnbnif , ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON THE GENDER. I. If we investigate the origin of gender, it will appear, that it is to be looked for in an assimilation of the objects, signified by words, to the animated part of creation. As in this there are two sexes, so the infant ipind of man distinguished those objects by two genders. Some/ to which might be attributed qualities like those, that are observed in Ihe male sex of living beings, such as greatnees, strength, activity, &c. were marked by the male, or masculine gender : others, in which pro- perties, opposite to the former, such as inferior size, comparative weakness, passiveness, kc. were noticed, * Thus, in Greek, diminutives are often of the neuter gender, as ri vcuhov, and the name Glycerium, Sect. 2. The Gender. 113 had the fehiale» or feminine gender assigned to iheiii. Thus two divisions were made, under which nouns sub- stanlive might be classed. Several nations, and the German, among others, added a third, called the neuter gender; comprehending words, that did not exactly coincide with the charade risticks of the two former. It contained, for instance, those with which the compa- rison of the male and female sex could not well be asso- ciated. Of this kind are, in German, the names of some animals, of which the male and female are discri- minated, by appropriate denominations. For example, t>a§ ^ferb, the Imrse, isof the neuter gender, being the appellative for the equine species, of which the male is called iDer •^cngjt, the stallion, and the female bie <^tuUf the mare. Thus ba^ S^inb/ denoting the bovine kiqd, has the same gender; the male being termed ber ^tm, (or ber S5uUc,) the bull, and the female bie Mnl;), the €o\v. Likewise ba$ ©d^tvcin, the swine ; ber Sber, (or ber ^em^c) the boar ; bie ^an, the sow : t)a^ ^u\)n, the fowl ; ber »^a()n, the cock ; bie .^enne, the hen. There is a similar appellative for the hunicin species, vi^. ber 5D^enf^, Lat. homo ; the subdivisons are, ber 9}^ann,^the man; bie grau, the woman. Tliis, however, as appears from the article, is not of the neuter, but of the masculine gender ; which seems to be a preeminence given to it, above the brute creation. We may, upon this occasion, remark a singularity in the word ba^ SBeib, a woman, which is a neuter. I conjecture, that it was introduced into the language, subsequent to another word of the same signification ; and that, for this reason, it was not received in the class of feniinines, its place being already occupied : or a particular idea might, originally, be annexed to it, for which it was deemed unworthy of L3 114 On the Noun. Part I, Chap, 2, thai gender. As those words, of which we have been speaking, were referred to the neuter gender, because a comparison of sex was not combined with them : so the following belong to the same, as general names ; the male, and female sex being expressed by subordinate appellations. 2^a§ ^int>, the child, signifying the off- spring of the human species, without implying the sex ; t)a§ &amm, the lamb ; t»a^ guUen, the foal ; bag SCalh, the calf; baS gerfet, a young pig ; ba§ ^ud)cn, a chicken, or young fowl. In all these words, no regard is had to sex, and, therefore, they are of the neuter gender. The diminutives are neuters, without any exception. The notion, upon which this circumstance is founded* seems to be, that, as the diminutives are not quite the same as their primitives, whether masculine, or femuiine, but differ in their qualities, by being smaller, a different gender should be allotted to them. Abstract terms cannot easily be made to square with the idea of sex. In consequence of this, they are ascri- bed to the neuter gender : as, t)aS ®cl)Cn, the going ; ba§ Sfteitcn, the riding. Those notions were partly moditied, and partly set aside, when language became more cultivated, and the human mind more enlaiged. We must, however, have recourse to theiu, if we wish to unravel, in some degree, the intricacies, with which this subject is accompanied. 11. The gender, we have said, had its source in consi- dering all objects as animate, and in per onifying them, according to the sexes, existing in creation. But it docs not thence follow, that different indivi, the dog ; tic flirts tinn, the female dog; fccvSGSolf, the wolf; tic SKolfittn, Sect. 2. The Gender. II7 the she wolf; ter (5fe{, Ihe ass; bie (^fcUnn, the she ass. In some, however, it is not usual, as in tcrguct)^, the fox ; t>er ^afe, the hare ; ber f&aXy the bear : of which it is not I lie common practice to employ, bie Sud)^ finn, tie ^dfinn, bic S5annn« Consequently the terms, above mentioned, 5Dldnnc^en, SBetbc^cit; mdnnlic^, votih:^ lid^, or similar words of discrimination, must be called in aid. — if the feminine gender serve for the appellation of the species, the male sex assumes the terminntion er, or rich : as, t>ic XiXuhz, the dove, or pigeon ; ber %a\X^ ber, (or 3:dubcr,) the male; bic ®an§, the goose; bcr ©anfer, or ©dnferid?, the gander; bie Snte, the duck; bcr (Snter, or (Entcrid), the drake; bie ^a^c, (old, bic Mat) the cat ; ber ^ater, the he-cat. IV. From the above, the termination inn* has been transferred to certain attribute?, and titles, (and occasio- nally, even to proper names), to denote the feminine gen- der. Examples : ber ^onig, the king ; bie ^otai^inn, the queen ; ber |>erjo9, the duke ; bie |)erjoginn, the duchess; ber gurjj, the prince ; bie gurftinn, the prin- cess ; ber ^rinj, the son of a sovereign, the prince ; bie ^rinjeffinn, the daughter of a sovereign, the prin- * I have to observe, that some writers have preferred to express it by in, without doubling the letter n. VVieJand, and other respectable names, are among the number. But inn has the most ancient usage in its favour, and is like- wise supported by recent authorities of distinction. Lessing, Nicolai, Adelung, (see theOrthograpby of the latter, p. 72 > and others protect it. It may be noticed, that this termi-. nation affects the vowel in the masculine, if it be a word of one syllable, by changinsit, for the feminine, into its cor- responding diphthong, ^'Bclf, 'M'ifivn, C)uti^ ^UnMnn. .9vat(», 3?vUbion, 118 On the Noun. Part J. Chnp. t, cess; bcr (Sc^dfcr, the shepherd; bic (5d}dferlnn, the shepherdess. As it is the custom, in Germany, for Ihe wife to share the title of her hushand, tlie ending inn is adapted to thai purpose: for. instance, ^cr X)OCtor, the doctor; bic S^OCtorinn, the doctor's wife; ber ^roe fcffor, the professor; bic ?)rofcfforinn, the professor's wife; bcr fRatIC), the counsellor ; bic 9ldtl)inn, the counsellor's wife. In addressinii the gcnllemen, \ou would say, ^crr 2?octor, ^err ^rofcffor, |)crr ^1% Mr. Doctor, Mr. Professor, Mr. Counsellor : and the ladies, grnu 5)octorinn, grau ^rofcfforinn, grau JRds^ tt)inn, Mrs. Doctor, Mrs. Professor, Mrs. Counsellor. V. It may be observed, that many words have the gender cf their common appellatives. For example, the names of flowers are feminine, and the word bic 5Btume, the flower, is likewise of that gender : the names of stones are masculine, and so is bcr®tctn, the stone, their connnon appellative. VI. Compound words take the gender of their last component, if it be a substantive: as, bcr .^ird)Cnratl?, the ecclesiastick council, from bic ^irdjC, the church, and bcr Siatl^, the council ; ba§ 9latl}^au^, the council- house, the senale-lnmse, from bcr DuUl), and ba§ SQaw^-t, the house ; bcr 9}^aa5j^ili>. » *""'*'r ^'^'" »»easuring, from bn§ ^rtrtg, the measure, and bcr a§ ?D?ad}Crb{)n, wages for making any tiling, such as clothes ; ba§ ^rU(fcitoI;n, llie printer's wages : which words arc, generally, used as neuters, although the last coniponent, bet Solvit, the wages, is of the masculine gender. Yet in others, composed with the same, its gender is retained: as, ber lixhcit^ lo\)n, wages for work ; ber ©uabenlol^n, the pension for past services ; bcr ^Utcrlo!j)n, wages of a person who watches, or guards, any thing ; ber ^icrtjllol)!!, wages for service. Likewise some words, compounded with ber SRutl), the disposition of the luind, deviate in their gender: as, t)k ©rogmutl), magnanimity; bie ^leinmutt), pusillanimily ; bie ©anftmutf), gentleness of disposition ; bie ©d^Wermutl), the melancholy ; hU SBel^muti), tenderness of feeling ; bie £)emutl), humility, bie 2;angmut]^, forbearance. Others, of the same kind, do not change the gender of their primitive : as, ber ^06)mnti), haughtiness; ber ©belmuti), nobleness of disposition; ber ©letC^mutf), equanimity; ber 2Banfel^ tnuti), a wavering disposition ; ber »^elbemuti), an he- roick disposition; ber Sorvcnmutl), a lion-like spirit; ber Swcifclmut^, a disposition to despair. VII. Words, assumed from foreign languages, ought to preserve the gender of their originals : as, ber ^anal, the canal, from the Latin canalis, masculine ; baS (Sct:^ crament, the sacrament, from the Latin sacramentum ^ neuter ; bie ^eriobe, the period, from periodus, femi- nine. But this is not always regarded : for they say, ba^ ^tjrint^, neuter, though it comes from lahyrinthus, 120 On the Noun. Part I, Chap. 2.. masculine*; ba6 (5()or, the quire, wliich is derived from chorus, masculine. Frequently ber S^PtCt, (or , the shield ; £)a6 @c!^ilt), the sign of a house. ^cr@CC, the lake; 2)ic cr 5^itttt)0C^cn, Wednes- day, and t>ic 5i}Zittn?D(^e; bcr 2(1 tar, the altar, and bag 2CUar; ber ©pp^. plaster made of lime chalk, and baS ®t)p§* — It would not be worth our while to enume- rate all the deviations, which may be found in the dif- ferent provinces of Germany. Stet. 3. Declension of Substantives, 123 SECTION III. THE DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. The nouns substantive are most conveniently arranged under four declensions. By this division, the great advantage is obtained, of enabling the student, at the first view of any word, accompanied by its article, to refer it, immediately, to its proper mode of inflection. This is of the utmost importance, and not to be accom- plished by any other method. It removes the labour of learning the declension of every substantive individually, by subjecting the whole body of them to a few plain jrules*. * This system of the declensions is entirely my own, and I will not hesitate to say, that I regard it as one of the most important, and valuable parts of the Grammar. I suc- ceeded in establishing it, after much reflection, having strongly felt the defectiveness of other grammars, in this particular. They furnish a certain number of declensions, more or less, from two to ten ; but none of them enables you to determine, how any substantive you may meet with, ' is to be declined. None has arrived at fixing this criterion, which is of so much consequence, that, without it, any scheme of declension can be but of little use. By the me- thod laid down, in the subsequent pages, all uncertainty, as to this matter, is removed : and Jong observation and expe- rience have proved, how fully it answers its purpose. Some of the Criticks, by whom the former editions of this work have been reviewed, have not been aware of the nature of the subject, on which they were passing their judgment, and have seen nothing in it but an arbitra'ry innovation, or the substitution of one number of declensions for another. They did not perceive, that, far from caprice or fancy hav- M 2 lU On the Noun. Part L Chap, 3. THE FIRST DECLENSION contains all the nouns substantive of the feminine gen- der ; and is thus formed : In the Singular number, The terminations remaia unaltered. In the Plural, The following additions are made to the termination of the singular, viz. of n, throughout all the cases, if the singular end iu e, el, er, en, if it end in any vowel but e, or in any conso- nant, with the exception of monosyllabick words, and the terminations el and er. e, in monosyllables, ending with a consonant, for all cases, excepting the dative, which has the ter- mination en. ing suggested the alteration, it was necessity, that prompted it. And if that necessity has been successfully relieved, the merit of the contrivance, by which that was effected, is not to be denied. W those persons failed to appreciate it, it must be ascribed to their ignorance, or their inattention. I have, in the second edition, mentioned a German Ke- viewer, who has thus exposed his failings. I do not know, whether I should advert to an objection, which has been made, that our system of declensions renders a multipli- city of exceptions necessary. These exceptions, it will be found, are not more numerous, than might be expected in the framing of any rules, in a language like the German: and though they should add to the difficulties of the learner,^ yet they do not diminish the great and paramount utility of the system. If, before, there were no exceptions, this is ea- sily explained : for neither were there any rules. In a lan- guage that is much cultivated, and used, exceptions always abound. This is judiciously observed, by Mr. Adelung, in his Orthography, p. 16. It is in its infancy, that a language is most reguUr, and most swayed by analogy. Sect. 3. Declension of Substantives, \t5 Note. The plurals of bie 9}luttcr, the mother, and bie Softer, the daughter, are irregular, viz. nom. gen. ace. bie Wllitttx, bie XhdjUx; dat. ben 5Dluttern, ben S£6d}term THE SECOND DECLENSION contains all the masculines and neuters, ending in el, em, er, (not those in eer, or err,) and the neuters in e. lis inflection consists in an addition of s to the genitive singular, and of n to the dative plural. — Words ending in n, do not require the superaddition of this letter, in the dative plural. THE THIRD DECLENSION contains all those words, which end in e and st, which are of the masculine gender, and of more than one syl- lable. But besides these, some others, which are to be enumerated on a subsequent page, of different termina- tions, though ail of the masculine gender, belong to this declension. One neuter only has found a place among them, namely, \ia^ ^erg, the heart. AH the cases, both of the Singular and the Plural, with the exception of the nominative singular, are made by addins: to the latter, when ending in e (or ar, err) the letter w; and fw, when ending in *^, (or in some other consotianl). — Sometimes the genitive singular receives the accession of s, so as to terminate in ns, or ens. THE FOURTH DECLENSION contains all those masculines, and neuters, which are not comprehended in the second, and third declensions. m3 126 On the Noun. Part L Chap. 1. In the Singular, the genitive is made, by adding es to llie nominutive : the dative, by adding e; and the accusative is like the nominative. In the Plural, most words form their cases by an addi- tion of e, for the nominative, genitive, and accusative, of en for the dative, to the nomi- native singular. Several neuters, especially those of one 'syl- lable, and a few masculines, instead of e, and en, assume the syllables er, and ern, in the cases alluded to. Note. In the genitive singular, s simple is occasionally substituted for es ; and e, in the dative, omitted. GENERAL RULES. I. The dative plural, in all declensions, terminates with the letter n. II. The vowels a, 0, U, and the diphthong aU, of the singular number, are, in the plural of many words, changed into the diphthongs, d, 6, U, and an. This applies a. To the monosyllables of the first declension, which form the plural in e: as, t>ic ^ax\^» pi. bic vg)dnbc; bic 9?ot(), pi. bie 9'l6t()c; tic grudbt, pi. bicgrud)te; bic gaufl, bic gduflc, b. To several words of the second declension. See the examples, and observations, hereafter. C. To all those nouns of the fourth, which make their plural io er, and to many of the same de- Sect, 3. . Declension of Substantives, 127 clension, which have e in tliat number. See Ihe observations, p. 141. III. The vocalive case, in either number, is always understood to be like the nominative. It will, Iherefore, not be mentioned in the subsequent examples. We now proceed to give specimens of the severial declensions, and to enter into a detail, concerning each. FIRST DECLENSION, Comprising all the nouns substantive of the feminine gender, EXAMPLES. Singular, . Plural, Noni. 2)te(Sd)a(e, the saucer N. Die @(^a(en, the saucers Gen. "^ix @d)ale, of the G. ^cr (Sc^alen, of Dat. Der @c^alc, to D. Den (Sd^alen, to Ace. ^ie^d^ale, the saucer. A. ^ie @(^alen, the saucers. Nom. Xie geber, the pen N. ^tc Scbcrn, the pens Gen. 2)cr geber, of G. 2)er gebcrn, of Dat. 2)ergeber, to D. Dengebern, to Ace. ^ie geber, the pen. A. ^ie Sebcrn, tiie pens. Nom. 2)ie grau, the woman N. ^ie S^auett, the women Gen. :E)crgrau, of G. 2)crgrauen, of Dat. ^er grau, to D. :5)enSfauen, to Ace. ^ie grau, the woman. A. ^ie grauen, the women. .vW c 12S On the Noun. Part I. Chap, 2. Singular. Plnral. Nom.^iCvgjoffiuing, thehopcN.'2^ieJ5offnimgcn, the hopes Gen. 2)er^offnung, of . G.'3'er^offnungcn, of Dat. 2)ervg)offnun9, to D.'5)en|)offnungen, to Ace. ^ie^offnung.the hopeA.2)ie^offnungcn,the hopes. Norn. 'S)\i ^anb, the hand N. *5>{e .J)dnbc, the hands Gen. 2^cr ^anb, of G. 2)er vg)dnbc, of Dat. 2)er vg^anb, to D. 2)cn vg)dnbcn, to Ace. ^ic ^anb, tlie hand. A. 3^ic ^dnbe, the hands. .Noni.:Sie5)Zutter,tlie molherN. ^ie 5)lutter, the mothers Gen. Set mwtitx, of G. Der g}^utter, of Dat. ^er^U^uttcr, to D. 'Scn9)Zuttcrn, to Ace. 2)ie!0iutter,themotherA. l)'\i 5i)luttcr, the niolhers OBSERVATIONS. I. Monosyllables, endinjj in a consonant, should, ac- cording to rule, form the plural in f, but the following are excepted : ;^ic lixt, tlie kind ; bic ®al)n, the career : bic S5av, a bi-.y; bic ^^irn, the pear; bic S5rut, the brood; bic S^ucl)!, an opening in the land, a bay; tie (k\)\XX, theeU'clion; bic Gut, thecnre; bic ^im, tl)e damsel ; bic ^oX)Xt, the conveyance; bie %l\XX, a field, a plain; bic SUltl), the flood; bie gorm, the form; bic gvad)t, the (rei^hl; bic ©Illtl), a vehement fire; bfc Sagb, the chace; bic Sajl, the burthen; bie Sift, the cninnng, deceit ; bIc 5}?arf, the boundary, and a spe.res of coin; bic ^Pid)t, the duty; bic^vad^t, the pomp; Sect. 3. Declension of Substantives. 1 29 t>k ^ofl, the post, post-office ; U^ £luaat, the torment ; tie (Scl)aar, the crowd, troop ; bic ©C^Iac^t, the battle ; t)ic ©C^rift, the writing; bie (5cl)U(t>, the debt; bic @pur, the trace, track ; bie c ; 511 (5l)rcn, in bonour of; l^on (Scttcn, on the part of; V>or greutCH, ^orjoy; ju ©djanten ^OJCVbcn, to fall into dishonour, or disgrace, to be disgracefully disappointed. That lermi^ nation may be said to supply the place of the article; which power it has in proper names, as will afterwards be shewn. It may be discerned in some compound words, where the article is suppressed on account of the composition, but would be used, if the composition were dissolved, and the components reduced to their simple state: for example, bcr ^^rewfd)anter, the destroyer of honour ; ba§ grcubewfejl, the jubilee ; bic ^6U^faI)rf, the descent into hell : instead of bcr iSd^UUbcr der @^rc, ba§ gcfl der gvcubc, bic gnljrt (511) ^/«* ^oUc,^ Thus, gvauewbilb, graum^immcr, SBUimrnjlaub, ci)xenxhi)x\Ci. 6. Some words, of the lirst declension, arc not used in the plural number. They are, for the most part, abstracted terms, and words of general import, or such, for which our ideas require no plural. This sub- ject will be more amply discussed, in the additionai remarks. Sect, 5. Declension of Substantives, 131 7. In some compounds, the substantives belonging to the first declension, admit tlie general cliaraclerislick of the genitive case, which is the letter s, (see p. 158, Ilh & p. 331.): ^or example, 2Crbeit9l)au§, from fete 2(vbeit, 2{c^t«erf(drun9, from bie 2Cd)t; ©eburt^tag, from bic ©cburt; ^ixlfsmittd, l)ulf*bet)iirftig, from bie ^ulfe; 2(u0(egim9*fun(l, from bie ^Cu^legung* SECOND DECLENSION, Comprehending all those nouns of the masculine and neuter genders, which end in el, em, en, er ; and those of the neuter gender, which end in e. EXAMPLES. Singular, Plural. Nom. ^ev »g>immc(, the N. 2)ie ^immel, the hea- heaven vens Gen. ^e6 ^immet6, of G. ^ev ^immel, of Dat. ^em ^immel, to D. S^en ^immeln, to Ace. ^cn «g>immel, the hea- A. 2)ie ^immel, the hea- ven, vens. Nom. Set SSufen, the bo- N. 2)ie SSufen, the bosoms som Gen. 5)cg SSufenS, of G. 2)er S5ufen, of Dat. 2)em SSufeit, to D. 2)cn SSufen, to Ace. 2)en SSufen, the bosomA» 2)ie SSufen, the bosoms. 132 On the Noun, Part I. Chap. It. Singular. Plural, Noni. 2)er 23ater, the fa- N. 2)ie SSdter, the fathers ther Gen. 2)e6 SSatcr^, of G. 2)er SSdtcr, of Dat. 2)cm SSater, to D. 2)en SSdtern, to Ace. 2)en Skater, llie father A. 2)ieSSdter, the fathers. Nom. 'S)a^ ©cbirge, the N. 2)ic ©ebirgc, the mouu- moutitaiii tains Gen. :5)e§ (Sebtrgeg, of G. 2)cr ©cbirgc, of Dat. ^em ©cbirgc, to D. 2)cn ©cbirgcn, to Ace. ^a§ ©ebirge, the A. 2)ic ©cbirgc, the ihouh- mountain tains. OBSERVATIONS. 1. Very few words remain with the ending fm; for instance, bcr 2Ctl)em, the breath ; t>er 23cfcm, the broom ; and in these, n is now frequently substituted for m. Though em should be retained, the dative plur. would be en, 2. To this declension may be added, nouns com- pounded with the verb fet)n : as, t)a6 SScWUftfcvn, con- sciousness; t)a§ SQ3o!)lfepn, tlie state of good health. Also neuters in a: as, ba§ ^lima,.the climate; ta^ er .^crl, gen. bc^ MtxU, dat. tern .f crl, ace. ten ^crl ; plur. nom. t)ie .^crl, gen. bcr ^txi, dat. ben .^erln, ace. bie .Kcrl. It has been con- traded from ^ercl ; for so it is, to this day, spoken in Low German ; and this accounts for its belonging to the second declension. 4. Tije following, in the plural number, change the vowels a, 0, U, into the diphthongs d, 6, U* (a J Some which end in el: ber 2£vfct, the apple ; ber ^ammcl, a castrated sheep ; ber vg)anbcl/ an affair, a concern ; bct 5[IZangc(, the deficiency ; bcr Sllantcl, the mantle ; bec iJlilbel, the navel ; bcr ©attcl, the saddle ; bcr ©c^nabet, the beak ; ber vBcQel, the bird, (b) Some which end iu<;»: ber gaben, the thread; bet ©rabcn, the ditch; ber ©arten, the garden ; ber Jpafzn, the haven, harbour; ber Saben, the shop (but when it means the ghutter of a window, the vowel is not altered), (c) Some which end in er: ber 2(c!er, a field, or an acre; ber jammer, the hammer ; ber ^ad^ter, the farmer, (though this word is also written, in the singular, ^dc^ter) ; ber ®d)tt)ager, the sister's husband, the brother-in-law ; ber SSater, the fa- ther; ber SStuber, the brother. These have in the plural, ©dttet, SSogel, ©drten, SStuber, &c. 5. All diminutives, belong to this declension. — f. Any substantive may be formed into a diminutive, by the I termination chen being added : for instance, ba§ SSatei* N 134 On the Noun. Part I. Chap. 2. ^cn, ba6 aSrubcrc^cn, from SSater, S5rubcr» The vow- els a, 0, U, and the diphthong au, are, generally, con- verted into d, 0, U, au, as appears from the examples, just mentioned. Thus t)a§ @o()nd)en, from @o{)n, the son ; ba^ SSaumd^cn, from ber S3aum, the tree. In the Upper German idiom, the syllable lein serves for the purpose of making diminutives : as, ba§ [O^dnnlein, from bcr Wlam, the man ; ba6 grdulcin, from bie grau, the woman ; ba^ S3uc^lein, from ba§ 23ud), the book. In the High German, chen predominates: yet lein is adopted, when the other appears too colloquial; for example, in poetry. It also remains in particular words : as, ba6 Srdulein, which is the title of a young lady of noble extraction ; t)a^ SJllltfjlctn, denoting a revengeful disposition ; t>a^ 25ud)lcin, a book of small compass. — When a word, ending in e, el, en, is to receive the dimi- nutive termination of lein, the letters e, en, and /, are commonly left out : as, ba§ ^ndblcin^ from bcr ^nabe, the boy ; bn§ ^lic^ilein, f;-om ber ^ud)cn, the cake ; ba§ (Sngclcin, from ber (in^d, the angel. If it be required to transform a word, ending in ch, or g, into a diminu- tive with chen, the syllable el must be inserted : as, baS 5Bud)eld)en, ba$ Slingeld^en, from ba§ S5ud), the book, ber SRing, the ring. This is done to prevent the con- currence of the same, or similar letters. On that ac- count, it is better to say ©eclclein, than ©eelletn, from bie ®ecte, the soul ; (S^ndUelein, than ©cbndUein, from bie ©d^nallc, the buckle; though, iu these instances, chen should be preferred, @eeld)ett, @d)ndUd)en.— All diminutives are of the neuter gender, as has been slated before. Their original signification is that of littleness, which is differently modified, assuming, in the object, sometimes the idea of prettiness, sometimes that of Sect, 3. Declension of Substantives. 13i smallness only, aud also, occasionally, that of ridicule and contempt ; and in the person speaking, or writing, frequently that of fondness, or flattery. 6. Some words of the second declension, take their plural number from the third : as, t)er S5aier, a Bava- rian ; bcr S^auer, the peasant ; ber ^antoffct, the slip- per ; t>cr (Stad)el, the sting ; bcr S5cttcr, a male relation, a cousin ; t)a§ Tlu^t, the eye ; t)a§ (5nt>e, the end : pi. S3atern, S5auern, ^atttoffcln, ©tac^cln, SSettern, ^Cugcn, (5nt)Cn» It would be no great offence against the lan- guage, if they were altogether, both in the singular and plural, consigned to the third declension. THIRD DECLENSION, Containing all the masculines, ending in e and st (of more than one syllable); some other words of the same gender, but different terminations ; and one neuter, ^a^ EXAMPLES. Singular. Plural. Norn. 2)cr ^mht, the boy N. ^ie .^ttabcn, the boys J Gen. ^c6 .Enabcn, of G. £)er ^ttaben, of ^ Dal. :^cm .^nakn, to D. ^cn .Knabcn, to Ace. ^cn^nabcn,theboy.A. :I)te ^naben, the boys. Norn. 3^cr ^crr, the lord, N. £)ie ^errn, the masters or master Gen, ^e§ ^crrn, of G. ^cr ^errn, of Dat. T)tm |)ctrn, to D. T)zn .g)errn, to Ace, :^cn»^errn,the master. A. X>ie ^errn, the masters, N 2 136 On the Noun. Part L Ck^p. 2. Singular, Plural. Nom. ^cr Snfantrijt, the N. £)ic Snfantriften, the fool soldier foot soldiers Ggi. ©e§ :5nfantriftcn, of G. ^cr i^nfantriftcn, of Dat. £)cm Snfantri jlen, to D. :^cn ^nfanfriffcn, to Ace. 2)en:3nfantrijten,the A. T)k ;Snfantrij!en, the foot soldier. foot soldiers. Nora. 2)a$ J&evj, the heart N. 2)ie ^crjctt, the hearts Geii. T)Z^ ^erjen, of G. ^cr |)er5en, of Dat. ^em ^erjcn, to D. X)cn ^erjen, to *Acc. £)a6 ^erj*, tlie heart. A. ^ic ^erjen, tlie hearts. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The genitive case singular is soii»etinies formed in ens. This may be done, when it is placed before the word, by which it is governed : as, t^C^ ^uabcnS SJdtcr, the boy's father, instead of t>cr SSatcr t>C§ .^uaben, the father of the boy ; fee6 ^nabcn§ Ijalbcn, on account of the boy, where the preposition t)alb6n stands after its case: and it should always be done, when the genitive is not indicated by llie article : as, ^crjcn^ ©Ute, good- ness of heart. But to admit that additional, s without 1^ peculiar motive, is inaccurate. In the following Words, however, it is authorized by the best granima- Tianst: t»er grietc, peace; ber gunfe, the spark; tcr • It is remarkable, that in all languages, which vary the terminations, in declension, the accusative case of the neu- ters is like the nominative. — X'a? i^erj is sometimes ex- pressed by ^erje, not only in provincial idiom, but also in writing, for instance, in poetry. The prevailing usage, to which we are compelled to submit, reject* the final #. t A^elung is one of them. Sect. 3. DectenstoH of Substantive f, 137 gugjla^fe, the footstep; ber ©ebanfe, ihetliought; ber ©laube, the faith, the belief; ber ^aufe, the crowd; ber ^arpfe, the carp ; ber %ime, the name ; ber (Bam^f the seed; ber @d)abe, the hurt, injury, damage; ber 3Bi({e, the will : of which the reason seems to be, that these words may likewise, in liie nominative case sin* gular, be expressed by grieben, gunfeit, gugjla^fen, ©ebanfen, ©lauben, «§aufen, ,^arpfen, 9iamen, ©amen, @d)aben, SGStEen, and referred to the second declension, in which s is the necessary characteristick of the geni- tive*. But notwithstanding this circumstance, the $ is, in those words, frequently omitted. — The letter f, after r, is usually left out; as, be6 ^erm, for »§erren; be6 SSarbarn, for aSarbaren* 2. It has been stated, that the masculines, ending in e and st, fall under this declension, if they be of more than one syllable. Therefore, monosyllables, as ber %i)ZZ, the lea ; ber ^Wif, discord, are not of that description. Yet ber Q.l)Xi\t, the christian, and ber glirj!, the prince, are included : but these may, originally, have been (5|^ri|!e, Surjle ; and thus have lain within the rule, ^tx @ee, the lake, is in the singular of the fourth, and in the plural of the third declension. 3. To the third declension belong the following words : ber 2(b\?0Cat, the advocate ; ber 2£rd)itect, the architect ; ber 35arbar, the barbarian ; ber S3aftliff, the basilisk ; ber S5dr, the bear; ber ;S5et), a Turkish governour; ber ♦ One of these words, ber '>&cbaben, sometimes bears another mark of the second declension, namely, that it is, in the plural, expressed by !5c()^bcn. Thus it is used by Wieland, Agathon, Vol. 11, p. 259, Leipzig, 1794, 8vo. That change, of a into d, belongs decidedly to the second declension, and not to the third. N 3 13« ^niheNotm. t^art t. Chap.2 S3runn, the well, (also S5vunnen, after the second); bet 5Buci^|l(ib, the ktter, or cliaracler, of the alphabet ; t»er ^abett, a cadet, young soldier ; ber Srtmcrab, the com- rade; bcr ^antibat, the candidate; ber ^atl)0(i!, the Roman calholick ; bcr (If)rif!, the christian ; ber (SUettt, the client; ber Sorrefponbent, the correspondent; ber Accent the teacher; bcr i^UCat, a species of coin; ber (5lep()ant, the elephant; ber Sel§, the rock, (also bcr gelfen, second declension) ; ber %hx% the prince (before uientioned) ; ber ®e(f , a ridiculous man ; ber ®enog, the associate, partner; ber®cfeU, the associate, journeyman ; ber ®raf, the count ; ber J^ageflolj, a bachelor, an un- married man; ber^alunf, the scoundrel; ber ^ciburf, a sort of footman ; ber ^etb, ttie hero ; ber •^crr, the lord, or master ; ber ^irt, the herdsman ; ber ^ufrtr, the hussar ; ber Sanitfc^ar, the janizary ; ber 5n[ag, the inmate ; ber SJ^cnfc^, man, a human being ; (ba6 SJ^cnfdj, an abject female, is of the fourth) ; ber 5[J?0^r, the moor, or negro ; ber ?|}^onard), the monarch ; ber ^OXX, the fool ; ber £)d)6, the ox ; ber ^arugrapl), the para- graph ; ber ^atriard), the patriarch ; bcr ^riem, the awl, (also ber ^friemen, second) ; ber ^l)ilofopi), the phi- losopher; ber ^oet, the poet; ber ^otentat, the |)oten- tale ; ber ^rdfibent, the president ; ber ^rdlat, the pre- late ; ber ^rinj, the prince ; ber ^falm, the psalm ; bcr ©d^enf, the cup-bearer, butler, publican, (aUo alter the fourth); ber ©cl^mcrj, the pain, (more commonly after the fourth); ber ©c!^6p^, the dunce, (also after the fourth); ber ©Olbat, the soldier; ber ©tubctlt, the stu- dent ; ber ©Upcrintcnbent, a superintendent, or superior clergyman ; bcr ^t)Or, a silly person ; bcr S^ro^f, a sim- pleton, (lo be distinguished from bcr 3^ropf, of the fonrih declension, which siguifies a drop); ber /^i)ratltl, the Sect, 'S. Declension of Substantives. isg tyrant; ber SSorfa{)r, the ancestor ; t)cr ^ad, any Ihing pointed, and projecting. Add some derivatives, ending in tf ;as, bcr^Cbamit, a descendant of Adam; ber^efiut, a Jesuite ; ber «^ufftt, &c. Also the u^)peljalives of some nations ; such as bcr Talmud, ber ^ofadP, ber ^roal. ber mcilahax, bcr Xli)ian, &c*. 4. Of some words the nominative singular is not suf- ficiently fixed to determine liie declension, to which they are to belong : for, according to the ending of that case, the declension must vary. If, for example, you say, ber SSrunnen, the well, this word comes under the second declension ; if ber SSninn, it is to be referred to the third. Thus ber Saumen, the thumb, second decl. ber ^aum, third; bcr gelfen, the rock, second, ber gel§, third. 5. The third declension lends the plural number to • Many of the words, above enumerated, would bear an «, at the end, without shocking the ear, and are even heard so, in provincial dialects : such as, 29drc, 29runne, 2?UC^s Hahi, (iamerabe, (Sanbibate, i^aii^oliU, Ducm, Qkp^antc, ©encffe, (Sefette, ^atuttfe, .^eibucfe, f)irtc, Snfaffe, 5)?o= nar*e, 9?arre, Dcbfc, potentate, ^]3rafibentc. (Scbcnfe, ©or* bate, ©tubente, ^acti: thus ^ibamite, ^ff^iite; and far- ther ^fllmucf e, ^ofacfc, Create, Ubtvinc. With the e, at the end, they would, at once, fall under tlie rule of tiiisdcclen- sion : and it is scarcely to be doubted that such, at first, was their cbaracteristick. But the rougher idiom of the Up- per German, as it prevailed, took away this sofietiing vowel. Had that been left, the rule of this declension would have been so absolutely established, that there almost would not have been an exception. It simply would have lieeo this : " To the third declension belong all the masculines ending in e, of two, or more, syllables. For even the words now ending in st, would have had the e: and bil? ^frj would have been bfl$ -Ocrje. From this it will appear, how truly the principle of this declension has been ascertained, in our system. 1 40 [1 39] On the Noun. Part /. Chap. 2. some nouns of the second, which iiave been before mentioned ; and hkewise to some of the fourth, of which see below. 6. One masculine in e docs not follow this, but the second declension, namely, tcr ^dfc, liie cheese, gen. t>e§ ^dfe§, cStc. Plur. t>ic ^dfe, dat. ben ^dfcn, &c. But it may be observed, that the word is also written ^d§, in whirh shape it would belong to the fourth de- clension, wilhouf, any where, occasioning an exception. There is likewise a word in st, which deserts this declen- sion, and follows the fourth, viz. bcr^allafl, the palace ; gen. t)c§^aUajIe6, pi. bie^aUdjle, &c. 7. The final e of the nom. case sing, is now and then omitted,- in words of this declension, where it ought to be put ; and poets sometimes use the liberty of cutting off the termination en, in other cases: as, bCHt v!^clt>, bemgclg, ben gurji, for bem v?)elben, gelfcn, gurjlcn*— But this is rather to be pardoned, than to be imitated. FOURTH DECLENSION, Comprehending all those masculines, and neuters, which are not included in the two foregoing declensions. EXAMPLES. Singular. Plural, in e. Nom. Der 3:ifd). the table N. Die S£ifct)C, the tables Gen. 2)c§ 3:ifd)e§, of G. ^tx Zi\i% of Dat. 2)em 3:ifcl}e, lo D. Den a:ifcl}en, to Ace. 2)cn 3:ifd?, the table. A. 2)ic SlifdjC, the tables. Sect, 3. Declension of Substantives. [140] 14i Singular. Plural iu er. Nom. £)a6 SSucl), the book N. ^le S3ud)er, the books Gen. £>c§ 33ui)e§, of G. i::et IBud^er, of Dat. ^em Sucl)e, to D. Dm ^udbcrn, to Ace. 2)a§ ^'^ucl;, tiiebook.A. Die ^UCl)CV, the books. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The genitive case singular is sometinics made, by adding merely 5, instead of es, to the nominative; and in the dative, the terniinalion e is omitted, as t)e§ :©ud)^, bem S3ud)* These abridf^meats, however, are not to be approved, unless when founded ypon some reason. The metre of a verse, or the rhythtn of an oratorical sen- tence, may, for example, justify ihenj. In some in- stances, the aj>()lication of this license would be intole- rable, as in ©efefe^, for ©efe^eg ; ^(al^^, for ^i)Ial5e§ ; Sifd)6, for 5lifcpc§.— Of ®ott, God, denoting the Su- preme Being, the jjenitive is liardly ever found otherwise, than ©otteS, and the dative @ott : but wlien it signifies a heathen deity, or an idol, it may be ®ott§, in the geni- tive, and Orotic, in ihe dative. Words ending in ar and or, and some in urn, are generally nsed without the f: as, teriJlac^|>ar, the neighbour, gen. t»c§ 3flad)bar§,. dat. bem 3^?ad)bar ; ber ^ajlor, the priest, gen. t>e§ ^ajlor^, dat. bem ^ajlor; bev ^rautigam, the bridegroom, gen. bc§ Svdutigame, dat. bem SSvautigam ; bcr C^)et)ovfam, obedience, gen. bc6 ©c^cvfam^, dat. bcm ®eI)orfam* 2. The following is a list of those nouns, which form their plural in er. (a.) Of the masculine gender : bCt (gott, a god, a heathen idol ; @ei(l, |)Unbofott, ^n^ thxm, geib, ^mn, $Ranb, $Kcid)t!)um, fBormutib/ ^a\K U2 [141] On the Noun. Part 1. Ckap.2, {b.) Of the neuter gender : ba6 %a^, (plur. 2(cfcr), %U Uxti)um, 2Cmt, 2ru9cnliet), 33at, S3ilb, S3i§tt}um, S3latt, ©ret, 2$ucl), 2)a*, :I)orf, erjbigt{)um, dx), gad?, gag, gelb, gurltcntljum, ©elb, ©emad), ©emutt), ©efpcnjl, ©efc^led)t, ©kS, ®(icb, ®rab, ®ra6, ®ut, ^aupt, ^au^, ^crjogtijum, ^0(5, ^ofpttal, ^ul)n, ^alb, ^inb, J^lcib, tout, ^amm, iii)t, Sicb, god?, SJ^aul, bag 5[)?cnfd), (a bad woman), g^lcjl, ^fanb, 9lab, SUcgtmcnt, ba§ @(^ilb, (llie sign of an inn), ©d^log, ©ci^WCtt, (Spi= tol, Zi)ai, S5olf , 2Bamm§, SBcib* 3>a§ ma% ilie aci of taking food, the meal, and its compound, ba§ ®aftma{)f, the banquet; likewise bae?i}ial)(, llie mark, sign, with the compounds, £)enfma^l, ®rabma()(, 9)?crfmal)l, have the plural commonly in er, but also in e. ^er (Straud), and t)(l^ ©cbct, are sometimes used with the plur. in er, as @trdud)er, ©ebcter ; but this is improper. 3. All those, which have er in the plural, change the vowels a, C, U, and the diphthong an, in the same num- ber, into d, 6, u, an: as, ^am\, pi. ?[J?dnner : Sod?, pi. 1^6d)er; *Bucb, pi. Sud^er; ^aiu5, pi. vg)dufcr» And of those in e, the following transform them : (a.) Mas- culines: bcr ^(al, pi. Me; ber 2(bt, pi. bie HihU; ber mbrucF, pi. bie 2(bbrucfc; ber ?ntar, pi. bie 2(ltarc ; moreover, ^Cnfancj, ^(ntrag, 7(r5t, 2(fl, ^fuftrag, ^Cug^^ brucf, TCu^cjang, SBad?, S3a(g, SSall, 25anb, (the volume of a book); S5art, S3ag, ©and), S3aitm, S3rfd)9f, a3locF, 5Bocf, S5ranb, SSraud), S5rud}, Siifd), danal, pl.^andre ; (Sapellan, pi. GaveUdnc, (Sarbinal, pi. ^arbindle; (Saflel:* Ian, pi. (Sajlelldne; Gi;oral, Damm,' 2)amv>f, ^axm, T)ich\la\)\, T)m^, ^inbrucf, (Sinflug, einc^ang, ©imvurf, gaU, gifcal, glol?, glud?, glug, glug, grofd?, gud)^, gunb, gug, ©ang, ©ajl, ®aul, ©ebraud}, ©crud?, ®es» fanoi, ©runb, ©up, ^al?n, .f)al^, ^of, ^ut, ^al?n, Sect.S. Declension of Substantives. [142] 143 (a boai), ^am^f, ^arj!, Manf, Mau^, Man^, ^log, Mloi^, ^nopff ^od), ^opf, ^orb, ^rampf, ^ranj, ^ropf, ^rug, ^ug, Sa^, gauf, 5}?av!t, nax\d), W^xmn, pi. 2}?cu-=: fd)dUe; 93loraj!, pi. ^ordjle; 5kd;fd)u^, 3^apf, ^alkfl, pl.^aUa)!e; ^apfl, ^aflor, pi. ^ajlore, ^ag, ^flocf, ?)flu9, ^la^, ^oca(, pi. locate; ^ropt^, ^uff, manft, fRanf, ^a% Siaum, 9laufd), «Rocf, 9lumpf, (Saal, pi. ©ale ; (Sacf, (gaft, ©arg, @a(5/ ©auui, @d)ad)t, (Sd)aft, (5d)alF, @d)all, (B(i)ai^, (Bdjaim, ©c^laf (the temple of the head), (Sc^dng, @d?lauc^, ©c^Uinb, @d)lug, ©c^mauS, @d)oog, pl. (Sd)6f e ; ®d)opf, ©d)ranF, (Sd)ur§, (Sd)itp, ®d)wamm, (S(i^tt?nn, (Si^wan!, (Sd}it>ans, @d)«)arm, ©(^mung, (3c^tt)ur, (Se(bf!fd)ug, t)r, the car, pl. bie Dl)ren; ber-SlueU, the source, pl. bie £luellen ; ber ©i^merj, 144 [143] On the Noun. Part I. Chap. 2. the pail), pi. bic (2c^)mcr5en ; bcr cr, parts of dress, such as neckcloths; Sect. 3. Declension 6f Substantives. [144] 145 ta^ SBoi't, the word, pi. feie SBorte, words in general, in Latin verba, dicta, Fr. paroles— "Oit SOSortCV, words of l!ie vocabulary, Latin vocabula, dictiones, Fr. mots, 6. In tl)is, as in the other declensions, some words are to be met with, that are only used in one number, either singular, or plural : of which an account will be given in the additional remarks. ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON THE SUBSTANTIVES. L Most of the nouns substantive have both numbers, the singular as well as the plural. But there are some, which from the nature of their signification, or from the peculiar usage of the German tongue, occur only in one number. Few of them want the singular, the greater portion is deficient in the plural. Those which have no plural, are partly such as are deprived of it, both in English and German, and partly such as are without it, in German alone. A. Those which take the plural number neither in the English, nor in the German language, are : 1. The names of cerlaiu material substances, and some, other words of a particular description. For ex- ample; t)a§ ®olt), gold; (gilbev, silver; (gifcn, iron; ^upfer, copper ; 3inn, tin ; S3let), lead ; t)a6 ^Ifenbeitt, ivory ; bie ^rbe, earth ; ber S£()on, the clay ; bcr (^tauh^ dust; baS .§olj, wood; ba§ Sleifc^, flesh; t>cr @))e(l, bacon ; ba^ ©c^malj, lard ; ber ^alg, tallow ; bag SUiarf, tlie marrow ; ba§ ^i'i)l, meal, flour; ba§ ^a^, malt; t>a^ ©etreibe, corn; bic ^Butter, butter; bie 50lilc(?, milk; ba6 |)Omg, honey ; ba6 2Bad^6, wax; ber ©pcU: c^et, spittle ; bcr W\t, dung ; ber Slug, soot ; ber SJoj!, rust.; be« iSc^amm, mire; bcr ®(^immct, mould; ber o 146 [145] On the Noun. Part I. Chap. 2. @(!^mu^, dirt ; ber >Scl}nec, the snow ; bcr 9lcgcn, the Kaiu ; bcr ^^agcl, hail. — Of some the plural may be used technically, to denote the species : as, bie (^rbctl, ©Ubev, ^Upfet, ^\X\m,^kX)t, ^oljcr, &c. the earths, silvers, coppers, tins, leads, woods, i. e. the species, or kinds, of earth, silver, copper, tin, lead, wood. 2. General and abstract terms, such as : bev diui)m, the glory ; ber SfJaub, pillage ; bic f&illU, booty ; bcr ^Obcl, the populace ; ba6 SSict), the cattle ; ber ^U^, dress, tinery ; bie SSemunft, human reason; bcrSOSiUe, the will; bie ©tarfe, strength; bie v^ifee, heat; Ui SBdrme, warmth ; bie Malk, the cold ; ber @eI)orfam, obedience ; bie ©etvalt, force, violence ; bic ^hi)t, trouble ; ber ©citj, avarice ; bcr ^'^cib, envy ; ber ©tolj, pride ; bcr ^0&)m\Xtl), haughtiness ; bie Zxmuti), po- verty ; i)k S«senb, youth; ba§ 2(ltcr, old age; ber ^unger, hunger ; ber T>UX\t, thirst ; ber (Sdjlaf, sleep ; ba§ ©lucf, luck, happiness; bcrSom, anger; bcr^ifcr, zeal; bte^ile, haste; ber gtcig, industry. B, Such as admit the plural in English, but not in German. 1. The following words : ber 9lat]^, the council, also counsel, advice ; bcr ^anf, thanks ; ber SScrftanb, the understanding ; ber iioI)n, the reward ; ber Summer, sorrow ; ber i^ammer, affliction, nusery ; ber 5Q^unb, the mouth ; ber ©anb, the sand ; bie ©Uttjl, the favour ; bic Ciebc, the love ; bie Surd}t, the fear ; ba6 Sob, the praise ; ber Wloxt), the murder ; ber XaM, reprehen- sion, blame; ber S^^''^^^^/ ^^^^ constraint; ba6 Scbcn, the life; ber 3^ob, death ; ba6 UngU'lcf, the misfortune; ber i(iX\f, the quarrel; ber ©trcit, the contest; bie 2(11= funft, the arrival ; bic ^Ixx^t, the flight, escape ; ber 2(nfatt9; the beginning; ba6 Snbe, the end, or con- Sect. S.. Declension of Substantives [146] 147 elusion ; hit ©mipfang, the receipt, the act of receiving ; »)cr llnterrid}t, instruction ; ba^ ®emurmcl, the mur- muring; betUrlaub, leave, permission ; ter ©CttUp, the enjoyment. — If tlie plural he required, it must be supplied by a synonymous word. For instance, bet fRati), the advice, counsel, pi. bie Slatfjfc^tdge, from ber Olat^fd^lag, the advice; ber 9lat]^, the council, pi. bie Sftatl)gt)erfnmmtun9cn, from btc Sftat()S^erfammUtn3, the meeting, or assembly, of a council ; bcr Txinf, pi. bic ^^anffngungen, from bic^anffagung; bcrg;oi)n, reward, pl.SSeloftnungcn, from bic 25elo{)mmg, the reward; ber ?OiUnb, the mouth, if the organ of speech be meant, pi. bie ^nn^tn, the tongues, from bie ^UW^t ; if the instru- ment of eating, bic SO^duler, from ba6 ^aul, the mouth ; ba§Sob, praise, pl.bic8obe§crt)eblin(jen, the praises, from t>k £obe§er{)ebun9, or bic Sobreben, from bic Sobrebe ; berS^ob, death, pi. btc !£obc§fdlIe, deaths, from bcr^o^ beSfali, the event of death, or bic S^obc^artCtt, from biC 3^0bcgart, the manner of dying, the kind of death; bcr 3anf, quarrel, pi. bic SdnfcrcvcH, from Sdnfcrct), the quarrel; bcr^tveit, the contention, pi. bic^trcitigfci* ten, from bie (Streitigf cit, the contest ; ba^ UnojiM, the misfortmie, pi. btc Ungliicf6fdlle, from bcr UnglucfSfall ; ber Unterridjt, instruction, pi. bie Untcrweifungett, from bic Untcrtreifung, the instruction, or bic S5elel)ntn9en, from bic ^et€l}run9, the information ; ber Urlaub, permission, pi. bie Svlaubniffc, from bic (Srlavtbnig, the permission. 2. Some names of plants : as, bcr ^0^1, the cabbage ; bcr »g>afer, the oats; bcr ^o^)fen, hops ; "oa^ ©c^ilf, the reed ; bic ^rcffc, cresses. Some are likewise unusual in English ; viz. ber ^(ec, clover ; bcr ^noblauc^^, the O 2 148 [147] On the Nimn. Part J. Chap, 2' garlick; bcr ^Spargel, asparagus; ter Jlac^^, the flax; bev ^anf, hemp ; t)ie ©cr|!e, the barley ; t)ev SGSci^cn, the wheat. When the plural is to be expressed, some adjunct must be made use of, such as bic %xt, the kind ; bic Wanjc, the plant: for example, jnjcp ^pi^no^n ^M, two cabbages ; btc ^of)(arten, the kinds of cab- bage ; bie^lcepflani^en, plants of clover ; bie ^Iccartcn, or 3CrtCtt ^lee, different kinds of clover. When the name of the plant ends in a simple e, and the adjunct is to follow it, the letter nis generally inserted : as, ®cr:? 3. Words implying quantity, weight, or measure, are seldom used in the plural, although numerals, exceeding oney should be put before them. Of this kind are £)ev OTct; the acre ; for example, 5cl;u HdiX Sanb, ten acres of lan s^aupt, the head ; t)icr»§aupt9?inblMeI), four heads of cattle. ^ie (in some provinces, baS) ^laft^r, the fathom ; ncuu ^Uftcr, nine fathoms. Sect 3. Declension «f Subaktntives, [148] U<) ^a§ ^aU, as in ein ^a% oHce ; 5Wep 5}la|)(, twice ; tret) ^aM, tliree times; \)ier ?iJ?a{)(, four limes; fe*§ ^aM, s,ix times. 2)er ?0^ann, as bie (iompagnie if! l^unbcrt 5Dknn flat?, the cotupany is a hundred men stronjj. ^ic ^axh Jii*- "»»>*'*• a weight; as, jet)n SD^atf @olb, ten natksnf I'oM. ^a§ ^aar, the pair ; bre\) ^aax @d)ul)e, three pair of slice <; fed)§ ?)aar (Strumpfe, six i)air of stocking*. Note, gin ^aar, also signifies a few; cin^aarSagt/ ^Xj a few (lays. "^ £>a§^funb, the pound ; tJicr-^funO ^Udtx, four pounds of sugiir. ^a0 © i)Ocf, a nun^ber of sixty ; jwct) ©d)0(f 2(ei>fc{, sifx sc(»re of apples. ^er @tein, the stone ; ^jiergcl^n ^teitt fc^wer, fourteen stone ueiv'ht, ^S @t''tf, tlie piece ; jtebett (Btixd 3^ud?, seven pieces of cloth. 2)a§ 3l>li/ '^^ '"**** ' f^'^f 3oll brcit, five inches broad. A tew words are exreptid from this rule, such as bie dUe, or @f)lc, an ell ; bic SOJcile, the mile ; bie Xttl^t, the ounce; and some others, which must be learnt by experience. It is to be observed, that the substanlives^ whiclj follow those nouns of measure, or qnantity, are not declined, unless either a pronoun, or an adjective, be joint d with them. When accompanied by pronouns, they s«and \i\ Ihf genitive cas'^, or the dative with the preposition ton, of; fed)S 9)[unb btcfc^ SucferS, onwn biefem ^vi^tt^ ii\ pounds <»t this sugar ; \)ier gag iene^ SfiSeinc^, or t)on ienem SBScinc, four casks of that wine : when by adjectives, they remain in the nominative, if jl no other word be in the sentence to govern them ; or if ^ o3 130 [I4p] On the Noun. Part I. Chap. *2. there be, for initance, a verb, or a preposition, Ihey are pul in the cases, required by either ; as, fchicfen fie mir t>ret) Du^enb gutcia SBetn, unb fcd)§ 9)funt fcincn 3udtV, »ei'erglora, of Gen. 2)ererifcn,Frederica, 1 T i On (he Noun. Pari J. Chap. 2. Noni. (2app()0, Supplio Gen. eap^l^o'6, of Dat. (Sappi)0'n, to Ace. (gnpp^o'n, Sa])pho. Iii'?tead of the simple*, in llie genitive case, es, or fns^ must be added in words that end in s, ss, sch, x, z, tz: as, 'm\)i\u^, ^en.^\)liu^t^, or 5[}?\)liujTcn§ ; gucl)g, grifd>, gen. gud)fen^, grifc^eng, in which two last exan)ples, ens may be thought preferable lo es, because a distinction is thus made between gucl)fe§, the gen. of bcr gucb§, tlic fox, and that proper name ; and likewise between fnfd)CS, the neuter of the adjective frifd), and the proper name. ilRaj:, gen 5!)to§, or ^^axcng ; ©djulj ^en. ©c^uI^cS, or ©d)u(5en§ ; gran^, gen. granje^, or Sranjcng ; 9Ko:= ril^, gen. Wtoxit^t^, or 5[J^ori^en§4 The addition of s alone would here create an offensive harshness. The characteristick letters ns, or ens, of the genitive case, «re always appropriated to female names, ending in e ; as, grieterife, gen. gneberifenS : and very often lo those, which end in a; as, glora, gen. glorcnS ; Suropa, gen. ©liropcn6» Nor are Ihev uncommon in male names ending ii) e, or a consonant, ixcept / and r. For exam- ple: ^m\t, yen. |)ct?ncn6; ^ant, gen. .Kantcii^; 3Bolf, gen. SBolfcng ; lln>ugh it is more consistent withmodern usage, in these names, to omit the n, or «i, before the s. Names ending in ag, es, os, us, do not well bear the usual terminations, of the genitive, in e$, or ens ; for the sound, which is thus produced, is uncouth, and painful to the ear. It is therefore avoided, when it conveniently can be done. Most names, of those endings, are from the Latin ; and not unfrequently, the Latin termination of the genitive is adopted : as, t)a§ ^eiben Qt)rifii, the Sect, 3. Declemi^n of Substantives. 15.5 sufferings of Christ ; fa^ Sebcn ^{kibiabi^, the life of Alcibiades ; where Christi and Alcibiadis are Ihc Lalin genitives, from ChHstus, Alcibiades, instead of the Ger- man e^rl|TujTe§, 2£lcibiabcffcg, or (5^rij!ufen§, Zkihia^ tefcnS* Another method of superseding the awkward sound of the latter, is not to give any distinctive termina- tion to the genitive at all ; and to say, (S{)rijlu§ 2;ciben/ 2Clcibiat»eS M^cn ; or ba6Seibenef)rif!u6, ba§ Scbcn 2(1=^ cibiabe^ ; yet the last is more unusual : for the penitivc, void of any other mark of discrimination, may, in a manner, be distinguished, by being placed before the noun, that governs it ; but not so well, when it stands after. Sometimes the preposition t)Ott, of, may be of service, though it is not always apj)licable ; and occa- sionally an irregular abbreviation is resorted to, as %6:)C^ loen§, from 2Ccpcloiif, which should be 2(d)e(ou|ycn6« But the most obvious, and best mode, is the use of the article. As there are two ways of declining proper names, it may be asked, when, and how, each of them is to be em- ployed. The first mode, with the article, answers almost every purpose, except when the genitive case is to precede the word, by which it is governed. The variable termina- tions ought then to be used : as, ^oimx*^ ^ii(X^, the Iliad of Homer; ^ix^xH 2£enci§, Virgil's ^neid ; not bcS SO0\mt S^ia^f ^^^ SSirgil 2Ceneig» Htre, if the article were prefixed, the termination g could not be dispensed with, and the article would be a superfluous addition, — After a demonstrative pronoun, the genitive of male names alwavs takes the s, when that case is put before the word, on which it depends: as, bicfe§ Siccro'6 'Sd)nften, the wrili>»gs of this Cicero; fene^ ^irgiB 15G On the Noun. Part I. Chap, 2. ©ebid)te/ iHe poems of that Virgil. — The endings wand en, ill ll»e dative ami accusative, occur more frequently in III*' language of common life, than in accurate com- position : and the article seems now to be generally pre- ferred. Yt't there may be circumstances, in which tlie use of those terminations must be allowed. In some provinces, thry are even added l«» the dative and accu- sative rases of conmion appellatives, supplying the place of the aiticle: as, fagC e§ SSatcm, tell the father, dat. for bem SSatcr ; rufe S5rut)ern, ^IntUxn, call the bro- ther, the mother, for ben a5ruber, bic 5l}iuttcr* This, however, is a barhari>m. — Sometimes, the dative and ac- cusative are not discnminated from the nominative, ei- ther by the article, or the termination: as, ^d) l)Cib^ e§ @cl)Iec^cl gcfagt, 1 told Schlegel, for bcm (Sd)lc9Cl, or ®^legeln;. Ijahcn fte Cicero gclcfen, have you read Cicero ; l)ahm fie ^Ht 9efet)en, have you seen Pitt, for ben Cicero, or (Sicero.n, and ben ^Mtt, or ^itfem / But this deviation from the rule can hardly be justified ; though it must be acknowledged, that it is, by no means, unusu.ll, especially after prepositions, and after transitive verbs. Wiien a substantive, whether a title or other ap- pellative, with the article, stands before a proper name, the latter remains undeclined : as, t>e6 ^i)ilofopt)Cn ilant, of the philosopher Kant : be§ i^id^tevo SSilV^er, of the poet Burger; be^ ^aifer^ Sofept?, of the Emperour Jo- seph. But, if the substantive is not attended with an article, the proper name must be varied in its termina- tion, at least in the genitive case; as, .^^nig gnberid/f> @icge, King Frederick's victories; . J^cmi 2cifev'6 @d)rlf=: ten, Mr. Lei^er's writings. In the first example it is to be remarked, Ihaf, grammatically, ^onig ought to be ^^nige^/ or ^oniC|§ ; but as the pro|>cr name, belong- Sect, 3. Declension of Substantives, 157 ingto this appellative, has the same characteristick end- ing, it is omitled in the latter, to spare the reiteration of the hissing sound. It is not necessary to vary the proper name, when tjje preceding title, or appellative, is in the dalive, or accusative : as, er 'i)at C§ bent ^erm fK\ii)Ux er§df)lt, he lias told it to Mr. R. ; roix {)aben t)tn . 2)OCtor vg)erfc^e(- (^efe{)en, we have seen Dr. H.— When two or more names stand in apposition, the last only requires the characteristick ending of the oblique case: for example, @manuel ^aut'^ SBetfc, the works of Ema- nuel Kant ; ^oI)ann (§eorg ^einrid) geber'^ (Sc^riftcn, the writinos of John George Henry Feder. When the surname is preceded by the term t)on, which implies no- bility, the last Christian name takes the termination : as, bcr 91ame ^arl gricberid)'6 t?on 5Ban(^ctiI)cim, the name of Charles Frederick of Wangenheim ; ba§ 2Cnbetlf CU $Bill}ehn ©ottfrieb'^ x)on Seibnil^, tiie memory of Wil- liam Godfrey de Leibnitz. A common substantive, being in apposition to a proper name, must be put in the same case : as, ba6 Mtn (^axV^ be§ JWOlftcrt,- MotlXp ge§ oon @d)n)ebcn, the life of Charles the twelfth, king of Sweden. The names of countries, and places, admit the s in the genitive, but not n in the other cases ; as ^eutfd^*: lanb'^ btui)cnber 3uftanb, the flourishing state of Ger- many. The dative and accusative are, therefore, like the nominative. Sometimes the dative may end in e, when the word is referred to the fourth declension : as, in bem t)olfreiiten £)eutfc^lanbc, in the populous couh- try of Germany. The article never can be prefixed to such names, unless an adjective, or participle, intervenes, as in the last example. The genitive is sometimes re- p J 58 On the Noun. Parti, Chap, 2. presented by the preposition \)on* : as,t)ic ^onigc t)On dnglant), the kings of England. A male name may be converted into a female, by the addition of the syllable innf : as, |)CVne ; t)ie ^cpuinn, Heyne's wife, or daughter. Yet this is not a very ele- gant manner of conveying the idea, and is generally ex- changed for some other mode of expression. We have hitherto spoken of the singular number of proper names ; if a plural be wanted, it may, perhaps, in general, be recommended to form it, according to ihe gender and termination of the word, after one of the four declensions : namely, in feminines, after the first ; in masculines, ending in el, en, er, after the second ; in those in c and ^f (of more than one syllable), after the tkird^; and in the rest, after the fourth. But it is not to be denied, that frequently an uncoulhncss would be thus produced ; as, for example, if you were to say bic SSaconc, bie ^ricfllcpc, the Bacons, the Prieslleys. In such instances, it is belter to have recourse to the letter s, as the index of the plural, though it is not a genuine German termination for that number. It has been once before called in aid, when we were speaking of cer- tain nouns substantive, endhig in a, in the second de- clension|. Let us farther observe, that the plurals to be formed after the third declension, may be objected to for this reason, that the termination en is liable to be mis- taken for the female ending, sometimes used instead of inn: as, bic S^l^eop^raftcn, for 3^()eopf)raj!inn, Uje * See p. 370. f This is, in tn, Mrs. or Mi t See p. 133. Obs. 2. f This is, in some provinces, turned into en, as biC ^Cp< nen, Mrs. or Miss, Heyne. Secl.S, Declension of Substantives. [158] 155) wife or daugliler of Theophraslus ; tie ^epneu, for t^epninn, the wife; or daughter, of Heyne. I have, therefore, suggested, in another place*, the expediency of referring the woro()inin9cnt)cr :^eutfd^er SScrfe, a series of liarmonious Gcnuati verses; Ucbcifctjungcn alter ©ties: cl)ifd}er unb iJateini fd)cr (5d}riftftel(cr, translations of an- cient Greek and Latin anthors: in wliicli, if en he sub- stitnted for er, in 3)eutfd}cn, @ricdnfc!^en, £atcinifd}en, the harmony of the sentence is diminished. The er should not be unnecessarily removed, as is sometimes done : '^ad) S3et>d guten ^{nkitung, after the good pre- cepts of Beda; mit beinc^ S>ater§ Quti^en drlaubnig, with your father's kind permission; um 2rmalie'n§ fd)6^ nen ©Cflalt roiUen, for the sake of Amelia's beautiful countenance; 2(lce|!'§ vfcifcn (Srmal)nurtn cingcbenf, mindful of Alcest's wise admonition: where it should be, guter, gutiger, fd)6ncr, \rcifcu— The termination en be- longs to the third and fourth forms, so that, when it is any where else adopted, an intermixture of the forms may be said to take place. It is not unusual to see it en»j)Ioye(l in the vocative case : as, Ucben Seute, good people, for liebe gcutc*» 2. It is doubtful, whether after the following plurals : aUe, all ; ^rcnige, few ; met)revc, many, several ; etlidje, some ; einiQC, some ; mauiye, several ; fold)C, such ; fcls Incje, such— the adjecti\es ought to be plated in the se- cond, or in the subseqwent forms. And it is to be re- marked, that, in the nominative and accusative cases, the second form 15 generally used, after cilti^C, CtHd}e, IMClc, wenige, manege, me^ircre ; and after alle, fclbicjc, fold)e, it mai/ be usedf: but in the genitive and dative, the ter- ♦ For this practice Wieland, and other pod authorities, may be quoted. The irregularity would be done away by understanding a personal pronoun, before the vocative: as, 3tJrliebcnl?eutf. t Wieland forms all the cases of the plural in en, after afft?. Sect, 4. Declension of Adjectives. [1 64] l6'5 minalion ew, of the other forms, should always be pre- ferred. Examples : Plural Norn. ^inigegUte SeutC, some good people. CieiK Siniger giticn Scute, of some Dat. ^inigen guten Scute, to some Ace. ^inige giite Scute, some good people. Nom. 2{Ke gute ?!}^enfc^en, all good men. Gen. TClter guten 5Q^enfc^en, of all Dat. 2£(len guten 9}Zenfc^en, to all Ace. 2nie gute 3J?cnfcl)ett, all good men. 3. Words that are not declined, such as adverbs, some adjectives, and most of ll>e cardinal numbers, have no influence upon the adjective. When, therefore, after such vv«»rds, it is followed by a substantive, it will appear in the second form. Fortxample: sing. masc. fel^rgU=: ter 2SSein, very good win*- ; pi. fel)r gute SSlZX[\&)ZX[, very good men : sing. fem. etiX)a^ falte 5}^ild), some cold milk; sing, iieut. mel WCiffe^JBrot, a great deal of, (or jiiurli), white bread ; rDCttig ^CkXlz^ SSiCf, a SHia!! qaaii- tity of, (or little), strong beer. Plural, with numerals: jwanjig tapfcre SJ^anner, twenty brave men ; je^n fci)6ne grauen, ten handsome women ; t»ier f(eine ,Kint)er, four little children. Sing, and pi. 2(llcr(et).bunte6 papier, all kinds of variegated paper ; altcrlct; fc^Otte ©acbeu, all sorts of fine things. The same with allerljant), all kinds ; man^erlep, several kinds. THIRD FORM. When the defiuite article, or a pronoun demonstrative, relative, interrogative, or the adjectives jet>er, iebwct'ev^ icg(ict>er, manci)er, go before. 166 [i63] On the Noun. Part 1. Chap. 2, It is thus delined : 1. With the definite Article. Singular. Nom. £>er gutc, tie gutc, ba§ gutc* Geft. X)c§ Qutcn, t>ei' gutcn, bc§ gutctt* Dal. X^em gutcH/ bcr gutcn, i>cm gutcn^ Ace. ^cngutcn, We gutc, bag Qute* Plural Noni. :£)ic guten* Gen. 2!^cr guten* Dat. 2)en guten^ Ace. ©ie gutcn* Examples : noni, t»er QUtc ^axv^, the good man ; t>lc ^Wti grau, the good woman ; ba6 QUtC ^inb, the good child ; gen. t)e§ Quten SKanne^, ber gutcn grau, bcS guten ^inbe§, &c. . . ~ 2. With a pronoun Demonstrative. Singular. Nom. 3)iefct gate, bicfc gute, biefee gitte* Gen. ^icfeS gutcn, biefer gutcn, bicfcS guten* Dal. £){efcmguten, biefer gutcn, biefemgutcn* Ace. X)iefen gutcn, bicfc gute, bicfeS ^xiU* Plural. Nom. ^iefe gutcn. Gen. liefer gutcn. Dat. :£)icfcn gutcm Ace. I^icfc gutcn* Examples : Dicfcr gute (Sol)n, this good son ; bicfe gutc S^odjter, this good daughter; bicfcS gutc ^nb, this good child, &c« Sect. 3. Declension of Adjectives. 167 3. With a Pronoun Relative, or Interrogative. Singular. Nora. SBclc^icr gutc, n?eld)c ^uU, wcldjc^ ^ntu Geu. S5Scld)c§ guten, \relcl)cr guten, tt>cld)c§ gutem Dat. 2Betd}cm gutcn, wclc^cr gutcn, iveld)em guten. Ace. 2Bckl)en guten, \T?eld)c gute, wddjt^ cjufc* Noni. 2BeId)e gutcn* Gen. SBelc^cr gutcn* Dat. 2Bc(c^cn guteh* Ace. 2Bcld)c gutcn* Examples : SBctc^cr gutc 9)?ann, which gooel man ; WCld^C gutc grau, wliich <:ood woman; n)cld}c§ gute ^inb, which good child, &c.— 2Bc(d)Cr, hke ivhich, in English, is used both in a relative, and interrogative signification. 4. With the Adjectives jcber, jcbiVCbcr, icgUc^cr, sig- nifying each, every. Singular. Noni. ^cbcr gutc, jcbc gutc, jcbco gutc* Gen. ;Scbc§ gutcn, jcbcr gutcn, icbc§ gutcn* Dat. :Sebcm gutcn, jeber gutcn, icbcm gutcn* AcG. Sebcn gutcn, jcbe gutc, icbc6 gutc* No Plural. Examples : ^tOtx gUtc ?D^ann, every good man ; jcbc gutc grau, icbc§ gutc .^inb, &c. In tlie same manner, jcbtt)cbcr, icbwcbe, icb\T?cbc§, and jcgUc^cv, icglid)c, jcg=: Ud^e6, every one; mandjcr, many a— (man, Nvoman, &c. l68 On the Noun. Part I. Chap. 2' OBSERVTAIONS. 1. The (lenionstralivc pronouns, as many as there are, (see the following chapter), govern the aHjeclive in this form. Of relatives and interrogalives lliere are none, which can he joined with an adjective, besides the' one mentioned . 2. Some participles, which are used m a demonstra- tive sense, seen) to liave the same power, before the ad- jective. Of this description arc: befagt, aforesaid; fol^enb, following; gcbad)t, aforementioned. For ex- ample: SSefdCjtcr alte ?0^ann, the said old man ; ^it)i\(i)ii tC§ neue »5au6, the new house mentioned; fol9ent>C!S fd)One SBcrf, the following beautiful work. Sing. nom. SSefagter alte SO^ann, the said old man ; gen. bcfagte^. altcn 5Ranne6, of the saidolH man; dat. bcfagtemalten 5)Zannc, to—; ace befagtcn altcn ^am, the said old man. Plural, nom. befacjte altcn 3}^dnncr, the said old men ; gen. bcfagtct altcn 9}?dnncr, of—; dat. bcfagtcit altcn 5)?dnncrn, to—; ace. bcfagte altcn 9}?dnncr, »l»e said old men. &c. FOURTH FORM. This form takes place after the indefinite article, after numerals, which are declined, after the negative adjec- tive fcitl, none; and after pronouns personal, and pos- sessive. The inflection is as follows : 1. fVith the Indefinite Article, and some Numaals. Singular. Nom. dm gutcr, cine gutc, cin c^utcei. Gen. (5inc6 QUtcn, cincr cjutcn, einc6 guten. Dat. Sinemc^utcn, cincr gutcn, cincm gutcn. Ace. ^incn gutcn, einc gutc, cin gutc^ Secit. 4<. Declension of Adjectives. ^^9 r Examples : din gutcr 9}^mn, a good man ; ctue gutC grau ; tin ^ntt^ ^int* Gen. @ine$ gufen SJlanneS, &c. There is no plural to the indefinite article. It serves also for the numeral one, and, as such, is declined in the same manner. Of the other numerals, J^rep/ two, and brep, three, are only declined, in the J;enilive and dative, when put before adjectives, in this manner : Plural. Norn. Gen. 3^^ci;er (brejjcr) guten, of two (three) good, for instance, people. Dat. 3^^ct)cn (brepcn) gutctt, to— Note. The word hziht, both, may be considered as a numeral : and the adjective, after it, be inflected accord- ing to the fourth form. 2. With the Negative fdtl, none, Norn, Mm guter, feine gutc, fein guteg^ Gen. ^cim§ gutett, fcmergutcn, fcine§ gutcn; Dat. ;^eincm guten, fctner guten, f einem gufett^ ' * Ace. \^etnen gutcn, feine gutc, f ein gute§» Plural. Norn, ^eineguteit* Gen. Reiner gutem Dat. ^einett gutem ' Ace. ^eine guten* Examples : jtein g^fe 3Jlann, no good man ; Feine Qute grau, fein gute6 ^inb, &c. ' '^^*' o 170 On the Noun. Part I. Chap. 2. 3. With a Personal Pronoun. Singular. Noin. 3c^ armcr, Sc^ armc, ^dj armc6» Gen. (not usual, in the personal pronouns). Dat. Wx nrmen, ^ix armen, ^ix armcm Ace. ^id) armen, 5[Ricl) arme, Ttidj armc§» Plural. ' Noni. 2Bir armen, Gen. (not used). Dat. Un§ armen* Ace. Un§ armem The same with the other personal pronouns, ^u, thou ; er, he ; fie, she. Examples : ^d) armer Wlann, I poor man ; 3d) arme grau, I poor woman ; ^d) arme^ ^inb, I poor child, &c. 4. With a Possessive Pronoun. Singular. Nom. SD^ein guter, meine gute, mcingutc^* Gen. ?li)lcineS guten, meinerguten, meine§ guten. Dat. 9}leincm gliten, meincrguten, meincm gutem Ace. 5Dleinen guten, meine quU, mein quU^^ Plural. Norn. Wttinc guten. Gen. 5D^einer gutem Dat. sjJleinen gutcm Ace. SO^eine Quten, Sect, i. Declension of Adjectives. 171 ' Tile same with the other possessives; as, beitt, thy; [ein, his, its ; i\)x, her ; uufer, our ; eucr, your ; ii)X, their. ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON THE ADJECTIVES. I. When the adjective, in tlie first form, ends in el or «*, the f, before / and r, is in the otlier forms, generally, thrown out, for instance : Sbel, noble, ^d.form, et»ter, cblc, eble§» Gen. ebleg, cbler, eble§/ &c. sd/orm, ber eblc, bieeble, baS eble» Gen. be§ eblen, bcr cblen, be§ eblen, &c. 4>thform, eiit cblcr, eine eble, ein cble^* Gen. eineS eblen, ciner eblcn, einc§ eblen, 5fc. In the same manner : '^auttt, pure, unmixed, 2d form, lautrer, lautre, lautre6» Cen. (autre§, lautrer, lautre^, &c. 5d form, ber (autre, bie kutre, t}a$ (autre, &:c. 4th form, ein (autrer, eine (autre, em(autre§* Frequently the e, which remains, is put before I and r, wheli the termination is in w: as, ebe(n, instead of eb*: len, (autern, instead of (autren* II. The terminations of some adjectives are not per- fectly ascertained, and settled, chiefly of those that end in ich, icht, ig ; which syllables are often promiscuously employed, in the same words : for example, blumig, b(u mid), blumicbt — though some grammarians maintain, that a distinction ought to be made between those syl- lables. Namely 1^, or ich, relates to the matter, or sub- stance, of which a thing consists, or is made ; and icht signifies similitude, or resemblance : as, b(umi9, or hh^ ^ 2 172 ' On the ISoun. Part 1. Chap. Z. mic^, flowery, full of flowers; blumtd)t,. flower-like, re- sembling flowers— Ihus, fupfctig, coppery, conlaining coppfer; fupfcrid)t, coppery, resembling copper, like copper. III. Some adjectives are neVer (declined, and others only, when an article, or pronoun, is before Iheni. Of the first description are, those ending in ley : as, cincrlcp, of one kind, or of the same kind ; ^wdcrlct), of two kinds ; breierlct), of three kinds ; tticmlet), of four kinds, &c. ; allerlet), of all kinds ; mand:)txkt), of several kinds, t)iclcrlcp, of many kinds— add to these, aUer!^ant>, of all kinds, of all sorts ; and the word einanber, one another, each other; ctwa6, something of, some. Examples: CtWaS §8icr, some beer; aUctlep SBcin, wine of various, or all, kinds ; atlert)anb <5ad)cn, things of all kinds ; mit dnanbcr, with dne another. Of the second class are, gan^, atl, whole ; (jail), half, Examples: without ah ar- ticle, or pronoun, ganj ^cutfdjlanb/ all Germany, 'or whole Germany ; l)alb graitfrctct), lialf France, that is, the half of France V with an article,' ot* pronoun, bcr ganje @tamm, the whoFc Iribe'l gen. t>cB Qanjcn oxf, my whole village ; t>ic !)ill^5Belt',' lialf the world. ' IV. The adjectives mcl, much, and WcniQ, 'liltl<^»*are frequently used'in the first or adverbial forn},^before substantives: 'as, V)iel 2Bein, much wine; wtWlQ 2Bcin, little wine • instead of mkx, WCniger, SOBcil% So in the other genders, vicl9J?ild), wenlQ 5[Jlild)/much milk, little milk; instead of mcle, wiwi^t; mel S3icr, trenig a3ier, much beer, little beer ; instead of t?iclc§, ivcnigc§. This does not correspond with the rule, yet it is juslified by usage. It is particularly common in v^etliQ, which is left in its adverbial state, though a preposition should go Sect, 4, Declension of Substantives, 173 before : as, mit WCnlg @clb, with little money. %\zl^ after a preposition, is jjeneraily declined, but not always : ^ii t)ic( 2(u9en bid? an^ufd^aun, with many eyes to be- hold thee; where mclcU ought to have been put, instead of V)tct*« When the definite article, or any pronoun, stands before these adjectives, they must be declined: as, t)i1§ t)ielc ®elb, the great quantity of money ; gen. be§melen®clbe6, &c. biefc6 V)iele ®elb, this great quantity of money ; mein ytele6 ®elb, my great quantity of money ; "t^a^ trenige^elb, the small quantity of money; jeneS vrenige ©elb, that small quantity of money ; bcin ruenige^ ®elb, thy small quantity of money, &c. Whenever any grammatical irregularity can be ob- viated, it should be done. Therefore, where these ad- jectives may be brought to comply with the general rules» it will be right to subject them to such laws. It is not wrong to say, njenigcS ®elb, t?iele§ ®elb, instead of tve:? nig, v>iel; mit tDemgem ©elbe, instead of mit wenig; and the former mode of expression should be preferred, upon the principle of granmiatical accuracy.— SBcnig/ with the indefinite article before it, is not declined, nor is the article, joined with it, inflected : as, ein wenig SBein, a little wine ; mit ciu wenig QBein, with a little wine ; um ein Wenig -Bein^ VO\\im, for the sake of a little wine. It has the declinable termination, atter that article, when it is used as a substantive : as, ein 2Benige§, a small quantity. — SSietand wcnig, sometimes govern the genitive case : as, SSiel SSolfe^, a great nmltitude of peo- ple ; incl S3iel)e§, a great number of cattle ; wenig SOBaf=i ♦ This is a quotation from Herder. ' «3 . 1717^ OfitheNom. Part I. Chap, i. fer§, a small quantity of water. This is rather an an- tiquated mode of speakinL^'; but it is not uncommon to use those words, after the ijenitive case, in the following, and similar phrases : (f § gtebt t>er gottlofcil gcute t?icl, there is a great mimher. of wicked people; cS fint) un^ fcr met, there are many of us ; cS ft'nb i()rcr trenig, there are few of Jlieni. The words, ber Qottlofen Seute, un^ fer, itjret, are genitive cases, governed by \?tel and rpeutg^ I In a questipn, t)tel and \rcni9 must naturally b^ placed Lcbefore the genitive : as, xvk \)ie( [tub i{)rcr, how many are there of Ihehi? vok tt)cnig fitlb it)rer ? how few are Uiere of Jhem?^ — What has been said of \){cl and wcnig, applies, in every particular, to their comparatives, mel^r, more, and tveniger, less. These! also stand adverbially, ( ; or in the first form, before substantives, and have ihe s same I latitudes, and the sairle limitation!;, as the former. 55?ci)r ®clb, more money, and trcnigcr ©clb, less money ; instead of tne!)re§, n)cnigcrc§. And like the others, they occasionally govern the genitive case: as, fold;>er ' Seute meJ)r, more such people ; unfcr ftnb me^r, tliere : are more of ns; ibrer ftnb ^rcniger, there, are fewer of them: wliere, foId}er geute, imfer, if)rer, are genitive , cayes. Vc; Common adiectives are sometimes u^cd in the first, when they should be in one of the other forms: for instance^ fd)6n SBctter, tine weather, instead of fc^6nc6 SPBctt^r; ein gro^ ©lucf, a great piece of luck, instead of eingvoge^ Qdlhd; cin rci^cnb SBcib, a charm- ing woman, instead of ein rcil?enbcC^ SlBcib ; cin ^ut ®la§ SScin, a good glass of win-, for cin Qutc^ QoUt^ SQJcjn* But this is fundamentally wrong, and must not be imitated. Neither the authority of individuals, Hor V custom, are sufficient to vindicate it. Sect. 4. Declension of Adjeeiives. ~175 VI. When two adjectives, of the same enduig, are be- fore one substantive, the lerminat'«)n of tlie first is some- times, for the sake of brevity, sup|>rei;s6'J : etu XOtl)^ Unb Wei^e^ ®efid)t, a red and white fare, for etn rot{)C§ unb tt)eige6 ; ^erfonen mann^ unb weibltcljen (l)efd)led^tc§, persons of the nraie and female sex, for mdnttliijen ; dtt geniig* unb arbeitfamer Wlzn\6:}, a contented, an-i inckis- trious man,. for genugfamct; blet)s: unb fupfer artigcS ^rj, or»' cojitaming lead and c pper, /"oxblcparttge^; Ctn grants unb forgenfvcic^ (^^mit^, a mind- frt-e from grief and sorro.v, tor gramftei^S* This abbrei)ialioij should not be unnecessarily adopted ; but in parljirular situa- tions, ii is convenient, and sounds well." It is also to be met with in nouns substantive, as ®enug=: unb Tivhtiti^ famfeit, contentment and industry, for ©cnugfamf eft ; and generally indicated by the sign of hyphen (s:). l The Spaniards use a similar mode of contraction. VII. Ail participles share in the nature of adjecliv.es. They are capable of the same niodifications, according to four forms, and subject to the Same laws. They will be treated ,of, in a subsequent part of lhi» Grammar. VIII. Adjectives may ' be converted into substantives. This is either done elliptically, or abstractedly. 1. EllipticaUi/, when a substantive is understood. Examples: ber T}Znt\d)C, (supply 5i)?ann) the Germain, native of Germany ; ber ®ele{)rtc, (supply SQlann) the learned man, the scholar; ber 2Beifc, (supply Mam)/ the wise man ; bcr SKeltVCetfe, the philosopher ;. ber Siebfte, or ber ©eliebte, (-^up. Ttmn), the beloved man^ the lover; (bcr i^iebfte also signifies the husband; bic ^iebfle, the wife); ber Dberfte, (sup. 50^ann), the man highest in command, the colonel; b^r ^efanbtc, (sup« 1 70 Ow the Noun. Part I. Chap. 2, Wl^nn), li»e man sent, the anibassadour ; t)cr S5ct*lentC, for S3et)icnenbc, (snp. 5[J?ann), the waiting man, llie jr.an servant; bev Sleifcnbe, (suj). 5n'?ann), the traveller; ber SScnvaubtc, (sup. 5DZami), tlie man related, the relation ; ber S3e!annte, (sup. ?[)^ann), the man, with whom we are acquainted, the arquainlance. ^ic Sd^OHC, (sup. %xa\X, or graucn6pcrf0ll), the fair lady, the fair one ; bic (^^C^ Uebtc, or Stebfte, (sup. grau, or grauen^pcvfon), the be- loved woman; bic SSefaunte, (sup. gnui, or graucn^s: perfon), the female acquaintance ; bie Sl^cnranbte, (sup. graueng^erfon), il>e female relation, ^a^ ©rope, (sup. SEBefen, being), that which is great; ba§ @cl}6ne, (sup. SQBefcn), that which is beautiful ; bag Srljabcue, that which is sublime ; ba§ (Sble, that which is noble. — These substantives, in their mode of declension, remain liable to the three last forms of adjectives ; namely, when no article is before them, they follow the second form : for example, in the plural, ©elcl^rte, gen. (5)etel)rter, dat, ®Clet)rtcn, ace. ®cle!()rt€« When the dtrfinile article, or a pronoun demonstrative, he. precedes, the third : as, sing.nom. ber S5ebicnte, the servant, gen. bc§ S5cbicntcn, dat. bcm S3ebicntm, ace ben 25cbicnten» Plur. nom. bic SSebicntcn, gen. ber S3ebicnten, a6 9Beif , the colour white ; ba6 9lunb, the quality of round, ro- tundity, or a round substance. They arise out of the first form, the article in the neuter gender being pre- fixed ; and are varied after the second, or fourth declen- sion of substantives: as, sing. nom. t)a6 23i(JU, gen. t)e§ 25tau§, dat. bcrn tbU\x, ace. ba§ SSlau, &c. SSic(c§, the neuter, in the second form of ^iel, much, is used as ^ a substantive, and signifies, a great deal. SStcUefen/ abcr Wid)t 3Stele§ (cfcn, to read a great deal («. e. to attend much to reading), but not to read a great quantity, or li'ariety. SECTION V. THE COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. Qualities assigned to persons, or things, may exist in them, in a certain gradation ; for which reason the adjectives, which are words, denoting qualities, are said to be capable of degrees of comparison. The comparison, in grammar, is generally effected by • Wielarid (Agathon, vol. i. p. 69), says incorrectly, felnc jSebiente, for, felne 25e5ienten. Herder errs in the same manner, saying, ii)ver i&dbotie, for ©C^cnctt. ^it^X* 2?(attcr^ vol. i. p. 122. 178 On the Noun. Part I. Chap. 2. two degrees, one of them, containing the idea more, and C2(\\ei\ the Comparative ; and the other, expressing the notion most, and denominated the Supm-lative. These degrees are in German, as in Enghsh, produced by the addition of certain letters, or syllables, to the ad* jectives; namely, the comparative by that of r, or er, and the superlative by that of «f, or est. ^ This is analogous to the English language, and will be easily understood by the reader. If, for instance, in English, the comparative degree of bold is to be formed, it will be done by adding er to it, bolder; and if the su- perlative is required, the addition of est will answer thai purpose, boldest. It would be the same in German. THE COMPAHATIVK DfiGllEE. Rule. Take the adjective in its first form (see Declen- sion of Adjectives), and add to itfr; or r only, when il ends in e: you will then have the comparative degree of the first form. Examples: ^d)bxi, handsome, compa* rative, fd)6ner, handsomer; engC/ narrow, comparative^ cngcr, narrower. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The vowels a, 0, U, are, in the comparative de- gree, changed into the diphthongs a^ 6/ U : as, axiWf poor, compar. drmer, poorer ; ^rof}, great, compar. gro* gcr, greater ; f urj, short, compar. f urjcr, shorter ; jung, young, compar. juuger, younger. 2CU/ remains unal- tered : as, xanl), compar. raul;cr^ The following words are hkewise exempt from the transmutation : a.) jQln^, bmt, fatjl, falfd?, fto^, gerat^e, gefd^lanf, glatt, t)ol;l, Seet. 5. Comparison of Adjectives. 179 U\)\, farg, fna))p, la{)m, tag, (we«ry), lo6; (loose), lofc, (wanion, frolicksome), matt, ittorfc^, nacft, platt, ^lum^, xq\), runb, fad}t, fanft, fatt, fd)laff, fd;lanf, j!arr, jlolj, jlraff, f!umpf, toll, ^OU* h.) Tliose wliich end in haft and «flrm : as, laf^erlfjaft, tu9enbl)aft, f urcl)tfam* c.) The participles; and such as are shaped like parliciples, though they cannot be deduced from existing verbs. Of this description are : abgefc^macft, beja^rt, befannt, bes: ta^i, beivanbett, bcwanbt, gewogen, t^erwegcn, t^erbammt, t)erbu()lt, ut^a^t, \)errud)t, tterfdjlagen, t)emant)t, t)oU=: fommen, n)o^lf)abent)* 2. Adjectives, which end in eZ, cast away the e before /, in the comparative degree : as, cbcl, noble, conipar. ebler, (for ebekr), more noble; bunfel, dark, conipar. buttflet, (for bunf eler), darker. A similar omission often takes place in those, ending in fw and er : as, trocfcit, dry, compar. ttocfncr, (for trO(f cncv), more dry ; offcH, open, conipar. ojfner, (for offener), more open; \)oUs fommen, perfect, compar. t>oEf ommncr, (for t>oUf omme- ner); bitter, bitter; compar. btttrer; tapfer, brave, corn- par, ta^frer* But in these, the elision of the e is not necessarily required, and need not be practised, except for some particular reason in composition. 3. The comparative degree is subject to the four forms of adjectives, a.) The first, or adverbial : as, »g)omcr tjl fd^oner aB SSirgil, Homer is more beautiful than Virgil ; bie ^&jvoz^ix tjl alter a{% ber SSruber, the sister is older than the brother ; ba§ ^itlb ijl wcifer al6 ber IBater, the child is more wise than the father. £)ie ^h^ mcr waren mdc^)tiget aB bie ®ried)en, the Romans were more powerful than the Grecians. In these examples, the comparative stauds in the first form, as being neither preceded by an article, nor followed by a substantive. 180 Onthe,Noun, Part I, Chap. 2. b.) Tlie, second foruij before a subslaiilive, without an ar- ticle, or pronoun, anlecedent. The terminatious er, e, eSy are added to the first form : as, sing. noni. fc^oncrcr^., fcl)onere, fd)oncre§ ; grof erer, gro^cre, grog erc§ ; geh. " ' ^rogereS, ^rogercr, grogereS ; dat. gro^crem, grog ercr, ^.' gro^ercm ; ace. cjrogeren, grb^rc, grogerce* Plur. nom. ' grogcrc, gen. grof ever, dat. grogcren, ace. groferc. Ex^. ' aniples : ^XK 2(rmutl) ju flevbcu { j! gvogcrcr ^ul)m (grofs' fcre^f)re— grogere^^liicf), alS rcid? unb laficr^aft ju Icben, io die in poverty is greater glory (greater honour — greater happiness) than to live rich and vicious, ^ic ^ngldnber ffnb gvog^rc geutc aU btc ^ranjofcn, the En-, " glish are taller people than Ihe Freacli. Here is the se-" cond form, because a substantive follows, c) The third form, with the definite article, or a pronoun demonstra- tive, or relative, preceding. In this manner ! sing. nom. t»cr fc^6nere, tie fc^onere, baSfc^oncre; gen. bcS fdjoncs: \ ren, ber fc^)6ncrert, be§ fd)6ncren ; dat. bem fd)oneren, " bcr fd^onercn,. bcm ■ fdjoncrcn ; accV ben fc^^ncrcn, bic fd^6ncrc, ba6 fd)6nere* Plur. nom. bic fd)6ncrcn, gen. '^ bcr fc^onercn, dat. bctt fd)6nercti, ace. bietd)6ncrcnV Ex- amples: ^cr gr6gcre?[Rann, thegreaierman ; bic gvo^crc^" grau, the greater woman ; ba§ grogcrc ^inb, the greater child. ^Icfcv fdjoncrc 9)?ann, bicfc fc^6ncrc grau, bics= fcS fc^Ortcrc ^inb, d.) The fbtirth form, with the inde- finite article, or a personal, and possessive, pronoun, going before : sing. nom. cin grogcrcv, clne grogcrc, ein grogctce ; gen. cincg gr6^cren, cincr grogcrcn, cinc6 grof:= fcrcit ; dat. binem grogcrcn, cincr gr6gercn, cittern gr6f:= fercn: ace. ctncn grogcrcn, cine grogcrc, cin gr6gcrc§. For example : ^§ ijl cin gr6gcrcr S^crlufl, cine6 grcunbee^ bcraubt ju werbcn, alS t)lelcr (^djal^c, it is a greater loss to ^be deprived of a friend, than of many treasures. Sect. 5. Comparison of Adjectives. ISl Thus in llie oilier genders: einc gropcve ^Cmutt)i3un9, a greater niortitication, fem.— eilt Cjro^cre^ Uuglud!, a grpater misfortune, neuter. 4. In the additional remarks on the adjectives, an er- rour has been noticed, which consists in using tlie first, or adverbial form, where a declinable form ought to be employed. The same inaccuracy is to be met with, in the comparative degree: for instance, fd)6ncr SBcttCt, instead of fd}6nerc§ SBettcr, finer weather ; cin Qtoger ©lucP, for tin 9ropere6 ®lucf, a greater piece of luck. That this is decidedly wrong, has been before observed. 5. Of those adjectives, which are irregular in their comparison, and those, which do not admit the termina- tions of the comparative degree, an account will be gives in the additional remarks. THE SUPERLATIVE DEGREE. Rule. Add »f, or est, to the first form of adjectives ; this raises them to the superlative degree : as, fd^OtT, fine, superb fc^onft, finest; Qtof, great, superb grofel?, greatest. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The vowels a, 0, U, are changed into the diph- thongs d, 6/ U, with the exceptions, adduced in the com- parative degree, Obs. 1 . 2. Tiie adjectives in f, b, ch,/, g-, /, m, », nd, r, form the superlative in st : as, gefd^winbc, sup. gcfc^winbejl ; Icife, sup. icifejt ; grob, sup. grobjl ; \)zxxl\^, sup. \)mf Ud^ft ; fd)arf, sup. fc^drfjl ; arg, sup. drgft ; jung, sup. iungf! ; fd)mal, sup. fc^mdljl ; furc^tfam, sup. furc^tfamjl; ^6)hn, sup. fd}5n|t; teifeenb, sup. teifeent)|!; l^eiter, sup» IS^ i^ th€ Norn, Part L Ch^p.i. f^citeicft. — Those which end in e, divest themseWes of this letter, after ft and g-: as, l)crbc, sup. l)crbjt; ertgc, sup. eng)!» 3. Those in aw, eu, ey; and in rf, h, k, ck,ff, 11, mm, ««, rr, pf, s or ss, sch, st, t, z, make the superlative de- gree in est. For example : blau, sup. btaucjl ; neu, sup. ttcucfl ; fret), sup. frepef! ; xviU>, sup. wilbe jl ; rof), sup. rol)ef!; fdblanf, sup. fd)ranfe|!; flarf, sup. (idrfeft; t)tcf, sup. tidfef!; fcl;(aff, sup. fc^laffej!; toll, sup. tolleft; Viimm, sup. t>ummcf! ; tunn, sup. tunncf! ; burr, sup. ))urrcft; j!um^f, sup. jlumpfcft; fug, sup. fugejl; grog, sup. grogefl; morfd), sup. morfd^eff ; fc)!, sup. fcjlejl; ]j)art, sup. l)drtcjl ; f urj, sup. furjcf!. But in these also, the e, before st, is frequently thrown out : as, t>cr bummjie, ber bimnjfe, tcr ftdrf)!c, bcr breitjtc. In par- ticiples it must be removed : as, bcr gebilbctfle §SJlenfd), the most civilized mati. 4. When ss precedes the termination of the superla- tive, est is sometimes changed into t. This is done in the word grog, great ; of which the superlative is ex- pressed by grogt, instead of grogefl; in the third form, fccr grogtc, the greatest, for grogef!e* The same con- traction may be observed in other adjectives, though not so commonly : as in fug, sup. third form, bcr fugtc, the sweetest, for fugejltc ; blag, sup. bcr blagte, the palest, for blaffcf!e ; but it is not to be commended. ;©er bcjlc, the best, which is now the established superlative of gut, good, (see Adelung's Orlhogr. p. 289), '^ contracted from bcffcjlc, begte* Tlie superlative of words ending in isch, is supposed to be rendered less disagreeable to the ear, hy substituting t for est ; as of lMC()ifcl}, beastly, sup. third form, bet mc^ifc^te, the most beastly, for bet t)lel^ifd)e)le ; of l)durlfd), clownish, ber bdurifc^te, for Jto^. S, Comparison of Adjectives. i^ baurifc^cfle; huhi\di), rascally, bcr biibtfd)tc* But even by sucli means, words of that description cannot b# marie tolerable ; and it is best, if possible, to supersede then I. 3. The superlative degree is, like the comparative, suscf ptible of the four forms of inflection ; though most frequently used in the third, with the definite article ; as, t>cr fcbonjle, the handsomest; t»er tteucftc, the newest; gen be§ fi)DnjIen, bc^ neuejlen ; dat. bcm fc^onflen, bem ncUCjlctt, &c. See the declension of adjectives. Next to the third, the first, or adverbial, form i» often em- ployed ; or to speak more properly, a subtitute for that form. This consists in the dative case singular, of the third form, with the word am prefixed: as, am fd^OHJleW/ am ncucjlen* The following phrases, it is finest y it ?> newest, would be expressed by, e6 ij! OXn fd^onjlctt, aW ncuejlcn* Ti»is circundocution is to be thus explained, %m, is put for, aXi t)Cm ; an being a preposition, which denotes on, nearest, or next to; and \)im, the dative of the definite article: consequently, avx f^OHJlcU literally signifif « nejit to that, which is finest ; and afterwards •imply marks the superlative degree, in its first form, without any collateral meaning. It will be useful to subjoin a few examples : 3Mefe6 Sraucnjimmcr ij! am fdj)6n)ten/ wcnn fie fid) nic^t fd)minft, this lady is hand^ somest, or most handsome, when she does not paint heX" self. ;3ener S^ebncr ifl immer am gro^ten, n)enn er fid^ m bie 8cibenfd)aften tX)enbct, that orator is always great- est, wlien he addresses the passions. €§ tvirb am beftctt fcpn, i)cutc 5u ^aufe p bleiben, it will be best t«) ^lay at home to-. lay. I^erientge Wlann ifl am iDeifeflen, wcls? d^er Cin ru^ige^ gcben fu()rt, that n»an is wisest, (»r the most wise, who leads a quiet life, ^icjeuige grau ij? MX K 2 1«4 On the Neun, Part L Chap, t, flugflcn, wclc^e il)r«n v^aiiS^alt o;ixt beforgt, Jbai woman i» most prudent, who takes good car^ of her donieslick concerns. DaSjcnigc ititib ij! am liebenSwurbicjften, WClcl^e^ fotgfam ijl, that child is most amiable, which is tractable and obedient, ^icjeitigcn Ccutc ftnb am Vcr^ nunftigjlen, weldje SSorurtf)eilcn am wcnigffcn untcr^ WOrfcn ftnb, those people are most reasonable, who are least subject to prejudices. The same ideas niight have been answered by the third form. Instead of, it will be best to stny at home, the turn might have been, it will be the best thing to stay at home : c6 Wirb ba§ be(!e fct)n, &c. For, that woman is most prudent, who. Sec, you might say, that woman is the most prudent, who, &c* ^ieieniQe grau ifl bie flugfte, weld^c, &c.— The prepo- sitions auf, upon, and ^u, to, are, for a similar purpose, connected with the superlative degree. They are then, like an, contracted with the article : auf ba$, into auf§ ; ^U bem, into 5Um« But their signification is not so ex- tensive, as that of an* They only describe the manner, in which a thing is done, or exists: for example, auf6 fd)6nfle eingcrid)! Ct, arranged in the finest manner ; auf§ t)Ollfommenf!c au69Cfuf)Xt, executed in the most perfect manner. 2Cuf governs the accusative, and the adjective, therefore, ends me, which is the termination of the neu- ter of that case, in the third form. 3ll »s joined with the dative: as, §um fd)6njlen, in the finest manner; jum \)OUf ommenflen, in the most perfect manner. The use of the two prepositions last mentioned, especially of 511^ is not so current, nor so classical, as that of the former.— The first, or adverbial, form of the superlative decree, in its original stale, perhaps only appears in the word aUerliebfl, most lovely of all : as, ba§ ifl aUcrlicbff, that fs most lovely. Rut even here it is not quite pure : the Sectr 5. Contpari99n •/ Adjectivn, 1 U word aller, disguises it nearly as much as am, ai\% o|r j^unu Siebj!, by itself, for ex. bu^ tjl licbj!, never occurs. If it be remarked, that the following, dll^erf!, f;0(^f!, ittngjl, Idngj!, meifl, C[€i)orfamjI/ gndtigf^, frcunblid)ft, t)erbinblid)|t, V)erbimt)enjl, and others, are superlatives of the first form ; it must be considered, that they are mere adverbs, ufien thus used, and have not the nature of ad- jectives They will be mentioned hi their proper place. — The second form of the superlative is chiefly to be seen in lite vocative case, which is like the nominative: as, sinir. liebttcr ^rubcr, dearest brother; tkui'jlf ©teeller, dearest sister ; fd>6nfle§ ^inb, most changing child ; piur. mrbigflc ^rcunbc, most worthy friends.— In the fdurtii form the superlative is to .be found, after the personal and possessive pronouns* : as, ^C^ drmjlet ?0?cnfci>, 1 poorest man ; bu t^eutjter JBtubcr, thou dear- est broher; bu licbjlc intnient.' In (German, some adv€!«b, such as fetJt/ very, nu^erff, ex- tr<;mely, ^Sc^jT; highly, .wwld ^e enipjoyc^cl. »3 1 »6 On the Novn. Part /. Chap, tl, an(^fl, eingcben?, fcinb, gar, gram, red)t, imred)t, tl)zii:s' tjaft* OlluTs refuse it partly. Of this kind are the participles* aixl a Ijeclivts eiuliiig in i;)a\t, ic^, ifd) : whicli only suffer Ihe comparaUve degree in the first form. It may be permitled Jo say, gel)artcter, ^t^thw^ betcr, in the first forni, more hardened, more grounded, froH) Ihe participles Qct^drtet, gcgrunbet: but the ear would be shocked at the sound of the following forms : 9el)artetcrer, 9et)drtctcre gc{}drtctcrc§; or, ber 9cl)drtetf terc, m gegrunbctcrcr, eiitc Qcgrunbetere, tin gcgrunbc^ tcre§* Thus in liie adjectives lebl)aft, 9ctriiTcnI)aft, Ids c^erlic^, locrdnbcrlid) bdurifc^, vcrfd)n?cnt)crifc^, and others, it is allowable to make n?e of the first form; Icb^after, gcnnfTen()aftcr, ldd)crltc^cr, vcrdnberlic^cr, hain: rifd)Cr, t)Crfc^n)cntcrifd)Cr, ; but the subsequent forms, tin {eb^aftcrer, bcr ldc^crlid)cre, &c. could not be endured. The superlative degree is not liable to the same objec- tion. It is not inconsistent with good language, to say, ter Ubl)aftc|!c, ber Idd^erlic^ifle, and even ber gcgrimbctflc, ter gcbdrtcfte : though the adjectives in isch, which are, of themselves, disharmonious, produce a sound still more unpleasant, when augmented by the hissing termi- nation of the superlative: as, ber bduerifcf)e(?C« II. When the degrees of coujparison are not expres- scd by the termination, certain adverbs are made use of to convey the notion : namely, me()r, more, for the com- parative; and am meijlcn, most, for the superlative. For example : feinb, inimical ; mc!)r fcinb, more inimi- r9\; am mciflcil fcinb, most hostile; tl)eiil)aft, par- taking; mt\)x tl)cllt)aft, am mciflcn tl)tili)aiU Those adverbs are sometimes put to adjectives, which are ca- pable of the comparative terminations, when, by this expedient, any harshness, or abruptness, of souud may Sect. 5. Comparison 0/ Adjectives, 1 87 be obviated. Thus in XCdjX, true, cnnip. tta{)rer, sup. tt>a()rejl ; where me^r roaijv, am meijlcn voaljv, may be used : as bicfco i|! ncd) mebr \x?a^r aB iene6, this is stiil niore true than that.— After the deduction of the few words, which have hem me/.tioned, all the exi^stinii ad- jectives form their devices of comparison by means of li»e termniatious: for whirli the a Iverbs mel)r, am mel^ jlcn, cannot he arbittarily substituted. However, when two chft'ereut ad Jt ctives are to be c«»nipan «l with one ano- ther, it must be done by mc^r: as, cr ijt me^V (ufllg al§ trauric^, lie is more merry thun sad ; ^CugUJlu^ )VaV mti)V glucflid) al^ tupfev, Au;;ustus was more b>c! nmrh, comp. mzf)x, sup. am mc()rj!cn, or am mciffctn— The comparative degree, mthv, when put in a declinable form, generally receives, besides the usual terminations, the Nyljable re before them. The second form of meftv should be, me()rcr, mtijxc, me()rc§, plur.mef)rc; but it i? commonly expre^st-tf bv, mc^rerer, mcftrerc, me(;i-crc*o, plur.mel)rcre: cin mc^vereg, for ein mcJ)re6» Thissenm to have arisen from a misconception of the declinable ending*; and niight be lai, which are, i^tX, am ei}eften, appear soiiKlimes in the silualion of a'ljtelives. — »^od)/ Ingh, makes tlu- com- parative 1C)l\)VC, exchanijin<.' the L'ultutal, in the niuhMe, forthesimph' aspirate; but th«' superlative, am b6cl)flen# On the other hand, woX)i, ti*ar, has in tlie coiDparative nai)er, and in the supf^rlatlve aitt ndcl)flcn, as^uminjr, \n the latter, the jjullural, insttad of the n>ere A. These, however, can |jare' interior; bcr obcre, the superi«)r ; bcr imtcre/ »he i)derior ; ^erVOTss t)erc, the anterior; t>cr i)intere, the posterior, They all take the superlative : as, tcr niittclfte, t>cr dugerfle, txt inner j!c, &c. SECTION YI. THE NUMERALS. They are divided into cardinal, and ordinal numbers, A. CARDlNAXi NUMBERS. 1. @iti, citie, fin : or, 4. 5?lcr. eincrv Cine, eine^. 5. ^Unf. a. Swfp. ri , . 6. €tcii». ;j. 2)rej». 7. (gtcben. S^t. 6. The Numerals » 18^ 8. ^*t. 9. 3feun. 11. @(f, or eilf. 12. 3tr5rf. 13. ^reijjefjen, orbrepjefin. 15. ^unfjc&n. 16. ©edj^e^n. ir. ©iebenje^tt; or fiebje^n. 18. WtK^"' 19. 9?eun5e&n. 20. Sw'Jtijig. 21. ©In unb jwanjtg, 22. 3we0 unb jwattjig. 23. "SJrei) unb jwanjift. 24. 2?ier unb jwanjig. 25. ^Unf unb ^wnnjig. 26. t t««^«'"f'- 1816. ^ct)tjeN Nnbert unbfeciJje^n. OBSERVATIONS. 1 . ^tn, cine/ Ctn, one, is declined like the indefinite article. It ii?, in fact, the same word, used with a dif- 1^ On the Noun, Part I. Chtp. t. ferent power. As h iiiin' ral, it is pronouiiCfd with a stronger arrenr : as, ein WlaWXl, due grau* When it stantr tint, tie etne, t>a^ tint, Ihe one. Gen. ^eS einen, bcr einen, be6 cinen, of Dat. ^em cinen, ber einen. bem einen, to Ace. £)en einen, bie eine, b«§eine, the one. The plural may be used for the purpose of distin- guishing certain classes of individual objects: as, the ones, and the others; that means, the one set, and the other. Nom. £)ie einen, the ones ; gen. ber einen; dat. ben einen ; ace bie einen* Pronouns are also prefixed : as, my owe, this one, which one. Tlien, tin, is considered as an adjective, and put in that form of declension, which is required by each respective pronoun. The German numeral never serves in a suppletive capacity, as the English one; a good one y this one, that one. Here the number is not meant, but one fills the place of the substantive, which is understood, since those words, a good, this, that, in English, cannot well stand absolute, without something following. This peculiarity is un- known to the German language : and the adjectives, as well ai the pronouns, are placed by themselves, without any such support. 2. 3n)et?, and brep, now and then indicate their geni- tive and dative, by additional terminations : gen. ^Weper, breper; dat. jnjepen, bm;em This is necessary, when those cases are not otherwise distinguished : as, bit ©tdrf e Jtreper 5D^dnner, the strength of two men ; bie Wia&ii breper ^onige, the power of three kings. Tu 192 On t/ie Noun. Part I, Chap. i. tliese examples, the genitive case could not be recognised, except l>v tlie endings of the numerals ; but if the ar- ticle, an adjective, or a pronoun were present, by whose endings tlie genilive might be known, it would be impro- per to vary the termination of the numeral: as, btc ^taxh bcr JWp 5!Jianner, the strength of the two men ; bie 5[}^ad)t bicfer brep ^onige, the power of these three kings ; bic Xuut 5n)c\; aufric^tiger S^^cunbe, the faith of two sincere friends. Here the genitive case is determined by the article, the pronoun, and the adjective; the nu- merals, therefore, need not be inflected. The declinnbic ending of the dative is not required, before substantives : for that case is always sufliiciently expressed by the latter. But when the numeral is not followed by a substantive, the termination should be added, as a sign of the dative : for instance, ^d) \)aht C§ 5WCt;etl gcgcbcn, I have given it to two ; id) t)(iht C§ brcpcn mitSCt{)cllt, I have communi- cated it to three. Likewise after prepositions, mit JtVCVCU, with two; t)on bvcVCU, from three. The other numerals all admit the termination of the dative, in the same cir- cumstances : as, Sd) t)abc C§ mxm gcgcbcn, l have given it to four ; id) Ijaht C^ fimfen QCfagt, I have told it to live ; id) l)abc C§ ^iranjigen mit9etl)cilt, I have comnmnicated it to twenty, &c. And with prepositions : for example, auf alien vicrcn, upon all fours; itiit fed^fcn, with six; t>on ad)tcn, of eight, &c. Those which end in en, do not receive the additional termination ; as, ftcbcn, 5Cl)Cn, brc\>s 5Ct)Cn, &c. The termination of the genitive is only pe- culiar to ytttX), and brct) ; and cannot be assumed by any of the rest. Its office must be supplied by a preposition, such as \3on, or some other mode of expression, when the case is not of itst-lf discernible. —In l)unbcrt, and tuufmb, the dative is not to be signified by the addition of en^ Sect, 6, The Numerals. ](j3 lS)Utfbtrttn, taufenben: for thi« wonid make the numb«r plural, and denote hundreds, and thousands. Recourte may, upon this occasion, perhaps, be had lo the indefinite article, as in English : for instance, ^^ \)aht C§ einem JS)Unbert Qegeben, I have given it to a hundred; \ii) ^aU e§ einem taufcnt) mit^tt^tilt, I have communicated it to a thousand ; though, after all, this would not he so pro- per, nor so truly German, as to add some substantive, for the sake of distinguishing the case : as, ^fd) l)abc C6 l)Unt»ert geilten gefagt, I have told it to a hundred peo- ple ; icJ) ()abe e6 taufcnb geuten Qt^tUn, I have given it to a thousand people. — In compound numbers, the ter- mination en is not added : as, t)or taufetib ftebcn f)Unt)ert Unb ncun unb neunjtg, before the year 1799' 3. It is a property of the language of Upper Ger* many, to assign three genders to the second numeral, namely jWCen (or jwccne), for the masculine ; jttJO, for the feminine ; and jwet), for the neuter. But in High German, no distinction of gender is admitted, in the car- dinal numbers, except in One. 4. In speaking substantively of the cardinal numbers, for instance, as the figures in cards, they are made to be of the feminine gender, the word bic 3^W/ *he number, being, probably, understood : cine @tn, or (5in6, a one ; eine S^ei;, a two, a figure two ; eine X)ret), eine SSier ; and they end, in the plural, in en, according to the first declension of substantives : as, jwet) (Einen, two ones ; jtDet) SSieren, two fours, two figures of four ; brei) @ed)s: fen, three sixes ; \>kx S^leunen, four nines ; allc 2Cd)ten, all the eights. 5. *g)unbert and taufenb, are used as substantives, with the neuter article: as, X)a^ ^unbert, the hundred; ba§ SSaufenb, the thousand. In English, the numbers, 194 On the Noun. Part I. Chap. 2. Hundreds and Thousand, when placed before any sub- stantive, have, generally, the indefinite article prefixed : as, a hundred pounds, a thousand dollars. In German, that article is not admitted: but you say, ()unt)ett 5)fmib, taufcnb X^aUx, 6. The reader will, of his own accord, have taken no- tice of the mode of forming the decimal numbers, so that it will not be necessary to detain him by any farther remarks. B. ORDINAL NUMBERS. These are declined like adjectives, and may be put in the four forms. The most usual manner of representing them is in the third, with the definite article. The first. Sd. 3d. 4th. 5th. 6th. Tth. 8th. 9th. 10th. 11th. nth. 18th. 14th, 15th. 16th. 2)er er(!e. Ser jwepte. 2)et britte. 2)erolerte. 2)etfUnfte. 2)er fecjjjle. 2)er fietente, orfieiite. 2)er aci^te. ^er neunte. 2)cr3f^nte. 2)erdfte,or tllftt ^erjw^lfte. 2)er brepjc^nte. 2)cr oiergetinte. 2)er funfiebnte. 2)er fe(|>3e[)nte. Theirth. 2)er fiebenje^nte, or fiebje^nte. 18th. 2)er adJtjefnttf. 19th. Det neunje^nte. 20th. 25et gwanjlfiffe. 21st. 2)er ein unb jn^ati: 22d. 2)er3tt)epunbjwanii 2Sd. Serbreuuttb iwan* 24th. Der Pier unb itvan* 25th. 2)erfUnfMnb3wan« 2«th. 2>erfect)^unb3Jran« Sect. 6, The Numerali. 195 The2rth. 2)er fieben unb 28th. 2)eracJ}tun&3wan» 29th. 2)eif neun un5 30th. 2)er breifllfiile. 31st. 2)et eiit unb breif 32d.. 2)er3wepunbbi'eif» fidf^e, &c. 40th. 2)er oierjigile. 41st, 2)er eitt unb uier* jigtle,; &c. 50th. 25er funfjifijle. 60th. 25er fec^3i9f!e. 70th. Det* fiebenjt^ile; or |?e&3i9|!e. The 80th. 2)er adjtjisj^e. 90th. 2)ev neunjigiUe. 100th. 2)er^unbert|!e. loist. 2)er dunbett unb I02d. 2)er Nnbert unb awepte. 103d. 2)er dunben wn^ britte, &c. 200th. SJer Bwep ^Mm bettffe. sooth. Der b«p (>un» bett|?e. 1000th. 2)er taufenbf?e. The one thousand seven hun- dred and ninety-ninth, 2)er taufenb fieben dunbcrt unb neun unb neunjigfff. OBSERVATIONS. i. In the formation of the ordinals, the first and third numbers are irregular ; but the rest follow a certain rule : viz. the termination te is added to the cardinals, from two to nineteen, inclusive ; and ste, from twenty to the last. 2. The ordinals may be brought under all the forms of adjectives. The first, or adverbial, however, is not usual. For these numbers resemble the superlative de- gree, in their nature, and do not allow thai form. The idea, which, according to the English, should be ex- pressed in the first, may, in general, be supplied by the third form ; by saying, for example, he is the second, the third, the fourth, instead of, he is second, third, fourth, s 2 1SK5 On Ihe Noun. Part /. Chap, 2, The second form would be: (grjier, crj!e, erftc§; jwet)* ter, jweptc, 5tt)et)te§* gen. erflcg, cifcr, er(!cS; jwc^s? tcS, JWCptcr, 5tt)cptc^, &c. Examples: dx^ct %b\&}mtt, 5n)Ct)tC ©eitc, bnttc§ MapiUl, first section, second page, third chapter.— Fourth form: gin JtDcpter, ei'ne JWCpte, cin 5«>ct)tc§; cinbrittcr, cinctdttc, cinbrittcS* gen. eineS jwe^ten, ciner ^njeptcn, eincg 5wct>tcn, &e. In the same manner, after personal and possessive pronouns : as, ^d) brittcr Dfftcicr, I third officer ; mcitt "omtcx Stre» tl^um, my fourth errour ; itnfcr funftc§ @k§, our fifth glass; it)rc fec!^f!e S5outcille, their sixth bottle. The third form, of course, follows after demonstrative, rela^ live, and interrogative pronouns. 3. In compound nambers, the last only assumts the shape of an ordinal ; the foregoing remain cardinals : as, berfec^6 unb ncunjigfle, the ninety sixth ; t>crtaufcnl> ffcben {)unt)ert unb fcc^§ unb ac^tjigjlc, the one thousan4 seven hundred and eighty-sixth. 4. ^cr anbcre is used as synonymous with bcr JtVCt)te* The adjective anbet/ corresponds both to the Latin a/tN«, other, and to alter: and in the latter sense, it serves for the second ordinal number. ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON THE NUMERALt. Besides the two divisions, into cardinals and ordinals, the numbers suffer a variety of modifications, which it will be proper to notic«, at the conclusion of this section. I. Partitive numerals, which arc in Latin expressed by, bint, terni, quaterni, guini, dent, &n\ aud in Eng- lisli bv, two and two, three and three, or, two at a Him, three at a time, four at a time, &c. or, everi^ two, ewery three, evert/ four, every five, &c. The Germans, like the Sect. 6. The Numerals. I9)' English, avail themselves, for this purpose, of the con- junction unb, and: as, jwet) unt» ^wep, brcp uttb bret) ; or they say, je ^mx), jebret), ic mer, ie5e{)en, je jmn^tgr jc breifftg, it tjierjig, jc funftig, &c. Se is an adverb signifvin^r evef\ and here denotes at a time. II. Distinctives. These are, in English, firstly , se- condly, thirdly , fourthly y fifthly ; or, in the first place, in the second place, in the third place, &c. In German : dx^Mj, or erftcn^ ; jweptenS, britten^, \?icvtcn$, funfs^ tcn^, fec^f!cn§, ftcbentcn^, or ficbtcng; ac^)ten§, neun=: tcn§, §e{)nten§, elftena, ^wolftenS, brepje^ntcne, swanjig^s fien§, &c. Also thus: 3um erjTen, §um jwcpten, (or jum anbern), jum britten, jum t){crten, ^um funftcn, &c. Those in ens are the genitive cases of the ordi- nals, third form ; «, at the end, being added, instead of the article, be§ erftett, be0 5n)ct)tett, be§ britten, &c. And some substantive may be understood, after it : as, bc§ erjlen Drte6, or crjlen Drte§ ; ^n^epten ^rte^, &c, in the first place, «S:c. The genitive case is occasionally found, in German, where a preposition ought to be supplied. The other mode is with the dative, and the preposition JU, before it : §um, for ju t)tm* Here likewise a sub- stantive may be inserted, III. Dimidiatives, or numbers that halve. They are composed of the ordinals, and the word \)alh, half. Their signification is extraordinary : for example, brlt* k\)Cdh, literally, the third (number) half, of bcr brittc and t)alb, means two and a half, two whole ones, and the third half ; mertel)alb, of ber t)(erte and {)alb, three and a half, or three whole ones, and the fourth half*. It • Something analogous to this exists in the Greek lan- guage. S3 Ip8 On the Noun, Part J. Chap, 2. is not usual to say jn)C^tcf)alb, but ant)crt()alb, which is one and a half, or one whole, and Ihe second half. Therefore, the way of proceeding wilh these numerals, is this: ant>crtf)alb i^, britte^alb 2|, t?iertc()alb 3^, ftijtftc()alb 4|, fcd)j!c^alb 5|, ftebente^db, or ftcbtcl^alb 6h ad)tel)atb7|, ncunte^alb 8|, 5el)ntef)arb 9|, clftcl)alb, or cilftet)alb io|, 5n)6lftel)alb ii|, brepjc^ntc^alb 12^, 5tt)an5igj!ct)alb \^l, ein unb ^wanjigfteljalb 20|, &c. For example: anbcrtl^db 50^ona%, one month and a half; bnttc()alb SQJoc^en, two weeks and a half; DicrtCs: %0Xh Sat)rc, three years and a half; fcd)j!c^alb ©uiueCH, five «j;uinea>i and a half. They are not declined, though they may, perhaps, sometimes admit the termination en, in the dative, when they are put ab<;oh)teIy. In anberts: |)alb, which comes from bet anbcrc, I lie e, in the middle, is supplanted by a t, of which the reason seems to he, Ihat it may he assimilated to the other numbers, which all contain a t. IV. Variativegf which denote a variety, according to numbtr. They are made, hy adding eriey to the cardi- nals: as, jmcperlct)/ of two kintis; brcpcrtcp, of three kinds; mercrlcV), of four kinds; fiinfcrlet), of five kinds; fccl}fcrlep, of six kinds; ftcbcncrlct), of seven .kinds; JWanjigerlc^, of twenty kinds, &c. For example : ^re^erle^ SBcin, wine of three different sorts : JWCpcr^ tc^ ^DhinjC, coin of two different sorts ; fcd^fctlet) ^an^ tcr, ribbons of six different kinds. In the same man- ner are used: allerlct), of all kinds ; ciucrlet), of the same kind; manc^crlct), of several kinds; viclerlcp, of many kinds. — The variatives are not declined. V. Certain adjectives are formed out of numerals: for example, (Jinfac^, simple, uncompounded ; jWCpfad), two-fold; brepfoc^, threefold; \}icrfad), funffad), fcd}6=^ Sect. 6. The Numerals. ig^ fad), 5e{)nfad), &g. Of nearly the same significalion are those endinj; in /«/% : as, 3vt)Ct)fd(ti9, brcpfdltig, \)ier:5 fdUig, &c.— but einfdUig, denotes simple, artless, silly. Similar compositions arise from the cardinal numbers, and substantives : as, 5n)Ct)^funt)ig, of two pounds ; brep^fimbig, of three pounds; mer unb jwanjigpfunbig, of twenty-four pomids; from JWCp, brep, l^icr unb JWatts: jig, and ba§ ^funb, the pound, ^repccf ig, of three cor- ners, or angles, threecornercd, triangular ; merccfig, of four aniiles, square; fimfecfig, of five corntrs, from brct), t)tcr/ fl nf, and bie ^cfe, the corner. Tht-se, and others of the like description, are inflected, according to the four forms of adjeclives. VI. The fractional numbers, with the exception of |)a(b, half, are derivexd) meincr, have mercy upon me. The genitive of the plural is put after numerals, and after the words mel and mcnig* : for example, unfec gWOlf/ twelve of us; it)XiX JWaujig, twenty of them; unfer Wentg, few of us ; if>rcrmcl, many of them. In the Lord's prayer, the genitive unfer is, according to the earliest translation, governed by a substantive, ^atct; ▼12. SSater unfer, Father of us, instead of unfer SSater, our Father : which is a literal imitation of the Greek, grari^ ^/awv. — The genitive is likewise joined with some prepositions, viz. WCgen, Ijafben, Willen, denoting on ac- €Ount of. Then, it generally coalesces with them into one word, by means of connecting letters : as, 5l)^etnets WCgen, on my account ; feinctwegen, on his account ; i^retwecjen, on her account : unfertwegen, or unfemts? wegen, on our accownt ; eueretiregen, or cucrcntwegen, on your account ; ii)retn)C9en or i()rentn)egen, on their account. Thus, meinetf)alben, beinetl^alben, xtitmttxoxU len, or urn meinetwitten, &c. Otherwise the preposi- tion \)on, with the dative, is employed to signify the case of: as, tton mtr, of me ; von un§, of us ; von bir, of thee ; t)on eud), of you ; von ifyXi, of him ; von X^X, of her; VOn il)nen, of them. 2. In addressing one another in conversation, or in writing, the Germans do not confine themselves to the second personal ; but, like the Italians, Spaniards, and Portuguese, they have adopted the third. Besides this, they apply the plural number to a single person. If it ♦ 8ee Additional Remarks on the Adjective IV. p. 173. Also p. 374. 5(pc/. 1."^ Pronouns Persona^nd Reciff^ocalp-^ 203 be an anomaly to speak to one^ as if he were more than one, which is done in English, by saying yoUy instead of thou : it is still more strange to address him, as if he were not the person spoken to, which is the case in the use of the third personal. How can it, for instance, be sup- posed, that in tliis question. What is he doing ? the person is meant, of whom that question is asked, and that it stands for. What art thou doing T And if it be but one person, it appears absurd to assign to him the proaoun, in the plural nunjber: as, What are they doing! This, however, is the fact, in the German language. The Ita- lians, Spaniard:*, and Portuguese have another monstro- sity, in their polite manner of speaking, namely, that of bestowing on the person, whom they address, although it be a man, a feminine pronoun. That perverseness has sprung from the corruption of the middle ages. At that tasteless period, new terms were introduced into the La- tin tongue, in the form of titles and appellations, such as, Majestas, Celsitas, Serenifas, Exeellentia, Gratia, and the like ; and these figures of adulation were, with various modifications, received into the modern languages of Europe. The Spaniards produced their Merced {in Vuessa Merced, or listed, your Mercy, your Grace); and the Italians their Signoria (in Vossignoria, your Lordship, your Ladyship). Those words were first in- tended as abstracted representations of the virtues, and qualities of the person, to whom they were given : but, gradually, the person was confounded with his attribute ; and this was addressed, instead of the person. It was accompanied by the possessive pronouns of the persons, as your eminence, his grace, their excellencies, her high- ness ; in the same manner as any common appellative, for example, your father, your mother. In saying. Am 204 On the Pronoun. Part I. Chap. 3. eminence has written, the natural analysis of the idea is this: He, thai eminent man, or he, who is an eminent man, has written ; for, your highness has conferred a favour upon me, the fuiKlamental notion is : Thou, who art, or wliom I respect as, an illustrious person, hast conferred upon me a favour. — The third person of the verb occupied the place of the second. Having arrived at this, some nations went a step farther. The third person, they took for granted, was a mark of respect ; and they observed, that those appellatives, with which it was connected, were of the feminine gender, as celsitas, ierenitas, exfellentia, &c. Therefore, when they had occasion to use a pronoun, they assumed the third per- sonal of the feminine gender. Thus the mystery of the usual mode of address, in the Italian, and other lan- guages, is cleared up. The French and English did not go that length. For though they received such titles, as yoBr majesty, your highness, your lordship, in the third person ; yet, when a pronoun was wanted, they turned back to the second : as, I told your majesty, and you were pleased to direct, &c. ; when I wailed on your grace, you desired, &c. : in which instances, the lialians would say, she (Lat. ftf, namely, nwjestas, gratia) was pleased, «Af desired. — As in the Italian, Spanish, and Portuguese tongues, the expression Vossignoria, and listed, were, by degrees, applied indifl'erently, for the sole purpose of civility ; the third of the feminine gender became a ge- neral form of politeness. — This notion, concerning the third person, was admitted by the Germans. But they overlooked ils origin, and no longer associated with it those substantives, to which it owed ils existence. They deemed the third person of itself suflicieut ; and there, fore appropriated the magculine pronoun, (ST/ he, to a Seel. 1 . Prdkouns Personal, dnd Reciprocal. 205 man ; and @ie, she, to a woman. Not contented with this, they introduced another innovation. With the third person they combined the plural number, which had pre- viously been adopter! in the second person, as a refine- ment in speaking ; you for thou. In the same way, @ie, they, was substituted for ^t, he, or ©ie, she. At length, the following practice has been established. The plural of the third personal, ^\i, is the polite mode of address, macje use of by, and to, people of education. For example, instead of How do you do ? the Germans, in their language, will say, How do they do 7 It will be remarked, that this may sometimes be mistaken for a real third person ; and confusion may hence arise. How- ever, the context, in most places, will show who is meant ; and where that is insufficient, a gesture, or some other means of explanation, may make the person understood. In writing, misconceptions of that kind must be obviated by clearness of expression ; besides which, the pronoun of address is commonly begun with a capital, whereas the mere third personal has only a small letter for its ini- tial, unless it be at the beginning of a sentence. — Not- withstanding this new manner of speaking, the former ones, thoUf you, Ae, she, are still in use, but assigned with a particular discrimination; respecting which a few words must be added, since it is become necessary, for the present language, to distinguish them properly. The singular of the second person, £)U, thou, is first of all applied to the Supreme Being; because upon him we poor mortals can bestow none of those vain, and worth- less titles, with which we decorate our fellow creatures. In the next place, it implies familiarity, founded upon affection, and fondness. This is the pleasing appella- tion, by which parents speak to their children, and bro- 206 On the Pronoun. Part L Chap. 5w thers, and sisters, to one another. It is the language of love, and conjugal union. With friends, it is as a token of intimacy, and confidence : and though it is as much abused, as the name of friend itself, yet it is often found to denote the close harmony of congenial souls*. Cliil- dren are sometimes allowed to speak to their parents ia the same mannerf; though, in general, the third person plural, @ic, is preferred, as more respectful. Lastly, ^U, is the reverse of ceremonious politenesj, and thus it is applied, where particular distinctions are laid aside. Therefore, it is commonly made use of, in speaking to little children : and to people in very subordinate situa- tions; for example, by the officer to his soldiers. It is often heard in quarrels, and opprobrious language, when the considerations of decorum, and propriety, are dis- regarded. All these significations may be reduced to the notion of familiarity, differently qualified^ — The • See a charming passage in Schiller's Don Carlos; at the end of the first act — 1 mean, in the original ; for the trans- lations give but a faint, and imperfect idea. It begins thus ; Itnb ie^t nodb eine 29itte, Cieber— D?enite Widi)2)w— «. f. w. And now one more request, my dearest friend — "Do call laae thouy &c. t I found, in my last visit to Germany, since writing the above, that this practice of speaking, between children and parents, had very much gained ground, and was, in some parts, ahnost becoming general. I am among those, who do not approve it. For, though love, affection, and confi- dence should exist between children and parents, yet this particular relation seems to me to require a mixture of ve- i>eration and respect, on the part oi the children, (accord* ing to the precept. Honour tfii/ father and t hi/ mother), and not to be improved by familiarity. X Tlierc is a particular verb, which expresses the use of the second personal, vir. bu^en, answering to the French tuloyer ; in English) to thou, according to Shakspear. Sfti* l» Pirmouns Personal, and Reciprocal, 307 plural ^x, you, wben referred to one person, generally involves the idea of that familiarity, which is used to- wards inferiors ; for instance, by a master towards his menials : it is likewise bestowed upon individuals of low condition. — Since the plural of the third personal was adopted, as the polite mode of address, the singular has been reserved for the lower stations of life : namely, Qx, he, for a male ; and ©ie, she, for a female. In this manner you address your servants. Thus a person of rank, in the consciousness of his pre-eminence, will speak to trades-people, and the prince to his subjects. Yet those persons frequently forget the comparative •height, on which they stand, and are carried along with the stream of general politeness. Servants, however, are seldom spoken to in any other way, than the singular of the third personal : also those in a mean situation, su6h as common handicraftsmen, peasants, labourer^^ and others. The plural of the second personal, ^\jx, is even a degree below this*. 3. The first and second personal pronouns are also endowed with a reciprocal power. For they are used reciprocally, without any addition ; and myself, thyself, ourself, yourself, and yourselves, are expressed by, tnid^, ^ic!^, un0, i\l(i)* For ll^e third person, there is a distinct reciprocal, which is mentioned above. In this respect the German language differs from the English, in which the reciprocals are composed of the possessive pronouns^ and the termination self. The Germans have the word, felbft, or felbet ; but this expresses the Latin ipse, the French meme, the Italian, stesso, or medesimo, &c. and * The Danish language uses these pronouns nearly in the same manner. See Tobiesen's ^^^UC 2)&nifd[Je (Bpva^f ii^U, p. 34, T 2 iOi On tike Pronoun. Part L Chap. 3, may be annexed, not only to pronouns, but to any sub- stantive : as, ;Sd) felbjl, I myself, that means, I, in my own person, no one else ; 25u fclbjl, tiiou thyself; (Si: felbfc he himself; mx felbjl, ^i)v fctbjl, eie felbj!* ^x 5U?ann fe(b|!, the man himself; tie gcutc felbft, tim people themselves^ &c. It is to be observed, that when the third personal serves for the pronoun of address, tbe third reciprocal must correspond with it : for instance, ©cl^e^r fid), seat yourself, sit down, to a man of inferior condition, literally, let him seat himself; felje ®te fid^/ to a woman of an inferior description ; literally, let her seat herself; fe^cn Likewise with verbs: for example, ifB, for i|l e§; Qel^t^/ for gel)t e6 : but these contractions are best avoided. SecL 2. Pronouns Possessive^ fiQ9 SECTION II. PRONOUNS POSSESSIVE. These are: SDlcitt, my, or mine; S^eitt, thy, or thine; ©cin, his; S^r, her, or hers; a rub- must be given, when that addition should take place, and when not. When simply a possession is sig- nified, without any other idea attending it, neither those termiiiatinus, nor thai of the feminine gender, are re- quired : as, ^er ©artcn if! mein, the garden is nn'ne ; t>ic (gtubc if! bein, the room is yours ; l>rt§:g)au§ ifl fcin, the house is his. But when a comparison of possession is injplied, those endings are to be subjoined. For ex- ample: whose book is this? it is mine; this must be, ^§ ifl meine^/ with the additional termination; because a comparison of possession is understood — is it that, which belongs to me, or that which belongs to you, or to a third person ] the answer is, it is that which belongs to me. SlBefTcn ^unb i|l bag 1 whose dog is that ? g§ ifl unfctcr, it is ours — SSScffcn gcber iftbaSl whose pen is that ? €6 if! fcine, it is his. Here the same compa- lison is involved, and the termuiation affixed. So in the following : 3j! bicfc§ mcinC'5 obcr il)rc6 ? is this mine, or theirs ?—9^ein, e6 ift beiite6, obet cure6, no, it is thine. Sect. ^. Pronouns Possessive. 21 1 or yours. This difference in the use of the possessives, though apparently nice, ought to be carefully observed. The rule, as before said, is : when a possession is merely indicated, the pronoun is put without the declinable end- ings, in the nominative singular, masculine, and the no- minative and accusative, neuter; but when a distinction of the possessors is made, the terminations must be added. It is, of course, understood, that the substan- tive is never expressed, when these terminations are em- ployed*. 2. Tn unfer, euet/ the e, before r, is frequently left out, when a syllable comes after it : as, unfrer, unffC/ littfrcS, for unfercr, unfcrc, unfere§ ; curer, cure, eure§, for cucrcr, euere, eucrc^^ 3. Tlie po>sessive pronouns may be used absolutely, with the definite article : as, ^er meine, btc iticinc, ta^ mcine, mine ; t>er t)einc, thine ; bcr feine, his ; t)cr i()re, hers; bev unfete, ours ; bcr eucte, yours ; t)ert{)re, theirs. I say absolutely, that means, with no substantive follow- ing, though understood. For example: SSScjJen^Ut ijl ba§ 1 whose hat is that ? (50- ijl ber meinc, it is mine. SBeffen Uf)r ijl ba^ 1 whose watch is that ? (gg ijt bie bcinc, it is thine. SBcJTen SSud) ijl ba^l whose book is that? @6 ijl ba^feinc, it is his. Tiie French have the same manner of expression, in le mien, le tien, le sien, le notre, le voire, le leur. Indeed, they cJiim»>t put their possessive pronouns absolutely, unless the article is pre- fixed. In English, the article caiuiol be joined with them. But in German, the pronoun possessive absolute may either be used with, or without the article: nor is * Compare v^ith this what is said of the first numeral, p. 190. 212 On the Pronoun, Part L Chap, 3. it sufficiently defined, wliere the one, or the ot her, is preferable. It seems solely to depend on the sound, and the structure of the sentence; though, at the same time, it cannot be denied, that, when the article is made use of, the possession seems to be more distinctly marked. When united with the article, it is most usual to insert an additional syllable, namely ig: as, Dcr tneinige, t>er beU mgc, ber feinige, ber i()rige, t>er unfrige, t>cr curicjc, tcr \1C)X\^Z* The former, without the syllable ig^ may be regarded as a peculiarity of the Upper German dialect, though it sometimes occurs in the best writers. — The de- finite article going before, these pronouns are declined after the third form of adjectives. 4. ©cro and ^l^ro, are possessives, used in ancient and ceremonious language. They serve for addressing persons of distinction, being put for ^l^r, your, or yours ; and are not declined. 5. The possessives are sometimes found after genitive cases, supplying the place of the declinable ending in the substantives: as, £)c§ 50^ann fein SSucl)/ the man his book, for be6 ^DianncS 25ud) ; ber grau il;r ^int>, the woman's child, for bag ^int) ter gvau* But this is not to be considered as a pure, and classical mode of ex- pression. Seet. 3. Pronouns DemonstraHve, 213 SECTION in. PRONOUNS DEMONSTRATIVE. Under this head are comprised all those, which point out, or determine, the subject, to which they refer. They are: liefer, t)iefc, biefe^, this; Lat. hie, hac, hoc. Si'^ net/ jcnc, jene§, that ; Lat. ille, ilia, illud, ^iX, Wf t>a^, that; Lat. is,ea, id; or iste, ista, istiid, ^cncnige/ biejcnigi, baSjcmgc, that ; Lat. is, or ille. 2)erfelbe, U^ felbc, fcaffell&e/ the same ; Lat. idem, eadem, idem. A. Those which areproperli/ demomtrative. Singular. Plural. Mate. Tem. Keut. Nom . liefer, bicfc, b{cfe§,(orbicf% N. ^icfe* Gen. DiefcS/ bicfcr, bicfe^^ G. £)icfer» Dat. 2)icfcm, bicfer, biefem* D. 2)iefcn» Ace. 2)iefcn, biefe, bicfe^, (or bicf). A. 2)icfe* SinguUr. Plural. Masc. Fem. Neot. Kom. 2imx, jene, jcne6« K :sctic. Gen. Sene6, jcner, jenc5» G. Setter* Dal. Senem, icner, ienem* P. Senen* Agc. Scnen, jcnc, icne§» OBSERVATIONS. A. Sene* 1. When two demonstralives are put together, in the genitive and dative singular, and the genitive plural, the last of them may assume the termination en, instead of er, em, es» By this means the concurrence of the same ^U On the Prcnotm. Part h Chap, ^ syllables is avoided, if that should be thou«jht objet- tionaWe. For example : Die SD^eittungen btcfcS unt jencn 5U?annc§, (for jcneS), the opinions of tins and that man ; or in the plural, t>kfer unt> jcneit ?Kdnncr, of such and such men. SSon bicfer unb jcncn ®cfd)id)tc— (dat. fem. for jcncr), of this and that history. 2Cu§ bicfem un^ icncn 25ucl)C (for jcncm), out of such and such a book. 2. The neuter singular of these pronouns, is placed before and after verbs, without any distinction of gender or number, in the same nianner as the personal @§« Set above. For instance : X)icfc6, or biefi, iflcttt 5!}?ann, this is a man ; jcneS i jl einc grau, that is a woman ; bie^ ftnb 5fJ^cnfd)cn, these are nien. 2Ba0 fur cin SJlann iji bicg 1 what man is this 1 2Ba§ fur cine grau ifl bieg 1 what wo- man is this] 2Ba§ fur geute finb bief 1 what people are \urSf t B. Determinative Pronount. They determine, or limit, the subject, by causing it to depend upon a relative, which follows. Singuh ir. Plural. Masc. Fem. Keut. Nom. 2)er, bic, bag* N. m. Gen. 2)effen, bercn, bcffcn, G. 2)crer, (o'tcf), (or bcg> (or bcren)^ Dal. ^cot/ bcr, bcm* D. i)encn* Ace. ^cn, bic, ba§. A. 2)ie. ^ing-w/ar. Masc. Fem. Went. Nom. £)cricttige/ bicjcnigc, bii^icnige, Gen. Dceienigen, bcrjcnigcti; bc^jenigcm Dat. Demjenigen, bcrjcnigcn, bcmjcntg^tt* Aec. jDenjcnigen, biejcnigc. ba6jcnig«. Seat, 3. Pronouns Demonstratite, $15 Plural. Nom. ^ieienigen, Gen. ^^evjcm^en* Dal. 2!)enjemgcn* Ace. S)ieieni9en* Singnlar, Morn. Gien. Dat. Aoc Masc. Fem. ^erfclbe, biefelbe, 3:)efre(ben, t>erfe!ben, £)cmfc(bcn, berfdben, ^enfelben, bicfelbe, Plural. Nom. S>iefelben* Gen. ^erfelbcm Dat. ^enfelben Ace 2)iefelbcn# OBSERVATIONS. baffclbe. beffelbcn* tcmfclb-en* baffelbe* /'viU.- y^#^ 1. These pronouns may be joined to substantives, or stand by themselves : as, ^Jcr 5Qlcnfc^, Wcld^er tUQettbl^aft tebt, ift VlJCifC/ that man, who lives virtuously, is wise— • ^er, vvelc^cr tugenb^aft Icbt, ift wcife, he, who lives vir- tuously, is wise, ^erjenigc 5[Jlcnfd), wclct)cr Ungcrccl)ti3s: feit Ikht, ift ein ^ofen:)id)t, that man, who loves injus- tice, is a villain— £)erienige, wetc^er Ungcrcct)ti9fcit liebt, ij! cin S5ofen)td)t, he, who loves injustice, &c. SJcrfelbe 5[)lcnf(^, wctc^er— or Derfelbe, weld^er* 2. The relative generally follows after ScrjenigC : but not always after ©er, and i^crfclbe* For example : @6 i jl te'r Wamr it is f Aa« man ; e0 t j! bcrfelbc 5S)iantt, it is the same man. When ^et, is by itself, j^either before a sab- 2l6 On the Pronoun, Pari I. Chap, 3. stantive, nor followed by a relative, gome local adverb is commonly put to it, as ^icr, ba, bort : £)er ba, that per- son there ; bcr l)icr, that person here ; ber bort, that per- son yonder. SSBcffen^au^ ifl ba^l whose house is thatt ^cffcn ba, or beg ba, that person's. SBem gcf)6rt c^ ? to whom does it belong ? ^cm ba, to that person. 3. The genitive case of the demonstrative, ber, tit, ta6, in all genders, and both numbers, frequently serves as a substitute for the third possessive pronoun, vix. ^tffcn, bcrcn, bcfTcn, for his, her, its ; bercr, or bcrcn, pi. for, Ikeir. This will be noticed more at length here- after. 4. 3)er:, bie, ba§, when serving as a demonstrative pronoun, has a stronger accent, in pronunciation, than the deiinite article, by which it is distinguished from the latter. The genitive plural should always be berer, to discriminate it from the gen. singular fem. but neverthe- less it is frequently expressed by betCU, sometimes with a view to ameliorate the sound : as, bcrctl ciner, one of those, for bcrer eincr* — This pronoun, when joined with the adverb ebctt, signifies the same, Lat. idem, and is equal in meaning lo X)tx\t\hi : as, gben ber 5D^ann, the same man ; cbcn bie §rau, the same woman ; cben ba6 ^inb, the same child. 5. 2)a§, like bicp, and c6, is seen in connection with different numbers, and genders: as, ^a§ ijl ber 9}?ann, that is the man; bag ijl bic %VClU, that is the woman; ba6finbbie Scute, those are the people. 6. ;J>erfclbc, is frequenlly employed with the significa. tion of the third personal, or that of a simple demon- strative, in the manner as, in English, the same is used. For example : / have received the book, and read the same, for, and read it. But its peculiar and original Sed. S. Pronouns Demonstrative. 217 power, is the Latin idem. In that sense, it somelimes has the adverb eben, before it, which gives it additional force, ^hzn berfelbe, the very same ; and occasionally also the first numeral, Which still increases the mean- ing : as, ein unb cben berfelbc, one and the same. 6. ^crfelbigc, biefelbigc, bajTelbige, the same, is syno- uymous with terfelbe, biefelbe, baffclbe* Sometimes it has a strong demonstrative power, signifying that; but altogether it is a word, not of the most classical stamp. 7. ^er namlid)^, and bcr9lcid)e, occur as substitutes for bcrfelbe ; but not frequently. 8. a§, instead of Y0Zl6)tt, welc^c, I n)eld)e6* Tlie former has the advantage of brevity ; and is, therefore, often preferred : though in many places, n?cld)er, would be decidedly better. The latter ought to be considered as the original, and proper, relative ; and ter, tie, ba0, only as au occasional substitute. SB3c(d)er should have the preference : l) After the first, and se- cond, personal pronouns*. ^6), n)cld)er — I who ; ^\X, tt)eld)er— thou who ; S^r, weli^c— you who ; @{c, wels: d)C — they who. 2) When the relative immediately pre- cedes the verb, without another word intervening : as, ©It 5Kann, njeld)er fc!^rcibt, a man who is writing ; citt ^inb, we{d)eS licf't, a child which is reading. 3) When the definite article, or a demonstrative pronoun, goes just before : as, £)cr fD^atin, midget —2Mefer SKcnfd^, wcld)er — Senc grau, n^clc^e— Daejcnige ^iitb, welc^c^* The last distinction is not sufficiently regarded, in practice; and those pronouns are promiscuously used. That this is • After the first personal, of the plural, 2Bir, it would be objectionable to use welflt^e, on account of th« alliteration. I| is preferable to say,2BiV/ bit wit. U 2 220 On the Pronoun. Part I. Chap. 3, wrong, cannot escape the observation of an accurate judge. By allowing ^er, t>ic, t>a0, to follow closely after the definite article, or a demonstrative pronoun, a« unpleasant uniformity of sound is, in the first place, created. Secondly, ^er, tie, ba^, having itself the qua- rificalions of the definite article, and of a pronoun de- monstrative, a mutability of signification is exhibited ; which is no virtue in any word, nor in any language, and is the more objectionable, when there is another term id existence, in every respect of the same power, and apt- ness, which is exempt from those imperfections. In the two other situations, ^cr would produce an abruptness of sound, to which the German language is averse* Thtrefore, i^d), tcr mcle^ucl)cr gclefen ]()abc, I who have read many books ; must be changed into, ^c^, XOtX^iX t)iclc S3u<^er gclefen ^abc : and, instead of, (Sin ^ttabe^ ber fcl}reibt, a boy that writes ; it will be proper to say, (5tn ^nabe, tXJCld)er fdjreibt* The defect of abruptness, in tlu' relative ^cr, is often remedied by the addition of certain words to that pronoun. Namely, when placed after the first, or second, personal, the antecedent pro- noun is repeated after the relative. For example: ^(^^ t>cr id^ vielc 23ud)er gclcfcn \)aU, I who have read many- books ; ^u, ber bu ^ier )!el)e)!, thou who standest here. SBir, bie VOXX l)ier oerfammelt finb, we who arc here as- sembled ; S^r, bie \\)X cuer SSaterlanb liebt, you who love your country*. When alone with a verb, after the third personal, or a substantive^ the adverb ba is joined * In such a connection, the preceding personal is some- times spared: as, bie ibr ein Cieb ber Ciebe wogt; ye that venture on a song of love, for ibr, bie '\^X, &c.— Herder (3e^ t^mite^latter, Vol.3, p. 31.) Sect,4> Pronottris Relative and Interrogative, 221 with it : as, (gin ^nabc, ber ba fdjreibt, a boy that writes. ^a, signifies the^e, but serves, in this juncture, as a mere expletive, to lenjjtheil the short relative pronoun.— -^Ct, as a relative, never stands united with a substantive; for instance, ^er 50?ann cannot express, which man, 2. The genitive plural of the pronoun S)er, bie, ba§, is properly bcvct; but when it is used in a relative signi- fication, it is commonly changed into bcrett, though nol always*. 3. The adverb fo, so, sometimes represents the rela- tive. For example: £)ic ^a\)x):)zxt, voi\&)Z vou eincm SBerfc, me ba^ientge if!, fo voxx '^tw Sieb{)abcrn {jicrmit t^ovlegcn, gefobcrt wcrben fann, be|!c{)ct barin, &c. " The veracity that can be required of a work, like the one which we now lay before the lovers of elegant lite- rature, consists in this," &c. Wieland. It is a peculiarity of the ancient style, and at present only resorted to, for the purpose of preventing the repetition of other rela- tives. When the verb follows after it, without any other word between, ba is added, as in the relative bcr, bic, ba§« For exaniple, in Burger's Lenore : ^0^ f einer war, ber .^unbfd^aft o^ixh, SSon alien, fo ba famen, «. e. of all that, came, ♦ 2)ann feufje fic tiadb in jienen 2?lumen, 2)erer ^aupt am ^fi^el ©c^werer unb gefcnfter if!. " Then repeat my sounds, sighing, among those flowers, whose heads, near the grave, are drooping and declining," — From Denis's Monody on the Death of Gellert. Here the genitive berer, is more emphatick and distinct, than berCM would appear. u3 3^ On the Pronoun. Part 1. Chap. S* 4. SOBet/ who, as a relative, always begins a sentence ; what otherwise would be the antecedent, follows. For example : SBcr auf t>cm SGBegc bcr S^u^cnb tt)anbcU, ifl Qlucflid), he who walks in the path of virtue, is happy. It is never put after an antecedent. It would, for in- stance, be a solecism to say, ber SJJann, tt)cr bic ©cfefee i\)Xt, the man, who respects the laws. Here a different relative is required. Nor can ttjer, be connected with a substantive : as, VOiX 50?ann, which man ; for n)Cld)Ct ISKann. ^^ hen wer stands alone with liie verb,ba is fre- quently added to it, in the same manner, as it is to ber (see the former page): as, 2Bet ba ^a\x\>t, bag bicg fo fep, irrt fid), he who thinks that this is so, is mistaken. — — The neuter VOCk^, may either commence a sentence, or be placed after an antecedent. For example : 5Ba§ QC^ Xt^t ifl, \)erbicnt Sob, what is just deserves praise; bag, waa bu mir gcfagt f)afl, that which you have told me ; aUc6, tvag ic^ 9efel)cn ):)ahi, all I have seen. It stands here to signify which; and is very properly employed after an antecedent, denoting something general, and undetermined. When an individual, or particular, sub- ject precedes, it is necessary to express the neuter, which, by n)eld)c§ : as, ba6 f&nd:), mld^c6 Sic mir gclicljen l)a^ ben, the book which you have lent me. This rule is sometimes neglected, and vt»a§ put, where n>eld^c6 ought to be the relative ; but such deviations are not to be approved.— 2Ber, occasionally, signifies somebody : as, e$ if! tt)Cr ba, there is somebody ; and wafv something: as, ic^ i)abc tvag, I have got something. But these expres- aious are not classical. Sect. 4), Pronouns Relative and Interrogative. 223 5. The relative pronoun is often omitted in English, and to be understood in a sentence. For example ; " The man 1 love," i. e. whom I love. The pensive muse shall own thee for her mate. And still protect the song she loves so well. Charlotte Smith. u e. which she loves. Simply the thing I am shall make me live. Shaksi'eak. I. g. which I am. — In German, the relative must always be expressed. 6. The pronouns SOSer, neuter, \va^; and wclc^er, Welc!^e, Wcld)e6, also serve to (piestions, or in other words, have the signification of interros^atives. — 2Bct 13 applied to persons, either male or female, and wa§ to things. They ask the questions, in a general way, as the Enghsh who, and what : diid are never joined with a sub- stantive. SBcld)Cr, XVild)Z, Welc^Cg, refers to particular objects, and may be united with substantives. . It an- swers to the English interrogative, which: as, tveld)er ^ann, which man. 7. 9Ba§ is combined with the indtfinite article, to express the French interrogative, or exclamatory, pro- noun, quel, Lat. qualis, and the English what, with or without the indefinite article, as, what man? or, what a mani But in German, the preposition fur is inserted, between voa^, and the article: as, tt?a6 ftir ein WUm, what man, or, what a man ; n>a^ fur etne grau, what woman, or what a woman; m^ fur ein ^int), what 224 On the Pronoun. Part I. Chap. 3. child, or, what a child. It is literally, what for a man, what for a woman. This preposition had probably a meaning, when it was first introduced ; which by time lias been obliterated*. The indefinite article is omitted, as in English, before the plural number, and when the idea is of a general cast rather, than referring to an in- dividual object : for example, wa§ fur ?i}^enfd?en, w hat men ! voa^ fur 3c"9/ ^^^^^ stufl"! r\)a^ fur 5Bcin, what wine !— SBcld) ein, fem. n)eld? cine ; pi. tt»clcl)C, are oc- casionally used in the room of, tt)a6 fur ein, \va^ fur cine, and n)a§ fur* 8. The local adverb WO, where, with a preposition, frequently fills the place of a relative pronoun. For example: Womit, wherewith, instead of, mit n?cld)em, fem. n)cld)cr, or plur. mit ttjeld^en, with which ; wo^on, whereof, instead of t>on n?etc!}cm, tt?ctd}er, rrcld)cn, of which ; WOburd), where through, for burd^ Welc^en, WCld^C, Vt»eld)C§, throu^ih which : tt)OJU, whereto, for JU WCld)Cm, n)cld)er, n?eld)en, to which. When the prepo- sition begins with a vowel, r is inserted after n>D : as, WOraug, whereoul, for out of which ; TDOrubcr, where- upon, or whereover, for upon which, of over which. * The Swedes, Danes, and Dutch have the same manner of expression ; and in Sliakspear (Much Ado about No- thing, Act I. last scene) the following pa^sap is found: " What h he for a fool that betrothes^himself to unquiet- ness." Whntfor a fool, seems to be said instead of, Wliat mfoolf and to correspond with the German mode of speak- ing. Sect, 5. Miscellaneous Pronouns 225 SECTION V. MISCELLANEOUS PRONOUNS. Under this denominalion are to be coniprebended sereral words, which could not conveniently be classed with the former divisions. They are : jet)er, jebwc^cr, mand)cr, jemant), jet>crman, niemant), and fclbf!* 1. Seter, jcbe, iet)c6, each, every (one); jctweber, jebwcte, }ebtt)ct)e§, each, every (one); mand)er, mans: d)e/ mand)e§, many a (one). They are eilher put be- fore substantives, or may stand by themselves ; and are all declined. 2, 50^aH, not declined. It implies a general, or inde- finite, personahty, answering to the French on; and takes the verb in the singular number. For example ; 50^an fagt, French on dit, people say, they say ; matt fprid)t, Yt.onparle, people talk, they talk. The Eng- lish make use of dift'erent expressions, such as we^ you^ they, a person, one; where tli€ Germans employ man, and the French on. For instance : mart mug fid) l^utcit, -Fr, on doit prendre garde, a person, or one, must lake care; mait xxxt fid), weittt man glaubt,— on se trom- pe, si Ton pense, a person, or one, mistakes, if he thinks — . The oblique cases of the indefiiiile article are placed in a corresponding relation with man* For ex- ample: 3}^an drgert ftd) immer, wenn einem getrtjfc (ix^ Wartungen fei)lfc^lagen, a person is always vexed, when he is disappointed in certain expectations. 5Jlan XXXt ftc^, ttjenn man ^Imht, tev groge |)aufe fi^d^e cinen \V^\}XiX SSert>ienjlte tvegen, oue is mistaken, if he thinks, 236 On the Pronoun. Part I. Chap. 3. that the multitude esteems him for true merit. — In these examples eincm, and einetl, dalive and accusative cases of the indefinite article, answer to man* 3. ;Semanb, some one, some body, any one, any body; ict>crman/ everyone: ttiemanb, no one. These .words seem to be composed of the foregoinu^abej!, (if) thoii have. 3. (5r(fie, e^) Ht, he, s. @t, (fie, e^)^abe, (iO he, (she, it) has. (she, it) have. X 230 Oh the Verb. Part I. Chap. 4h INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTITE. Plural, Plural. 1. 2Dir Nfcett, we have. 1. 233ir baben, (iO we have. 2. Si't'N&et, or^abt, you 2. 3^r ^abet, (iO you have, have. 3. ©ieNben, they have. 3» ©ie fjaben, (iOthey have. Preterimperfect. Singular. Singular, 1. nfdb Ntte, I had. 1. Sd^ i)&tte, (if) I had. 2. 2)u ^attett, thou hadst. 2. 2)u Wtt^, 00 thou had. 3. i&x batte, he had. 3. <5r b&tte, he had. Plural, Plural. U 2Dir Ijattetl, we had. l. WlX |>&ttet1; we had. «♦ 3br battet, you had. 2. 3br b&ttet, you had. 3« @te Jjatten, they had. 3. ©ie l)&tten, they had. Preterperfeet, Singular, Singular. 1. 3* l»abe ge^abr, I have 1. ;[$(<) (>abe getabt, 00 I had. have had. 2. 2)u iiajl fleljabt, thou 2. 2)u&abe|Igebabt/00thou hast had. have had. 3. @r )fat gebabt; he has 3. Qt ^abc ge^abt, he have had. had. Sect. 1. Auxiliary Verbs, ' 031 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. PluraL Plural. U mt Men seMt, we 1. 3Dir|iabettge^a6t, wehave have had. had. 2. Ij^r Met, or Uht, 2. 5ar fiabet geN^t, you ge&(j6t, you have had. have had. 3. ©ie ^aben ge^bt, they 3. ©ie aaben ^eMt, they have had. have had. Preterpluperfect. Singular, Singular, 1. m Hue ^eUK I had 1. 3db Htte ge&abt, (iO I had. had had. 2. 'S>uMte^QeMt, thou 2. 2)u ^dttef! QeMt, (It) hadst had. thou had had. 3. ©r^aftege^abt, he had 3. @r liatte ge^abt, he had had. had. Plural, Plural. 1. Wit Htten ^eMt, we 1. 2Blr ^dtten Qe^jabt, we had had. had had. 2. Stir Matter ^eMt, you 2, 3t)r ^dttet ge^abt, you had had. had had. 3. 8ie fatten ^eMt, they 3. @ie fatten ^eMt> they had had. had had. X 2 232 On the Verb, Part I. Chop. 4. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. First Future. Singular, Singultn', 1. ^dbwerbe^aben, I shall i. 3cl) werbe taben, 00 I have. shall have. 2. 2)u wirl? ^a6cn, thou 2. 2)u werbej^ 6aben, 00 shalt, or wilt, have. thou shalt have. 3. @r wirb^aben, he shall, 3, ©r werbe {jabeti/ 00 he or will, have. shall have. Plural. Plural. :i. SBIr werben (jabcn, we i. SBIr werben fiflben, (if) shall have. we shall have. 2. :3t>rwer&ctl&aben, you 9. ^^r werbet ^abett; 00 ■ shall, or will, have. you shall have. «. ©tewerben Nben, they 3. 6ie werben baben, 00 shall, or will, have. they shall have. Second Future. Singular, Sitigular, 1. n^werbege^flbt^aben, 1. I5* werbe ge^abt Jaben, I shall have had. (if) I shall have had. 2. 2)u airj! ^i^att Men, a. 2)u werbeflge^bt liaben, thou shalt have had. (if) thou shalt have had. 8. @r wirb fiebabt (jaben, s. (fr werbe gebabr Nben, he shall have had. (if) he shall have had. Sect.!. Auxiliary Verbs. 233 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Plural, Plural, 1. 2Bir werben ge^abt hb, you are. 3, @ie ftnb/ they are. SUBJUJ^CTIVE. Present. Singular. 2. 2)u fipe^, or fepfl, thou be. 3. ©r fep, he be. Plural. 1. 2Dir fepcn, or fcpn, we be. ^. ^^r feijeb, or feijb, you be. 3. ©ie fepen, or fepn, they be. Preterimperfect. Singular. Singular. 1. 3(i} wax, I was. ' 1. 3c^ ware, Cif) I were. 2. 2)u waref!, or warj!, 2. S)u wSrejl, thou wert. thou wast. 3. Qvwat, he was. 3. (ivw^X(, he were. Plural. Plural. 1. 2Dtr wavtn, we were. i. %iv w&ren, we were. 2. ^fJi^ waret, or watt, 2. 3^f wdret, you were, you were. 3. <&ie WaXin, they were. 3. @ie waren, they were. QS6 On the Verb. Part /. Chup. 4. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Preterperfect. Singular. Singular. 1. !j(i) bingewefen, I have i. 2(* U\> gewefen, (\f) I been. have been. 2. 2)u fcijl Qcwcfeti, thou 2. 2)11 fepei?, or feptl, gewe* hast been. fen, (if) thou have been. 3. er ijl gewcfcn, he has 3. @r fcp flewefcn, fif; he been. have been. Plural. Plural. 1. W\x finb gewefen, we i. 2Bir fepen, or fepn, ge^ have been. wefen, you have been. 2. 5l)r fepb gewefen, you 2. ^(jr fcpeb, or fepb, gewc have been. fen, you have been. 3. ©ie finb gewefen, they 3. ©iefepen, orfepn, gewe. l>ave been. fen, ihey have been. Prelerpluperfect. Singular. Singular. 1. 3c|j war gewefen, I had i. 3* w&re gewefen, 00 I been. had been. 2. 2)u warej! gewefcn, 2. 2)u wdreil gewefen, 00 thou hadst been. thou had been. 3. (Sr war gewcfen, he 3. (Sr wSre gewefen, r^O had been. he had been. Plural. Plural. J. 2Dir warengewffen, we i. 2i)ir wdren gewefen, v>e had been. had been. 2. 5t>r warctgewefcn, you 2. 3()r w&ret gewefen, you had been. had been. 3. ©iewarengewefen,thcy 3. ©ie »&ren gewefen, they had been. had been. Sect, 1. Auxiliary Verbs» 237 INDICATIVE. First Singular, 1. 3^ wnbi fepn, I shall be. 2. 2)u wivjl fcpn, thou shalt, or wilt, he. 3. @rirtrb fcpn, he shall, or will, be. Plural. i» Wit werbeit fepn, we shall be. «. 3^r werbet fepn, you shall, or will, be. 3. ©ie werben fei^n, they shall, or will be. SUBJUNCTIVE. Future. Singular, 1. 3(i> werbe fe»n, 00 i shall be. 2. 2)u werbej! fepn, thou shalt be. 3. 6r werbe fepn, he shall be. Plural, 1. a23irwerbenfepn, we shall be. 2. S&J^ werbet fej?n, you shall be. 3. ©ie wevbetr fepn, they shall be. Second Future. Singular. 1. Jc^werbe gewefen fepn, I shall have beeni 2. 2)uwir|!9ewefenfepn,thou shalt, or wilt, have been. 3. ©rttjirb gewefen fe^n, he shall, or will, have been. Plural. 1. 2Dir werben gcwefen fe^jn, we shall have been. 2. 3^r werbet gewefen fe^n, you shall, or will, have been. 3. ©ie werben gewefen fepn, they shall,or will,have been. Singular. 1. 3^^ werbegewefenfcpn, ("if) I shall have been. 2. 2)utt>erbe|!gettjefenfepny thou shalt have been.- 3. @r werbc gewefen fepti/ he shall have been. Plural, i.^Blrwerbengewefenfepn, we shall have been. • 2. 3^rwerbetgewefenfe|jn, you shall have been. 3. ©le werbengcwefen fcpn, they shall have been. 238 On the Verb. Part I. Chap, 4. First Future Conditional. Singular. 1. I5d^ Wmbe fepn, I should, or would, ]je. 2. 2)u wUrbefl fepn, thou shouldst, or wouldst, be. 3. @r tvurbe fepn, he should, or would, be. Plural. i» 2Bir wUrben fetjit, we should, or would, be. 2. 3^rwUrbetfei)tl, you should, or would, be. 3. ©le tt?i4rben fepn, they should, or would, be. Second Future Conditional. Singular. 1. 3* W'Me getrefen feijn, I^hould, or would, have been. 2. 2)u wdrbef! fiewefett feprt, thou shouldst, or wouldst, have been. 3. @r wi^rbe gewefen fepn, he should, or would, have been. Plural. u mvwdYben ^emfcn fepn, we should, or would, have been. 2. ^^rwurbetgewefenffun, you should, or would, have been. 3. ©iewUrbfngewefenfejjn, they should, or would, have been. IMPERATIVE. INFINITIVE. Singular. Singfilar. N2. ©eij (bu) be rthouj. Pres. ©eiJIt, to be. 3. @ep er, let him be. Preterperf. ©ftt'efen ffpn, to Plural. have been. ri. (Sepert tt?ir, Ictusbej. Fut. ge^jn mrb^n, to be ^2. (Bept (i^x) be TyouJ. about to be. 3. ©(?pn fif, let them be. Sect. 1. Atixiliary Verbs. 239 PARTICIPLES. Present, (Sepenb, being. Preterite, ©ewefen, been. Third Auxiliary, SBevbeu, to become. SBerbe, pres. ; SBarl), (or wiirbe) imperf. ; ©eworben, (or worsen) pret. part. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Singular. Singular. 1. 3^ mvbi, I become. 1. ^^ VOtxbC, 00 I become. 2. 2)u wtrit, thou becom- 2. 2)u tt?erbe|t, CJf) thou be- est. come. 3. (5r Wixb, he becomes. 3. @r werbe^ riQ he become. Plural, Plural. 1. SJirwerben, we become, i. 2Dir werben, we become. 2. 3&ttt)erbtt, you become. 2. ^^v mxbet, you become. 3. (&ie werben, they be- 3. ©le werbeity they become, come. Preteriniperfect. Singular. Singular. 1. 3c^ W(»rb, or wurbe, l. 3c& wurbe ("if; I became. I became. 2. 2)u wurbejl, or warbf!, 2. 2)u w^rbej!, (if) thou be- thou becamest. came. 3. Qtwaxb, or wurbe, 3. (Jrwurbe, he became, he became. 240 On the Verb. Part L Chap, ^. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Plural, Plural 1. 2Btr wurbenV we be- i. 2Dir wUrben, we became, came. 2. 5br wurbet, you be- 2. 3tjr w6rbet; you became, came. 3. (&le wurberi; they be- 3. ©iewfirben, they became. Preterperfect. Singular, Singular. 1. !j^ bin gcworben, or i. 3fc^ f*?? scwcrben, ornjor* WOrbf n, I have become. ben, (if) I have become. 2. Du 6ifl gewcrben, or 2. Du fepejl, orfepf!, gewor* worbcn, thou hast be- ben, or worben, (If) thou come. have become. 3. (f r i|l getrorben/ or 3. &v fep geworben, or wor» WOrben, he has become. ben, (if) he have become. Plural, Plural, 1. ^Dit finb geworbcn, or t. 2Dir fepcn, orfepn, ge«?or» worben, we have be- ben, or worben, we have come. become. 2. !3^v fepb Qfttjcvben, or 2. 3tjr ffi;cb, or fepb, d*?' worbcn/ you have V)e- irorbcn, or wprben, you come. have become. 3. (&ie (inb gcworbcn, or- 3. 6le fcpen, or fipn, ^t* trorben, they have bo- worbeti, or woicben, they come. have become. Sect. I, Auxiliary Verbs. 241 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. ^ Preterpluperfect. Singular. 1. 3c^ war gewor&en, or tror^ftt, I had become. 2. 2)u wflrcf! fwarflj ge^ tt^crben, or ivorben, thou hadst become. 3. (5r war gcworberi; or WOrben, he had become. Plural, U 2Dir ivaren geworben, or worbctl/ we had be- come. 2. 3^r waret (watt) ge^ worbeti, or worben, you had become. 3,,(&iemarengen?orbe«, or WOrben, they had be- ccfme. Singular. 1. ^d) whu geworben, or «?orben, (if) I had become, 2. 2)u ttjarefl geworben, or ttJOrben, (if) thou had be- come. 3. @r w&rc geworbew, or WOrben, fif) he had be- come. Plural. 1. 2Bir whYtn geworben, ot WOrben, we had become. 2. 3^f whvit geworben, or worben, you had become. 3. ©ie w&ren geworben, or WOrbfn, they had become. First Future. Singular. 1. 3^ werbe werbcn, I shall become. i. 2)u witfl wcrben, thou shalt, or wilt, become. 3. (5r wirb wcrben, he shall, or will, become. Singular. 1. 3d? werbe werben, ftfh I shall become. 2. 2)u werbef? werben, thou shalt become. 3. (5r werbe mxben, he shall become. Y 2452 On the Verb, Part /. Chap. 4. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Plural. Plural. 1. SBirwerben werben, we i. Wit werben werben, we shall become. shall become. 2. 5^r werbct werben, you 2. !3^v werbet werben, you shall, or will, become. shall become. 3. ©ie werben werben, 3. ©ie werben werbcn, they they shall, or will be- shall become. come. Second Future. Singular. !♦ 3c<^tt'^tbe gcworben, or wet be It, fepn, I shall have become. 2. 2)u wirf? geworbett, or worbenjfepn, thou shalt, or wilt, have become. 3* €r wirb geworben, or wcr&^n, fepn, he shall, or will, have become. Plural. 1. Wiv werben geworben, orworben, fet)«, we shall • have become. 2. 3^r werbet geworben, w worben, fepii, you shall, or will, have become. 3« @ie werben gewcrben, or worben, fepn, they shall,or will, have becvine. Singular. 1. 3f& werbe getvorb^n, or worben, fepn, fif; I shall have become. 2. Su werbef! geworben, or worben, ffpn, thou shalt have become. 3. (f r tterbe geworben, or wcrben, fepn, he shall have become. Plural. 1. 2Dir werben getrcrbcn, or worben, feijn, we shall have becouie. 2. ^^rwerbetgcwcrben, or worbert, ftpn, you shall have become. 3. 6ie werben ^ewcxbtn, or»orben,fep«, they shall have become. Sect. 1. Auxiliary Verbs. 243 First Future Conditional, Singular. U ^dfj wurbe werbeii/ I should, or would, become. 2. ^u wiirbejl werben, thou shouldst, or wouldst, become. 3. (5v wUrbe wcrben, he should, or would, become. Plural. I. W\x wiirben werben, we should, or would, become, 'i. ^t't' Wiirbet wetben, you should, or would, become. 3. ©ie nnSrben werben^ they should, or would, become. Second Future Conditional. Singular. 1. 3ct) wiirbc geworben, or wcrbeit, fe»)tt, I should, or would, have become. 2. 2>u tt>i5rbe|T ^eworben, or wotben, fepn, thou shouldst, or wouldst, have become. 3. (5r wurbc geworben, or worbcn, fcpti, he should, or would, have become. Plural. 1. 3Biv w6rben geworben, or worbcn, fc^jn, we should, or would, have become. '-i. 5'()r wijrbet geworben, or wcrben, fcpn, you should, or would, have become. '^. @ie wUrbcn geworben, orworben, fepn, they should, or would, have become. y 2 244 On the Verb. Part I. Chop. 4. IMPERATIVE. Singular. Plural. (1. 2Berben wir, let us be- come.J '2. 2Bcrbe (bu) become 2. 2Derbet Ci^O become rtbouj. ryou> 3. 2Der^C ef, let him be* 3. 2Dcrben fie, let them come, become. INFINITIVE. Pres. aCerben, to become. Pret. perfect. (Seworben, or trorben, fepn, to have become. Fut. 2Berben wab^n, to be about to become. PARTICIPLES. Present, 'iZBerbenb, becoming. Preterite, ©ewcrbetl, or tporben, become." Noie. — Wiiatin the foregoing conjugalion is encJosecl in parenthesis, is to be considered as less usual, or less classical, than that which is not so marked. Of this description are : the 1st person plural of the imperative; tX)arf!, wart, in the preterimperfect of the second auxi- liary ; and triirbe, trarbfl, in the preterimperfect of the third. Many things, in parenthesis, are understood to be commonly omitted, such as the 2d i)€rsondI pronoiuis, in the imperative. Sect 1. Auxiliary Verbs, 245 OBSERVATIONS. 1. Accorfling to the English grammar, the verbs wioy, willt shall, let, are, in conjugating, employed as auxilia- ries. They are not necessarily required for the Gerni'erm69cn, is chiefly used. And lastly, 5) To like. Here it is connected with the infinitive : as, ^d) mag C6 ntd}t i\)\xn, I do not like to do it ; and also with an accusative case, like a transitive verb : as, ;^d) mag ba6 nid)t, I do not like that. In this signification, it is mostly applied to what is eaten or drunk. For exanjple : SJlogcn @ie ©auerfraut 1 do you like sour krout .? 9^ein, id) mag c§ nic^t, no, I do not like it. ;^c^ mag ticfen SBcin nid^t, I do not like this wine. ;^d) mag nid)t6 mcf)V, I do not like any more. In such phrases, an infi- nitive may be supplied, viz. effcn, to eat, or trinfcil, to drink; and the construction, with the accusative, consi-> dered as elliptical. Sd) will/ I will. Infinitive ttJOllctU This answers to the Latin velUy and the French vouloir ; and implies a fu- ture event, so far as it proceeds from will, and inclination. For example: $B5ollcn ©ie fpalgiercn gcl^en? will you take a walk; that means, Is it your will, or inclination, to take a walk] ^d) njill Icfcn, I will read ; the same as. It is my will, or my inclination, to read, ^r tt>i(l flicgCU unt) i)at fcinc 5^l'^9^^/ ''^ wishes to fly, and has no wiugs. The idea of purpose, and inclination always accoQipanies Sect, 1. Auxiliary Verbs. 247 this verb : it is not employed, as in English, to denote mere futurity, for vvliich VDCrben is exclusively appro- priated. ^d) foil, I shall. Infinitive, follCH^ The Englisli shall may be considered as the literal translation of the Ger- man word, but it does not comprehend all its meanings. The verb to be, with the preposition to and the infinitive of another verb following, (as, 1 am to see, tve are to go), answers to its significations more frequently than shall. The German verb denotes: 1) To be obliged, by neces- sity, or duty. It may then, as occasion requires, be ren- dered by shall, must, ought, am to ; in French, by fal- loir, devoir. For example : ^u foUjl ba6 t()un, thou shall do that, thou art to do that, thou must do that; it faut. ®ic follen fd)reiben, you are to write ; il Jaut ecrire, 2) To l)e bid, to be commissioned. ^^ foU ba^? i)in Cje^cn, I am to go there. 3) To be authorized, to be suflfered, to he permitted. ©oU id:) e6 ()aben? am I to have it, may I have it? ©oU id) e6 tf)Un, obcr Xli&jt ? am I to do it, or not ? may I do it or not ? 4) To be ad- milted, to be supposed, (^ie foUcH mic^ nid)t bcleibigt lj)abcn, you are supposed not to have offended me ; CI* foU fetnett (Ba^ crwiefen f)aben, he is admitted to have proved his position. These subsequent significations have all a connection with the first, and original one, which implies an obligation. That obligation is some- times so involved, that it is difficult to recojjnise it; for example, in tlie two last significations mentioned, where we must imagine an obligation, springing from the will of another, to which we submit. Jt is stjH iiiore so, when the verb means 5) To be said, to be reported : as, 2)er ^onig foE attgcfommett fevn, the king is said to 248 On the Vetb, Part L Chap. 4. be arrived. T)k gran5oftfd)c g(ottc foil gcfd^lagcn ^VOrticn fepn, llie French fleet is said to have been beaten; C6 foil fid) jugctragcn l)abcn, it is said to have happened. If compulsion, or obligation, be the primary notion, to be combint'd with follcn, it may perhaps be represented as a kind of necessity, that a thing has happened in such a manner, and not otherwise : we may conceive a sort of limitation, or restriction, with regard to the fact, that has happened; as if we were to say, people will have it, that this has happetied. In the expression will have it, something of constraint may be perceived: for where the will of any person is in operation, it produces a compulsion, or ohligation, in reference to others. These primary notions, however, are obliterated; and we now content ourselves with the significations, as they are in use*. The formation of the future tense by the verb shall in English, and by similar verbs in other languages^ such as the Swedish, Danish, and Dutch, may be ana- lysed, and traced, in a similar manner. Thus foil occurs in old German ; and even in the modern language, that is, in High German, vestiges of it remain in some phrases, and expressions. It is common in a conditional future, which is very frequently employed. For exam- ple : SBenn cr f ommen folltc, if he should come ; wenn t»a§ fO fevn folltc, if that should be so. (Solltcu ful} ta§ 9Bcttcr anbcrn, fowoUcn \\>\x auf^cjcljcn, should the wca- ther change, we will go out. • The signification, just mentioned, to he said^ to be re- ;;orfec/, is found in the Swedish verb s/co/o, the Danish yA-«//f, and the Dutch zullen, all of which answer to the German fotten. See the Grammars and Dictionaries of those lan- guages. Sect, 1. Auxiliary Verbs. 249 (Boikn is often used with an ellipsis, when the infini- tive of some otlier verb is to be supplied. By this means, several phrases are to be explained. For ex- ample : 2Ba6 foil id% what shall I ?— supply tl)Un, do, what shall I do, what am I to do, what would you with me, what do you want of me ] Thus, 2Bag follf! bu 1 xva^ foil er? waS foil fie? wa^ foHcn wix, m^ follt il)r, V0a6 foEen fie ? what art tliou to do, what art thou wanted for, what is he to do, or what is he wanted for, &c. SBa6 foil U\^, what shall that— supply fepn, be, what shall that be, what does it tend to, what does tliat mean ? This is sometimes fully expressed by, §Ba6 f^ ba6 l^eiffen, what is that to mean, what is the meaning of that, what do you mean by tliat? From that elliptical mode of speaking, the following significations may be assigned to folleu : a) To mean. Examples : 2Ba§ follen bie fieben 2^dmmer, what mean the seven lambs? 3Ba^ foil t>a6 ®efd)wd^, what means that talk 1 2Ba6 foUeu biefe^^vdnje, what mean these wreaths? 235a6 foU aber biefer, but what means this man ? In all these phrases, the infinitive fepn, or in the last ti)UXl, may be under- stood b) To be intended. Ex. ©ie follen alle fuv mein ^an^, they are all intended for my house. 2Bem foil tienn biefer iX ^nabe fann feinc ^Cufgabc, the boy can say his lesson, knows his lesson by heart; cr fann fc^6nc fiiebcr, he knows pretty songs, he can sing pretty songs. Here the infinitives fet^n, fa^cn, ftngcn, to say, to sing, may be understood, ^onncn <5ic 2)cutfd), do you know Ger- man 1 dr fann ®rtcd)ifc^, he knows (ireek. In such instances, Icfcn, to read, fprcd}cn, to speak, V)er|lcl)cn, to understand, or similar infinitives, may be supplied. Sd) barf, I dare. Infinitive, burfcn* This verb sig- * In the Scotch idiom, the word to can is still found, for ex. : " What vve first learn, we best can,** i. e. what we first learn, we know best. See Ramsay's Scots Proverbs, Ch. XI. *' Other prayer cnn I none," i. e. I know no oilier prayer. Walter Scott's Lay of the Last Minstrel, Canto 11. St>6. Sect. 1. Auxiliary Verbs. [250] 2»l nifies 1) To dare, to venture. 2) To be allowed, not lo be restrained, answering to mai^, dare. For example: 2Darf \&) fvacjcn, may I ask? (Sic burf^ncg wiffen, you may know it. With the negative, it is to be rendered, by may not, must not, dare not. 3) Frequently, the English verb need expresses it. 4) The prelerimperfect potential, burfte, denotes a probable contingency, and may be translated by might, may, need, should, would, as occasion requires. For example : (5§ burftc Vielleid)t Voa\)X fepn, it might perhaps be true ; c§ butfte alSbattU ntc^t not()n)cnbi9cr SBeife bcr %a\i fcpn, it need not, then, necessarily be the case. In all these instances, it has the infinitive after it. When it occurs without an infinitive, it is by ellipsis, so that some infinitive is to be understood. Ex : ^r barf allc^ tt)a§ cr fnnn, he dares to do all he is able, where t\)\xx{, to do, may be supplied, (^c barf nid)t in bag S^aw^, he dares not, or may not, come into the house, where fommeu, to come, is understood. It has sometimes the genitive, or accusative, after it, sig- nifying to want, to need, to be in need of; but this sig- nification is obsolete. ^&) mug, I must. Infinitive, milffen* It coincides pretty exactly with the Etiglish must ; sometimes, it is to be rendered by ought ; and occasionally the terms, to he obliged, am to, art to, is to, are to, answer to the sig- nification.- With the negative, it now and tlien expres- ses, need not. Insome instances, it has a mere potential meaning, and is to be translated by may. ^A) laffe, I let. Infinitive, (affeu, to let, to sufi'er. It also means to leave; and to leave off. It farther sig- nifies to get, to procure to be, to cause: as, ^irt ^aVi§> bauen laffcn, to get a house built; cinen Slocf madden 25$ [25 r] ' On the Verb. Part J, Cliap. 4. IdJTcn, to get a coat made. When combined with the third reciprocal, it seems often equivalent to the Eng- lish may, or is to be: as, tag Idgt ftc^) nid)t tt)Un, that is not to be done; ba\)on licffe fid} Vide fagen, of that much might be said ; t»aS Id^t )id) nidjt bcgreifcn, lliat is not to be comprehended. As an auxiliary to the im- perative, the Germans use it only for the first person plural, of that mood*. 2. In English, the auxiliary, to be, is joined with the participle present, to form what is called the definite^ or determined time\: as, / am (now) writing, I was (then) loving. Such a combination is foreign to the German language, in which the definite time is not distinguished from the others, ^d) fd)reibe, stands for, I write, and I am writing ; id) fd)ricb, for I wrote, and I was writing. S. Another peculiarity of the English tongue consists in the verb do, employed to express the present, and past imperfect, of the verb active, and neuter, marking the action, or time, with greater force, and distinction : as, / do love thee. It is also of frequent, and almost necessary, use, in interrogative and negative sentences^. This mode of expression is not quite unknown to the Germans ; for it is, in some provinces, to be met with among the lower people: as, ^d) tl)at licben, I did love ; t()un @ic i^m fcl)rcibcn, do write to him : but it is utterly banished from the general, and classical language. * See p. 234, note. t SecLowth's English Grammar, p..63. I Sec Lowth, p. 64. Sect. 2, Conjugation of Regular Verbs, [251] 253 SECTION II. CONJUGATION OF REGULAR VERBS. There is but one conjugation of the regular verb, of which the following is a representation, in the x\clive INDICATIVE, SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Singular, 1 person, e : as, ^d) \oU, I praise. 2 person, est, or st, 3 et, or t. Singular, 1 person, e. Plural. ' en, • et, or t, ' en. est. e. Plural, en. et. en. Preterimperfect. Singular. Singular. — ete, or te. 1 — etest, or test. 2 — ete, or te, $ • — ete, etest, ete. Plural. ' eten, or ten. etety or let. ■ eten, or ten. Plural, 2 - 3 - Z eten, etet, en. 254 [452] 'OntheFerb, Part L Chap, 4., IMPERATIVE. Singular, PluruL en, et, or #. en. INFINITIVE. Present, en. PARTICIPLES. Present, end. Preterite, ge -«/, or t. GENERAL RULES. I. The other tenses are compounded with auxiliaries ; namely, the pielerperfect, and pluperfect, with ()abcn, (or if the verb be a neuter, of a particular description, with fcpn), and the preterite participle : the futures with tverben^ and the infinitive. II. The first and tiiird persons plural, of the present tense, are always like the infinitive, and vice vers^. — The first and third singular, and the first and third plural, of the preteriuiperfect, arc allike. This applies to all verbs, both regular and irregular. III. The preterite participle has every where the syl- lable ge ))refixed to it, except in verbs compound inse- parable, and some others, which make \he infinitive in ieren, or iren : as, rCQicrcn, to govern ; \)ar(Oti)imn, to handle; i)afclf ercn, to jest ; fpafeicten, to walk ; floljic^ Sect, 2. Conjugation of Regular Verbs. [253] 255 ten, to be proud ; bud)flabicren, to spell ; barbircn, to shave ; rcbeUiten, to rebel ; marfcl)ircn, to march ; prOs= tcfliren, to protest; variircn, to vary; co))iren, to copy. IV. The radical vowels of regular verbs are never changed. If, for instance, frageit, to ask, be considered as a regular, it is not correct to make the second and third pers. sing, pres. indie, ftd^jt/ frdgt/ transforming the vowel a into the diphthong d. V. The e before st, in the second p. siug. pres. ind. ; before t, in the third p. sing, and second p. plural : like- wise before f, throughout thepret. imperfect, and before the same letter in the pret. partic. is commonly thrown out, when from such an abridgment, no harshness arises, in the pronunciation. But it must be observed, that this is only allowable in the indicative mood ; and would be improper in^ the subjunctive. VI. In verbs that have the letters /, or r, in the last syllable, tlie e of inflection, after those letters, if. it be not itself the last letter^ is always omitted, cviep iq the infinitive : as, ©ammeltl, to collect, for fammelcu ; baucrn, to last, for bauerem Sometimes the e, before / and r, is cast away : as, ^(i) famtnlc, I collect, for fammelc; bu fammlcjl, thou collectest, for fammcljl (fammelej!) ; cr fammtet, for fammelt* @§ bautet, it lasts, for e§ bauett» However, this mode of contrac- tion is neither so regular, nor so much in use, as the former. VII. The passive voice is universally formed by means of wetbcn, thet tbird auxiliary. /•. 256 [254] On the Verb. Part J. Chap, 4 Active Voice. fiobcn, to praise, gobe^ pres. ; lobetc, or lobte, pret. imperf. ; gelobcf, or gclobt, pret. part. INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Singular, Singular, 3* ro&e, I praise. 1. :^dO robe, (if; I praise. 2. 2)u robej!, orro6(!, thou 2. 2)u lobej!, (if; thoupraise. praisest. S. (5r robet, or robt, he 3. dt robe, (if) he praise. praises. Plural. Plural. 1. 2Dir roben, we praise. i. 2!Bir lobett; we praise. «. !jf}t robet, or fobt, you 2. 3bt lobet, you praise, praise. 8. @ie tobeit; they praise. 3, ©je loben, they praise. Preterimperfect. f Singular. Singular. ! i. 3c|> (Obte, I praised. 1. 34? lobete, (if) I praised. ' 2. 2)u robtef?/ thou prais- 2. 2^u robetejT, (iQ thou cdst. praised. 3. (Sr lobte, he praised. 8. 6r lobetf; he praised. Plural. Plural. 1. 2Dir fobten, we praised. 1. Wit lobeten, we praised. 2. 2fbt lobtet; you praised. 2. 5|)r lobetet; you praised, j 3. (5ie icbten, they praised. 3. ©ie rebftftl, they praised. Sect 2. Conjugation of Regular Verbs. |;^55] 257 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Preterperfecl. Singular. 1. ^d) ^abegelcbt, I have praised. 2. 2)u ^af! gerobt, thou hast praised. 3« (§r Ijat gelobt, he has praised. Plural. 1. 2l)ir ^ahen gelobt, vve have praised. 2. 3^f N^t gelobt, you have praised. 3. 6ie ^ben geiobt, they have praised. Singular. 1. ^c^ ftabe gelDbt, (if) I have praised. 2. ^ubabej^gelobt, (iii))thoii have praised. 3. @r i»abe getobt, Of) he have praised. Plural. 1. 2Bir ^abep gelpbt, we have praised. 2. 5^^^ ^l^ft QClObt, you have praised. 3. ©te (jaben gelobt, they have praised. Preterpluperfect. Singular. 1. 5c^ Ntte gerobr, I had praised. 2. 2)11 batteil Qelobt, thou hadst praised. 3. @r ^atte gelobt, he had praised. Plural. 1. 2Dir fatten gelobt, we had praised. 2. 3br batter flefobt, you had praised. 3. @ic Ijattcn getobt, they had praised. Singular. 1. 3* aatte gelobt, (if) I had praised. 2. 2)u bdttej? gelobt, fif; thou had praised. 3. @r tidtte seiobt, he had praised. Plural. 1. 2Bir (iSiten gelobt, we ,had praised. 2. 3bt ^dttet Qelobt, you had praised. 3, @ie fatten gelobt, they had praised. z a 258 [256] On the Verb. Part I. Chap. 4. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. First Future. Singular. Singular. 1. ;3d[jn>er&eloben, I shall i. !jd} werbe lobeit, (if) I praise. shall praise. 2. 2)u ttjlrf? Icbiti, thou 2. 2)u werbejl roben, thou shalt, or wilt, praise. shalt praise. 3. @rwlrb robeti; he shall, 3. (5r werbe lobtn, he shall or will, praise. praise. Plural. Plural. 1. 2Dir werben loben, we i. W\v werben Icben, we shall praise. shall praise. 2. 3^twerbet roben, you 2. 3^r wcrbet loben, you shall, or will, praise. shall praise. 3. ©iewerben (oben, they 3. ©if werben robcn, they shall, or will, praise. shall praise. Second Future. Singular. Singular, a. ^c^werbe gerobt^aben, i. 3ci& werbe getobt ^aben, I shall have praised. (if) I shall have pr. Z. S)u Wirt! gelobt i^ab^n, 2. 2)u wcrbefi gefobt^aben, thou shalt have prais- (if) thou shalt have ed, &c. praised, &c. First Future Conditional. Singular. 1. 34? wUrbe foben, I should, or would, praise. 2. 2)U Wilrbejl roben, thou shouldst, or wouldst, praise. 3. Qv wurbe roben, he should, or would, praise. SeM. 2. Conjugation of Regular Verbs, [257] 259 Plural. 1. WiX WlSr&Cn fobetl/ we should, or would, praise. 2. 3^r WUvbet loben, you should, or would, praise. 3. (5ie WUrben robcn, they should, or would, praise. Second Future Conditional. Singular, 1. 2^ wUr&e gelobt Nt^eW/ I should, or would, have praised. 2. 2)U WUrbef! gefcbt N^Ctt/ thou shouldst, or wouldst, have praised^ &c. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Singular. Plural. (1. Co6en wir, let us praise.) 2. Co&e (bu) praise (thou). 2. Cobct, or icH (\^r) praise (you). 3. Cobe er, praise he, or 3. Ccben fie, praise they, let him praise. or let them praise. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. Coben, to praise. Pret. imperf. ©etobt ^aben, to have praised. Future. Cobcn trerben, to be ^bout to praise. PARTICIPLES. Present. Cobenb, praising. Preterite. Oelobet, or gelcbt, praised. 260 [258] On tlie Veih. Part 7, Chup. 4,, PASSIVE VOICE. ©clobt Vterben, to be praised, INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Singular. Singular. 1. ^db mvbi Aelobt, I am 1. ^(fy mxbi gelobt, (if) I praised. be praised. 2. 2)u trtrfl yetobt, thou 2. 2)u irerbefi gelobt, 00 art praised. thou be ])raised. 3. Qt witb selobt, he is S. (f r tverbe gelobt, 00 he praised be praised. Plural, Plural. 1. 2!5ir wcrben flefofct; we i. SBir werben gelobt, 00 are praised. we be praised. a. I^^'* wf^'^^tflf^obt, you 2, 3()r wcrbet geljpbt, (if) are praised. you be praised. 3. @ie wcrben gefobt; they 3. @le werben gelcbt, (if) arc praised. they be praised. Preterhnperfeet. Singular. Singular. 1. 3* warb (or wurbe) i. 3cl) wUrbe Qffcbt, 00 ^ gefobt, I was praised. were praised. 2. 2)u wurbell (or warb^) 2. 2)u nn'irbcf? gelcbt, (iQ gelobt; thou wast pr. thou wert praised. 3. Qv wavb (or wurbe) 3. @rwUrbe getobt, 00 li« gerobt; he was pr. were praised. Sect. 2. Conjugation of Regular Verbs. [259] 26l INDICATIVE. Plural. 1. 2Blr wurben getobt, we were praised. 2. 3&r wurbet gerobt, you were praised. 3. @iewurben gelobt; they were praised. SUBJUNCTIVE. Plural. 1. Wix wilrben gelobt, we were praised. 2. 3fjr vr^rbet gcrobt; you were praised. 3. ©ic w6rben gelobt, they were praised. Preterperfect. Singular. 1. 3(i} tin gelobKworben, I have been praised. 2« 2)u bijlgelobt worben, thou hast beenpr, 3. @\f ij! geto&t worbett, he has been praised. Plural. 1. 2Dir finb geroBt worben, we have been pr. 2. 3^r fepb gerobtworbcn, you have been pr. 3. eie finb gclobt worben, they have been pr. Singular. 1. I5C^ fej) flelobt worben, Cif) I have been praised. 2. S^u fepefl fletobt wovben, Cif) thou have been pr. 3. dx fep gerobt wtxben, (if) he have been ■ pr. Plural. 1. 2Diir feijen gelcbt worben, we have been pr. 2. 3^t feueb gerobt worben, you have been pr. 3. @ie fe^jen gelobtworben, they have been pr. Singular. 1. 3^ war gelobt ttjorben, I had *^en praised. 2. 2)u warefl gelobt wor. betl/ thou hadst been praised. &c. Prelerpluperfcct. Singular. 1. 3^ wdre flclobt wcrben, Cif) I had been praised. 2. 2)u w&refl gelobtworbett. CifJ thou had been prais- ed, &c. '26^ [260] On the Verb, Pari 1. Chap. 4, INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. First Future. Singular, Singular, 1. Ijd) W(vbt gerobt wevbtn, i. 3^ werbe ^dcbtmrben, I shall be praised. 00 I shall be praised. *2, Su ttjirjt ge(obt werbert, 2. 2)u werbffl geloi-twerbf n> thou shalt, or wilt, be thou sbalt be praised. praised. 3. ©r wirb fierobt werben, 3. Qt werbe gelobt wtxb^n, he shall, or will, be pr. he shall be praised. Plural, Plural. 1. Wix werben gerobt wcv. i; 2Bir werbcn gefobttrer* ben, we shall be pr. ben, we shall be pr. 2. S^rwerbetgerobtwetben, 2. rfbi^werbetgefcbtwcrben, you shall, or will, be you shall be praised, praised. 3. ©iewerbengelobt werben, 3. (Ste werben (^lebt njer» they shall, ox will, be ben, they sliall be praised praised. Second Futt»re. Singular, Singttlar, 1. !3^ werbe gefobt «?orben i. ^d) werbe geJobttrcrben fejjn, 1 shall have been fepn, ('\f) I shall have praised. been praised. 2. 'Du wir(! Qelobtwcrben 2. 2)u wcrbejl^lobtworben fe^n, thou shalt ba.ve fepn, thou shalt have been praised, &C, been praised^ &c. Sect. '2, Conjugation i>f Regular Verbs. [26 1] 2^3 First Future Conditional. Singular, 1. Jcft wiirbe getobt werben, I should be praised. 2. S'u trurbefi,9erobt werben, thou shouldst, orwouldst, he praised. 3. ©r tt^rbe jjelobt werben, he should, or would, he praised. Plural. i« 2Bir wUrben gelobt werben, vve should, or would, be praised. 2» 5^r wUrbet gefo&t werbett/ you should, or would, be praised. - ^« ©ie wUrben getobt werbeit/ they should, or would, be praised. Second Future Conditional. Singular. 1. !j(i) wUrbe gefo&t worben fepn, I should have been praised. 3, 2)u wUrbej! gelcbt worbett fepn, thou shouldst, or wouldst, have been praised, &c. IMPERATIVE. Singular, Plural. (1, 2Derbcn wir getobt, let us be praised.) 2. 2Derbe (bu) getobt; be 2. SCerbet (i&r) setobt, bo thou praised. you praised. 3. 2Berbeer gclobt, be he 3. 2Berben fi'egelobt, be they praised, or let him be praised, or let them be praised. ^ praised. 264 [-262] Oft the Verb. Part I. Chap, 4 INFINITIVE. Prcs. (Berobtwerben, to be praised. Pret. perf. ®efo6t vrorben fepn, to have been praised. Put. aCfrben flelobt werbert, to be about to be praised. Note. In the conjugation of the passive voice, tlie participle worben, of Ihe auxiliary, is used, in prefer- ence to getrorbcn, because the latter, when joined with the preterite participle of another verb, would fre- quently cause a disagreeable repetition of the syllable ge» — Sometimes worbctt is omitted in the past tenses, as id) bin gclobt, for gclobt worbcn, &c.: but it should be put, whenever those times are to be pointedly, or distinctly, expressed. Sect. 3. hregular Ferbs. [263] 2^5 SECTION III. IRREGULAR VERBS. These verbs deviate, for the most part, in the pre- terimperfect tense, and the preterite participle. Some differ in the present tense, and several in the imperative mood. The number of irregular verbs amounts, at present, to upwards of two hundred. Formerly it was more considerable ; but it has decreased with the progressive cultivation of the language. Several verbs, which, in preceding ages, had an anomalous form, are now in- flected according to the common standard of conjuga- tion. There are others, of which, even at this day, the irregular inflection is usual, though, at the same time, they may, without oftence, be conjugated in a regular manner. In the following list, those, whose irregular character is become obsolete, will be marked by a double star (**) ; and those, which are, at the present period, varied in both ways, with a single (*). The latter, it is possible, will in time, like the former, lay aside the irregular shape entirely: and new attempts of regularity may perhaps be made upon others. For such is the nature of the human mind, that it flies from anomalies, and bends towards rule and system, by which its opera, tious are facilitated. AA 266 [264] On the Verb. Part I. Clmp, 4. i OS . s 3 «* ^:l^ o o o «« «> »t* <33 CS <33 cJ^ S ^ o «g i Cu »- a <» o s: s i s s: 3 *> 5 ^ 4>J =5 go ^ ja a> ^ JO a t D > s 1 (4 ^ 5 ^ « wl •"• a <& 5 »- ^ M 1— ( ^ a» S S a H •S . ^^ o o _> i;s^ •^ H '■^ «D * CO ct W ♦ CO :; u S^^r CO « . »4 a 1-4 s g %£t .£> u:> A >£> ;2 sS M M pL( o5 d CO C* C< C< ^ M 0. • h3 ^ §- i SB CO 2 3 1 2 > > 1 ! o e S 8 IS 8^ 0) C "So a ^ i 1 i 1 2 *; 2 2 c 1 S» «rf «» *♦ t> 8Fi 8Fi » SFiSFi 5 »i»i 8S Sect 3. Irregular Verbs, [265] 267 CW kCr a;> <33 <» 3 *- •^ w ** Oi ^E, ^ *> "=^ 5i. CS5 CS5 *35 a <0 _ e.^ o <^ ■M U uT V v^ m ** cA e« • (U p. 5 . s « 'B.o SJ et£ 12 w «^ CO C< aa e?i <" 2 Hr- -^ ^ -S ? £ S s o s s S" t: *J *• — — Si ^ J 3 c £J « S S S S S 5 « § £ 8Fi 8^ AA 2 q6S [266} On the Verb. Part /. Ckap, ^. ex, © c -B' . o « « *; »- *r w aj sO «£> u:> U. >s> JO t tn OJ 2 G ? s: .5 ^ S^ fS ^ n s <35 =1 tl" S .2. <3 3 ■*- >» 3 a. ■^ x> x> -o o 4^ S S-: CS5 «35 «a «1 •3S <35 %* e §5 •« •« ^ .v S ^ «4— a ^ ii * •& OD 22 (£1 cs a. 5 g^t « 3 2 S O %• 3 a. S a. S 2 S 2: *• JO >o x> JC* X^t ^ *" 'SS. ^* ^T3 ^ *^ '- 9 <>o> ,0 e9 1 CO • •» , . c s s »2i •is 5 -s 'E ^ ? s s :3 E a. 4, r«. ^^ <^ ^ •♦- Sects. Irregular Verbs. [268] 269 c = S - S g S ^ -v* <^ <^ t^ t: C35 S- »- i^ s ^ S= *- *. «U ■^* •^i «rf Si H ttn! CO -^ 1 ii '5^ ^ ^ tto. £ >i 0^ CO d CO a5 > 1 1 J u 1 a C u a. ^ 2 3 S ^ '^ V 13 •N .5 C! bJO • S . > oT Cl, s '5 i a : s i «33 «33 «35 .x> ts= *» fe: O O O '5 «V te. fc tei .t. iii <^ «> •^ ^, ^> «35 C» C35 t3) C* si 4j O -55 s r» siJ Uc! «5 '^ o o o 3 ? te- td ^ .it 'ii 2^ o ii o <^ c *ti- XT ** *-» Hi. TV *- . «« o« »«3 .T3 ,Ii, •— T? V<3 v^S "<5 .Ir 4R> <*— «*— «^_ US. T3 o) q- £ cJ w <»» w> <30 ** t^ a ^ «« o > c O 3 S " •^ B - o 2 2 *- 4-> *-i QJ 2 '^ 2 3 J- <— S= Ki *- ^ S 4^ «rf «rf 1^ CSS .— »>N w ".S — Mq 5U *- P^ t Sect. S, Irregular Verbs. [270] 271 S. 2J '*2 ^13. <^* 5; J.' vCi *S> > Ix ^ fcO ^ o<3 Q o Oi CO cu ^^ — s a; rj C« CO ^«2 fl > 3 ct» O 3 ^ en ® S o t<5 ^ it C s s^ ^ I O- ♦33 vB. ■«3 C «- i> ^ <^< a. ^,< •^ **> «35 cc O) «S) jr C 4J u ID fl W C3 ■-S Ji ■= 5 S? ^ 3 > .5.2 s c c a> c« o a. .- 3 •i (A a3 »» *S3 CO ■ »-»■ c « ^ >1 t-H »o «X- *o ^ <33 bl *x> ^ cJ-C CX^ •* 44^ <3) C» C» <35 «35 C35 •Si ^ .^ '>0> ■«' ,» C br ft. s '-3 c da £3 bO > gov "S CO •— v^ .*-• ^ ^ ^ »-l SI *>> O ""^^ ^^ tr tjn. ^ "^ *^ "H ,j> JS> •>»< oJ 00 '/> .2 •^ ^s ^ 3 4-< *^ 1 s 22 ^ c il -G J3 .ti 3 C C s "a -a 030 — •*^ c r- ? c-i •53 13 4h* 1— < (SO V M^ %m ^ ^ •^ if 1- to? >- ^ r CO >^ 13 15 V O •fc^ ^ c -> '3 a; ■-2 O '^ §D 'a s 1 ^ 1 S 'So 0) .s X o 3 O .sT o *^ o ^ n _c c *3 2 c o ^ rrt •» . t Oh "C *o ^ cj t3 ^^ ^ ^ a 2 o O 2 o . S S S g ^ ^ 276 On the Verb. Part L Chap. 4. i ^ <» OS «L» ^ ^ <3D <3J «> e ^ aj ji, tic. "^ i I tc te X St. ». St. H c. § s »-4 ♦- "5 CO .1 «33 s . 'S a i3 2 4- 4-t. c s. 47 c (^ E ^o ci ♦•a «> ^ g$ &; .5 o< oj .22 o w to § $ i ^ (U ^^ o 2 s= ^ c c •^ » '^ »■• a- a Sect. 3. Irregular Verbs, 27f Ph -"^ 2; C V •o « ,2i S^ •- a c> =1 © «= c J O ^ CO W} 5) ^ *i3 :s s^ ^ ;r « '^ . « £ ^ -« § 5 -S -S X ^ S .i: .5 .5 3 BB 27S On the Verb, Part L Chap. t. i *= c c: c «: 05 Oa ***»<»<35«!. « x> s: '^ ■S ^fc i -a I I :B g c* G O a E o -^ .2 |2 2 8^ (S (A 5 3 ■^ "2 5r 2 o S o |1 o .2i .S2 W) H (© Secf3» In^egular Vei^ls, 27^9 llggggggg gg g g *^C»C»«i<33«35 <»<» *» ,435 I Q 2 .S a-S fi »• «£ « <^> %S^ vO |S ss rt CO CO eo u ^ tij: Qs: ttii c ** U— «3> ♦-! "^^ c« »o 5d i§^ S e « w 01 C- &: ^- w oJ •^ S "«2 C£ *^ .S t.0 H- c 2 c o ■w *-> *J X '"oocr>P'-o«o2^*^ *" 280 On the Verb. Part I. Chap. 4» 5 ^ P. I C e = S S 2:: s s ^ e B fi ^g •Co -g .5 ^-^ ^ .j: t: S - ^ ^ S = c 2 :: -c c fi B fi £ >e •& je © e «^ g g « g fi 1^ S) 1^^ ^ ^ .t: .- c s s 2 . . I fi 2 ^ s a e O t' ':5 T? t« a * c • 2 " S ^ h P o S i3 ^ -^ ^. s s 3 3 s - 4g< c ^g- *. ju *- jr c »rv "6~ l.cv 'fi' •© "© •© "© £ E 'fi ^T fi J2 .^ -r^ ^ ^ (d Sect 3. trregutar Verbs, ni ft) •3 *B re .o .^ tr te <*' 0& «3& ^ 4» te i te. %- 0^ e* 1- «* « ^D. g «2- a> J •s c t2 ^ O S S 1 a> > a o tn «o Xi PQ o c5 rt 1 ^ JS n) m l> CO O 5 o •5 . . -^ 5 «? «« o ,b .2 -s ^03 ? ^ -J^ - - CIS -^ se* ^ "S tS r (^ t® (^ i^ 11-. ac "^ BB 3 2 282 On the Verb, Part /. Chap. 4. s * ^ © 2 2 e c c« rs •is. •Z .5 2i St. &. a. ti) tiJ) (i) o. cL.S .« ^ -^ 2 5 o t« •« ^ ^ 2 •" Q 2 •^ ^ «> 3 ^ ^ .5; .5 X. -^ - S. ,:4 -d S c o jl 1 ^ i c i E i ^ ^ a i o 2 o c 0) ^ ^ -o s n c -a «rf ^ ^« ? •3D ^ 03 s Sect 3. Irregular Verbs. 383 ■l-> -* o <35 «.o •i3 tt:- t-i y ^ o 'S ^ w ^> 4_ qr^ «jn. «0 uO 05 2i (^ (iS) (S tS w i M 2 2 C3 'o s ^ ^ o >» fc: J2 , Cj o j3 o^ y en c O ^ '^ ■u o _4f s (U > o i- ^ •^ o -s >> i3 2 o o c^ 2 ^ n o w en CO o « <^ o s$ >2 £ H X C .•& <§ 1 ■g £ UO «tCL 1 >• 1 JO rs of 5 f 1h a> «i» •«rf c« 1 » 3^ *** 1 1 _• Qi» *- «> 1 ce t3 a> Si •^ » «-■ > tt?: . f\ o tfci. 1 • i-f •5 ^ '? ^ t^ 'S^ t^ •5 (-H 'Si .2 2 s> o » » ^ P- Oh i « ©< « 2 « 1 •*- >> 1 t/i 0? > 2 't3 I "3 2 1^ 3 o '■S '2 1 Id § oT 1 S t3 1 2 > 2 o 2 i-T 2 2 o en O 2 b. c ■♦-» s to 2 «33 4J i <** S « >.> )U >« >- r ^ ^ S S S. j 2a6 On the Verb, Part L Chap, 4. 13 JO (2 I s 5S& J s J. £ » » P^ 0< CO a g 1 ^1 a 1 > E c the fool il by the s. cJ- c 1^ 2 a. •s .2 o 1 If to Q = cp -t c 2 O ^* 2 cC 2 in o c o 2 ** 2 c *1 c a- o i g4 c i* ** j^ «> ». «* «« ^ S) ?§ a © S = I S! 2 isl I f Sect. 3. Irregular Verbs. 287 11 c S c JS S ** 2t .<^ "S »» C3) S «XC. ■tZ « «> -r - « S o o 3 3 11 B B £ & B Q> «rf ^ «rf ^« *33 <30 ^35 «33 <^ fi fi fi «it «> •X3 ?« ^ •e e s i :? g s fi Oh « C5 vZ> J3 Vw- 1 fi 'i d so c? i •43 1*^ ^ O •3) g. o -- f J3 to 'S ^■z ^i -a s ^ o ^ ^ ^ ^ 288 On the Verb. Part L Ckap4.. Oh S S ^ «&> ^^ I I I I ^ ^ 2J 0. r4 .S3 a :j3 Q fi fi bO OTi s 3 a II c li CO 5 ♦* ,a u 'Q •♦* •^1 .S >> o*r c .2 o e iS c «* a? O a:> ^* Jt B 'i'i «5- § t o Sf J '^5 o 3 5 -^ t: 3 fQ ^.^ S -^ p< u. U) £2 -.g" ^ ^ a Is o „ 1 Q to s .2 ». OJ i- •^ ^* i 11 .2: fi o .2 i3 cncn mm •♦-' 4-* ^ct. 3. Irregular Verhs. 289 OBSERVATIONS. 1. Tlie preceding list exhibits the irregular verbs ia lliose parts, which deviate from the rule : in all the rest, Ihey conform to the regular mode of inflection. Let it be observed, that the iirst person plural, of the present tense, is always like Ihe infinitive, and that thence the con- jugatio?! proceeds regularly: the infinitive, indeed, maybe considered as the root of the regular parts of the verb. Of the preterimperfect, the third person singular is con- stantly the same with the first and ; the other persons fol- low% in their terminations, the example of the regular verb. Where the imperative is not marked, as irregular, it may be supposed, that it is to be made of the infinitive, by cutting off the final n, or sometimes en. 52. The preterimperfect takes, in the subjunctive mood, an e at the end : that is to say, when it terminates with a consonant, in the indicative, an e must be added. Moreover, the vowels a, 0, U, are, in the subjunctive, changed into the diphthongs d, 6, u* For example : ;Sd^ hatf I begged, subjunct. 'baU; id)1)0b, I lifted up, subj.d()obc; id) trug, I bore, or carried, subj. trilQC* — Some verbs assume a different vowel, instead of a diph- thong: as, ^d) fannte, I knew, subj. fennetc; id^ nannte, I named, subj. nennetc; ic^ rannte, I rushed, subj. retwete^ Others have a diphthong, but not that which corresponds with the vowel, in the indicative. Of this kind are, ^c^ befall, from befet)len, subj. hi^ folate ; begann, from beginnen, st»bj. begonne ; \)ax%, from bcrgen, subj. burge; gcbal^r, from gebdl)ren, subj. ^ia bo^rc; o^aii, fromgcltcn, subj. goUe; rann, from rinnen, subj. tonne; fpann, from f^innen, subj.fponnc; j!af)l, from ftef)(en, subj.jt6()lc; ftatb, fromfterbcn, subj. fife cc 2P0 On the Verb, Part I. Chap. 4. be ; ^crbarb, from Mzxhtxhrn, subj. t)crburbe ; roaxb, from n)crben, subj. WUrbc* In tlie examples first adduced, where e is put, in the subjunctive, for a, this is, in truth, no more than the regular form. For fcnticte, nennete, rcnncte, are precisely the same as (obcte. Of the instances, which have diphthongs, unlike the vowels of the indicative, it is to be remarked, that originally a change of the vowels, in the indicative, has taken place : and that bcfaf)t, was formerly befol()l ; barg was burg ; gcbal)r, 9cbc()r ; gait, gott; rann, ronn; fpann, fponn; jlarb, f!urb; wcrbarb, vcrburb^ Some of these are, even now, occasionally used, though perhaps not with sufficient propriety ; as befof)!, gebo{)r* 3. The second and third persons singular, of the pre- sent tense, and the second person singular, of the impe- rative mood, of verbs, which have ie, or u, in the first syllable, are, in ancient language, and poetically, formed ineu: as, biCQC, 2. beUQJ!, 3^htU^t; imperat. beugc : biete, 2. hzixt^, 3. bcut; imperat. bcut : • fIic{)C, 2. flcud)|!, 3. fleud^t ; imperat. fleu^ : fiteffe, 2. ficuffcf!, S.flcugt, imperat. flcug: (UQC, 2.leU9)T, 3. (cUQt; im- perat. leUQ: tricge, or trugc, s.trcugfl, 3. trcugt; im- perat. trcug : jie{)c, 2. jeud^ft, 3. jeud^t ; imperat. jcud^. This is not a permanent irregularity, and has, on that account, not been noticed in the catalogue of the verbs. 4. Compound verbs are, in general, inflected as their simples. Therefore, if these are irregular, the com- pounds will be the same. A few are excepted : for instance, t)cranlafTcn, to occasion, compounded of la\^ fen; bcrenncn/ to blockade a town, from rcnncn; xaif)^ fc^lagcn, and bcratl)fd}la9cn, to deliberate, from fd)(a* gcn« The greatest number of compounds, however, adheres to the conjugation of the simple verbs. Sect. 4. Verls Neuter. 2.91 SECTION IV. VEKBS NEUTER. Verbs, which signify an action, that from the sub- ject nominative passes over to an object, or affects a person, or tiling, are, in grammar, called active, or transitive: and those, which do not imply the passing over of the action to a certain object, are styled intran' sitive, or neuter. Thus, I love, I hate, are actives, or transitives, because the action, therein contained, gene- rally refers to an object, which is expressed, as, I love — my father ; I hate — a slanderer . But I walk, I ride, f sleep, marking an independent action, that is to say, iiii action without relation to an object; or denoting merely a state of being, or acting, come under the de- nomination of neuters. It will be perceived, that the line, between verbs active and neuter, cannot be drawn with precision. For those, which commonly are used as actives, may some- limes, appear in the shape of neuters : / love, Ihate, may mean, I am in a state of loving, of hating, without the mention of a particular object. On the other hand, such as, in general, have the character of neuters, may be transformed into actives, as, / ride — a horse; I fight — a battle ; I walk — a mile. There would belittle more to say of these verbs, were it not necessary to remark, that some of them take, in the preterite tenses, the auxiliary feptt, to be, where, in English,*© Aare is used. These must be pointed mil, and described, that the student may not be led into gram- matical errour, by the custom of his own language, CC 2 292 On the Verb. Part I. Ch/ip. 4. Let it, flierefore, be noticed, that the following neuters are joined with the auxiliary fevn* I. Those, which signify a cliange, or transition, from one condition, or state, into another. For example : 2f u^arteit, to degenerate, pret. perf. id) bin auSgcartet ; einf(^lafen, to fall asleep, pret. perf. id) hin cingefd}lafcn; erblaffcn, to grow pale; erfaltctt, to grow cold ; crross tl)en, to grow red, to blush ; crfd)rC(f cn, to get frigh- tened; gcncfctt, to recover from illness, to regain health; gerati)ett, to get into, to fall into, also to succeed, to prosper; fd)njeUcn, to swell; vcrarmcn, to grow poor; »erblul)en, to fade, to wither; verl^ungcm, to perish with hunger; Verfd)n)int)en, to disappear ; wad^fcn, to grow, to increase. Add fterbcn, to die, to expire, and synonymous words, as ct1tfct)lafen, to expire; for dying implies a change of condition. II. Such as note motion, with locality, that is, motion with relation to place, or distance. The place, or dis- tance, may either be named, or understood ; in both cir- cumstances, fet)n serves fSr the auxiliary to the verb, in the past tenses. For instance : ^d) bin nad) ^ont»on gerittcn, I have rode to London ; tcr geinb ifl nad)ber.g)auptf!at)t marfc^irct, the enemy has marched to the capital. Here the locality is expressed. Frequently it is understood, as in the verbs compounded with the local particles, a))^ off; an, on ; auf, upon ; au^, oiit ; be\>, near : burc^, through; cin, into; fort, forth, forward; t)er, and ()in, towarerfal)rcn, to act, to proceed with. Sect, 5, Reflective Verbs. 295 SECTION V. REFLECTIVE VERBS. When the action, expressed by a verb, returns back to the subject, from which it proceeds, the verb is called reflective, or reciprocal : as, / love myself, 1 cut myself he hurts himself. It must immediately appear, that every verb, im- plying action, is capable of assuming this form: but there are several, in German, which never are used without Ihe reciprocal pronouns. These are reflectives, in the strictest sense of the word, and to them, in par- ticular, the present section is devoted. May it suffice, out oltheir number, to slate the following; anmapCU, to presume, to claim ; anfc!^i(fen, to prepare ; *aufs: fc^wingcn, to rise ; dugern, to intimate, also to come forth, to appear; bebanfen, to thank for a Hung; *be^ ten! en, to consider ; *bcfinbett, to find ; *be9eben, to resign ; *bc{)elfen, to put up with, to be contented : bes= ru()mcn, to boast ; *befinnett, to reflect ; *bewerben, to sue, or apply for ; einbitbeu, to imagine ; *i\\t{)oXUxi, to abstain; *entfd}lteffen, to resolve; erbarmeii, to pity, to have mercy ; frcuen, to rejoice ; grdmen, to grieve ; getrauen, to be confident; ru{)men, to boast; *imter:? tlel()en, to venture, to dare; Wibcrfe^cn, to resist. It will be useful to show an example of the conjuga- tion of those verbs ; and, for that purpose, one shall be selected, the inflection of which is regular. Those marked with a star, are irregular, and must be looked for in the list of irregular verbs. Qg6 On the Verb. Part I. Chap. 4. (Bid:) freiien, to rejoice. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Present. Singular. Singular. 1. !jd> freue mid), I re- i. !jd) freue mic^, (if) I re- joice, joice. 2. 2)u freuef? (or freufl) 2. :5)u freuejl bid^, (if) thou bic|), thou rejoicest. rejoice. 3. @r (fie, c^) freuet (or 3. ©r (fie, es) freue fid?, freut) flC^, he (she, it) (if) he (she, it) rejoice, rejoices. PluraL Plural. 1. 2Biv freuen un^, we i. %\t freuen un^, we re- rejoice, joice. 2. 3^t freuet (or, freut) 2. J{jr freuet eucf>, you re- iuA}, you rejoice. joice. 3. ©ie freuen ficlJ, they 3. Sie freuen fic^^, they re- rejoice, joice. Preteriniperfect. Singular. Singular. 1. 3cip freuete (or freute) i. ^d} freuete rnict?, (if) I re- ntier), I rejoiced. joiced. 2. 2)u freuetef? (or freu: 2. 25u freuetefl M(f;,(if)thou tefl) Mc^, thou rejoi- rejoiced, cedst, &c. ^c. Sect. 5. Reflective Verbs. 297 INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. Prelerperfecl. Singular. Singular, 1. 3^ ^^&^ w^ic|> gefveut i. 3c|) ^abemici^ gefrcut, (if) (or gefreuet), I have I have rejoiced, rejoiced. 2. 2)u U^ bici) gefreut, 2. Du Mc^ bid) sefi'cut, thou hast rejoiced. (if) thou have rejoiced. 3. (§r Nt fidb gefreut, he has rejoiced. &c. 1. 2Biv t)aben un^ gefreut, we have rejoiced. 2. 3^^^ ^fltif euclj gefveut, you have rejoiced. 3. (5ie ^abcn fic^ gefreut, they have rejoiced. * Prelerpluperfect. Singular, Singular. 1. 3c^ 6atte mid) gefmit, i. 3cl? t)Stte micf) gcftcut. I had rejoiced. (if) I had rejoiced. 2. "Du battejl bic^ gefreut, 2. Su ^dttell bid) gefreut, thou liadsi rejoiced. (if) thou hadst rejoiced. 3. @r6atte ficb gefreut, he 3. @r ^dtte fic^ gefreut, (if) had rejoiced. he had rejoiced. &c. &c. 298 On the Verb, Part L Chap. 4. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. First Future, Singular, Singular. 1. 3^ werbe mic^ freucn,i. !jci? werbe micfc freuen, I shall rejoice. (if) I shall rejoice. 2. 2)u wix^ bic^ frcuen, 2. 2)u wcrbefl M* freuen, thou shalt, or wilt, re- (if) thou shalt rejoice, joice, &c. 3. (?r w'lxb ftdb freuen, he shali, or will, rejoice. Plural, 1. 2Dirwcr&en un^freuen, we shall rejoice. 2. ;[5^r werbet cud) freuen, you shall, or will, re- joice. 3. (Sle werben jicb freuen, they shall, or will, re- joice. Second Future. Singular. Singular. 1. 3^ werbe mid? gefrcut i. 3ct) werbe mid) ftcfrewt ^abcn, 1 shall have re- bflben, fiQ I shall have joiccd. rejoiced. 2. 2)u wirfl bidb gefreut 2. 2)u werbejl bic^ gefreut ^abeti, thou shalt have ()aben, 00 ihou shalt rejoiced. have rejoiced. &c. kc. Sects. Reflective Verbs. 299 First Future Conditional. Singular. 1. 3<^ whbt mlc^ freuen, I should, or would, rejoice. 2. 2)11 ttJiirbejI bi^ freuen, - thou shouldst, or wouldst, rejoice, &c. Second Future Conditional. Singular. 1. 3c^ wiirbe mid) gefreut ^ahen, I should, or would, have rejoiced. &c. IMPERATIVE. Singular. Plural (1. ^viucn wiv un^, let us rejoice.^ 2. ^vetie (bu) bic^, rejoice 2. ^rewet for freutj O^v) rthou^. euc|l, rejoice (you). 3. ^reue er ffie, egj |ic^, 3. ^g^reuenfi'e ficliJ; let them let him fher, itj rejoice. rejoice. INFINITIVE. Pres. ©idJ freuen, to rejoice. Pret. perfect, ©idf) gefreut ^aben, to have rejoiced. Fut. ©ic^ freuett WCvben, to be about to rejoice. TARTICIPLE PRESENT. ©ic|) fveucnb, rejoicing. 300 On the Verb. Part I. Chap. 4. OBSERVATIONS. 1. Most of the reflective verbs govern the reciprocal pronouns in tlie accusative, a icw in the dative case. Of the latter class are, atimagen, cinbitbcn, getraucn: as, ic^ mafic mir an, bu bilbejl t>ir cin, id) gctraue mir* The impersonal, e6 baud)t, it seemetb, either takes the accusative, or tlie dalive : as, c§ bduc^t m&}, or, e^ \)Ci\X&)t mir, it seems to me. 2. Some verbs are only used, as reflectives, in a particular signification. For example: ft(^ bcbcttfctl, to pause, for the purpose of reflection, to hesitate, from bcbenfen, to reflect upon, to consider ; fid) bcrufcn, to appeal to, from bcrufen, to call; ftc^ bcfc^cibcn, to be contented with, from bcfd)etben, to point out, to direct, to enjoin ; \\&j flird^tcn, to be afraid, from furd)tcn, to fear; fid? ()Uten, to be cautions, to beware, from Ijutcn, to guard ; fid) toerantWOttcn, to excuse one'sself, to argue against accusation, from \)Crantn?ortcn, to answer for. 3. Others ar^, in the same signification, employed as simple verbs, and as reflectives : for instance, irren, aiid fid) irrcn, to be mistaken ; fdyCUcn, and fid) fc^CUCn, to be shy of a thing; janfcn, and fic^ janfcn, to quarrel, 4. The reflective verbs are joined wilh the first auxi- liary, !)abcn. Sact. 6, Impersonal Verbs. 301 SECTION VI. IMPERSONAL VEEBS. Verbs, which only occur in the third person of tlie singular number, in as much as they are destitute of the other persons, are termed impersonal. Such are, for example, e§ t?dud)t mic^ (or mir), or mic^ (mir) t>dud)t, it seems to me, methinks; e§ bunft mic^, or mic^ t)Unft, it seems to me ; e$ QC^iemct fi^/ it is proper, becom- ing; c^eMtmir, ormtrefett, it loathes me; e6 grauct mir (mid)), or mir graut, I am afraid. To this class may be added the following, though, in a strict sense, they cannot be called impersonals, because the first and second persons may be used, when required, viz : c6 tonncrt, it thunders ; e6 Uii^t, it lightens ; e6 regnct, it rains; e6 fc^neiet, it snows; C0 fricrt, it freezes; e§ tijCimt, it thaws ; e§ ^CiO^dt, it hails ; c§ reifet, there is a hoar frost. And these : e6 {)Un9ert mid:), or mic^ i)ungcrt, I am hungry; c§ burftet mic^, or mic^ burflct, I am thirsty : c$ fc^lafcrt mid), or mid) fc^ldfcrt, I am sleepy. Those impersonal verbs, which have a pronoun after them, may be said to participate in the nature of reflec- tive verbs : as, e§ t>unf t mid?, e6 gejlemct fid)» And, on the other hand, some of the refiectives have occasion- ally the impersonal form : for instance, e§ freut mic^, it pleases me, I am glad, from fid) frcucn ; e6 gtdmt mid), it grieves me, from ftc^ grdmeu; e6 graut mic^, I am afraid, from fic^ grauen* Wlien the reflective term is put before the verb, the pronoun e§, is in many words omitted : as, mic^ graut, mic^ t>ducl)t* DD 302 Ont/teVerb, PartL Chap, 4,. SECTION vir. VERBS COMPOUND. This division comprehends verbs, that are composed with prepositions, and such inv ariable words, as, in grammar, are styled particles. . All other combinations are excluded, for example, those with a verb, and a noun. A verb compound is either separable, or inseparable: that is to say, the particle, or preposition, at the begin- ning, may either be separated from the verb, or may not. A. Separable are those, composed with a&, as ab leg en, to lay down, from regen, to lay. an, —anfangeti; to begin, fongen, to catch. anj^cim, — an^eimileacn, to refer jletten, to to, place. auf, —- auf^oreti; to cease, ^ |) ore n, to hear. aii^, — au^laffen/ to leave out, laffen, to leave. H^, — &epi!etjcn, to assist, (fe^en, to stand, dar, -* barbrinAcn, to offer, to bringen, to present, bring. babejj, — babepjleden, to stand by, f?cben, to stand. Daocti, — bauonlaufcn, to run off, la u fen, to run. eiiiy — einfaiifcn, to buy in, (aufen/tobuy. Sect, 7. Compound Verbs. 303 fort, as fOfffa^ren, to continue, from fa^xtn, to move along, ^elm, — ^eimfe&rett/ to return home, fe^ren/totum. ^ev, — i^ev&ringen, to bring bringeit; to along, bring. Ijevab, — ^evabfe^en, to lower, fe^en, toset. I^eran, — tjevanfii^ten, tobringon,- — fU^jven, to lead. I^erau^, — j^eraii^^ofen/ to fetch out, ](i ten y to fetch' ^exhcp, — ^erbeprufett; to call towards you, rufetl, to call. |)evein, ~ ^ereinbringen, to bring briitgen, to in, bring. l^crtJor, — j^eroovbringen; to pro- btingen, to duce, bring. I^iit, -<^ Ijingelien, to go along, getteti; to go. ]^inab, — Ijinabrflffen, to letdown, raffen, to let. "^inartj — j^inan^ieffen, to pour to, Qieffen, to pour. Iiittflu^, — i)muiwetfen, to fling mYfen, to out, fling. i^iniiber, — - ^iniibevtragen, to carry tragett/ to over, carry. i^tnunter, — i^inunterfpHngen, to leap fpvinp^en, to down, leap. mit, — mitnei^meii, to take with nei^men, to you ; also, to censure, take. na^, — nadpforgen; to follow, to forgen, to succeed, follow. mbit, — nieberfiof en, to strike i?of en, to down, push, to strike, DD 2 30't On the Verb. Part I. C/iap. 4. tb, as obliegen, to be incum- bent on, fromnegen, tolie, vet, — porgebeii/ to pretend, geben, to give. vcxan, —vtxan^tUn, togo before, 8e^en,togo» rorou5; ■— oorau§fe0en, to suppose, fe0en,toput. coriiber, — oori4berfa^ren, to passby, fasten, to move. ijberein, — Uberetnfommen, to agree, fommen; to come. weg/ •— wegbleiben, to stay away, bleibcti, to stay. wUbtr* — wieberfommen, to come fommen, to again, come. iu, — jurcben, to persuade, reben, to talk. 3un*icf> —juriicffe^ten, to return, febren, to turn, aufammen, — jufammenfc^en, to put together, to compose, to construct, fe^ett, to put. Rules. T. The separation takes place 1 , In the iniperalive mood : as, fangc (bu) an, begin (ihou) ; fangc cr an, let him begin ; fangct (i()r) an, be- gin (you) ; fangcn ftC an, let them begin. Thus : i}hxi auf, cease, &c. * In wieberbcfen, to repeat, from bolen, to fetch, it is inseparable; which may lead to the supposition, that the verb should be written, wlberbolCtt: for ihe particle wiber is inseparable. But the circumstance may be accounted for by supposing, that the same particle is used as separable and inseparable, according to a dift'erence of signification, attributed to the verb, with which it is joined. SecL 1- Compaund Verba, 305 2. Ill the indicative, and subjunctive, when the verb is not, by the influence of a pronoun, or a conjunction, removed to the end of the sentence. For instance : ^^ fal)tt fort, I continue ; tu U^t\t fort, thou conlinuest ; erfd{)rt fort, he continues; tt)tr fal)rcn fort, we con- tinue; {{)r fal)rct fort, you continue; fie fasten fotft, they continue. 3. When the intinitive has the preposition §U before it (see Part II. Chap. 1. p. 388 B.), that preposition is placed between the compounding particle, and the verb: as, an^ufangen, (Tufjuljorett, fort5ufa]()ren» 4. The augment ge, in the preterite participle, is inserted between the particle, and the verb: as, angei= fangen, auf9ef)6rt, fortgefal^ren* II. The particle, separated from the verb, is put 1. In the infinitive, and preterite participle, before the verb, as appears from the examples adduced. 2. In the other instances, after the verb, and not only after the verb, from which it has been disjoined, but also alter the subject nominative, if that should hap- pen to stand after the verb (see Part II, Chap. 3.): as, fo fange id) an, thus do I begin ; nun ^ort ber Sarm auf, now the noise ceases: and, generally, after the cases governed by the verb. For example : i6) fangC: ba0 S3uc^ an, I begin the book, verb anfangen; ne^a men urd)9Cbrod)en/ and t>urd)brocpen, from brcd)cn, to break. hbiXf as ubcrfc^en, to get over, to leap over, separable ; . preterite participle, iibcrgefe^t: and ubcrfc^ett, to translate, inseparable ; preterite participle, ilbcrfct^t; both from fe^cn, to put. urn, as umlaufen, to run round, separable and insepa- rable, preterite participle, umgelaufeit, and umss laufcn, from laufen, to run. Unter, as untercjef)en, to go down, to perish, separable ; preterite participle, untergcgangcn, from 9e()en, to go : unkrnef)men, to undertake, inseparable ; pret. part. Utttemommcn, from nel)men, to take- Rules. I. Those verbs, when separable, have a neutral sig- nificalion, without a case following: as, cr bnd)t burd^, he breaks through . er ijl burdjQcbrod^en, he has broken through. 'A hen inseparable, Ihev are transilives, and govern the accusative case: as, bic ^onnc burc^»brid)t bie3Bol!en, the sun breaks through (he clouds. Add the following examples : T)a^ 9^ab iduft um, the wheel runs round, separable ; bcr^unb umlduft ba6 gclb, the dog runs round the field, inseparable. ;^ic^fcrbc fc^cn ubcr, the horses leap over, separable ; bcr Mnabc ubcrfctjt bcn»^Omcr, the boy translates Homer, inseparable, ^jc ©Onnc 9C()t lintcv, the sun sets, separable; id) untcr^ mi)\m ba^ 2Berf, I underlake the work, inseparable. Such is the rule, but a deviation from it occurs in some verbs, composed with burd) and urn* For example, burd)brecl)en, to break iu pieces ; umflogcH, to knock Sect. 7* Compound Verbs. 309 down, to overset, to overturn ; umttJCrfett, to throw down, to overturn ; umjlurjett, to overthrow ; umbrc* t)tn, to turn about, to twist about; umbringen, to kill: arc separable, though they are used as verbs transitive. This must be considered either as a mere exception, or may be explained for, as I have done in another place*, by saying, that the rule is only applicable, when the component particle has its first, or original, signification. When that signification is altered, the verbs, which were inseparable, become separable. The original significa- tion of burc!^ is through, but in that example it means asunder: utn denotes circular motion, but in the in- stances above the idea of inversion and change^ or some other notion, seem to prevail. II. In these compounds the accent varies: for, when they are used as separables, it is laid upon the pre- position, as, t)urc!i)brc(^en ; when they are inseparable, the preposition is void of accent, as, t>urd)bte'd)en» Thus u'mlaufett, separable— umtauYen, inseparable; uhzx^ia ^cn, separable— uberfc'fecn, inseparable; u'ntcrgeljen^ separable — untcrne'f)men, inseparable. D. Some verbs are doubly compounded, with parti- cles separable, and inseparable : for example, aufetss jiet)en, to bring up, to educate ; autJCtrrauen, to entrust. The particles auf and an, are to be found among the separables ; ei* and ^cr are inseparable. These- verbs, though separable after the first particle, do not take the syllable gc, in the preterite participle : as, auferjogen/^ AWertraut* J>. Of those, which are composed with nouns, it is to Exercises, p. 66. 310 On the Verb, Part I. Chap, 4 be observed, that some are separable, as, ftcpf^red)cn, to acquit; 9(cid)fommen, to equal; lo^rciJTcn, to tear loose : and some inseparable. Several of llie latter have the augment in the preterite participle, like simple verbs. For example : frD(;(0(f Ctl; to exult ; ^antljaben, to han- dle ; fru()f!ucf en, to breakfast ; UcbduQCln, to exchange fond looks : which make the preterite participles gcftot)* lorft, 9ef)ant)i;abt, 9cfrul)j!iicft, gcUebdiigelt Those withi^oU/ full, are inseparable, and reject the augment: as, tJoWjiel^en, to execute, pret. part. t?oU5ogen» Concerning the Signification of Compound Verbs, In reviewing those which are separable, few diffi- culties occur. The prefixes, for the most part, may be rendered intelligible by translation. Thus, cA, signifies off; an, on ; auf, up, or upon ; au§, ouf of; bei?, by; tar, there; cin, in, or into; fort, forth, or forward ; glcid^, like ; I)cim, home ; tnit, with ; nacJ), after ; nieber, down ; ob, on, upon ; t)Or, liefore ; WCg, away ; wicfccr, again. Only i)tn, and Ijcr, require an explanation. They are both particles of locality, .^in, expresses motion proceeding from the person, who is speaking, to another point ; i)er, denotes motion from any place towards that person. Thus, cr Cjel)t l^in, he goes along, means, he goes from the fjoint, in which the subjective person is, to some other point ; and, er fommt {)Cr, he comes, signifies, he comes from any place towards the person. Therefore, when I bid any one to proceed from me, it will be, 9ef)cn ©ie bin ; and when I desire him to come towards me, fommcn @iel^cr» But more is to be said of the compounds inseparable. The nature, and meaning, of their prefixes, is compli- cated, and calls for some illustration. Sect, 7' Compound Verbs. 311 S5C/ supposed to be related to the preposition be^, serves* 1. To transform verbs neufer into transilives. For example : fol^en, to follow, is a neuter, construed with the dative case ; bcfolgen, to follow, in a metaphorical sense, to obey, a verb transitive, with the accusative ; — arbeiten, to work, to labour, neuter; bcarbeiten, to bestow labour upon a thing, to elaborate, transitive ; — lad)en, to laugh, neuter; be(ad)en, to laugh at, transi- tive ; — jleigen, to ascend, or descend, neuter ; bcfteigctt, to ascend a thing, to mount upon, transitive, as, ten ^()ron befleigcn, to ascend the throne ;— antworteu, to answer, to make answer, neuter ; beantworten, to an- swer, transitive, as, einen SSrief beantworten, to answer a letter. Thus, in English, to rhyme, is a verb neuter, to berhyme, a transitive. 2. In composition with verbs transitive, it has the effect of exchanging the case, governed by the simple verb, for one, depending upon the preposition mit, with. For example : SSlumett auf ben SOSeg flreuen, to strew flowers on the way; here SSlumeu is the accusa- tive case, governed by the verb ftreuen, and t>en SOSeg is governed by the preposition auf* Now, taking the compound beflreueu, it will be, ben SBeg mit S5(umen be|lreuen, to strew the way with flowers ; here the cases are changed, and ben SBeg is governed by the verb ;. the former object accusative, in its turn, is combined with a preposition.— giguren auf ba§ ^apkx ma^len, to paint * A curious, or rather a whimsical, etymology of this particle is offered by an anonymous writer, in the Monthly Magazine, for July 1801, p. 504, It exists in all Teutonick languages ; even in the English, as is proved by the verbs to bedeck, besprinkle, begnaw, begird, berht/me, and others. 312 On the Verb, Part I. Chap. 4. figures on the paper ; gigureu is the object accusative, governed by llie simple verb mal)len» Making the latleK a compound witii bc, the phrase will then be : ba§ ^a:s ipier mit gigurcn bcmat)lcn, to paint the paper with figures ; t)a§ ^aipicv is become the object accusative, and giguren isjoined with the preposition mit* 3. Any part of speech may, by means of the prefix bC/ receive the ciiaracter of a verb : as, bcflugeln, to furnish with wings, from bet S'^^9^'^/ *'^^ ^ving» ^ sub- stantive ; bcreid^crn, to enrich, from veid), rich, an ad- jective.* The German grammar admits this operation with considerable freedom, though not every combina- tion, which may be formed in that manner, can be re- garded as classical. For itjslance : @r fd)rcit jud}l)Ct)! he cries huzza — ic^ will x\)n bejuc^^cvjen, I will huzza !}im ! that means, I will make him change his note, I will punish him, or something like it. Here an inter- jection is transformed into a verb. (Sv ncnnt fi(^ ^crc ?0^afcow, he calls himself Mr. Maskow— idp tDlU il^n h^ maffowcn, I will maskow him, i. e. I will teach him how to use that name, I will make him know what he is doing, or a similar idea. Here a verb is made of a pro- per name, by the aid of the particle bc» These expres- sions are, in fact, a sort of jargon, or cant language : yet they show the nature of that particle. 4. In some instances, the signification of the simple verbs does not seem to be allertd, by the composition with be : as, forbern and beforbcrn, to further, to for- ward ; furd)tcn ami befurd)tcn, to fear. The simples as well as the compounds, arc employed as trausitives. • Thus in English, to befriend, to beguile, to behead, to bedew, from friend, guile, head, dew. Sect. 7' Compound Ferbs* 313 However, if the Hse of such verbs be strictly enquired into, a diiFerence may be discovered. For example ; bcs f or^ern, means to promote a person to a higher rank ; io which sense the simple, fort'eru, rarely, or never, oc- curs ; and befurcl)ten, to fear, is not applied to persons^ as objects, but only to things, as, i(^ befurCi^te biefetl Umf!anb, I fear this circumstance ; whereas furcl)ten is capable of both significations. Moreover, the latter seems to denote a stronger fear, and bcfurc^teu merely a|iprehension, or doubt. @nt signifies 1. Privation: as, cntc]()ren, to deprive of honour, to dishonour, from et)ren; mUxhzxl, to disinherit, from erben ; entbinben, to free from a tie, hence to act as a midwife, Fr. accoucher, from bitlben ; entfeffcltt, to free from fetters, to set at liberty, from fcffclu ; tnt\>hlhxn, to deprive of population, to depopulate, from t)a6 SJolf^ the people ; entwaffucn, to disarm, from Vljaffnen. It is, \q this signification, the reverse of bc* 2. Removal, or motion, from a place: as, entflicfjCtt, to fly away, from fliel)en ; CUtfu^-ren, to carry off, from ful)ren ; cntjie()en, to withdraw, to take away, from ^ua i)tn. Sometimes, it seems to express approach, or mo- tion towards a certain object : as in eittbietett, to bid, to send word to ; etttf^vedjen, to answer to, to correspond with, to suit with. Thus in the adverb entgCgCH, to- wards, encountering. The notion of approach implies the proceeding from a certain place towards another, so that the idea of removal from a place is, in some man- ner, connected with it. 3. It notes origin, and beginning : as, cntfpringen, to spring forth, to arise, from fptingCIt ; entflci)en, to arise, to be produced, from ftet)cn ; entjuntett, to inflame, to E £ 314 On the Verb. Part I. C/iaj). 4. set on fire, from junben ; cntbrennctt, metaphorically, to calch fire. The first signification is to be considered as the radi- cal one, from which the other two are derived. For re- moval is a species of privation, which the place sustains, whence the removal is made : and origin and beginning may be brought under the same head, so far as that which arises and begins to appear, withdraws, or disen- gages itself from that wherein it was before contained, or concealed, and thus causes a sort of privation to the same. The verbs with ttlt that signify a removal, have the place, or person, from which the motion is made, in the dative case. ^m^ is considered as a mere alteration of ent/ before the letter f* But it might also be said, that it was a corruption of cin, in. For it seems, in some instances, to answer the sense, which may be attributed to cttl : as, in empfangen, to receive, which originally might be tix\^ fangen; cm^)fint»eti, to perceive, to feel, cinfinben. In other verbs, it does not suit so well : for example, in et1tpfc!)lcn, to recommend ; where the first signification of cnt may seem to be applicable, if we suppose the primitive meaning of cntfcl)lcn (now cmpfet)lcn) to be, to strip of fauUs, to make faultless, to represent as faultless. @r denotes 1. The obtaining of an object, in consequence of ac- tion, or exertion : as, ctfcd^tctl, to obtain by fighting — 251 c ©ngtdnber ^aben cincn ©ieg erfod)tcn, the English, by fighting, have gained a victory. Tlius, crreitcrt, to obtain by riding ; crtanjctl, to obtain by dancing. 2. A motion upwards : as, crt)eben, to raise up ; cx^ ric^tcn, to erect. Sect. 7' Compound Verbs. 315 3. Tlie act of opening : as, etoffnctt, to open : ct^ btcd^ett, to break open. 4. The act of inventing, and producing to light : as, erbcnfcn, to find out by meditation, to invent ; crfmtctT, to invent; crftnnen, to invent by reflection. 5. The placing, or being placed, or getting, into a certain slate, or condition : as, ewdrmeu, to warm ; it^ rotl^en, to grow red, to blush ; erfc^reden, to terrify, and to be terrified. @C» The power of this prefix, whatever it primarily might be, is, at present, not easy to be distinguished. It may, perhaps, have consisted in an intension of signifi- cation. But now most of the verbs, composed with this particle, seem to be the same in meaning as the simples: for example, braud)en, and gebraud^en, to use ; benfcn, and gebenfcrt, to think : though it may happen, that some particular signification is more usual, in the simple verb than in the compound, and again another more common, with the compound than the simple. For in- stance, braud)en frequently denotes to want, to stand in need of, to have occasion for ; but gebrauc^eu is scarcely ever employed in that sense. Thus Qcbcnfeu, with the genitive case, means to remember, to think of: as, gCs^ benfe meiner, remember me, think of me ; in which construction bcnfen never occurs.— This is the same particle, which is prefixed to the preterite participle, where it evidently is applied to indicate the past action of the verb. — In the districts of the Upper German dia- lect it is, here and there, by the common people, put before every infinitive : as, getobCH, for (oben, to praise ; gelicbcn, for Ueben, to love, SSciC implies J. The idea, awai/: as, tjertreibett, to drive away^ E £ 2 3l6 On the Verb, Part I, Chap. 4. from treibcn, to drive ; uerjagcn, to chase away, from jagen; t)erfd)en!en, to give away, fromfc^cnfcn*. Hence it signifies 2. A lossf: as, i?erlieren, to lose ; t)erfpielcn, to lose at play ; and iJ. Destruction, or consumption: as, \)erbluf)cn, to fade; t)ertt?clfen, to wither; verf djmad)ten, to be fa- mished, to die of hunger; Verbtuten, to bleed to death. It denotes 4. Prohibition : as, \)erbicten, to forbid ; t)crl)int)ern, to hinder ; tjcrwef^rcH, to prohibit ; Vjcrbittcn, to refuse, to decline ; t^erfagcn, to deny, to refuse, 6. Change, or transmutation : as, tjerru(f en, to move a thing out of its place ; t)erfd)tcben, to put off; \)cr^ fe^en, to transpose ; ver^flan^en, to transplant ; vetdtt^ tlXXi, to change ; \jent?cd)fcln, to confound. 6, It signifies doing wrong, deviating from what is just, and proper: as, t)crful^ren, to seduce; WCtleitcn, to misguide ; tjerfatjcn, to spoil by adding too much salt ; fid) loerreci^ncn, to misreckon ; ftd) tocrfd)rciben, to com- mit an errour in writing ; fid) \jcrfprcd)en, to make a mistalip in speaking; tergcffcn, to forget ; ftd) VCrflcUetT, to dissemble. 7. Shutting up, or closing : as, tjcrfcblicffen, to lock up; ttcr(!o^fen, to stop up; locrmauevn, to stop by * Even in ihe verb, perfprecbcn, to promise, it is thus to be explained, ©prect^en, lo speak, combined with per, literally signities to speak away, i. e. to part with, by your speech; to f^ive up your future independence of actins:, respecting auy particular thing, by a declaration made to that purpose. t This is answered by the adverb awuyy in the English language; as in these examples, to trifle aicay on€*& time, to drink away ent^s senses. Sect. 7. Compound Verbs. 317 means of a wall, to wall up ; V)erftgeln, to seal up ; t>Cl*s: pid)en, to close, or slop, with pitch ; ttemacjcln, to nail up, to spike. 8. It enforces, and strengthens, the signification of verbs : as, l>etc!)ren, to honour, from c^xtXl ; \)erfpottetT, to mock ; verlad)en, to laugh at ; \?crlei(;cn, to grant. 9. It involves the idea of a close union, and connec- tion : as, ^erflcd)tcn, to entwine, to implicate ; ^CtbtnbetT, to connect; Verbrubcrn, to join by a brotherly tie; t)er:s fc^wagern, to unite by intermarriage; V>erfd)tt)Oten, to conspire. And lastly, 10. It expresses the placing, or getting (i. e. being placed), into a certain stale, or condition : as, DevbefferrT, to belter, to make better; tterbunfeln, to darken, to ob- scure ; V)evebcln, to ennoble, to improve ; tJergottem, to deify ; t?eraUcn, to grow obsolete, to fall into disuse ; t)ercirmen, to fall into poverty. 3er notes separation of parts, dispersion, destruction : as, jertreten, to tread in pieces, to crush; §errciben, to rnbtoaioms; jerprcuen, to scatter, to disperse; jers: jtoren, to destroy. 5D^if , (or mi§), answering to the English mis, 1. Marks an action, done, or carried on, in a wrong manner : as, mtgbraud)en, to abuse, from braud)en, to use ; mi^()anbe(n, to ill treat, from ()anbeln, or hil)axi^ teln, to deal with ; mtfibcutert, to misinterpret, from feeutch, to interpret ; mig^erjlef)en, to misunderstand, from '0ix\tit)tn* 2. It has u negative power: as, miflfattcn, to dis- please, from gefallen, to please ; mipiElQCn, to disap- prove, from biUigcn, to approve. — Those significations are also to be seen in union with nouns : as, t)a§ ^i^\>tx^ jlanbnig/ the misunderstanding; ber 50?tgbraud), the E E 3 318 Onthererb. Part I. Chap, 4, abuse; baS SDligtrauctt, suspicion; mtgfadig, unpleas- ing, offensive ; mi^trauifdj, suspicious, ^inter signifies 1. Behind: as, l){ntcr(affen, to leave behind. 2. It is used in a metaphorical sense : as, l){ntcr:s Bringcn, to give secret intelligence ; ()inter9C()Cn, to de- ceive ; ()intcrtrciben, to prevent. And in nouns ; as, fete ig)tntcrlij!, the cunning ; l)interlijlig, crafty. Uutcr corresponds with 1. Tiie English under, Lat. sub: as, untcme^mctt, to undertake. 2. The Latin inter, and ob : as, untcrbreci^en, to inter- rupt ; untcrlaffcn, to omit. The particle Un, like the English un, is a privative, but occurs only in combination with nouns, and preterite participles. — (Srj, answering to arch, before nouns, de- notes the chief, or first of a class. tUn, in the verbs umbringctl, to put to death, to mur- der ; and umf ommcn, to perish, needs an explanation, though it is hardly here in its proper place, as it is se- parable in those verbs. It first signifies about, then denotes change, after that loss, in which last sense it is applied to those verbs. :Scmant)cn umbringen, to put a person to death, is an elliptical expression for, jcmanben urn ba§ Ccbetl bringen, to cause somebody to lose his life. In a similar way, umf ommett is to be interpreted. 319 CHAPTER V. ON THE PARTICIPLE. The participle being deduced from the verb, and sharing its power and signification, is, in the English lan- guage, not improperly, considered as a part of the same. Here a particular chapter is assigned to it, as a distinct subject of grammar: because there is something pecu- liar in its use, which requires, that it should be treated of separately. It seems to form a connecting link be- tween the noun and the verb, thouglnit neither belongs to the one, nor to the other. The Germans have two participles, the present, and the preterite : and we shall speak, in SECTION I. OF THE present PARTICIPLE. It is made of the infinitive mood, by addition of the letter ' ; bag (nufenbe ^ai)x, the running (or current) year. It is, like any other adjective, capable of the four forms : as, the second form, erquicfenbcr 9Bein, refresh- ing wine ; |larfenbe (S^eifc, streni;thening food ; tu\)^ Icnbcg ©Ctrdnfe, cooling drink. Fourth form: dn liC:? bcnbcr SSater, a loving father; einc traucrnbc (Sc^wcjler, a mourning sister ; dn Vreincnbc^ ^inb, a weeping child. Examples, of the first and third forms, have been above given. The first, or adverbial, form is never put after any verb ; especially, not after the second auxiliary, fcptt, to be. Here the participle not only swerves from the usage of the adjective, but also leaves us destitute of a verbal combination, much in practice wiih the English. For, with regard to the adjective, it is rouHnon, in Ger- man, to place it advcrbiijjly after verbs: for instance, bicg if! fd)6n, this is beautiful; jene6 ijl l)d§nd), that is ugly.* And by means of the present participle, joined to the second auxiliary, the English produce what is termed the definite^ or determined, time: as, ** I am writing; he is reading ; we were looking; he has been walking; they will be goini;."t But the German participle cannot be thus empl(»ye(», except where, from its signification, it is quite regarded as an adjective : as, c§ ift rciljenb, it is charming; bicfc S$clcis bigung ij! franfcnb, this insult is mortifying ; il)rc Sittcn irarcn fc()V Cinncljmenb/ her manners were very cap- ♦ See p. 162. t See p. fi52. Seet, 1. Present Participle, 321 tivating ; tie S^lotl^ ifl bnngent^/ the necessity is pressing ; tiie Sajlt ijl fcrud ent>, the burden is oppressive. As an adjeclive, it may be said to admit liie degrees of comparison, by means of additional endings. How- ever, these degrees are not equally in use, with all par- ticiples. Indeed, the comparative only occurs of such, as have more the signification of adjectives, than of the verbs, from which they are taken. At least, they are become so current, as adjectives, that, in common prac- tice, they are hardly looked upon as parts of a verb. Of that description are, for example, rei^Ctlfe (from rei^eu, to charm) charming, pleasing, comparative, Xi\^ZX(^iX, more charming; einnel)mcnb, captivaliug, agreeable, comp. einnci)menber ; flieffenb, flowing, fluent, comp. flieffenbcr ; bringenb, pressing, urgent, comp. t»rins: genbcr ; brucfenb, oppressive, heavy, comp. t)irucfent>er* Now these, and others of the same kind, suffer the com- parative degree in the first, but scarcely in any other form. Other participles are not to be met with, in the comparative degree, at all. If with them a comparison is to be made, it must be done through the medium of the word mcf)r, more. — The superlative degree, may be applied to those participles, which allow the comparative : as, t>cr rei^enb(!e/ bcr fliefTenbjle ; but it cannot be trans- ferred to the others. The German participle has not enough of the nature of the verb, to serve for the purpose of constituting a member of a sentence : which power is principally as- signed to it, in other languages. In English, you may, for example, say with propriety, ** Seeing the great nnmber of prisoners, I concluded, that the action had terminated in our favour." This sentence consists of 322 On the Participle, Part I, Chap, 5, two members : Jirst, 1 saw tlie prisoners : second, I con- cluded. The first member is expressed by the partici- ple. So the following : " Hearing the noise of the can- non, he started up" — for, he heard the noise of the can- non, and started up.— In German, the participle cannot perform this office: the members of a sentence are constructed in some other way, and generally by means of conjunctions: as, " I saw the great number of pri- soners, flw«? concluded;" or, " when (as) I saw the num- ber of prisoners, I concluded ;" — ** when he heard the noise of the cannon, he started up ;" or, " as soon as he heard the noise of the caimon, he started up.'* Much less would the language bear the compound participle, with the auxiliaries : as, " having loved," or, *' having been loved." It would, for instance, be a great errour, to translate by the participle the following sentence: ** Having received your letter, I immediately desired my servant to proceed"— ^abcnt) eri)altcn ^i)Xt\\ 25nef, &c. The structure must be changed, in this, or a similar man- ner: " I received your letter, anrf immediately desired," &c. or, " When {as soon as) I had received your letter, I immediately desired my servant," &c. The conjunc- tion, tnt>cm, while, was formerly much used for resolving the participial construction of other tongues, into the German idiom. But it occurs, at present, less fre- quently. Though that is the most proper use of the participle, in other languages, the German does not acknowledge it; unless the following mode of employing the parti- ciple be considered, as connected with the former. Namely, it sometimes expresses the manner of acting, being, or suftering, and is then adverbially joined to « Sect. 1. Present Participle, 323 verb. For example : SBeitient) frrac!^ er 5U mtr, 7veeping he said to nie ; er fc^te fi(^ fd^ttjcigeub nieber, he sat down, preserving silence ; ftC jlanbcu traucmb bet) t>em ©rabe, they stood mourning near the tomb. The poets occasionally exceed the limits prescribed by common usage ; and give a greater latitude to the verbal capacity of the participle. This is, in fact, an afiectation of foreign manners. Allowance is to be made for poetical licence ; and certain privileges are to be granted to the muse, in order to distinguish her own from other compositions. Yet this liberty ought not to be too far extended ; nor is it to be supposed, that what most deviates from the rules of prosaick accuracy, is always most poetical. It will not be amiss to mention a few instances from Voss's translation of Homer. This is an excellent version of that great poet : but the scru- pulous imitation of the original, to which it aspires, and which often has the appearance of pedantry, may per- haps furnish ground for censure. Among its peculiari- ties is the frequent use of the present participle, which, though it corresponds with the Greek, is not counte- nanced by the genius and spirit of the German language. For example : Iliad^ Book 1. V. 51. T^od) nutt gegen fie felbj! ba6 l^erbe gefdjog t)inn)ent»enb, Xxaf ex— Turning the bitter arrows against them, he inflicted wounds. V. 130. ©egeix il)n rief antwortent) ber t)6lferfur(l 2£9amemnott — Agamemnon answering called to him. 324 On the Participle. Part I. Chap. 5 V. 147. |)a! bu in un\)crfd)dmtl)eit 9cf)ullcter, finncnb auf VOrt{)eU— Ah ! thou, clad in impudence, think- ing of gain. V. 290. S^m in bic ret>' cinfatlcnb bcgann ber ebfe 2Cd)iUeu§ — Interrupting him, the noble Achilles began. V. 326. ^ir\ mit mefjrern fommcnb— Commg- iviih more people. V. 345. Scner fprad)6, unb $atro!(o§, bcm Ucbcn greunbe gel)ord^cnb, giii)rtau§ bcm jelt— He spoke it, and Patroclus, obeying his dear friend, led her forth from the tent. V. 420. ^u inbeg an beS meer§ fc^ncUwanbclnbcn fd)(ffcn bid) fc^enb, 3urnc bcm :^anacn>ol!-.iS>fl^ ing thyself near the ships, indulge thy spleen against the Grecians, Book 9. V. 57. Sqo&) ba§ wort anflauncnb— Greatly admiring the speech. V. 86. ^n ben {)anben bie ragcnbcn f^ccrc bcwegcnb— Brandishing in their hands the lofty spears. V. 194. SScrlaffcnb ben fife n?o cr n\l)U— Leaving his seat. V. 196. S5cib' anbcr .i^anb anfaffcnb— 5eiri/ig- them both by the hand. The most essential quality, which the present parti- ciple retains of tiic verb, is, that it may govern a case. And this is perfectly agreeable to the nature of the language, provided a sentence is not clogged by long, or many, words of that description. For example: Sectl. Present Participle. 325 ^te aUe§ belebenbc (Sonne, the sun, which animates every thing ; f er grud)te bttngcnbc (Sommer, the sum- mer, which produces fruit ; bie mix be\)Drj!e^ent)e ®cs: fal^r, the danger hanging over me ; ba6 un§ loerfol^cnbe @efc!^i(f, the fate persecuting us. — Let it be noticed, that the cases governed are placed before the participle. Sometimes, the case and participle are drawn lofretiier, and written as one word : for instance, ^{n tf)xlkhmM ©emutt), instead of, ein a^xd licbenbe§ ®cmut^, a mind that loves honour; bcr ttjac^l)abenbe £)fftcter, for, bet S[Bad)e ]S)abenbe £)fftcter, the officer upon guard ; Ht ges: fe^gebenbe ®cwaU, for, bie ©efe^e gebenbe ^zwalt, the legislative authority; bie ftlegful^renben Wlad)U, for, MxkQ ful}renben, the belligerent powers. From analogy to the foregoing, the participles of re- flective verbs uiight likewise be admitted : as, ^er fid) freuenbe SSater, the father, who rejoices; bie ftd) gr^ menbe MntUXf the mother, who chagrines, or frets, her- self. Yet they are seldom made use of. Of impersonal verbs, as such, no present participle can exist. To answer the Latin participle in dus, which is of a gerundive signification, .and in English expressed by the preterite participle, with to be before it, the Germans have formed a similar participle from their present, by means of the preposition, ju, to. For example : ^a§ l^Od) JU f(i)d^enbeSSerbienft, merit to be highly esteemed; t)it}j\X tabelnbe (Strenge, severity which is to be blamed; eine fc^wer 5u bel^auptenbe SSefi^ung, a possession to be maintained with difficulty. Thus: «g)Oi^§uel)renber^err, honourable Sir, (who is greatly to be honoured). — This use of the participle sprung from the infinitive, with that preposition. For the Germans (like some other nations) employ the infinitive of the active voice, with §u, where F F 326 Present Participle. Part 1. Chap. 5. the English, more properly, resort to the passive : as, ^ief ijl JU lobcn, this is to be praised (literally, to praise) ; ba^ ijlt §U tabeltt, that is to be blamed (lit. to blame*). The present participle, may, in English, be converted into a subslanlive, by a preceding article : as, the writ- ing, the reading. This cannot be done, in German, where the infinitive only serves for that purpose : as, t>(^$ ©d;reiben, J?aS Sefenf. SECTION II. THE PRETERITE PARTICIPLE. Its formation is sufficiently known from the fourth chapter. It either ends in f, (et), or n {en) ; and has, for the most part, the augment ge before it : as, getobt, gefptod^cn* That augment is only refused by verbs com- pound inseparable, and by a few others, whose infinitive is hi ieren, or iren: as, rcgicrt, lamcnticrt, l)afcUert, The function of the preterite participle is twofold : Jirst, when combined with the auxiliary verbs, it makes the compound tenses of conjugation ; and secondly, as an adjective, it is joined to substantives. In the latter capacity, it is more freely used by the Germans, than by the English. Tiie former employ, witiiout difference, any preterite participle as an adjective, and in all the four forms. For example : second f. ©cUcJbtcr ^Ol^H/ ♦ See p. 418. t See p. 111. 5. and p. 420. Sect, 2. Preterite Participle, 3^7 loved son ; third f. hw gepriefene Nugent), the praised virtue ; fourth f. eitt \)txa6)kU^ ©efcl^Opf, a despised creature. The nature of an adjective is farther manifested in the degrees of comparison, of which this participle is susceptible; though the use of those degrees is limited, as has been stated in another place*. Some participles remain, in the quality of adjectives, the verbs of which are become obsolete. Such are, bc^s f)aftet, afflicted with; befc^cit>en, modest; gewogen, friendly, favouring; gefd)icft, clever; 9efd)Iac^t, neat, proper ; gett)Ol)nt/ accustomed. Others, though redu- cible to existing verbs, are considered as mere adjectives, in point of signification. Of this kind are, beru!)mt, renowned ; QiWfyxt, learned ; VJCrgtlUgt, pleased, gay, happy; tjewanbt, related by kindred; \?oll!ommcn, perfect. There is, indeed, so strong a relation between the nature oi the preterite participle, and that of the noun, that, on the other hand, adjectives are formed in the participial shape, though not derived from any verb : for instance, gcftttct, good mannered, from tie (Sittetl, manners, a noun substantive ; bel^et^t, courageous, from t)a0 ^crj/ the heart ; hziCi^Xt, advanced in years, old, and ubcrjal^rt, superannuated, from t)a6 Sal)r, the year; be=: mitUlt, wealthy, from bie 5U^ittel, plur. wealth ; bemoofl, covered with moss, from ba§ Wloo^, the moss ; bcfd^tlft, covered with reeds, from t>a0 ©C^ilf, the reed. From simple verbs, compound participles are made, which likewise bear the signification of adjective nouns. This is proved by the following examples : befanut, known, ac- * See p. 185. I. FF 2 328 > On the Participle. Part /. Chap. 5 quainted, from fennCH, lo know; bcrcbt, eloquent, from ret)en, to speak ; befd^affen, circumstanced, from fd^affen, to cause to exist; bettJanbcrt, conversant in a thing, from Wanbcrn, to wander; abgencigt, disinclined, unfavourable, from ncigen, to inclme ; tjerfoffeu, given to drinking, from fauffen, to drink inlemperalely; V^erfd^Wtcgen, habituated lo secrecy, faithful to a secret, from fd^wcigCtt, to be silent. The preterite participle, in English, may be put toge- ther with the present participle of an auxiliary verb: as, * having loved, being loved, havii)g been loved ;" the German language does not license this connection, as has been observed in the first Section of the present Chapter. The signification of the pret. participle is cither pas- sive, or denotes a certain stale, or quality. But some of these participles, joined with the verb f ommen, and ex- pressing the manner of coming, or approaching, seem to have an active power : as, cr f ommt QCVitten, he comes (lit. ridden) riding, or on horseback, from reitcn ; er fommt gelaufcn, he comes running, from laufcn ; cr f ommt gcfal)tcn, he comes driving, i.e. in a carriage, from faijrcn ; cr Fommt gcflogcn, he comes flying, i. e. upon wings, from flicgcn; cr f ommt gclad^t, he comes laughing*. The syllable un, being put before any participle, re- verses the signification, or makes it negative. For in- stance : ungelicbt, not loved; ungcflraft, unpunished; imgcrdd)!, unavenged. ♦ Something similar, though not exactly the same, is to be found in other Teutonick languages, for example in the Swedish, komma t&jgandes, to approach slowly, or solemnly. See Moller's Swedish Dictionary, word t&ga. In German, they are chiefly participles from verbs of motion, which are thus combined with fottimen ; but the last example, above adduced, er fommt aelJCfJt, which is taken from Lessing^s comedy, the Jew; (Die ^ubcn) Scene 19th, shows that this construction may also be applied to other verbs. 329 CHAPTER VI. ON THE ADVERB. From general grammar it is luiown, that adverbs are words, which, in speech, are added to other words,. to express a certain moditicalion, that is to say, a mode <5f action, or existence. Thus there are adverbs denoting manner, order, lime, place, motion, quantity, quality, relation, comparison, doubt, affirmation, negation, de- monstration, interrogation. It would be needless to en- ter into a detail of all these classes : but a few observa- tions suggest themselves, which are of practical utility. Adverbs are not variable, except that some admit the degrees of comparison, as, in English, soon, comp. sooneVy sup. soonest. In German, the adverbs of qua- lity are particularly subject to the degrees of compari- son : as, roo\)l, beffer, am beften, well, better, best ; fd)on, finely ; fc^oner, more finely ; am fd}Ottjl:cn, most finely. Adverbs of quality abound in the German language : for every adjective furnishes such an adverb. The first form of adjectives, thence called the adverbial, may, without limitation, be thus employed. For this reason, it has been maintained, by some grammarians, that adjec- tives are nothing else than adverbs, provided with de- clinable terminations, and adapted to substantives. But this seems a question, in itself of little importance*. To form an adverb of quality, from an adjective, re- * Quintil. Inst. Or. III. ll. Affectata suhtilitaSy circa no^ mina rcrum ambitiose laborans, F F 3 330 On the Adverb. Part I. Chap. 6 quires, in English, the addition of the syllable ty; as, from quiet, quietli/ ; hom fine, finely -, nice, nicely. Tiie German adjective has the njeaus of yielding an adverb ont of its own forms, quite ready for use, v^ithout a similar process. It is true, that in some instances the ending \x6:), appears to answer to the English ty: as, l\XX}^\\&), not lonj; ago ; erfllic^, in the first place ; fd)trers: li&}, hardly, scarcely ; but that ending is not exclusively adverbial. It is found in several adjectives : as, manit:? \\&), manly ; furfllid), princely ; fonigUd), royal, or kingly ; gliicflid), lucky ; 9efdl)rU4), dangerous. Some words become adverbs, by means of an addi- tional*; for example, bereit^, already, from bcrett, ready ; flet§, constantly, from (let, constant ; cilenb§, hastily, from eilcnb, partic. hasting ; befotlbcrS/ particu- larly, from befonber, particular; ailbcr§, otherwise, from anber, other; red)t§, to the right hand, from Xi&jt, right ; UnB, to the left, from Unf, left. Ad<| the dis- tinctive numerals, in ens, which are adverbs : as, cr|lcn0, in the first place ; JweitetlS, secondly; britten^, thirdly, &c. And the following words: bejlcn6, in the best manner; cl^cjlcnS, with the first opportunity ; mcij!cn6, mostly ; l)6c!^ftcn§, at the most ; ubrigcn^, as for the rest, in the mean time. Likewise these compounds: rtllcrbingg, by all means ; fd)led}tcrbin(}6, by any means ; aUerfcitg, on all sides ; bicgfeitg, on this side : jcnfcitg, on the other side ; bcibcrfcit§, on both sides ; bic^fall^, in this case; f^)orn(lreici^§, immediately ; mclma^lS, many times. The adverbial s I consider as being, originally, the characteristick of the genitive case. For, in the first place, it is certain, that the letters is generally used, in the German language, to mark that case. With this Ontke Adierh. 331 power, it is not confined to words of the masculine, or neuter gender, though it is chiefly appropriated to them ; but it may also be subjoined to nouns feminine, when no other mode of dislinotion is at hand. Thus it is right to say, glora'6 @d)onl)eitcn, the beauties of Flora, tiiough gtora is a feminine ; 2^ian'cn§ f!renge Sugcnb, Diana's severe virtue*. In the next place, the genitive case oc- curs absolutely, that is to say, without being governed by any other word ; where a case with a preposition might be expected, as is seen in these examples : ^Cbcnb^, or be0 2(bent)6, for an bem 2£benb/ in the evening ; ^lot^ 9en§, or t)e6 Wtox^tn^, in the morning ; ^itta^^, or be§ ^ittCiQi>, at noon; 50?onta9§, on Monday ; ^ien|!ag6, on Tuesday, &c.t Also, with adjectives: as, gerabc^ v2Bege§, straightways; fcine6 SBegeS, by no means; VDls: trigen gaUe§, in case of any thing contrary happening; alien SaUc§, at all events; folgcnbcn Za^Z^, on the fol- lowing day. In all these instances, the genitive case is characterised by the final s: This is even applied to nouns of the feminine gender: as, '^adjt^, in the night; ^ittwod)^, on Wednesday (supposing it to be from bie SfJlittWOd^c)* And as these words, on account of the adventitious s, resemble the masculine, or neuter gender, the article of either of those genders is sometimes pre- fixed : as, beg SRa^t^, be6 5Qlittn?od)^* But nouns fe- minine, having the characleristick *, are also found with adjectives, and pronouns, in their own gender, before * See p. 153. f The wenitive expresses, sometimes, state, or condition : as, ber ^JZeittung fepn, to be of opinion; ^oxMeni Uptly to be in the intention; Uttmutbe^ ftpW, to be in a state of displeasure, or in a state of dejection, to be displeased, to be dejected. See p. 390. 332 On the Adverb, Part I. Chap. 6, them. For example, mciucr e0 @elt)e0 l^alben, on account of the money; bat 335 On the Preposition. Part I. Chap. 7. i)alhtx is generally used, when there is no article : as, SScrgnugcnS i)albcr, on account, or for the sake, of plea- sure. It occurs abbreviated in beg (}alb/ on that account; \Vt^i)alh, on which account ; and in the four following compound prepositions. Zu^ZXi)alhf without, on the outside of. ^mxijaib, within, in the inner part of. ^berl)alb, above, on the upper side of. Untcri)alb/ below, on the lower side of.* ^♦cgfcitS, on this side of; Lat. ci*: as, X>U^fdth t>C§ StuffcS/ on this side of the river. ;Scnfeit0, on the farther side of ; Lat. trans: as, Scnfcit§ t)CS Slujjc6, on the other side of the river. ^raft, by the power of. Saut, according to, conformably to, by the tendency of: as, 2;ant bc6 S5efc{)l6, according to the order, or by the tendency of the order. fDlittclft, or SScrmittelj!, by the means of. Um:=\i?itten, for the sake of: as. Vim ®otte6 wiiUn, for God's sake; um S^XtX S()rc WilUn, for the sake of your honour. Un9cad)tet, (or, £)I)ngead)tct,) notwithstanding. It may be placed before, or after, its case. Sometimes it is found with the dative : as, ^cm ungcad^tct, notwith- standing that. ^l)ngead)tet is not so proper, as Ungcacbtet* Unwcit, not far from : as, UttWCit tic6 2)orfc§, not far from the village. fBermoge/ by dint of, by the power of, by means of. ♦ Those four prepositions sometimes govern the dative case ; and this is to be preferred, when another genitive folhiws. Example: @r fle&et itijierbalb bcm3i(Ufcmx Ungnabe; he is within the scope of his displeasure. Sect. 2. Prcpodlions with the Datite. 337 as, SScvmoge ber UeBung, by dint of practice ; Mzxmh^t t5e6 SleiffeS/ by means of diligence. SBa^renb, during: as, SBdl^renb be§ ^riege^, during the war. SDBegen, l. because of, on account of: as, ;^d) tl^at CS mcineS S5ater6 wcgen, I did it because of my father. 2. Concerning, with regard to, relating to: as, ^rfpracl(> mxt mir wegen beS »g)aufe§, he spoke to me concerning the house. It may stand before, or after, the word it governs; most commonly it is put before. Sdng^, along, is found with the genitive. See Sect. II. Sufolge, in consequence of, occurs with the genitive. See Sect. II. %\X^tX, out of, has the genitive case after it, in one instance, viz. au^il S(Jnbc0, out of the country. See Sect. II. SECTION II. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE CASE. %\X^, out of. 2(uper, 1. out of, on the outside of : as, 2fuf et bem .§aufe, out of the house. 2. Out of, not within, pas- sing the bounds of, in a slate of deviation from : as, 2Cuger Drbnung, out of order ; auger ©tanbe, out of condition ; id) mar auger mir, I was beside myself, I was deprived of the use of ray senses. 3. Besides, over and above : as, 2Cuf er bcn ^urgem von gonbon famcn auc^ t)iele grcmbe, besides the citizens of London, many strangers also came. — It takes the genitive in one phrase^ viz. auper Sanbe6, out of the country, abroad. GG 33^ [339] On the Preposition, Part I. Chap, 7. SQiX)^ See Sect. IV. (SntC geit/ towards, so as to meet ; united with verbs of motion : as, 2Bir tTJoUcu unfettu grcuhbe entgegcn qc*: l)Cn, \\e will go to meet our friend; ber ^nabc iduft fcinem ^ater entgcgcri/ the boy runs to meet liis father. 2. Against, opposed to, contrary to : as, ©a§ i^cer flc{)t i()m entgegen, the army stands against him ; bicg XCdX feiner 9}?einun(j entgegen, this was against his opiuion. It stands after its case. ©egenuber, over against, opposite to : as, 2)cm »^aufc gegcnuber, opposite the house. It may be divided, and gegen put before the case : as, gcgcn bcm »^aufc liber* £ang6, along : as, gdtig^ t)em gluffe, along the river. Somelimcs with tlie genitive : as, 9Iocl) fo V>ielc lattgS fcinca 3u9c6 t)urd} :l^eutfd)lanb junidfgclaffcnc SSeft^uns: gen, l)atten fein ^ecr nid^t tjerminbert,* not even the many possessions lie left behind him, along his route through Germany, had diminished his army. It is also found with the accusative, but this is quite provincial. mt, t^'ilh. SSl(k&), 1. after, posterior in time, behind. 2. To, in a direction to, towards ; wilh names of places, and verbs of motion : as, liefer WlckXiX^ rcif't nad) ^eutfd)(anb, this man travels to Germany ; a^cnn g€(}m 8ic Had) bcr (^tCk^t, >Nhen do you go to town; laffeii ^ic un6 nad) v^aufe gel)en, l^t us go home. 3. According to: as, ^U(C) bcr ^efc^rcibung bcS tm\X^, according to the ac- count of Livy. — In the signification last mentioned, it may be put after its ca'^e, when no other word is governed by, and follows after, that case : as, T>iX S3efcl)rciblin3 * ©cfd;icbte M brci^iAJatjvificn ilrieAC^, yon 5. ^6)'\iliit, Vol. iii. p. 500. Sect, 2. Prepositions with the Dative. [340] 339 lta(^, accordini^ to the description ; fetner ©eburt Xia^, according to his birth; fetner ^erfunft nad}, according to his orii^in, by origin ; meitter 9}^einung X\.a&), accord- ing to, or in, my opinion ; t)em 2(nfe{)en nCk&), according to appearance. But if the substantive were to have another substantive after it, which it governed, tiie pre- position must stand before its case : as, 9^ac^ ber S5C:5 fd)reibung t)e§ gimu^*— It is placed after, in certain in- stances, when it notes direction : as, S)er 5^afe ttad), following your nose ; t>em ©trome ua^, following the stream. S^ebjl, (or, SSenebfl)/ together with, besides, including. — SSettebjl is provincial. ^b, over, on, at, during, on account of. It is not much in use. €i^|?u^to&ford[jetn®etofeba6a!Dir&,unbeirett)Ott&flnnett. Jtteif!, ^xuWHi P- 28. (Sammt, together with. Growing obsolete. \xxd} cinen P(tolcnfd)Ug cjct6t)Ct, killed by a pistol shot ; burd) Stuvnt crobcrt, taken by storm. S. It notes duration, when it is put after : as, ^ie Qi^nj* ^ad:)t buvd), all the niglit through ; ba^ ganje ^a^t bwrcb, all the year through. In this sense, ()inbur(i?/ Sect. 3. Prepositions with the Accusative. [342] 341 adverb, is also frequently used, bie gan^e SRadjt ^XXtfi l^md), &c. gur, for. ©cgen, 1 . to, towards ; expressing direction, and ten- dency. 2. Against. — ®en is an ancient abbreviation of gegcn, not in use at present ; except in a few phrases, as, QCn ^immel, to, or towards, heaven. iDl^ne, without, not with, Fr. sa?is. ©onber, the same in signification, as the former, but not much used. It can only be put, when the substan- tive has no article: as, (Sont)er ®ei jl, without spirit; foits: ber ^VOd^d/ without doubt. Urn, I. around, about: as, Um ben^^ifc^ ft^ett, to sit about the table ; um tie (Bta'i>t QZ^cn, to go around the town, that is to say, round the circumference of the town. 2- It signifies succession, change, vicissitude : as, ^inen 3^ag um ben anbcrn, every other day. 3. -»A loss : as, Um ettrag fommen, to lose a thing; e§ ill um if)n 9cfd)ef)en, it is over with him, he is lost; ber 5}lcnfd) 1;)at mid) um mein ©elb betrogen, the man has cheated me out of my money. 4. It marks an object : as, Um ®clb fpielen, tt) play for money ; um bctt (Ste9fed)ten, to fight for the victory. 5. A comparison : as, Um ^Wet) T)nt^ td rcid)Cr, more rich by two thirds; um je{)tt ^af)Xt junger, younger by ten years. 6. It expresses a refe- rence, with respect to, as far as relates to : for example, (S6 i]t eine ungcwiffe (Sac^e um ben ^xitQ, as for the war, it is an uncertain thing ; WU f!e()t e6 um \i)X^ ©Cs: futtb()eit, how is it with respect to your health ? — Um sometimes precedes the preposition §u, before the infi- nitive ; and indicates purpose, and design : as, um JU f(^rciben, for the purpose of writing. — As an adverb, um denotes a circuit : as, '^iefcr SOSeg ijl um, this way is GG 3 342 [343] On t?ie Preposition, Parti. Chap. 7. about — ; and conclusion : as, baS ^al^t ift im, the year is brought to a conclusion, has passed through iU circle. Um unt) um, means, on all sides. 5Sit>cr, against, in opposition to. SECTION IV. PREPOSITIONS WITH THE DATIVE AND ACCUSA- TIVE CASES. These prepositions depend, for the most part, upon the notion of locality, with which they are connected, to determine the case they are to govern. Tf a state of rest, or permanent locality, is understood, the dative case is required to be joined with them: and the accusative should be made use of, when motion to a place is signi- fied. This distinction may be rendered easy and intel- ligible, by applying the questions, wherfy in what place ? and wheretOt to what place 1 A few examples will show this. 2(n, means on, near to, against, ©cr %\^&) j!e()f (Xn bcr SQSanb/ the table stands near, or against, the wall. Here the preposition governs the dative : for the ques- tion, where, in what place 1 may be applied — where, in what place does the table stand ? and a state of rest, or permanent locahty, is intimated. In the following: ©Cfee t>en ^ifd^ an bic 2Bant>, put the table against the wall ; a motion to the place is implied, and the prepo- sition united with the accusative. The table is to be moved to some place; aud naturally the question, whereto, to what place ? is suggested. Thus with auf, Sect 4. Prep, with the Dative and Accusative. [344] 343 upon : ^a6 SSud) \k<^t auf tern ^ifc^e, the book lies upon the table. Dative case ; where, in what place 1 Segen (Ste bag S5ud)auf bcnSafc^, lay the book upon the table : accusative. The book is to be moved to some place, and the question may be pul, whereto, to what place 1 So'xWiiX, behind : @r flel^t I)tntcr mix, he stands behind me. .Dative; question, where, in wiiat place? ^ommen @ie I)inter mid), come behind me: accusative ; for here a motion to a place is thought of. The same in the next example : 3^ifd}en, between : ^r faf 5n)ifc^>en "iizm S5nibev unb t>er ©(^treflcr, he sat between the brother and the sister ; dative, ©v tvttt JWls: fd)en ben 95rubei* unb bte (2d)wej!er, he stept between the brother and the sister ; accusative. Hence ^n, with the dative case, signifies in ; and with the accusative, into. The question depends upon the idea of motion, or per- manency: the latter requires the dative, the former the accusative. When that idea is not precisely determined, an uncertainty likewise arises in the use of the cases. For example, @in^au§ auf bcm SSevgcbauen, to build a house upon the mountain ; auf, with the dative : and, zxn ^a\i% auf '^tn S5crg baueit ; auf, with the accusa- tive. If the notion prevails, that the operation of build- ing is carrying on, m such a place, the dative case is proper. But if motion be imagined, by which, through the process of building, a house is, as it were, conveyed upon the mountain, then the question, whereto, to what place? presents itself ; and the accusative may be ad- mitted. 2)a§ «g)eer lagert \i&) auf bent SSerge, the army encamps upon the mountain. Here is the dative case, after auf, in consequence of the question, where ? But the accusative may stand, if, in idea, motion, towards the mountain, precedes the act of encamping : ^a6 ^eer ♦^44 [3'45] On the Preposition. Part I. Chap. 7, lagcrt fid) auf ten S5erg» Somelimcs, those two cases involve a difference of signification. For, ^cr ^nabe Iduft in bcm ©artcn, {in wiih the dative), and ber^nabe Iduft in ben ©arten, (accusative), greatly differ in mean- ing. The former expresses, the boy runs, or takes the exercise of runninjj, in the garden ; and tlie latter, he runs into the garden, die reitet auf bem SSerge (dative), he rides, takes the exercise of riding, upon the moun- tain ; and, er reitet auf ben SSerg (accusative), he rides to the top of the mountain. 2Cn, with the dative, notes, 1. locality, at, on, near, in : as, 2Cn einem Drte wo!)nen, to live at a place ; an bem Ufer eine§ gtuffeS, on the bank of a river; an ber^()ur, at the door ; also, upon the door ; an meincr (Stelle, in ray place. 2. The object of an action, in, at : as, T)k SSerbienfle beS SSater^ an bem ^inbe belo^nen, to re- ward the merits of the father in the child ; mein greunb arbeitet an einem S5ud}e, my friend works at, or is en- gaged ill, a book. 3. A cause, by, of: as, ^cr jungc 50?enfd) if! an einer 2Cu§5et)run9 (jef!orben, that young man died of a consumption. 4. A state, condition, manner, in, by: as, Sleic^ an greunben, rich in friends; grog an Slu^me, great in fame; fc^n?ad) an SScrpanbe, weak in understanding ; man !ennt beu SSo^el an ben gebern unb ba6 ^ilber an bem .flange, the bird is known by its plumage, and the silver by its sound. To this signification the first, or adverbial, form of the su- perlative degree may be referred* : as, 2Cm fd}6n|len, in the finest manner ; am beflcn, in the best manner : and the expression, am fteben, living, alive : as, ©r ijt nod) • See p. 188. Sect, 4. Prep, with the Dative and Accusative. [346] 345 am 8eben, he is still alive*. 5. Time, in, at, on : as, 2(m 2Cnfan9e, at the beginning ; arft Written SSage, on the third day. %t\, with the Accusative, expresses, 1. direction, to : as, %n einen greunb fd)reiben, to wriie to a friend ; ic^ wzxhi ba^ S3ud) an mcinen SSruber fc^idfcn, I shall send the book to my brother. 2. An object ; as, %n eittC (Sad)c glauben, to believe in a thing ; an ttvoa^ t)cn!en, to think of, to remember a thing. 3. Extent of space and time : for example, 25i6 an bie @ee, as far as the sea ; hi$ an ben 2Cbcnb/ to, or until, the evening. 2Cuf, upon, with the Dative, notes, 1. the locality of a higher place : as, 2(uf bem Sf)Urme, upon the lower ; auf ^Zm ^erge, upon the mountain ; auf bem ^adi^Cf upon the roof; auf bem zm Simmer* 2. It signifies locality, in general : for example, %nf t)tm 2)orfe fe^n, to be in the village; auf bem Sanbe tt)0l)nen, to live in the country ; auf ber S^Cjb, at the chace ; auf bem S5aEe, at the ball ; auf ber ^ofl, at the post office ; auf ber ©affe, in the street ; auf ber Uni:5 werfttdt, or plur. auf UnitJerfttdten, at the university ; tiuf ber @c^u(e, or plur. auf a6 S^^imer, as far as the chamber ; hi^ in bie ^a6:)tf till night; H^ in dttJtgfeit, to eternity. S'lebcn, beside, at the side of, L?i{, juxta. Ueber, with the Dative, 1 . over, above ; with respect to place. 2. above ; with respect to excellence, or rank. 3. During ; with respect to time, or occupation : as, Ueber ber Zxhcit, while at work ; uber bcm gcfcn, while reading ; ubcr Zi\d)C, at dinner, while at table. UthtX, with the Accusative, 1. over, implying motion to a place. 2. Beyomd, above, exceeding, more Ihun: • See p. 310. Sect. 4>, Prep, withmej)ative anef^ccusative, 3.49 as, ubcr meine^raftc, beyond my strength ; uber ^icrjig ^a\)Xi, above forty years. 3. With the adverb biS, it expresses extent : as, a3i§ uber bie D^ren, over the ears. 4. It notes a cause, about, on account of; as, ©ic^ ubet: einc ^a6:)t drgern, to be angry on account of a certain thing ; fid) uber itVOa^ grdmcn, to grieve about some- thing. 5. It notes an object, upon, concerning: as, Ucbct cinen gmiffen ©egenjfanb fprei^en, fc^reiben, to speak, or write, upon a certain subject ; uber tie S^Ugent), upon virtue ; uber taS Sajler, upon vice. 6. It signifies future time, when it is placed before the case : as, ^zwtt uber (i^tXo.O^Z, from this day se'nnight, or in a se'nnight from hence ; uber t)a§, or uberS, Sal)r, next year ; uber iJlac^t, to night ; uber laxi^ Ober furj, literally, over long or short, that means, some time or other. 7- It also notes continuance of time, or duration, when it is put after: as, S)en on, ju ; an bcm becomes am ; in bem, im ; ton bem, t)om ; ju bcm, gum* With the da- tive feminine, ber, JU only : as, }^m, for ju bcr« With the accusative neuter, ba6: an, auf, burc^, fut, in; as, anS, for an t>a^ ; aufS, for auf bae ; burc!^§, for burc^ t)a^ ; fur§, for fur ha^ ; in6, for in ba§*— There are other coalitions, but not equally sanctioned by good lan- guage : as, t)or§, from t)t)r bag ; toorm, from \)or bcm ; ubcm, from ubcr ben ; uber§, from uber ba§ ; unterni/ from untcr bem ; untcr§, from untcr ba6» With regard to those first mentioned, \\jfiy may either be adopted, or the preposition be put to the article, without being in- corporated with it. In some phrases, however, the con- traction alone is admitted : as, am 2CnfangC, or im %\\^ fange, at, or in, the beginning ; (^m gcbcn, alive ; am bes: jien, am fd^onflcn, in the best, in the finest manner ; jut Sflott), if necessary. 353 CHAPTER Vlir. ON THE CONJUNCTION. Conjunctions are particles, wliicli serve to connect words and sentences, and to bring them into a certain relation with one another. As this connection, and rela- tion, may be eiFecled in different ways, the conjunctions may, accordingly, be divided into various classes. Those, which merely join : for instance, andy also, &c. may be denominated copulative; those, which imply oppo- sition : as, either, or, neither, nor, though, although, yet, ^nevertheless, &c. disjunctive. Some note a condi-^ tion: as, if , otherwise, &c. ; and may be called condi- tional. Others a cause : as, /or, because, since, there^ fore, &c. CAUSAL. Some make a comparison : for instance, as, so, like, than, &c. ; these may be named comparative. And those which refer to time, or the succession of events: for example, then, when, while, before, after, &c. may either be styled tempo- ral, or consecutive. That classification may be made still more precise and minute, and the distinction rendered more accurate. But this is rather an object for speculation, than for prac- tical purposes. Let it suffice, for our views, to subjoin a list of the most obvious German conjunctions, in al- phabetical order, accompanied with the necessary ob^ servations. 2Cber, but. It does not always place the sentences in opposition, but like the Latin, autem, vero, sometimes only joins them; in other words, it has not only a dis» junclivc, but also a copulative power. H U 3 354 On the Conjunction, Part I. Chap, 8. 2C(Ictn, but, Lat. sed, at, is merely disjunctive. 2CI6/l>as, 1. a comparative signification, expressing a* and than : for instance, (go Warm aU xm (Eommcr, as warm, as in summer ; rcid)cr aU 6r6fu§, more rich than Crcesus. 2. It notes quality and condition : as, ^ aB ^ZXX toon biefem ^au\t, I as master of this house. 3. It is temporal, or consecutive, and signifies tf^Aew: %U id^ in Sonbon anlam, when I arrived in London.— 2Cl^ wcnn, as if; fo wo^ aU and:), as well as. 2Clfo, 1. so, thus. 2. Therefore. 2Cuc^, also. 2Cuf bafi, in order that. S3ettOr, before; Ljk\. priusquam, ^a, 1- then. 2. When. 3. Since, as, implying a cause. As an adverb, it signifies, there. ^al^er, therefore. Adverb, baf)er, thence. ^antl/ then. TCBbann is the same iu signification. Adverb, baun unb Wann, now and then. ^a'rum, on that account, for that reason. iDatum, therefore. When the accent is on the first syllable, it is strongly demonstrative. ^a^, that. ^cnn, 1. for, because; Lat. nam. 2. Then. 3. Unless, after some verbs in the subjunctive mood : as, Sd) werbc nic^t auSgcl^en, c^ fep benn, bag bic SRoti) mid) Jtrdnge, I shall not go out, unless it be, that necessity should compel me. ^u follft nic^t jlcrbcn, bu i)a\>z\t benn ben ^erm 9efe()en, thou shalt not die, unless thou have seen the Lord. It is, however, not very common in this sense, except after e6 fep, it be. 4. Than : 2Ber i jl bejTer benn ®ott, who is better than God ? @f)c benn id) f[6t)e, sooner than I should run away. This significatiou is rather antiquated ; modern language would prefer al§. Conjunctions, 355 in the first example, and omit bctttt in the second, with- out substituting for it another word. X)tnno6:), notwithstanding, nevertheless, still. Ser{)alben (bero{)alben), befi{)alben (jot^^alh, or bc§^ \)a\h), therefore, on that account. ^CJlo, stands always before a comparative degree, and notes proportion ; which, in English, is expressed by the definite article: for example, 3c^ ewattete ^l)XZ 5£nfunft nid}t imb bc(!o grower ij! mcinc grcube, I did not expect your arrival, and the greater is my joy. When two comparative sentences are brought together, the first generally begins with the conjunction je, and bej!o an- swers it in the second : as, ^c ru()i9er t)a§ ficbcU if!, be|!o 9efd)t(f ter ij! c6 jum 9flad)benfen, the more quiet life is, th^ more fit is it for reflection. Sonielimes, bcf!o is placed in the first member of the sentence, and je in the second : as, etu ^unj!n)er! ij! bcj!o fc^oner, je \?olls: fommcncr e§ i j!, a work of art is the more beautiful, the more perfect it is. ^Dtewcil, because ; obsolete. ©od)/ yet, nevertheless, however, but; Lat. tamen, ^^e, before that , Lat. priusquam. SntWeber, either ; always followed by ober, or. gallg, in case that. gall6 e0 9efd)e()cn foHte, in case it should happen. gcrticr, farther, moreover. golglid^, consequently. ^ingegcn, on the other hand. 3e, is proportional, before a comparative degree. See £)CJ!o»— Sometimes it is used, instead of bef!o : as, Sc c{)Cr, je Ueber,,.the sooner, the more agreeable ; je mcJ^r, je bcffer, the more, the better; for, bej!o licbcr, bej!o bcffer*— S« nad)bem, according as. 356^ Oft (he Conjunction, Part I. Chap. 8. Sebcnnod), yet, nevertheless. ;Sct)Od), yet, the same as T)o6)^ Sm Satlc, in case that, if. Smmagen, whereas, siuce. Snbem, l. while. 2. Because, since. SnbcJTcn, in the meanwhile. Sn9leid)cn/ or Smgleicbcn, likewise. Manm, scarce. Maxim i)attc er auSgcrebet, at6 ifyx €in ^I6pd)c6 ©raufen ubevfiel, scarce had he finishefl his speech, when a sudden horrour seized him. 9}^it]^in, consequently. 5^ac^bem, after; Lat. pi>stquam.~^c nacl^bcm/ ac- cording as. ^flamltd), namely. ^i6:)t allein, nid)t nur, not only ; followed by fonbcrn audi), but also. 3^od), 1. yet, still; L^t. adhitc. ^^^ocl? nic^t, not yet. !2. Nor ; preceded by webcr, neither, 5flutl, now. ^b/ whether, if. SDbglcid), Dbfc^ion, S)bWOl;l, though, although. These conjunctions are often divided : as, Sb td) Qkld) franf waX; althoniih I was ill ; ob cr fd)on ju ^lUifc wax, though he was at home. That separation generally, and almost necessarily, takes place, when a monosyllable fol- lows; such as, id}, tu, cr, C§, Wix, i()r, fie, or the ob- lique cases of these pronouns. Even two or three of these monosyllables ni;iy be put between : as, ^b id) mid) glcic^ frCUC, though I am glad ; ob WIX Ullg il)m Qkifi) gCJcigt ijahtn, tliongh we have shewn ourselves to him. With other words it is optional, whelher those conjunc- tions arc to be divided, or not. When I hey begin a sen- tence, the following member corresponds to them by Conjunctions. 357 means of the conjunctions bod), benrtOC^; or similar par- ticles, as, bemuncjead^tet, notwithstanding that, nid)t§ bej!o wentgcr, nevertheless, ^h cr gleic^) alt ifl, fo \)at er bod) ben ^^oaigen ©ebrauc^ feincr ®eifle6frdftc, although he is old, he still has the perfect use of his mental faculties. ^ber, or. ^iit, ^eitbem, since, from the lime that. . ^internal, or @intema(ett, because, since ; antiquated. ^0/ 1. so. 2. It serves to connect the subsequent member of a sentence with the foregoing*, commonly, when the conjunctions, wcntt (when), Weil, ^a, nad)bem, Wk, bamit, urn, (before the infinitive with ju), obgleid), obfd)Ott, precede ; and almost always after XOZtlXl, if, be- ginning the sentence. For example, SOBenn meitt f8x\X^ ber f ommt, fo fagen @ie e§ i'i)m, when my brother comes> tell it him. X>a cr in SHom eintraf, fo fanb er bte @tabt in ben »^dnben feiner geinbe, when he arrived at Rome, he found the city in the hands of his enemies. 3Benn bet ^nabe fleifftg ij!, fo fann er ^u grog en (Sl)ren gelan^en, if the boy be diligent, he may arrive at great honours. Sometimes the conjunction wenn, if, is understood, in the first member; and fo must likewise begin the following member: as, SKarej! bu l^ier Qeblteben, fo wurbenbic iSaci()en beffer j!el)en, hadst thou staid here, (which is the same as — if thou hadst staid here), afFairs wotild be in a better condition. 3. ©0, occasionally notes, therefore. 4. If, on condition that : as, ©0 ^OttXtiH, if God please, or please God. 5. @0 VOO))l, a(§ auc^, or fo WO^l a(6, as well as. Likewise, with the same meaning, fo al6 ; but seldom. 6. When aud) follows, il is to be rendered ♦ Compare p. 440. 358 On the Conjunction, Part I. Chap. 8, by, however: @o Qrog bic ©d)rcrfcn be§ ^ticgcS and) fct)n mogen, fo fonnten ftc tod) fcinen ©inn nic^it bdn^ bigcn, however great the terroiirs of war Jiiay be, yet Ihey could not curb his spirit.— ©o wic, as. ©onbcm, but, disjunctive. It is only used, when a negative goes before, ^i^t cbel, fontem fleinmutl)!^, not noble, but pusillaninious, ©Onjl, else, otherwise. ^f)Cil6— t^cilS, partly, partly. Ucbngen^, as for the rest, however. Ucbcrbicg, besides. Unb, and. Un9cad)tct, notwithslandiirg. SBd^renb, wdtjrcnb bem, wd^vcnbbaf, while. SQBann, for wenn, when, provincial. Adverb^ 2)ann unb n?ann, now and then. iBebcr, neither, followed by nod), nor. 2Bcit, because. (Sometimes, while.) SBcnn, l. when. Thus it is synonymous with brt, (al§, tt>ic ; for these occur under the same meaning, as brt) ; though it is differently applied. XfCl, is always connected with preterite tenses, and declares an action that is passed. SCBcnn, on the other hand, refers to what is present, or future. It is, therefore, peculiarly appropriated to con- vey general ideas ; whereas ba relates to particular events. Tiiis will be better understood, from some examples. T)a cr wad) Sonbon f am, fo fanb cr fcinen greunb, when he came to London, he found his friend. He came, and he found, are preterite tenses : the actions that are inti- mated, are passed, and consequently, brt must be em- ployed, to express when. SKcnn id) ju \\)m fomme, fo finbe id) \i)n immcr bet) ben S5iic^ern, when I come to him, I always find him at his books. / come, I find , are Conjunetions. 359 present tenses, and the subject is of a general import ; therefore, went! is made use of. In the following, one verb is in the future, the other in the present ; and njeiTtt is likewise required, to answer to the English when, SKcnn tl^r metnc (5timme l)6ren ujevbct, fo cilt, when you shall hear my voice, hasten. SBenn (Sie mj:) f)ari5 fommen, fo vrcrben @ie "^k attcn ^unflwcrfe nid^t me()r fc^cn, when you come to Paris, you will see no longer the ancient works of art. The use of ttjentt entirely de* pends upon the time of the action : when that is consi- dered as gone by, wenu is not to be employed ; but when the action is present, or yet to come, then it is the right conjunction. It may, therefore, stand before the perfect tense, when the action alluded to, is not really passed, but only staled as such, by anticipation : for example, SBeun «Sie bie^ t?erricl)tet ]()abcn fo fd^retben ©ie mir, when you have done this, write to me. On the other hand, the historical style, to enliven the narra* tion, sometimes assumes the present for the past tense. But still the action it refers to, is passed ; and XCiWXi, un- der these circumstances, cannot be put instead of td, JDie, or al6* — The English interrogative when, is always rendered by wenn, never by t)a« — Some persons write wann, instead of tVCttn, with a view to distinguish the first signification of this conjunction, from the second (iO* SBann, however, is nothing more than a pecu- liarity of the Upper German, and in Upper Germany promiscuously denotes ivhen, and if. 2. If, supposing that. It never stands in the signification of whether, after indirect, or disjunctive questions, in which sense if is used by the English : in other words, it never expresses the English whether j or the Latin an. In these phrases, fcr example : ** I do not know if (or whether) it is so ; 360 On the Conjunction, Part /. Chap, 8. ask him, if (or whether) he has got it?" — the German tt?cnn could not he employed. The proper word would be ob» SBenngtcic^, SGBcnnfd)on, although. They may be separated in the same manner as ^bglcic^, ^bfd)On\ 2Bic, 1. how. 2. As, both in a comparative, and con3ecutive sense ; when. 93ic bic i^ugcnt), fo bag UtttX, as the youth, so old age ; comparative. 2Bic cr bag fa(), ricf cr aug, as, or when, he saw that, he exclaimed ; consecutive. It also expresses than, though alS is better adapted to this purpose. SKiefcrn, how far. ^n wicfcrn, in how far. 2Bien)ol)(, though. SBo sometimes stands for if. Otherwise it signifies where, and is an adverb. SBofern (and 2)afcrn), if. 3Bof)(, indeed, perhaps, may be ; Lat. quidem. It has the nature of a suppktive particle, and cannot always be exactly translated. ^a6 ift WoJ)l tt)af)r, that, indeed, may be true. SSiffcit (5ie «)Ol)l, do you perhaps know 1 As an adverb it signities welL 3n)ar, indeed, it is so, allowing it; generally followed by abcr, allein, boc^, bcnnod^, or a similar disjunctive. ^bjwar, sonjetimes occurs with the signification of obgleid), obfd)on, although. Some of the conjunctions appear, in certain situations, to govern the suhjunctive mood ; and some have the power, in the structure of a sentence, of removing the verb to the end. These circumstances will be noticed, at large, in the second part of the grammar. • See p. 3^6. 3(51 CHAPTER IX ON THE INTERJECTION. The interjection is arbitrarily inserted, in any sen- tence, to express emotion in the speaker, or writer. It is the most simple of all the parts of speech, and has justly been considered as the first element of language. Interjections were the primitive sounds, which marked the feelings of man. They are not founded upon the association of ideas; but produced by the immediate impulse of sensation. They were gradually combined, and led to the formation of words. As they are not liable to any grammatical changes, themselves, nor in- fluence the state of other words, they occupy but little room, in either part of grammar. Here, those may be mentioned, which occur most commonly in the German language. Some indicate joy: as, al^! lj)a! Mirth and gaiety: as, fa! l^Ct)! l^cpfa! Loud exclamations of the same kind: juc^I \ud}i)t\)l The following be- token sorrow, and displeasure: a^l di)l o()I Pain: a^l Wc^! au! auwcft! Disgust: fi! pfml The next are expressive of admiration : o ! ai)l ep ! Of sur- prise, in a small degree : f)um ; in a greater degree : a'i)\ \)a\ — ^a !)a! when you have found out, or un- ravelled a thing ; either denoting surprise, or satisfac- I I 362 On the Interjection, Part /. Chap, 9. tion. — ^z ! and ^oUa ! are used for calling to a person. Gather words are employed, in the capacity of interjec- tions: for example. Gracious Heaven! Good God! — but, though they are exclamations, proceeding from our feelings, they must not be confounded with those simple sounds, which properly belong to this class. GERMAN GRAMMAR, PART n. CONTAINING THE SYNTAX. H AVING gone through the parts of speech, we ar- rive ^t the second (jiivbipn of grammar, which is called the Syntax,, ^ In this, the gufejecls that were separately expounded before, are brought into contact with each other. First of all, we shall observe their mutual in- fluence ; and the relation they bear to one another, when placed together. It will be seen tljat in those, which are susceptible of variatlons,^cerlain mbdifications take place. Words either agree with, or gover»> one another. The agreement consists in this, that they are put in the same gender, number, case, person, tense. And one word is said to go^rn the other, when, by the power of the former, the latter must w ceca s tMpil y assume a particular shape ; for examp^, a certain case^in declension, or such and such a mood, in conjugation. Therefore, the agreement and government of words will constitute theirs/ Chap^ ter of the Syntax. The second will contain a collection of peculiarities, which are not embraced by the first chapter. And lastly, in the third Chapter , we shall speak of the order and arrangement of words, in a sentence. I I 2 364 CHAPTER I. ON THE AGREEMENT AND GOVERNMENT OF WORDS. CONTAIN tNC : J . The Article, Noun, and Pronoun, 2. TTie Verb, and Participle. 3. The Adverb, Preposition, Conjunction, Interjection. SECTION I. ARTICLE, NOUN, AND PRONOUN. The Article. Rule. The article, whellier definite or indefinite, must agree with the noun it belongs to, in case, number, and gender. It Can only be joined to a substantive. If it stands before an adjective, it either refers to a substantive pre- ceding, or following; or turns the adjective into a sub- stantive*. Consequently, the agreement of the article is with a noun substantive. The Definite Article distinguishes, or determines the word, to which it is prefixed. — It is not every where lequired ; but omitted in the following instances : * See p. 175. VIII. SecLl. The Article. $66 1. Before the vocative case, because, when a person, or any other object, is spoken to, it is by tins circum- stance sufficiently marked. 2. Before the name of the Siipreme Being, ®ott, God. But when a heathen deity is signified, the article is used ; ber ©ott, plural, bie ©ottciv 3. Before proper names of persons : as, (Sdfar, %U^ Xiinber* In the oblique cases, however, it is employed for the purpose of declension. See p. 151. And some- times it also precedes the nominative, in speaking fami- liarly of a person : as, bet Mant, Kant ; ber Sone^, Jones : bcr ^dflner, Kastner. 4. Before names of towns and countries, where it is not even admitted in the oblique cases : as, Sonbou ; VOtt gonbon, of London, (gngtaub; tjon ^nglanb, of Eng- land. There are, however, some names of countries, which are never expressed without the article : as, X)U 3^urfet), Turkey ; btc 2Ballac!^et), Wallachia ; bie^d^wei^, Switzerland ; bie Saufi^, Lusatia, and a few more. 5. The definite article does not stand before cer- tain words, denoting the quarters of the globe : Dj!cn, East ; SBcftcn, West ; ©uben, South ; Sflorbeu, North ; and the synonymous terms, ^JZor^en, Zhcnh, Wlitta^, 6. It is suppressed before titles, when these are placed after the proper names : as, ©eorg, Moni^ t>on ^ngtanb, unb (S^urfurj! con «g)anno\)er, George, King of England, and Prince Elector of Hanover. Solfx^ntt fKcitnu^/ £)OCtor ber ^t^tt, John Ramus, doctor of laws. — Sometimes, hkewise, when the title is put before the name: as, ^onig ©eorg, King George; ^aifer granj, Emperour Francis ; gurft ^Otemfitt, Prince Potemkin ; X)Oitot Sutler, 9)rofc)Tor ©anberfom And even in the I I 3 366 Agreement and Government. Pari II. Chap. K oblique cases: as, ^oniQ gvict)rid)'^ gclbjUQC, King Frederick's campaigns ; 2)OCtor 2;Uti)er'§ (^elc{)rfamfcit, Doctor Luther's erudition. 7. In the language of the law, a few appellatives occur without the article, which properly ought to have it. Such are, S^cflaQtcr, defendant; ^lager, plaintitF; ;Sn|)aber, holder, proprietor ; 2(ppeUant, he that appeals ; (Supplicant, petitioner. 8. It is left out before some other expressions, which, in English, would require the article. For example : Ucbcrs^ bringer biefeg, the bearer of this ; in befter Dvbnung, in the best order ; V^oi* Subi^ung bc§ ©cl)ailfpiclc§, be- fore the conclusion of the drama. To which may be added the phrases, ^rf) i)Ciht e§ in .g)anben, I have it in my hands ; ic!^ l)Cibt e6 Vor ^(ugcn, 1 have it before my eyes. Before ^dnben and 2(uCjen, some determining word, either the article, or (as in English) a pronoun, ought to be inserted ; but custom has justified the omission. 9. When a word is put after the genitive case, which it governs, it cannot have an article. This is the same in English, as in German. For example : 2Bcr- tlber'S ficiben, Werther's sufferings. The genitive, 2BeVs tt)Cl'''o, stands before the word, by which it is governed, consequently the latter can have no article. So, ^Sobn:: fon'6 SBcvfc, Johnson's works. I)e» §I$atCV» ^au^, the father's house ; v^au§ without an article. 10. Several substantives of the same gender, number, and case, following, the article is prefixed to the first, and generally understood before the others : as in this example, X)k ®iitC/ Sicbc iinb 9^Kl}fid)t bcv5}iutter, the goodness, affection, and indulgence of the mother. Tliese three substantives are of the same gender, number, and Sect. 1. The Article. $67 case ; therefore, one article is sufficient for all. Thus it is before two adjectives : as, t>ie reid)fte UXlt an^iXitfyn^e S5clc!)run9, the most rich, and agreeable instruction. But when the gender, number, or case, is different, the article must be adapted to each substantive: as, ^er S£ob, tie 2(ufevjlel)un9, unb ba6 Seben, death, resurrec- tion, and life. Here the genders differ, and the repeti- tion of the article, accordingly, is necessary. Two sub- stantives being joined by uub, and serving as a title, or superscription, the article is commonly put before each, though they should be of the same gender, number, and case : as, T)tX fixdht unt) bcr %U(!C)^, the raven and the fox. The English and German languages agree, for the most part, in the foregoing observations : but in the fol- lowing there is a diversity. 1. The English leave out the article before words, that convey a general idea. The Germans, on the other hand, employ the article. For example : X)tv 50?cnfd) ijl ftcrbUc^, man is mortal ; tie SSugenb ful)Vt }inm, or ju bcm, ©lucfe, virtue leads to happiness ; ba§ 2aj!er jllirjt fctnc 2Cn{)dn9cr in§ SSerberben, vice plunges its followers into perdition. Here the words, which produce the general sentence, maw, virtue, vice, are, in German, ac- companied with the article. This is also peculiar to other tongues, for instance, iheFrench, and Italian. 2. The English have certain expressions, without the article, where the German language cannot dispense with it. Such are, Histori/y bie ®efd)id)tc j Holy Writ, bic t)eiUge ®d)rift» Saint Paul, Saint Peter, ber l^eiUc^e ^aulu^/ ber '^eilige ^itX\X^ ; unless Saint be rendered by the Latin word Sanct {Sanctus), which is sometimes done : as, Sanct Paulus, Sanct Petrus.— They omit it before most : as, most of his cotemporaries, where the 368 Agreement and Government, Part IL Chap, 1. Germans say, btc mciftcn. — In toivn, in der ©tabt ; in church, in der Mxdj^ ; to go to church, in die ^ird)e 9cl)cn» 3. They place the article always after the word half, when followed by . a substantive : as, half the number ; whereas, in German, the article stands before it, bie i)aibt 3a]^U The English article frequently stands after both : as, both the brothers, the Germans either put the article before bcibe, as, bie beiben SSruber; or omit it, as, beibc aSruber* 4. In English, the preterite participle is, sometimes, put after the substantive ; and the article is then omitted. For example. Paradise Lost, Paradise Regained, In German, that participle always precedes the substantive, and the article is retained, as in these examples : ^a§ verlorenc ^arabie^, ba§ wiebcr gewonncnc -^arabieS^ The Indefinite Article is nearly employed in the same manner, as in English. In some phrases it is made use of, where the English assume the definite article. This is done in speaking of collective bodies, attended with certain epithets, or titles: as, dim i)o\)Z Dbtigfeit, the worshipful magistrates ; cin bod) Weifcr Siatl), the most learned senate; einc l6blid)C Univcrfitat, the honourable university ; ein 9eci)rte§ publicum, the honoured publick. — In the English language, the indefinite article has its place after such, as, such a man ; in German, it comes before folc^er, as, ein fold)cr 5)?ann» Instead of ein fold)er, you will sometimes find, fo cin, (or, fold} ein) : for instance, fo tin 9)lann (or, folc^ z'xw SO^ann), the same as, ein foldjer 5)lann, such a man, which may be thought to resemble the English construction. — The English put the indefinite article before, few, hundred, thousand, as. Sect. 1. Noun Substantive, 369 a few, a hundred, a thousand (pounds) ; in German, tlie corresponding words are used witliout that article. Noun Substantive, Rule I. Two or more substantives, referring to the same object, or forming an apposition, as it is called^ are put in the same case: as, 2^er ^onig, unfcrgreuttb un^ SSater, the king, our friend and father. The two last substantives relate to the same object with the first, and therefore stand in the same case, viz. the nominative, 9Bir Ucbcn fcett Mni^, unfcrn grcunfe unb SSater, we love the king, our friend and father. Here they are again in the same case, but in the accusative, governed by the transitive verb lieben^ Rule II. One substantive governs another in the ge- nitive case, signifying possession, quality, or some other relation: for example, T)a^ »g)au6 mciucg greunbe^, the house of my friend ; bic S^UQCnb t)C§ SSatetS, UUb ba^ Safler be§ @o!^nc6, the virtue of the father, a«id the vice of the son. The English use the preposition of, to ex- press those relations. An exception is made by the words of measure, and quantity. These do not demand the genitive case, though of is put in English : for example, 3^1)^ @()len Sud), ten yards of cloth ; jn?et) %d\\zx SSScin, two casks of wine; citt Olegiment Solbaten, a regiment of sol- diers. The genitive, however, takes place when the sulv stantives, that follow those words of measure or quaa* 370 Agreement and Government, Part JL Chap. 1. tity, are joined with a pronoun: as, 3c'()n ^f)lcn bicfcS ^Ud)c6, ten yards of this cloth; ycozx) gdffct jcncS v2Beinc§, two casks of that wine*. The adjective also renders the genitive sometimes proper : as, ©in SJeQimeut gutcr ©olbatcn, a regiment of good soldiers. The genitive case is, frequently, supplied by the pre- position t)on, of, with the dative. This happens, 1. When the article is excluded : as, X)er @d)cin tJOlt Slcbltd^fcit; the appearance of honesty; ber n6rt»lid)C Sll^cil t)on ^nglanb^ the northern part of England; tie (Sreitjcn toon granfreid), the boundaries of France. And, therefore, 2. When quality, condition, proportion, are implied : as, (gin 5i)lann\)on SScrftanbc, a man of sense; cin^^crr X>on l^Ol^cm 2Ct)el, a gentleman of high nobility ; toon alter .^crfunft, of ancient origin ; einc gfleife toon 5c()n SJicf:? Icn, a journey of ten miles ; cin @d)iff toon JWet) l)un? t)crt ^onncn, a ship of two hundred tons ; cinc @umme tton JWanjig ^funben, a sum of twenty pounds; cin 5Kann t?on adjtjig ;Si^i)rcn, a man of eighty years. 3. When the matter is expressed, of which things arc made : as, Sine U\)X \>on ©olt>, the same as, cinc Qoltene \X\)X, a gold watch; cin S3ect)cr \)on Silbcr, a silver cup ; ein toon einem cbvlid^cn SD^amic, a pat- tern of an honest man ; cin 9}?u|lcr toon cincm gutcn ^ol)nc/ a model of a good son ; cinc ©d^urfc toon cincm ♦ See p. 149. Stcl. 1. Noun Substantive. 371; SSebtcnten, a knave of a servant ; tin Seufet t)on eiitcm SKeibe, a devil of a woman. ^. To prevent a repetition of the same endings : as, ^ie Urfadje t)on bem fonberbarcniBctragen beg 5IRannc§, the reason of the singular conduct of the man — instead of, 2)ie Urfacl^c be§ fonberbaren SSctragen^ be6 50^annc6# Sometimes it is indifferent, whether t)on be made use of, or the genitive case : for example, ^CU ©C^etlt t)On 3lebli(l)fcit ()aben, or, ben @c^cin bcr S^cbUd)feit i)ahtn, to have the appearance of honesty; bec«6rblid)e X\)zil t)on ^nglanb, or, ber notblic()e Xf)til gnglanbS, the northern part of England ; eincr ^on meinett Jt'eunben^ or, einer meincr grcuttbe, one of my friends. But where the genitive is not distinguished by the article, or the termination, ttOU must be employed. Before the article, it is often superfluous : as, ^en @d)cin t>on bcr S^ugenb ]()aben, to have the show of virtue, ^er S^ugettb, as the genitive case, would be sufficient, without that prepo* sition. Let it be observed, that the words ttott and of, are here mentioned, as being placed between two substan- tives : nothing is said of their other capacities, as pre- positions. Rule III. The situation of the genitive is after the word, by which it is governed. Sometimes it precedes the governing word, in which circumstance the latter loses its article : for example, ^eS 2cben0 gteubc, Hfe's joy; for, biegreubc t>c§> £eben§, the joy of life. It may happen, that the governing word, though put after the genitive, keeps the article; but then the genitive is deprived of it : as, SSolfS bte 372 Agreement and Government. Part IL Chap. I . !]!J?cngc, a multitude of people; grcubc bic guUc, abundance of joy. This, however, is not to be ex- tended beyond the phrases, established by custom. The position of the genitive, before the governing word, should be easy and unaffected: otherwise it is best, to leave that case in its natural place. Thus two, or more, genitive cases, when transposed, produce a heavy and unharmonious sound, as in this example: ^e$ gtogen ^I)tlofopI)cn ^ant6 gcbcn, which had better be, t)a§ Seben t)c6 grogen ^I)i(ofopf)en .^ant, the life of the great philosopher Kant. And it is worse, when of two genitives, before a third word, one governs the other : as, ^e§ 9litter§ bet ©onnc 2£bcnt()euer, the knight's of the Sun adventures ; for the adventures of the knight of the Sun. I^oun Adjective. Rule I. The adjective must agree with its substan- tive, in gender, number, and case. This rule applies not only to the adjective in its first, or positive, state, but also to the degrees of comparisou. Tlie substantive is sometimes understood, yet the agree- ment remains : for example, £)cr gutc 5[)?ann, Utlb ber b5fe, understand SJianu, the good man, and the bad (man) ; ben jwolftcn bicfc^ S0lonatJ)C6, the twelfth of this month ; supply %(kO^, day. Ride II. The place of the adjective is before the substantive. Except : 1. When it is joined to a proper name, as a title SecU i. Noun Adjective. 373 of distinction : as, griebrid) ber ^u()ne, Frederick tlie Bold ; 2((e]Cant)er ber ©rope, Alexander the Great. 2. Wen it assumes the function of a relative sentence: for example, 2)er »§elb, ma&)tio^ xm gelbe unb wcife int ^at\)Z, the hero powerful in the field, and wise in the council. This stands for : tt)eld)er mdc^tiQ xxn gclbe unb weife \m ^at\)i ifl^ 3. In these, and similar expressions: 3^'?)^ ^fl^nb, (Snglifc^, ten pounds English ; ^wanjig 5Dlarf Sube^ifc^, twenty marks of Lubeck ; l)wnbert gug 9l^einldnbifc^, one hundred feet Rhenish, Rule III, Some adjectives govern cases. 1. The following the genitive: SScburfttQ, in want of; bcn6tl)i9t, in need of; betx)uf t, conscious, (with the reci- procal dative, and the genitive of the object, as, \^ \>m mirber®ad)emc^tbett?ugt); eingcbetaf, mindful ; fd{)ig, capable of, (it is also joined with the preposition ju) ; frol^/ glad, satisfied, (also with the prep, ubcr, and the accusative) ; 9etrat)r, informed of, aware of, (also with the accusative ; it generally occurs with the verb irerben, to become, as, er trarb ber ®efaf)r, [genitive], or, \At ®efat)r, [accusative], gett)a{)r, he perceived the danger); geiDlp, certain; geWO^nt, accustomed to; funbig, skilled in, experienced in ; lo^, free from, rid of; mdd)tig, in possession of; mube/ tired of; (\\x\iif rid of; fatt, tired of; fd^ulbig, guilty ; i\)t\\\)erbdd)tig, suspicious, suspected ; t)erlu(iig, having forfeited, or lost; \}oU/ full of, (also wilhV)On); tt)ert^, deserving ; Wurbig, worthy. 2. The next are followed by a dative case : %^X\Sx^f like, resembling; angemeffen, adapted, suitable; angCtf ne{)m, agreeable; bcfannt, known to; bequem, conve- nient; bange, anxious, fearful, (as, mirijlbange, lam K K 374 Agreement and Government. Part II. Chap. I, fearful); hz^&)rotx\\^ , troublesome; bienltd), serviceable; furd)tbar, formidable; 9el)0rfam, obedient; Qcmdfl, suited to; gctteu, faithful; QCWOQCn, inclined to, fa- Tourable; gleid), like; natje, near; \)enrant)t, related to; notI)ig, necessary; nufeUd), useful; fc^dbUc^, hurt- ful; jutrdglid)/ conducive, useful: and others, signi- fying advantage, or disadvantage. — Prepositions may be employed in many instances, instead of the mere dative case, such as fur, for ; QCgCtt, towards, against, ju, to,&c. 3. Those which note measure, weight, age, value, with a numeral following, require the accusative, and are put after their case. Of this kind are : fiattg, long ; brcit, broad; \)0^, high; ticf, deep; grof, great; fd)WCr, heavy; alt, old; trcrtt), worth; fc^ulbig, in- debted, owing. For example : 3cl)n gug Ur\%, ten feet long; 5W0lf?)funt)fc^WCr, weighing twelve pounds: funfs jig Sk\ ©ctt) fd)U(t)ig, he owes a great deal of money. Observations. (l)The cardinal numbers, and the words t)iel, much, or many, and weuicj, little, or few, govern the genitive ; and are always put after it. They are fre- quently combined with the personal pronouns : as, Ullfcr 5w6lf/ twelve of us ; cucrcr (or cucr) jwanjig, twenty of you ; {I)rcv brcifftg, thirty of them ; unfer IMClc, many of us ; i{)rev Wcnig, few of them.* (2) The word all has, in English, generally, the de- finite article after it : as, all the world ; (ill, in German, is without the article : as, allc 2BcIt, all the world ; at {C6 ®clt>, all the money. There is only one instance, in which the article is required, namely, before possessive • Compare p. 173. Sect, 1. The Pronoun, 375 pronouns, when used substantively : as, 2((Ie tie SDleini*: gen, all my friends ; alli^ t)a§ Unfrtge, all we possess. And it may stand before adjectives, which are employed as substantives : as, alle t>ie ®Uten, all the good people; aUe§ ba§ S36fe, all the evil : otherwise it is not necessary, except when a relative follows, nor even then always : as, alle ble m&jt^tiU^zn^ol^zn, wtldjz t>arau§ entjlanben, all the disadvantageous consequences, which arose from it. — %ii sometimes follows the word, to which it belongs : for example, £)ie ^epfptele alle, all the examples ; t>{e ^l)rdnen alle, all the tears ; von ben ubrtgen aUtn^ of all the rest; t)iefe§ aUc§, all this, for alleg btefe6; alle§ t)a§, all that. It is always put after the personal, and relative pronouns : as, 9Bir alle, all of us; fie alle, aU of them ; tie Seute ti?et(^e alle jugegen xvaxtn, the people, who all were present. The Pronoun, Rule I. Pronouns agree with the substantives, to which they are prefixed, in gender, number and case ; and the relative corresponds with the antecedent sub- stantive, to which it belongs, in gender, and number, the case depending upon other circumstances. Rule II. The pronouns are put before the substan- tives, with which they are joined, never after them. This applies particularly to pronouns possessive, and demon- strative. In SSater unfer, our father, which is the be- ginning of the Lord's prayer, it might seem, as if the possessive were put after the substantive, SSatev: but unfer, there, is the genitive plural of the first personal pronoun, in imitation of the Greek.* The personal pro- » See p. 202. K K 2 376 Agreement and Govtinment. Part n.'ChapA. nouns are not combined with substantives, as the otIfer» ;ire, but only bear a reference to them, and, in that reference, they answer to them in number, and gender. This is likewise to be observed of pronouns demon- strative and interrogative, when they stand by themselves. The connection between the relative, and its antecedesl, is of a similar description. Observations, 1. Speaking of any inanimate object, the English use the neuter of the third personal pronoun, it, all such objects being considered as of the neuter gender ; the Germans, having three distinct genders, even for lifeless things, apply the pronouns accordingly, ^iev tj! cin neucr ^ut, here is a new hat— cr i|l fc^r fein, (he) it is very fine; wo Ijaben @ic ii)n Qcfauft? where did you buy (him) it? ^ut is of the masculine gender; therefore, the masculine pronoun belongs to it. So, Sffife gefdUtS^ncnbicfcSBittcrung? how do you like this weather? @ic ij! \ii)X unangenel^m, (she) it is very unplea- sant. The personal pronoun is in the feminine gender, on account of the substantive. T)Ci^ ^fcrb 9cJ)t rcd)t QUt, abcr e§ ijl 5U Iji^ig, the horse goes very well, but it is too hot. The neuter, C§, it, because baS $fcrt) is of that gender. 2. A demonstrative pronoun is sometimes preferred to the tliird personal, especially in the oblique cases, both for the sake of distinction, and of sound. When a nearer object is alluded to, bicfcr is put; when a dis- tant one, jener* :t)crfelbc is frequently substituted for the personal pronoun, without any particular modifi- cation. It is chiefly employed in the genitive and dative, in speaking of inanimate objects. When assigned to persons, it occasionally is expressive of resi)ect. ©cine ^6ni9Ud)e SJ^ajejldt ^abcn cinen S5cfel)l crgc^ett Sect, 1. The Pronoun, [376] 2,77 laffen, it)Dnn £)iefell)en eincn ^a^tCiO^ ^erorbnen, his Royal Majesty lias issued an order, in which (the same) he commands the keeping of a fast day. ^iefelbeu gives to the sentence a more respectful form, than Sr, he, or (Sie, they, would dp. Hence this pronoun constitutes a term of address, for ^Xi, you ; and when relating to individuals of high rank, it is commonly attended with certain epithets, as, .g)oc^btefetben, ^oc^jlbiefelbcn, %y lei:{)OC^jlbiefelben : wiiere ()od), high, l)0(^ft, highest, a(= let{)od)jlt, highest of all, mark the degree of nobility, belonging to the person addressed. 3. It has been observed, in the first part, that the neuter of the third personal often begins a sentence, in connection with a noun of a different gender, and num- ber : for example, g-0 ijt ein ^D^ann, it is a man ; eS ijl cinegratt, it is a woman. (5§, here corresponds with a masculine, and a femininine. However, the English language admits the same mode of expression in the«e in- stances. The peculiarity of the German appears in the following: (5§ fint) t)tete 9!J?enfd)en ba, there are many people; e§ fommt bcr ^oniCJ, the king is coming; c6 ruft ber SSater, the father is calling; c§ fommen geutc, people are coming. This frequently answers to the Eng- lish there: as, There is a quarrel in the house, eS ifl iXXl \x, the second personal pronoun, which takes the lead, in ab- sence of the first. 3. The verb is put in the plural number, with a sub- ject nominative of the singular, in titles of address : as, ^uere SyceUenj f)aben befo^len, your Excellency has or- dered ; @uetc Wla\i^at (jeru()Ctt, your Majesty is gra- ciously pleased ; :S^re ©ttaben bcmcrf en, your Grace ob- serves. In the above, i)aben, 9erul)cn, bemcrfen, are in the plural number. Persons of title, or rank, are sometimes spoken of, in this form, even when absent : as, £)er Shfixx ^aron ftnb ^tcr gcwcfcn, my Lord Baron has been here ; bct ^crr ®raf l^abeu e§ mir gefagt, my Lord Count has told me. Tiiis is, indeed, carrying the point of respect arid politeness very far, but it is by no means uncommon. Rule 11. The personal pronouns are always to be ex- pressed, unless some other word is substituted for them. Observations. 1. It is of course understood, that when a subject nominative accompanies the verb, no additioir^l 382 [381] Agreement and Government. Part IT. Chap A. pronoun is wanted. Therefore, in the third person, the pronoun is not required, when a substantive, in the no- minative case, is already with the verb : tor example, 2^er SJ^ann fdjrcibt, the man writes, where it would be wrong to say, bcr 5DZann er fd)reibt, the man he writes ; one nominative being sufficient. In the same manner, when you address a person with a title, the second pro- noun personal would be superfluous : as, ^re ©nabeu bcweifen mir fc()r \3icU ©UtC, your Grace, or your Lord- ship, shows me great kindness ; where the insertion of a pronoun, after your Grace, would be improper. 2. The imperative mood takes no pronoun in the se- cond person, except for the sake of emphasis, and dis- tinction. But the third person cannot be used without thepronoun, not even when it stands for the second, in speaking to any one. See the Conjugation of Verbs. 3. When two or more verbs, of the same person, meet together, one pronoun, or substantive, may serve for them all: for example, '^^ Icfe Uttt> fd)reibe, I read and write; cr fam ju mir, ging abcr balb wieber wcg, he came to me, but soon went away again ; wit ):)ahiX[, ^^re Sintabung erljalten, banfen fur Sbre ®utc unb werbm un§ ba6 a^eignugen mad)cn, @ic ju bcfudjcn, we have received your invitation, thank you for your kindness, and will do ourselves the pleasure of calling upon you. In these instances, the pronoun is only employed once, before the first verb. It is the same, whtn a substantive, or proper name, is joined to the verb : as, bcr Scitlb fam unb \)crf)eertc ba§ Sanb, the enemy came, and deso- lated the country. 4. The tirst personal pronoun js sometimes omitted in old, and formal language, particularly in addressing persons of superior rank : as, ^uerc ©nabcn tann biers Sect, 2. ' The Verb. 3S& mit 'OtX\id)ZXn, I can herewith assure your Lordship; ^ero ©C^rcibcn t)0!bCi^, when any one of these verbs precedes: S3ittcn, to beg; rat^cn, to advise ; crmat)nen/ to exhort ; beforgen, to apprehend ; fur^tcn, to fear ; \d)timn, to appear, to seem ; U^ fctngen, to make conditions; wunfc^cn, to wish; VOOU Icn, to desire ; jwcifeln, to doubt, &c. For, when we beg, advise, exhort, apprehend, fear, wish, desire, that a thing be done, a degree of uncertainty exists, as to the event. On this ground, the subjunctive mood is employed, in German. This is farther manifest from the verb fagett, to say, and similar ones, as, antivortcn, to answer; bel>Uipten, to maintain, &c. When that, which is said, or maintained, remains, in our idea, liable to doubt, the sidyunclive should follow after Sect, 2. ^ The Verb. 385 bag: for example, §[Ratt fagt xmx, ba§ c^ gebonnert l^abc, they tell me that there has been thunder; unfer greunb be^auptet, ba§ bieg cin fruc^)tbare§ Sal^r fet)n WerbC/ our friend mainlains, that this will be a fruitful year. Here, I am told something, and a person has maintained, that such and such an event will take place. But in as far as I do not regard these things as perfectly certain, and as there may be a doubt about them, it is proper that the notion should be expressed in the sub- junctive mood. When, on the other hand, the idea is considered as positive, and unquestionable, the indica- tive must be made use of: for instance, when a person speaks of himself, as, ^^ be()aupte, brtp c§ wa^r ifl, I maintain that it is true. Here, the subjunctive would be wrong, because the notion is strongly affirmative. If what a person mainlains were not certain, in his own con- ception, he should look for another expression, such as, I believe, I think. S^ mi^, bag er bag ©clb befom^ men 1;)at, 1 know he has received the money : the indi- cative, for the same reason. Hence it is evident, that the subjunctive rests upon the opinion, that it is formed, of the certainty or uncertainly, in the action of the verb. It is a natural consequence of this, that, in some cir- cumstances, it may be questioned, whether the indicative, or the subjunctive be more proper : the decision will proceed from the point of view, in which the sentence is contemplated. — The subjunctive is, sometimes, unneces- sarily recurred to, because the condition, on which it depends, is not always sufficiently understood. 2. The subjunctive mood takes place, when bag, and Wenn, are to be supplied : as, gr ^Unhtf e§ fcp nid)t mogUd), he thinks fthat) it is not possible ; man fa^t, ber ^aifer t)abcgriebcn9cmaci}t, they say (thai) the Em. L L 386 Agreement and Government, Part II, Chap. 1. peror has made peace. In those examples, Ihe indica- tive might also pass, without censure. But not so in the following : 9Sdrc ic^ an S^rcr ©telle, were I in your place, instead of, wenn id) an S^nx ©telle ware, if I were in your place ; i:)atU er bie (Bd)ai^t be6 €r6fu6, had he the treasures of Cr«su8, for, wenn er bie ©c^d^e be§ Sr6fu§ l)dtte, if he . had the treasures of Croesus. Thus, ©ollte fid) t>a§ eretgnen, should that happen ; foUte er nid)t f ommen, should he not come : for, if that should happen, if he should not come. 3. It frequently stands in a potential signification, ex- pressing a wish : as, ^cr ^immel gebe eS, may heaven grant it ; ®ott hii)\xU, God forbid ; — or a permission, and concession : as, ^r gel^e, n?ol)in er troUe, let him go where he pleases ;— or a supposition : as, g§ ware bcffer, wenn xvix ^xtn fiiati) befolgt 'i)atHn; it would be better, if we had followed your advice; ijte granjofert i)atUn bie @c^lad)t nic^t gewonnen, wenn fienicpt eine fo groge Uebermac^ an Scuten 9cl)abt l;dtten, the French would not have gained the battle, if they had not had such superior numbers ;— surprise, or wonder, »g>dtteicl)6 boc^ iH^t geglaubt ! I should not have thought it !* Rule 11. The Infinitive Mood occurs either without ihe preposition ^u, or with'\\., A. Without ju, 1. When it stands by itself, and unconnected, for ex* ample, in a vocabulary : as, lieben, to love ; fel)Cn, to see. 2. When il is in the room of a substantive, either as the subject, or as the object : as, t>crf^rcd)cn unb crfllllcn finb jwet) vcrfc^icbcne @ad)en, to promise and to fulfil are two different Hiings ; baS ncnne id) fec^tcn, that I • Ceffin^, Me^ubeit. Sect. 2. The Verb. 387 call to fight, or fighting; t»rt$ f)e{ffe tc^ graufam ux\ai)ff XtWf that I call to act cruelly, or acting cruelly. 3. After the verbs: fonnen, moQcn, (aflfett, burfcn, follcn, VDOUen, muffcn ; and wcrben, when it is the auxi- liary to the future tense. 4. After the verbs : l)eifTen, to bid ; {)clfen, to help ; lel)ren, to leach ; (erncn, to learn; l)6rcn, to hear; fcs: l)en, to see ; fuf)(cn, to feel. For example : ^ct) l)ic^ \l)n gcfjen, I bid him go ; er ^ilft mix fc^reibcn, he helps me to write, that is, he assists me in writing ; bcr SSater lct)rt t>a^ ^int> lefcn, the father teaches the child to read ; tt)ir (erncn tan^cn, we learn to dance ; id) ()6rc fte ftngen, I hear them sing ; id) fel^e it)n f ommen, I see him come> or coming ; er fui)Ue fcin 5B(ut Qai)Xtn, he felt his blood boil, or boiling. — After some of those verbs, the Eng- lish more commonly use the participle ; the Germans constantly employ the infinitive. Sef)ren and lemeil sometimes admit ju, before the infinitive thai follows them. 5. Some verbs are joined to an infinitive, without gu^ in particular phrases. They are ; 25leiben, to remain : with the infinitive, it signifies continuance of locality— as, Qx hUxht Uegen, he con- tinues lying; er hUiht ft^en, he continues silting, he keeps his seat, he does not move from his seat ; er hUxht ftef)en, he continues standing. Thus with jlecfen, to stick fast ; ()angen, to hang ; f nien, to kneel ; tUhztt, to adhere, to slick. Sal^ren, to go in a carriage, with fpa^teren : as, 3iC^ fal)re fpa^ieren, I drive out for exercise, for an airing. ginben, to find, is occasionally followed by the infini- tive, where the English put the participle. (Sr fatlh fte (c^laf^n^ he found them sleeping, or asleep ; ic^ fant) I. L 2 38* Agreement and Government. .Part II. Chap. 1, i>a6 IBud) auf ^cm S^tfc^e Hegen, T found iiie book lying u|>on the table. The participle might here be used, ^ven in German. ©e^en, to go : as, Sd) 9c!)c fpa^icren> I take a walk ; er gel)t fd^lafcn, he goes to sleep, that i?, he goes to bed ; and with some other verbs. v^aben, to have, in these and similar phrases : @r \)at gut reifen, he has good travelling ; fic Ijabcn ^ut f^rcs^ d>en, you have fine talking ; n)ir ()abcn ®elt) auf 3inr«« pet)en/ we have money standing out on interest. er '^mw t^Ut Uicl^t^ CtB fc^cUcn, the man does nothing but scold. B. The Infinitive with the preposition ju, to, be- fore it : 1. After nouns, when, in English, either to, with the hilinitive, or o/", with the participle, is used : for ex- ample, after a substantive, Sujl JU fpiclctt, an inclina- tion to play ; ba§ SSergnugcu @ie ^U fcf)Cn, the pleasure of seeing you; t)er SBSimfd) gelobt ju werbett, the wish of being praised ;— after an adjective, id) XOax frof) mei^ nen Jreunb wiebcr ju fefjen, I was happy to see my friend again ; mute JU ftc^en, tired of standing. 2. After verb?, when purpose and design are inlU Sect 52. The Verb. ssg mated. S^ ging ^u bcm ^cinnt, ii)m bie (Sad}e t^orjus: ftellen unb mit ii)m barubcr ju fpred^en, I went to the man, to represent the thing to him, and to converse with him about it. And here the particle utn is frequently joined with ^it, which expresses the design still more dis- tinctly, gicbet bie Sugenb, urn gludfUd) ju fepn, love virtue (for) to be happy. 3. After the following, and verbs of a similar signifi- cation : ^Cnfangcn, to begin ; auf()6l-cn, to cease ; befct)^ Un, to command ; bitten, to beg ; ewavten, to expect ; Ijjojfen, to hope ; furd)ten, to fear ; bro()en, to threaten ; ^)fle9en, to be wont ; hti)aupUn, to maintain ; erfeunen, to acknowledge ; befenneu, to confess ; fc^einen, to ap- pear, to seem ; wunfcfjen, to wish ; t^erlan^en, to desire ; crmangeln, to fail; erlauben, to permit; gejfatten, to allow ; Verblenen, to deserve ; wagen, to venture ; 1)05= ben, to have, as, id) t)aht ^i)mn ttvoa^ ^u fagen, I have something to tell you ; fcV)n, to be, as, e§ i)l JU futC^tCH, «il is to be feared; wiffctt, to know: and these verbs, l^elfen, nufecn, frommen, when they signify to be of use, to answer a purpose. 4. The preposition ol^ne, without, requires ^u before the infinitive. The English construe it with the parti- ciple : as, ^i)ne 5U WifTcn, without knowing, Fr. sans savoir. In English, the infinitive, with to, is put, after some verbs, where the Germans prefer the conjunction bdf^, with the indicative, or subjunctive, for example, / knew him to be the man, ki) rt>n^tt, bag er ber Wtann wax ; they thought me to be mistaken, fie bacJ)ten, bap xd) micb irrte ; he believed it to be true, er gtaubtc, bag e§ rocA)X xcaxu — The infinitive with to, is also employed, by the English, afler words, which form indirect ques- L L 3 390 Agreement and Government, Part IT. Chap, 1. tioijs, sucli as, whent where, how, which, what, whose, whom, when certain verbs, such as, to know, to tell, to be told, and the like, precede. For example, you know how to write it ; 1 will tell you what to do ; teach me what to say. In German, the intlicalive, or subjunclive, of some assisting verb, such as, mup, foU, must, ought, shall, is to be made use of: as, (gie tDlffen, Wic <2ie C§ fci)rciben muffcn, you know how you must write it ; ict) ttJtll S^ncn fagen, voa^ thing to a person. 3. The reflective verbs are followed by a nominative, after d§, or trie, as: for instance, (5r hitXCkO^t fid) al6 ein rec!^tfd}aftcner 50^ann, he conducts himself as an honest man ; er jcidjtiet fid) a\^ ein guter (Solbat auS, lie distinguishes himself o* a good soldier. But it must be observed, that this noniinative case is not governed by the reflective verb. That phrase is elliptical, and, at full length, would be, gr betruQt fid), al§ ein red;tfd)af:5 fencr 9J?ann ftd) betrdgt, he conducts himself, as an bo- nest man conducts himself; er jeicbnet ftd) aud, a(6 zxxK Sect. 2. The Verb. [394] 393 9Uter(SoIbat fid) au65eid)mt, he dislinguishes himself as a good soldier distinguishes himself. The circumstances are the same after verbs, which are not reflective: as, X)er ^nabc fd)reibt aU cin ^cim, the boy writes as a man ; for ber ^nabe fc^reibt, aU cin ^lann fc^vcibt, the boy writes, as a man writes. If the case be referred to the reflective verb, it must be the accusative: for exam- ple, @r jeigt fid) aU cinen t{ic^)ti9en ge(b()ertn, he shows himself an able general. Rule II, The Genitive case, governed : i. By the verbs: Znlla^zn, to accuse of ; beburfett, to be in need of, (sometimes, it is construed with the ac- cusative case); bcfd)Ult)i9en, to accuse of, to charge with; betauben, to rob; ubetf)ebcn, to disburden, to free from; WUrbigen, to deign, to think worthy of. The thing that we are accused of, in need of, charged with, robbed of, freed from, thought worthy of, is put in the genitive case : for example, S^i^crftcl)ern, may be joined with the dative of the person, aud the accusative of the thing : as, 5^d) gcwdljre blr beine SSittc, I grant (to) you your request ; id) t?erftd)cre C§ bit, I assure (it to) you. SSerftd)ern is hkewise combined with the preposi- tion \)on : as, iti) Un won bcr@acf)c \3crficf)crt, I am as- sured of the thing. — S5clcf)rcn has the genitive of the tiling, in the expression, jcmanbcn cine§ bcfTcm Mt^ tetj, to inform a person of what is better, to set him right. But commonly vott is made use of—er l)at mict) t)on bcr ©act)c bclcljrt* 3. These govern either the genitive, or the accusative, the former being more usual in some of them, and the latter in others : 2Cc!^ten, to mind, to care about ; bc* burfcn, to want ; bcgcl^ren, to desire ; entbe^rcn, to want, to do without; txvoat)nzn, to mention; gcnicffcnr to enjoy; ^flcQCn, to foster, to take care of ; fc^oncn, to spare; fpottctt, to mock; tjcrgeffcn, to forget; wav^ ten, to attend to, to take care of, as, fcinc6 2Cmte§ Wax^^ ten, to attend to one's office. — ®cben!en, to remember, to think of, may have the genitive after it, or the prcpo- silion an, with the accusative. SectQ. Theferb. 595 4. Several reflective verbs are construed willi t!ie ge- nitive case of the thing. Such are : ^i(i) aitma^cn, to chiim, as, fid) eiiie^ 3)itel§ anmaf en, to claim a title, (also with the accusative, fic^ ciitCll Xxttl anmagctt) ; fid) (eitter 'Sad)C) anne^men, to interest one'sself in a thing; fidt) bcbanfcn, to thank for, as, x(!c) Woanh mid) beffen, I thank you for that ; fid) bcbenfcn, to consider; fid) bcfinncn, to think upon ; fii^ bcbienCH, to make use of; fid) begeben, to resign, to give up ; fid) bemad)ti9cn, fid) bcmeij!ern, to make one'sself master of a thing, to gain possession of it ; fid) cnti)altcn, to abstain; fid) cntfd)la:s gen, to get rid of a thing ; fid) entfinnen, to recollect ; fid^ erbarmen, to have mercy, to have compassion; fid) erinnern, to remember ; fict) ern)e()ren, to resist ; fief) freuen, to rejoice ; ficf) getrojien, to hope for with con- fidence; fief) rul^men, to boast of; fici) fcl^amcn, to be ashamed ; fic^ unterfangen, untewinben, to venture on, to undertake ; fief) \)erfef)en, to be aware of; fk\) XVti^ gem, to refuse.* Add some impersonals : @§ gereut mtcf), I repent ; micf) jammert, I pity, am sorry for ; e§ tterlangt mfc^, I desire ; e6 tterlof)nt fiel^ (ber "5!Jluf)e) it is worth (while). Many of these verbs also admit other cases, and prepositions. 5. The verbs fepn, to be, and wetben, to become, have the genitive case after them, in some phrases : as, ber ?!Jieinung fcpn, to be of opinion ; SSorl^abeng fet)n, to be in the intention, to intend ; 2Billen6 fet)n, to pur- pose; Unmittf)6 fet)n, to be in a state of displeasure, * The reflective, or reciprocal pronoun, in most of these verbs, is in the accusative case : atttnci^cn has it in the da- tive; which appears, when it is put in the first person, as, iC^ mafe m»V ^le^ an, this I pretend to. 39^ Agreement and Qovernment. Pari II. Chap, 1. dissatisfaction, dfjection, to be displeased, to be dissa- tisfied, to be dejected ;— SSort)abcn6 njcrben, to resolve, to determine. The combination of the genitive case with verbs, was formerly more frequent, than it is at the present day. It is found in old writings, after many verbs, which are now joined to other cases, or followed by prepositions. For instance, to express a part of a thing, the mere ge- nitive was put, where a preposition is now employed : as Sg bee S3rote§, eat of the bread ; trinf c teS SffieU ne§, drink of the wine ; nimm t>C§ ©CtreibC^, take of the corn. In modern language it would be, ig l^otl bcni S5rotc, trinf c \?on bcm SKcinc/ Rule III. The Dative case after the verb, I. After transitive verbs, which, at the same time, go- vern the accusative. The accusative is then called the case of the thing, and the dative the case of tlie person ; for example, ©eben ©ie bcm SKatinc ba^ S5ud), give the book to the man. ^em SSJ^attnc is the dative case of the person, and ba^ S5ucl), the accusative of the thing. — The following transitives take the dative of the person: ©cbcn, to give ; nct)tncn, to take from a person ; fos 9Cn, to say ; er5dl)lcn, to tell ; antirorten, to answer ; bringcn, to bring ; bcfc|)len, to command ; bC5al)lcrt, to pay ; f ojicn, to cost ; bictcn, to offer ; botQcn, to sell upon credit ; Ici^cn, to lend ; Qlaubcn, to believe ; gonncn, not to envy, not to grudge ; f (agcn, to com- plain of, to state in the form of con)plaiut ; licfcrn, to * Voss. Odyssec, 1. 110. (Sitii^e ttiifcbtcti be^ SBmti, some mixed of the wine. This is an imitation of the an- cient construction. SecL^. Vie Verb. 397 furnish; Iciftctt, to show, to render, as, ^{enf!e lei jteH/ to render services; crlaffctt, to remit; ewtcfcem, to return, to give in turn, to reply ; gcbictctt, to command; Qelobctt, to vow; alauUn, to permit; Qcflatten, to al- low ; tvtberratl^en, to dissuade from. Add verbs com- pounded with ah : abbittcn, to beg pardon, einem t^ ncn gel;ler abbitten, to beg a person's pardon for a fault; abforbern, to demand ; ab^Wingen, to force from ; alii ratf)en, to dissuade ; abfc^ilagett, to refuse ; abfpvec^en, to give sentence against a person, eincm ZtXOa^ obfpVC^ d)cn; abfaufen, to buy of. Some with an: anbictctt, to offer; anxat'i)in, to advise; anbeutcn, to signify ; axi^ bid)ten, to attribute falsely; an^Ct^en, to announce; and others. Some with bet): bepbnngen, to impart; bcplegen, to attribute; bepmefTeit, to impute. Some with cnt : entreijTen, to snatch away ; entjtc^en, to take away, &c.* Subjoin lastly the reflective verbs, ftc^ anma^en, to claim, to pretend to ; ftd) einbilbett, to fancy, to imagine. Examples: ^d) ma^Z mtr t)en ^itd an, I pretend to the title; id:) bilt>e mix ben Umflanb tin, I imagine the circumstance.^ After fid^ anmaf en, the ge- nitive may be put, in the room of the accusalive.f 2. After verbs intransitive : as, 2Cn^angen, to adhere to ; anliegen, to apply to, to solicit ; gef)6ren and an^^n i)oren, to belong to ; begegnen, to meet ; be! ommen, to agree with, said of things, that refer to health and con- stitution, for instance, of eating and drfuking ; beV>Oj:s: jtcl^en, to impend ; bet)f alien, to agree with a person ia opinion ; bepfommen, to come near, to j'et at ; beppflic^ ie», to coincide with in opinion ; bei;f!el)en, to assist ; * See p. 313. f See p. 395. 4. M M 39^ Agreement and Government. Part IL Chap. 1 . ban! en, lo thank ; bienen, to serve ; brot)en, to threaten; entflie()cn, ctitge^en, to escape ; entfprcc^en, to answer to, to correspond to ; and other compounds with cut;* einfallen, to occur to tlie thoughts, or the memory; cingel()Cn, to enter the mind, to he understood ; cittfoms: men, to enter the thoughts, to enter the miuil ; einleud)= ten, to be clear, to be evident, to appear ; fotgen, to follow ; frol^nen, to do service without pay ; gebui)rcn, to be due ; gebei()en, to succeed, to prosper ; ge()ord)en, to obey; gef alien, to please; 9etatl)en, gelingen, to suc- ceed ; gleid)en, to be like ; gejiemen, to become, to be fit; l^elfcn, to help; nu^en, to be useful, to be of use; obliegen (einer @ad)e) to apply one'sself to a thing ; un« terliegcn, to be overcome, lo yield ; fd)at>en, to hurt ; f^einen, to seem; fc^meic^cln, to flatter; jieucrn, to check, to restrain ; tro^en, to bid defiance ; ttJel^ren, to check ; n)eid)en, au6n)Cic^)en, to give way, to yield ; ftd^ Wiberfe^en, to oppose, to resist; iT)it>erflef)en, to resist; wol)twoIlen, to wish well ; ^ufallen, to fall to ; 5ulf)oren, to listen to, to hear ; jugcl^oren, to belong to : juf om^ men, to become, to be suitable, to belong lo, lo be due; jureben, to speak to, to exhort; and other compomjds with JU^ And these impersonals ; @§ al)net, or al^ttbet mir, it misgives me, I forsee; e§ beliebt, it pleases; eS Qebrid^t, it is wanting; c§ Qrnut mir, I am fearful ; e6 trdumt mir, I dream ; c6 fd}n?inbelt mir, I am giddy ; cS fcl>mert mir, I shudder; eS »crs fd)ld9t mir md)t^, it makes no difference to me. 3. Some verbs admit both the dative, and the accu« saiive : 2(nf ommcn, to come upon— mir, or mic^, fommt gurd)t an, fear conies upon me ; mir, or mic3^, bduc^t, • See p. 314. Sect^. TheVerh, 399 it seems to me ; mir, or mi6:), bun! t, it seems to me (the accusative is more usual); e§ fd)mer^t mir, or mx&j, it pains me ; mir, or mid) eMt, I loathe, ^eiffen, to bid, to desire, occurs with the dative of the person, and the accusative of the thing— wcr \)at bit ba§ gci)eiJT^n1 who desired you to do that 1 but the person may also be put in the accusative, wer \)at H^ t)a^ gcf)CiJTen1 The same is to be said of U^XZXI, to teach, which either is followed by two accusatives, one of the thing, and the other of the person ; or by the dative of the person, and the accusative of the thing. I think the latter more proper. 4. The dative expresses advantage, or disadvantage, and answers to the English prepositions, to and /or: as, ^it fd^cinct bie (Sonne, for thee the sun shines ; bir la:= d)tn bie gclber, to thee the fields smile ; bir l)eulcn bic -SSinbc, to thee (against thee) the winds howl. Rule IF, The Accusative is governed by verbs tran- jiitive. These are verbs, which imply an action, passing over to an object : as, I love my country. / love is the verb transitive, the action of which passes over to an object, my country. That verbs neuter may be transformed into transitives, and govern an accusative, has been noticed upon a for- mer occasion ;* as, cincn ^\xttn ^am^f {'dm^fen, to fight a good fight ; where fdm^fen is joined with the a<*- cusative, though it is generally used without any case. ^ There are verbs that lake a double accusative : as, ^eiJTcn, to call ; ncnncn, to name ; f(i)eltcn, to abuse ; fci)im^>fen, to call by an opprobrious name. For ex- * P. 291. MM 2 400 Agreement and Government, Part IL Chap, I, ample: ^dt) I)eiffc, itcnne, t()n cinen »^clt>en, 1 call him a hero; er fd)alt, fd)im^fte, il)n eincn SSetrugcr, he cal- led him a cheat. To which may be added fragcn, to ask, as, einen Ztxoa^ ftagcn, to ask a person something ; but here it is better to make use of a preposition, as, cU ttcn urn ttxoa^ ftagcn, to ask a person about something. Oflc{)ren, to teach, and J)eiffcn, to command, which sometimes have a double accusative, mention has beea made, just before. The Participle. The most essential points, concerning the participle, have been anticipated in the First Part. — Besides its con- nection with the verb, the participle is, in the syntax, liable to the rules of the adjective. — The preterite is combined in a particular way, with the verbs WOUcH, J)abcn, andttJtJTcn: as, ;Sd) woUtc ©ie gcfragt I)aben, I Avould have you asked, that is to say, I should wish to ask you ; id) ttJOEtC ©ic Qcbcten f)abcn, I would have you requested, that [is, I would request you. ■Dicfc^ SSct:? fcrccl)en woUen w\x 9cal)nt)ct wiffcn, we would know this crime punished, that is, we wish to have it punished ; cr xoxU nid)t§ t>on t>er (Sadjc gefagt triffen, he wishes not to know any thing said of the mailer, thai is, he does not wish to have any thing said about it.— Wilh the pre- terite participle an absolute accusative case may be com- bined : as, ^cinen auggcnommen, no one excepted. SecL 3. Preposition, Conjunction, Interjection. 40 1 SECTION IIIJ 0F THE PREPOSITION, CONJUNCTION, AND INTERJECTION. This section only furnishes a few short observations. Of the Preposition, When the same preposition belongs to more than one noun, it need only be once expressed : as, SSOU meincm SSater, meinem fritter unt) meiner ©d)n)ejler, from my father, my brother, and my sister. Of the Conjunction, The subjunctive mood follows after some conjunctions: yet it is not governed by them, as sometimes is errone- ously conceived, but depends upon other grounds, which have been fully explained above.* Of the Interjection. The interjection stands quite by ilself; it neither is governed by, nor governs, any other part of speech. Therefore, the nominative and vocative, being indepen- dent cases, that is, such as are not governed by a pre- ceding word, are most proper after interjections. %^\ id) unglMlic^er 50^enf(^, ah ! I unhappy mortal ! (5i) ! ber er grcutc, oh, whaijoy ! 2£d^ ! bc6 Unbanfbarcn, ah ! the ungrateful wretch ! ^fut ! be§ f^amtofcn 5Wcnfd)cn, fie upon that shameless man. That case was not, as I sup- pose, originally the effect of the interjection, but of some other word, either substantive, or preposition, which, in process of time, has been omitted. The dative of advantage, or disadvantage,* occurs after certain terms, that may be called interjections, though they are not strictly of that description: as,n)o{)( \\)m ! happy him !^n?o()lt)em 5D^enfc^en ! happy man !— tt>Clf) mix \ woe is me ! The accusative is sometimes observed, after the inter- jection, as it is in Latin. ^ ! mic^ Un9lucf(id)cn ! 0/ me miserum ! O, unhappy me ! This also may be ex- plained by; an ellipsis. Perhaps a verb might be sup- plied, after the interjection, such as seCy pity ! t See page 399. 4. 403 CHAPTER II. ON SOME PECULIARITIES IN THE LANGUAGE. The first topick, in this chapter, to which we will direct our attention, shall be The Composition of Word^.* By this operation, the German language has the means of creating new terms, out of its own substance, and of supplying itself with expressions, for any ideas that may arise. Though almost every tongue possesses this resource, to a certain degree, yet the German enjoys the advantages, resulting from it, more amply than others. It is rich in compounds, and has the faculty of exercising its formative power, to a con- siderable latitude, under certain easy, and useful re- strictions. The Greek language may perhaps exceed it in the number of compound words, with which the vocabulary abounds ; but it must yield to the former, in the convenience, and precision, with which the act of composition is managed. A compound word is produced by the union of two, * Mr. Adelung has fully, and ably, discussed this subject, in his System (Ce^rgeblube) Vol. II. p. 209—274; and his Orthography, p. 305—337. 404 Peculiarities, Part 11, Chap. 1, or more terms, into one. Such expressions, therefore, as these : newspaper, tablecloth, fortuneteller, bosom- friend, winterseason, bookbinder, bookseller, zvatch- maker, belong to that class. The rules for composition, which are tacitly acknow- ledged, in German, and ought to be miiformly observed, are these two : Rule I. A compound word should consist of two distinct, and clear ideas. The terms, which enter into the composition, mnst furnish two ideas : and these ideas must be so perspicuous, that, when combined in one word, they may, at the first perception, render it intelligible. They ought to bring into the compound neither obscurity, nor ambiguity. Rule II. The prior term of the compound should define, and limit the other. Hence the first component may be called the definitive, or particular term ; and the second, ihe fundamental, or general. For example: Winterseason. Two terms, giving two distinct ideas, winter, and season. The latter is the fundamental, or general term ; which by the former, winter, is defined, and limited. Season is thereby circumscribed, and con- fined to one particular kind. Newspaper : — paper Is un- determined, and liable to be variously conceived ; but a definite term, news, being joined with it, the accepta- tion of the word is particularised : it is specified, what paper is meant. Watchmaker:— a maker is a person that makes any thing; but by the prior term, watch, it is stated, how his art of making is defined, to what particular object it is limited. These are the two rules of composition, to which some farther observations are now to be added. Composition of Words 405 1 . In substantive compounds, the second component, or fundamental term, furnishes the gender.* 2. When two words are joined together, without the circumstance stated in the second rule, of the one's defi- ning the other, such words are not to be regarded as compounds. Two terms may be in connection, with- out that qualification, standing merely in apposition to one another. Such are Prince Bishop, Queen Empress. These words imply, that one person has two attributes, which in other instances would be linked by means of a conjunction, as Emperour and King, Doctor and Pro- fessor: but the first term cannot be said to define, and circumscribe the second. It is, therefore, wrong to write such words in one. All that may be allowed, in com- pliance with custom, is, to unite them by the sign of hyphen: as. Prince- Bishop ; Queen- Empress, or Em^ press-Queen, 3. It may be considered as a subordinate precept, after those two rules have been duly put in practice, that the compound should neither be too long, nor harsh to the ear. Respecting the length, it may be remarked, that when it is insisted, that two terms, containing two ideas, should constitute the compound, this does not preclude a previous compound from being employed in the composition. Though one of the terms be a com- pounded word, yet in the composition, for which it is re- quired, it is supposed to give only one simple idea. For example, t)a6 ©ilberbcrgWCrf , the silver mine, consisting of(5ilber, silver, and SScrgWerf, amine, has, for its se- cond term, a compound word, SSetQWCrf : for, this is to * See Additional Remarks on the Gender. Part I, Chap. 2. Sect. 2. p. 118. VI. 406 Peeuliariiies, Part II. Chap. 3. be analysed into SScrg, a mountain, and SScrf, work ; yet, the idea which this word affords towara§ JustitZ'Collegium, Ihe court of justice. Not un- frequcntly, those foreign words are written in their own type, as is done in these examples, not in the German character. 5. By the process of composition are produced (1) Substantives, in \\\e following manner: a. Both terms being Substantives. Examples : i^fc 2(bcnt)jlunt>C, the evenlno-liour— from ber 2Cbcnt>, the evening, aud bic ©tunbc, the hour ; t>er 2(pfclbaum, the apple tree— tcv 2(pfcl, and t>cr 25aum ; taS fRat};}::' t)au6, the council house— bcr diatl), tag »§au0 ; bet 2(rbeit§lo]^n, wages for work— tie Arbeit, berSobn; bet Composition of Words, 407 ^onntag, Sunday— bic (Sonne, ber Za^; bcv ®otte§=: bienjl, divine service — ®ott, God, ber ^ienft, the ser- vice; bcr ^elbcnmut^, heroick courage— bcr .g)Clb, the hero, ber ^Utl), the courage ; bic ^erjenggutc, good- ness of heart— ba§ ^crj, bie ®ute* 6. The first term being an Adjective. T)\t ©VO^mUtf)/ magnanimity — grof, great, ber 5D^Ut^, spirit; bic @d)tt)ermutl), heaviness of spirit, melancholy— fd)n)er, heavy, bet SKut^,* spirit; bie (ligenUebe, self love— cigen, propi r, and bie Siebe^ c. A Numeral the first term, ^er 2^ret)fuff, the tri- pod— bret), three, ber %\x^, the foot ; \}a^ SSierecf, the square— mer, four, bie (5(f e,t the corner; ba6 2Cc^tec!, the octagon — a^t, eight. d. The Pronoun (gclbjl the first term. Da6 ©elbfts: gefu^t, self-feeling— ba§ @efu^( ; bie@elbj!prufun3, self examination— bie ^rufung; ber @elbfifd)uf , or (Selb:^ fc^ug, a spring gun— ber (Sd)uf, an instrument for shooting. e. A verb the first term. T>tX Scct>tboben, the fen- cing school— fec!^ten, to fence, ber S3oben, the floor; t>k Sfleitbal^n, the riding school— reiten, to ride, bie D5a{)n, the course, the ground ; baS SSartgelb, pay for waiting, for attendance —warten, to wait, X}a% ®e(b, money, /. A Particle the first term^ such as, oSi, an, ein, * It will be noticed, that in these two last examples there is a deviation from the first observation, relative to the gen- der of compound substantives; which circumstance is re- marked, p. 119. f Gender varying ; sec the foregoing note. 4(y8 Peculiarities, Part II, Chap. 2 . &c. X>k 2tbrcife, the departure ; tie 2Cnfunft, the ar- rival ; ber Singang, the entrance. (2) Adjectives. a. A Substantive being thejirst term, S^Ugcnbrcid}, rich in virtue— fcie Nugent), virtue, retC^, rich ; fraftt»oU, full of strength, or power — bic^taft, t)0U; ei^falt, cold as ice— ba§ ^i§, Mi ; golbgelb, yellow as gold— t>aS ®olt>, gelb; peci)f(^tt)ar5, black as pitch— ba6 ^cc^, fd)tt)ar5; QOttc^furd^tig, pious, fearing God— ©ott, God, and fiird)tig (an adjective, unusual out of compo- sition); ]()ulfgbet>urftig, destitute, wanting help — tie ^ulfc, beburftig* b. An Adjective thejirst term, gcici^tfertig, thought- less;, flighty; ^ellblau, sky-blue; fret;tt)itli9, voluntary; tlltftug, wise as an old man. c. A Numeral thejirst term, ^repccficj, three-cor- nered, triangular; merecfig, quadrangular, square; fed^Sfugig, six-footed ; ac^tfcitig, having eight sides. d. A Particle thejirst term. 2(b{)angtg, dependent; atljldnbig, becoming; ubcrmutl}ig, overbearing, inso- lent; jufunftig, future; imglaubig, unbelieving; un^ gcred()t, unjust. e. A Verb thejirst term. £)en!n)urbig, memorable — bettfen, to think of, and n)urbig, worthy; f)abfud)tig, avaricious— f)abcn, to have; ticbcngtruvbig, lovely, ami- able— liebcn, to love, Wlirbig, worthy; lobcit^tVCrtl), praiseworthy— lobcn, to praise, n?crt^/ deserving. (3) Verbs. a, A Substantive being the Jirst term, ©ranb^ fd)(l^cn/ to raise contributions, by the menace of tire — bcr S3ranb, fire, fd}a^en, to raise contributions ; luflwanbeln, to walk for pleasure, to lake a walk— Composition of IVords. 409 t'ie Cufl, pleasure, wanbeltt, to walk; mttdfiXtl, to emulate— bie SQSette, the wager, eiferu, to be eager, or zealous ; Wetterleuc^teu, to lighten without thunder— baS SBetter, the weather, the tempest, leud)tcn, to shine ; l)ant>f)abcn, to handle— bie ^anb, the hand, i)abzn, to have ; el^ebrec^CH, to commit adultery— t>ie ^f)e, wed- lock, brec!^cn, to break. b. An Adjective the first term, grol()(ocfen, to exult — fro^; voUbringcti/to accomplish— \)oU; ^oU5{ef)cn, to execute. c. A Particle the first term. This species of com- position has been treated of, at large, in Part I, Chap. 4. Sect. 7. p. 302. (4) Participles. A Substantive being the first term, a. The Present Participle: (Sijrliebcnb, loving honour, generous, noble — bie (5f)re, the honour, liebcnb, loving ; gefc^gebenb, legislative— ba0 ©efe^, the law, gebcnb, giving ; voa&jsi ^)abcnb, having the guard, being on duty, as an officer — tic 2Bac^)C, the guard, \)» 5: as, 2)a§ ^immel6lid)t, the h'ght of heaven— ter »^immel ; ba^ Sfcl6of)r, an ass's «ar, the corner of a leaf in a book, turned down, a dog's ear— tcr Sfcl ; baS 2fr:5 htit^^arx^, the work-house— bic 'KxUxt ; bcr ©cburt^tag, the birth-day— bic ©eburt ; baS »g)ulf§mittcl, means of assistance— bie »^ulfc* Ns,ens: as, ^ie grlebcn^feicr, the celebration of peace— bcr griebc ; bie ^erjenSgute, goodness of heart —ha^ «§er5» Those additional letters seem to mark the genitive case, in the first component. E: as, ^a6 ^erjeleib, affliction of heart— ba§ ^erj ; bie ?0'lifTetl)at, tiie misdeed, the crime — from the par- ticle mig ; bcr ^ferbear^t, the horse doctor, the farrier — baS^fcrb; bcr ?)ferbcfuf , the horse's foot— ba§ ^ferb; ber ©anfcbratcn, the roast goose— bie ®an6, the goosie. In some of these examples, the inserted e may be taken for the characleristick letter of the plural number. A', or en: as, ^aS grcubcnfefl, the festival of joy, the jubilee— bie greubc; bag 2)rac^cnblut, dragon's blood— bcr 3)rad)e ; ber *g)clbcnmutt), heroick courage— ber ^elb, the hero ; ba6 J^irtenleben, pastoral life— ber ^XXt, the herdsman ; bcr SSaucmjiolj, vulgar pride — ber S3aucr, the rustick, the clown. The additional w, or en, may, in some instances, in- volve the genitive case, in others the plural number. Er: as, ^cr (Sperfudjcn, the omelet— bag @l), the egg, and ber itucl)en, the cake ; bie 23ilbcrfcl)r!ft, figurative writing— bag ^ilb, the image, figure, and ^U ©d^rift, "^Composition of Words, 411 the writing ; blC -SSSeiberlift, craft of women— ba§ SOSeib, the woman, and tie Sifl, the cunning. The letters er correspond, in these words, with the termination of their plurals. /, only in two very ancient compounds : ^le ^ati)ti^ gall, the nightingale, and bcr SSrautigam, the bride- groom. (2) Letters omitted. E, in substantives : as, T)k @nt>ft)(bc, the final syllable — t>a6 Snbe, the end ; bie Srbfolge, the succession— t)a0 (Exhtf the inheritance, tie %olQZf the act of following, or succeeding; ber (Sontttag, Sunday—He ©oune; t)ec Sixfti)hanm, the cherry tree— bte ^trfcI)C» jBw, in infinitives: as, ^er gccl;tbot)en, the fencing- school— fecl^ten, to fence; tie 9leitba^)n, the riding- school— rcitett, to ride ; benfwurbig, memorable-r-ben^ fen, to think of, and WurblQ/ worthy ; i)ah\nti)tiQ, ava- ricious — );)ab^n, to have. 7. It is not settled by rule, when, and how, those changes, in the first component, are to be made. The judgment of the person, who frames a compound, seems alone to determine the question. Sometimes, a diversity occurs in the state of the first component, as it is com- bined with different words : as, ©er S5auerl()0f, and t>er SSauernfrieg—both from ber ^auer, the husbandman, the peasant; tie (ii)xfmcf)t, and t>er (i^xtnftt)dn'ozx— from bie S^re ; ber ^cuer^erb, and bie geuer^btunf!— from ba^ geuer ; baS ^^erjblatt, tia^ |)er5eleib, and bic ^^erjengangjt— from ba§ «§ers ; \)a^ ^inbbett, ba6 ^itu^ t)tUi)txi, and bie ^inberflube— from bag ilinb* But even in the identick compounds, an uncertainty occa- sionally prevails : for example, ©er (gic]j)enbaum, and ber ^ic()baum, the oak tree— from bie ©iclj)e, the oak ; bet N N 2 412 Peculiarities, Part If. CHap. ^. €rb!(of, or (Srbenflof, the clod of earth—from bic @rt»c ; t)a§ Scl^tpcinfleifcf), or ©ci^weinefleifci), the pork —from t)a0 ©ct)we{n* 8. There are a few instances, in which a change of signification is effected by the mode of composition : as in, t>cr Sanbmann, and bcr Sanb^mann, the former de- noting a husbandman, a peasant, and the latter, a com- patriot; t»cr Sant)61{)err, the sovereign of a country, and ber Saitbf)crr, in former times, a great landholder, a lord of the manor. 9. The more ancient compounds cannot always be re- duced to that analogy, by which the composition is now regulated. 10. When it happens that two, or more compound words occur in a sentence, having the second component the same, this component is frequently omitted in the first word, or words, and only expressed in the word which is last : as, ^fajfens: uub SScibcrllf!, craft of priests, and of women ; ^rtcggs^ unb gricben^jcitcn, time of peace, and war; S3et=:, sguf^ unb %a^taQ, day of prayer, repentance, and fasting. The hyphen is then put after the first word, or words*. Thf Use of the Genitivte Case. It often occurs, when tijere is apparently no word to govern it. Thus it expresses : 1. Relation of time. 2)C§ 2Cbenb^, in the evening; be§ SKorgctlSf, in the morning ; be6 ^XttaQ^, at noon ; • See p. 28. This peculiarity of omitting the second component in preceding words, and expressing it only in the last, exists in the Spanish language, and also in the Swe- dish, Danish, and Dutch. t The same idiom prevails in the Greek language : as, ?g&§oy, early in the morning; ryxTo?> in the night. Use of the Genitive, 413 be§ 3Rac{)t§*, in the night; (5onnabcnt)6, on Saturday; SfJlontageg, on Monday ; ettie^ %a^i^, one day, on a certain day; i)CUtt9e6 3Jage6, this day; cinmalbeS SO^O^: mxt^i^, once in a month; \)tcrmalbeS '^^l)Xi^, four times in a year; §tr>et) ganger ©tunbctt, two whole hours. 2. Relation of place. ^{cfc6 t)xU^, m this place ; Qcfjortgen ^rte6, in, or at, a proper place ; aller t)Xtt, in all places, every where. 3. Way and manner, ©crated (or gcraben) SBege^, straightways ; flc{)ent)en gu^eS, immediately ; bicfer %Z^ jlalt, in this manner ; folgenter ©e|!a(t, in the following manner; meine^ 3^()ei(§, on my part; imfevn St^eit6, on our part; mcirte§ SBiffeng, to my knowledge; mei== ne§ S5et)un!en§, in my opinion ; einiger ^Ola^en, in some measure ; gen)ifrer 9)^agen, in a certain measure ; unV)er5: nc^teter <2cid)e, not having effected one's purpose. Add the following phrases : ^uuger^ flerbeu, to die of hun- ger ; eine§ fd)mcr5lid)en 3^obe6 flerben, to die a painful death ; ber ^offnung leben, to live in hope ; be6 '^w^ trauen§ leben, to live with confidence, that is, to place confidence in a thing. With the verb fepn : as, QBlUen^ feV)n, to intend ; bet 5}^einuttCJ fepn, to be of opinion ; be§ ^obe6 fepn, to perish. The peculiar use of this case has been adverted to, in the first Partf. It owes its existence indisputably to the omission of some governing word : but it is not, in ge- neral, easy to fill up the ellipsis. In practice, it is suffi- cient to know, that such is the usage. * Here the article corresponds with the termination, and not with the gender, of the substantive. See p. 331. t Chap. Vr. p. 331. N N 3 414 PecnfiarHies* Part Jl, 'Ckap. Q. The Use of the Aceusaiive, This case is employed to mark time, both as to date, and duration.— i>flfe: ^en 5e^ntcn %aQ md) ber @c!^Iaci)t, the tenth day after the battle ; fo voax C§ t»a§ crjic ^a\)X, thus it was (in) the first year ; ben ncuntcn ^Ul, the ninth of July; Worigcn ^icnj!ag, last Tuesday; bret) mal bie 2BocI)C, three times a week.— Duration : ^i) hin ben ganjen Za^ ju ^au\z gewefen, I have been at home the whole day ; icf) werbe wott) einen 50?onaf{) in ber ®tabt bleiben, I shall remain yet a month in town ; v>erwetlen , instead of, be6S3ater fcin ^inb, bc6 50?imn fcin Sud); though this circumstance may not be always attended to, in prac- tice. When, in English, an individual object of posses- sion is to be expressed, from a greater number of the same kind, the possessive pronoun absolute, with of be- fore it, is placed after the substantive : as, a friend of Pronouns. 417 tniney a servant of yours, an acquaintance of ours, a book of his. In German, tills is to be differently ex- pressed : for instance, ©in gveunb \>on mix, a friend of me, or einer Don meinen greunben, one of my friends ; ^in S5ebtentcr \)on un§, a servant of us, or einer von un=s fern S3ebienten, one of our servants ; eine§ \)on fetnen ^lld)ern, one of his books. It has been noticed, in another place*, that the geni- tive of the demonstrative pronoun, teffen, beren, and in the plural berer, forms occasionally a useful substitute for the possessives, fein and i!^r* The Demonstratives, biefcr, biefc, biefe^, m^y be referred to what is past, present, or future. ^iefe 9lac!^t, may signify, this night, that is to say, the night which is now existing, or which is to come ; and also last night, or that which is gone by. The English pronoun this, \s hardly ever used in the Ijttter sense* The Relative Pronoun is, in English, sometimes omitted, and to be understood ; in German, it must always be expressed^. With and), or audi) immer, following, it signifies, whoever, whoso- ever, whatever, whatsoever : as, SGBer a\i(i) ber SOlann fet)nma9, whoever may be the man ; xca^ aw^ immer bie golge fetjn mag, whatever may be the consequence.— SKrt§ occurs, instead of etwa§, something. * P. 378. t See p. 233. ^^^ Peeuliaritks. Part 11. Chap, 2. ^xnx^t, and ii{i6:)i, some, joined with numerals, denote an undetermined excess of the number mentioned: as, @inige, or ctHdje, 5tt?an:= JtQ §)funt), some twenty pounds, that is, twenty pounds, and some odd ones besides. When prefixed to a hun- dred, or a superior number, they indicate a repetition .of the same: as, (^tnige ^unbert s^enfcljen, somehun- dredsof men; etUdje taufent) Sg^aler, some thousands of dollars. 2Cllc unt iebe, all and every one. This is almost the only instance, in which iet)cr sujffers the plural number. in common life, signifies, sometimes, that a thing {5 consumed, finished, that nothing of it is left: as, :2)er SGScin i|I allc, the wine is finished ; t)f c Srbbccren finb aEe, the strawberries are eaten. SSSlixmh 9reid)cn, t)cinc§ cjlcid)en, feinc6 gleid^cn, il)rc§ (jletd)en, CUrc§ 9leid)Cn, mean, people of an equal situa- tion with me, thee, him, her, them, you. Srgenbcin, irgcnb cine, irgcnb cin, any, or any one, ^m ^aar, a few. See p. 149. The Infinitive of the active voice, after certain verbs, occasionally has a passive signification, gag i^n rufcn, let him call, may Iiifimtive. 41 p afso "signify, let him be called; t>er 9flid)ter ^tefl i()tt bint>en, the juge ordered him to bind, also, to be bound ; XOix fa{)ett i^n fd)(a9en, we saw him beating, also, being beaten. SSluXi Wax nicl)t§ ^U t()un, now there was no- thing to be done, literally, to do. (g6 ijl ju ^offcu, it is to hope, that is, to be hoped ; e§ ij! 5U bcflird)ten, it is to fear, that is, to be feared. But in the use of this construction, care must be had to avoid any ambiguity of meaning, which, in certain circumstances, might exist. The Infinitive of the verbs burfen, foUen, fonnett, mogen, laffcn, ntuffcn, troHcn, {)6rcn, fe^cn, is substi- tuted for the Preterite Participle, when an infinitive precedes*, ^li) Ijabe e6 nid}t t^un burfen, (for gcburft), I was not allowed to do it ; t>U ))atk^ fommctt follett (for gcfoEt), you ought to have come ; tt)ir f)atkn e§ fc{)Ctt f onncn (for gef onnt), we might have seen it ; ct i)at cin ^a\x^ bauen lajTen (for gelaffen), he has caused a house to be built ; ic^ i)aht x^xi an()orcn muffen (for gcmufit), 1 have been obliged to listen to him ; l^dttett roix auS9ei)en Vt>oEen (for gcwoUt), had we been inclined to go out ; i(i) ^aht i^n reben !)6rcn (for Qzt)bxt), I have heard him speak ; iii) ])aht il)n Tciten febcu (for gcfel)cn), I have seen him ride. — Sel^rctt, to teach, and Icmen, to learn, hkewise allow the use of this infinitive; though the preterite participle is, at present, more frequently employed : as, dx i)at mi^ fd)rciben le^ren, or ^zki)xtf he has taught me to write ; ici) i)aht bct) tf)m 5eic{)nen Icrnen, or geletnt, I have learnt of him to draw. The English admit the Infinitive afiQt the words, who, what, where, how .'f for example, " I do not know what * See Adelung's Dictionary, under the word ^(ittn* t See p. .390. 420 Peculiarities, Part II. Chap, 2. to do; I will tell you how to act, where to go, whom to address." The GeriDan infinitives caniiol be placed in such a construction; tiie sentences must, therefore, be differently formed : as, ^(i) n?cig r\\ti)t VOa^ ic() t\)\in foil, I know not what I must do ; iti) will S^ttCH fagcn, n)ic @ie l)anbcln muffctt, «)ol)in (Sic 9el)en muffcn, init wem @ic fprcc^en muffcn, 1 will tell you how you ought to act, where you ought to go, whom you ought to ad- dress. The Injlnitive, wiih ju, is put, where the English avail themselves of the participle, with a preposition, such as of, from, and others. For example, £)a§ SScrgnUQCn einen grcunb JU fcl^^n, the pleasure of seeing a friend ; @clC9Cnl)Cit 5U rcifcn, opportunity of travelling. ^ VDitrb ab9Cl)altcn JU fc^rcibcn, I was prevented from writing. Tliis peculiarity has been remarked in the First Chapter*. That Infinitives may be turned into substantives, by having the article, of the neuter gender, prefixed, has been already noticed.f The Preterite Participle of certain verbs, is united with the verb f ommcn, to come, in an active signification, to express the manner of coming: as, (St fommt QCrittcn, he comes riding, on horseback ; cr f ommt gcgangcn, he comes walking, on foot ; cr fommt (jcfal)rcn, he comes driving, in a car- riage; cr fommt Qelad^t, he comes laughing. See above.J • P. 388. B. t P. 326. See also p. 111.5. J P. 328. Pat ikies, Adveibsy Conjunctions, 421 whether considered as an adverb, or a conjunction, is often found, where the Enghsh can affix no distinct meaning to it. It seems to be a sort of expletive ; in this character, however, it conveys certain ideas, which give to the sentences a peculiar modification. Some- times the notions, perhaps^ probabli/, indeed, may cor- respond with it. It occurs in questions : as, ^ahtU ©ic vt)o{)l ge^ort, vraS man bat>on rcbet 1 have you perhaps heard, wliat is said of it ? and accompanies verbs, in an undetermined, and conditional construction : as, Sc^ m6d)te«)0^t Icfcn, I should like to read (if I could). Not seldom, it resembles the Italian ben, bene, and pur, pure, in its expletive capacity. — The adverb Well, noting, of a good quality, in a good manner, not ill, is, in German, generally rendered by gut ; by which means the confusion, that might arise, between this signification and the expletive, is obviated. For exam- ple : Sd) vozi^ md)t, wo man bicfe (^ad:)^n gut fauftn fann, I know not, where one may buy these things well. In this instance, if tt)o()l were used, it would, by the generality of readers, be accepted with an expletive meanings (Sern, willingly ; comparative, lieber, more willingly ; superlative, am Ikhftm, most willingly. By this adverb, the idea, to like, is afibrded : as, dtwa^ gem t^nn, to do a thing willingly, to like to do it ; Ctwa^ Qixn effen, to eat a thing willingly, that is, to like o o 422 Peculiarities. Part II, Chap. 2^ it ; cttt)aS gern mogcn, to like to eat a thing.* gttt>a$ gem fe{)Cn, to see a thing willingly, to see it with appro- bation; hence, to like, to approve, (^c i^t ©emufe lieber alS Sleifd)/ he likes vegetables better than meat; literally, he eats more willingly, ©ie fcl)en e§ am lieb* flett/ they see it with most pleasure, that means, they like it best. The use of lieber, and am Ueb(!en, will be readily understood, from that of gern« ^in and ^eu The former signifies motion froDi the place, in which you are, to another ; and the latter from another place, towards you. Thus it has been explained before.f ^XXt unb 'i)Zt, backwards and forwards. 35Dd), put after an imperative, has the power of entreating, and exhorting, answering, in general, to the French done, and, frequently, to the English prai/ ! Examples: ©agen @ie mix boci^, pray, tell me ; fcpn ©ie bod) fo gut, pray» be so good. It is made use of in questions, and exclamations : IBdd fdgte er bod^, pray, what did he say 1 SEar ba§ bod) Cin Hxm, what a noise that was !— In Lower Saxony, it is used for the affirmative ^a, when a negative precedes. So, besides its affirmative signification, yes, has an exple- tive faculty^ in which it may often be answered by, indeed, tnAy, certainly, I see, I wonder, forsooth. • Sec p, 240. t P. 510. Particles, Adverbs, Conjunctians, 423 Examples : ©ie f ommen ia fpdt, you certainly are com- ing late, or, 1 wonder you come so lale. @ic finb ja rcd)t grog gewotbcn, you, indeed, are grown very tall, @t jlcllt fic^ ja fc!)r fontcrbar an, he, forsooth ! behaves in a very singular manner — ^a n)Ol)l, certainly, yes cer- tainly. — ^a, combined with a negative, strengthens it : ^ Sa tticl)t, on no account ; ja nie, never, spoken em- phatically. Wlittm, before the prepositions in, and untcr, signifies, in the midst of : as, WlitUn XXi fciner 9icbe, in the midst of his discourse ; mitttn unter ten geinten, in the midst of the enemy. ilflocl) immcr, still, constantly, by continuance. @r hUxU n^tf) Ittimet in Sont^on, he still continues in Loudon. A Comparison of things equal, is, in English, made by the repetition of as : for example, * as brave as Caesar.* In German> the first particle is translated by fo, and the second by aU, or trie : (So ta^fer aU (Sdfar* The word than, after the comparative more, is expressed by al§. Sometimes, the English put but after a comparative degree, instead ofthan : for example, * There was nothing farther to be done, but to fight/ The German alS, must here be retained. SSSie is pccasionally substituted for al§* oo 2 4^4 Pecvifarities. Part 11. Chap. ^, TIu Negative, 'iSl\6:)i, is often used by tlie Germans, where the English would deem it superfluous: as, g§ if! ubcr einen5D?onat^, feitbcm ief) ©te nicf)t gefel)cn ):)aU, it is above a month since I have [nof] seen you. The sentence certainly con'- tains a negative idea, which, however, is, in Englbb, omitted. In interrogative exclamations, the negative gives em- phasis. SBie t)ielc 9}?enfd)en ftnb nid)t in biefcm ^rtege nmgefommen, how many men have [not'\ perished iu this war ! 2Bic ftolj fd^iett cr nicl)t, how proud did he [notl appear ! The French also make use of the negative. Quel bruit ces homines n'auroient ils pas fait, s'ils m*a- voient attrape d un tel banquet, Not a, Not anj/f are, in German, commonly rendered b^ fein, none. Two Negatives, in the same sentence, are improper, because they are useless. For, they do not affirm, as in Latin, nor add to the force of the negation, as in Greek. Yet they occur not only in the language of com- mon life, but also in the best writers. 2)cr ^aifer unb t>ie Sigueftanbcn gcwaffnet unb ficgreic^ in £)cutfd)lanb, unb nirgcnbS f cine ^la&jt, bic xi)mn SQSibcrjlanb Iciflen f onntC,* the Emperour, and the league now stood armed, and victorious, in Germany, and there was no where no power to resist them, gr barf aUe§ waS cr frtnn,.unb tfl feincm anbcrn nid)t§ fdjulbig, he dares to do, what he can do, and is under no obligation to no one.f X^a er * ©fitter's ®efci>ic^te be* brelf igjiJ^rigen Krie^d* VoL I. p. 227. t 2Diclanb'^^flat{)on, Vol. I. p. 154. Particles, Adverbs, Conjunctions, 425 fi^ tJoUfommen wo^ htvou^t ij!, nit fcine €()re sel()abt 5U l)aben, as he is perfectly conscious never to have pos- sessed no honour.* ^ux feiit ®clb 'i)at fie nicJ^t, only she has not no money, that is, not any money .f Some- times, indeed, there may appear to be energy in the repe- tition of the negative ; but, altogether, it should be ra- ther considered as a species of negligence in composition. About, nearly. This idea, accompanying numbers, is differently ex- pressed. 1. By certain adverbs, viz. hiXX[iX^t, ttioa, fajl, un^efdbr, xoq{)\, bi§* (5§ fint) woi)l brcv '^cA)Xt, it is about three years j un9efd{)r jeljH ^futtb, about ten pound : JVDCV) 1o\^ trct) S[Bod)en, from two to three weeks. 2. In common life, but incorrectly, by eitlC, which seems to befcorruptcd from cinigc : as, ^ine Ck^i %0,^Z, about eight days. 3. By citt being prefixed to the sub- stantive, and the termination er added to the latter: for example, (gin ©tucfct lt%Xi, about ten pieces, (ba§ @tuc!, the piece); eiu S^ler brct), about three yards, (bic@!)lc, the yard); eirt S^()tcr funf, about five years, (ba§ S^i)r, the year). The syllable cr is supposed to be the remains of ober, or ; consequently, cin mplish so jll-conceived a project*. The verbal arrangement will • 1 have always regretted to class with these innovators the venerable Plainer ; and wondered, that a philosopher, like him, should have fallen into such a mistake. It seems, that he was desirous of giving to his writings every facility to be understood; to effect which, he adopted, in a great measure, what is called the natural constructiou, unagining that this was correspondent to simplicity, and plaiiuiess of composition. But the consequence was, that a new lan- guage was thus produced, which was not German, being deprived of the essential characteristick of verbal arrange- ment. Hence difficulty, and embarrassment are expe- rienced, in reading the works of that author. For by not allowing the ideas to flow in their accustomed channel, but ^rcing them to pass through a new and unusual direction, a restraint is imposed upon the operation of the mind, and its mechanical habits are impeded. The reader will Hnd in the Philosophical Aphorisms, enough to justify these obser- vations. 'VIr. Campe, whose grammatical labours claim the regard and gratitude of all who know how to value the German lanijuage, has noticed that aberratiou trom the true idiom, in his valuable Treatise, on the Pimciples, B,ules, and Limits of Purity in the German Language— <5runb0^e, S^egern ttnb ©tdttjeti bet iBcrbeutfc^ung (pre- F P 434 Arrnngement of Words. Part II. Chap. 3. maintain itself, in spite of the attacks, which may be directed against it, by a false spirit of reformation. The feehu|4s of the whole nation will oppose themselves to those erroneous, and unprofitable designs. The following rules are abslracted from the practice of the best writers, and the manner of speaking among the well educated classes of society. It need scarce be remarked, that to the poet a certain latitude is granted, io regard to the position of words, so as to favour the exigencies of rhyme, and metre. The Chapter will con- fist of the following sections : 1 . Position of the Noun Suhstantivt, 2. Of the Noun Adjective. 3. The Pronoun. 4. The Verb. 5. The Participle. 6. The Adverb. 7. The Preposition. 8. The Conjunction^ 9. The Interjection. fixed to his Supplementary Dictionary), p. 105, first editiqp, or p. 65, edition of 1813 ; and expressed his disapprobation of it, though he has not ^)laced it in that strong light of censure, in which I have telt myself obliged to represent it. S^t, 1. Noun Substantive, 435 SECTION I. POSITION OF THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. Rule I. The Substantive, iu the nominative case, being the Subject of a sentence, is placed before the verb*. Note, The subject is to be distinguished from the ob- ject: the former governs the verb, and the latter is go- verned by the verb : for instance, ^er SSater Ikht feitiett ^O^n, the father loves his son. Here, ter SSatcr is the subject, whicli governs the verb, that is to say, the verb must agree with it, in number and person ;t feittett ©Ol^tl, is the object, which is governed by the verb, be- cause it raust, in compliance with the nature of the verb, stand in a particular case. To give another example : ^cr Wlann fd^reibt einen S3nef, the man writes a letter; — t)er EDlann is the subject, and ^inzn ^rief the object. These terms must be distinctly recollected, throughout the subsequent pages. Exceptions to the first Rule, 1. The Subject is put after the verb, in a direct ques- tion: as, @d)reibt ber 5[J?ann, does the man write? <^^Xt\Uf the verb— t)Cr ^dXiXi, the subject. It is the same,, when the question begins with an interrogative pronoun, or interrogative adverb : as, 2Ba0 fagt ber ^Ci^ ter, whai says the father? vrelc^eS 35 uc^ Uejl ber (^C^tUs * I make no mention of the article, because it is ob- vious, that it must always stand before the word, to which it belongs. t See p. S80. P P 2 436 Afran^mmt of Wordi, Part tl Chap. 5# Ux, wliich book does the pupil read ] tratum lac^t ber ^nabe, why does the boy laugh 1 wc^tDegen wcint tie @d)ttJcfler, what does the sister weep for? 2. When, for the purpose of emphasis, the oliject it placed at the head of a sentence*. For instance: ^xia fc^ ®IM gcnie^t ber Sugcnbl^aftc, this happiness the Yirtuous man enjoys, ^cr Su9Crtt>l)afte is the subjects Vfhich follows after the verb, Qcnie^t ; because the ob* jecf, t)icfe§ ©IM , begins the sentence. 3. When the dative, or accusative, case of personf stands first: as, ^cm !J)lcnfd)en ijl t»a6 Sebctt tl)cucr, ^o man life is dear ; ticfen ^naben l^at mcin grcunb tie granj6fif(!^e ©:pracl)C 9clcl)rt, ^Ai« boy my friend taught the French language. The sentences here begin with a case of person, and the subjects are found after the verb. This, and the preceding exception, may perhaps be to- gether comprehended in these words, that, when any oblique case of declension begins a sentence, the subject must go after the verb, 4. When an adjective, or pronoun, serving for, or be- longinj; to, the object, begins the sentence. ®ut ift beu SBein ycoax, abcr aud) t()CUCr, the wine indeed is good^ but also dear. The adjective gut has, in this instance, the capacity of the objecl, and, beginning the sentence, moves the su»»jt'ct, ter SBein, from its place. ®ut ftnb^t mcin SSatcr ben 2Bein, &c. my father tinds the wine good: here gut refers to the object, ben SBein, and has the same influence upon the subject. This is also to be observed in the pronoun, when it acts as the object : as^ SSliXn ij^ ba6 ^a\X^, mine is the house ; mein represcota • See p. 443. R. 11^ 1. t Se« p. 44S. R. IV. V. SecL 1, Noun Substantive, 437 the object, and ba§ c verb. 2(lfo, signifying so, thus ; ba,then; bai)er, thence, therefore; bautt, then, (the same as bcnn); barauf, thereupon, then ; barum, <'or that reason ; bcmnad), conse- quently; benn, then ; bcSi)aIb, be6f)alben (beroljalbcn), for that reason ; bc^tDCQCn, on that account ; bc^glctd^Clt, like- wise; bod), yet, still, (it docs not always affect the situa- tion of the subject); femcr, moreover; folciltcb/ conse- quently ; glcid)n)0f)(, nevertheless ; inbcfTcn, in the mean while ; in3lcid)en, likewise ; faum, scarce ; mitl^in, con- sequently ; noc^, yet, nor; tf)cil§, partly; fo, either meaning so, or beginning the subsequent member of a sentence; ubcrbieg, besides; ubrigcn§, in other respects. —When the conjunctions, aud), also; ctttweber, either; jwar, indeed, are in the beginning of the sentence, the subject may be put af\er the verb, by which means a stress falls either upon the subject, or the verb : as, 2CUC^ ricf bn§ SSolf, the people even exclaimed ; cntWCss bcr liej! bcr ^x\aht, obcr cr fc^rcibt, the boy either reads or writes ; 5n)rtr fcl)cinct bie^^onnc, abcr, &c. the sun in- Sect, 1. ^ Noun Snhsiantive. 439 deed shines, but, &c. When the emphasis is to be on the subject, it should remain before the verb : as, 2(ud) t(l6 SSolf rief, even the people cried out.— In old and formal language, the subject is sometimes placed after the verb, when unb, and, or fonbem, but, precedes. Unb f)at SScflagter erwicfcn, and the defendant has proved. Here SScflagtet, the subject, is after the verb, in conse- quence of unb» 1 1. In quoting, the subject is put after fagett, or any similar verb, when part of the quotation goes before : as, Dag (Slucf, fagt ber 2Bcife, ifl t^errdt^erifd), For- tune, says the wise man, is treadierous. 12. The subject always follows the verb, in the subse- quent member of a sentence. Note. The Subsequent member of a sentence is that, which comes after one beginning with a relative pro- noun, (such as W)a§, what), or relative adverb, (such as WO/ where), or a conditional, causal, and consecutive conjunc- tion, (such asWCnn, if; rozil, because; ha, when*). Ex- amples : 9Bag bcr 25atcr facjt, t^ut ber @o()n, what the father says, the son does. The lirst member of this sen- tence begins with the relative pronoun, tt?a§ ; in the se- cond, or subsequent, member, therefore, the subject, bet {e Z^Xt fd)nc(l ttcrjlreict)t, fo benu^t t>er SQSeife jeben 2Cu9cnblicf , because time passes quickly, the wise man turns evtry moment to profit. Here are again two members, the antecedent, because the lime passes; and the subsequent, Ihe wise man turns every moment to profit. The sid»je< t in the latter, of cou»se, stands aftt-r the verb. T)0. QcifaV fid) mi)ZXU, mtvoidm t>ie getnbc, when Caesar approached (antecedent), the eneniy withdrew (subsequent). The subsequ«'nt mend)er, after an antecedent, with a con- junction of tlie (lesrnption alluded to, frequently begins with the particle fo, concerning which it will be proper to refer to some remarks in Part I.* This particle serves as aconnectini; link, between the antecedent, and subsequent members.f It is not always made use of, ence to wo. By these words, which are to he supplied, it is, that the subject, in the second member, is brought behind the verb. See a note to the Exercises, p. IGO, 2. The sub- sequent member may, perhaps, altogether be said to depeid upon connecting words, which are to be understood. As to the relative terms, beginning a sentence, there hardly occur any other, besides was and WO, which thus influence the subsequent member. ♦ P. 357, and 427. f It seems, that such a link, between the antecedent and subsequent members, may always be supposed ; and that, if it is not expressed, it may be understood, as is intimated in the note, on the foregoing page. Compare a note to the Exercises, p. 161, 'i. Sifci, I. Noun Substantivi!. [440] 441 when the prior member begins with a consecutive^ or causal conjunction; but rarely omitted after a conditional, such as, n)enn, if; oi)fd)on, obgleid), njeunfc^on, vomx^ gleid^, though, althoug!). The conjunction weUH, if, is sometimes understood in the antecedent ; and with this circumstance, the subsequent member, generally, lake* fo, and the subject goes after the verb. For example : SKarebcr gliifi fc^iffbar, fo wurbe ber ^anbcl blui)cn, if the river wi-re navjgable, trade would flourish. The an- tecedent member should properly be thus expressed : 2Beun ter gtuf f^iffbar wdrc»— The conjunction t»ejlo, and also je, when equivalent to bcftO/* constitutes a sub- sequent member.— A subsequent member farther arises, when an infinitive begins the sentence, expressing pur- pose and design. Um reic^ ju wcrbctt, unterjiel^t fid^ bcr SU^cnfc^ oft ben grogtcn S9Kif)feli9fciten, in order to grow rich, man often undergoes the greatest hardships. The latter *' man undergoes," &c. is the subsequent member, where the subject must be put after the verb, 13. The last instance, in which the verb precedes the subject, is, where the conjunction n)ettn, if, is to be sup- plied : as, SBdre mcin SSater lf)ier gcwefcn, fo ware t)a§ Unglud md)t 9efc^e{)en, bad niy father been here, the misfortune would not have happened. SBBdre mcitX SSater \)m gewefen, stands undoubtedly for, wenn metn SSatet l^icr gcwefen ware, if my father had been here ; and the subject, as appears, is behind the verb. From all the exceptions to the first rule, which have been enumerated, this general conclusion may be drawn, that the position of the Subject is affected by the collo- cation of the other words, in the sentence ; and parti- * See p. 355. 442 [441] Arrangernent of Words, cularly, that when these are moved out of their natural place, the suhject loses its original situation. Rule II. The Substantive, being the Object, is put after the verb : for example, Sci) ticbc mcincn SSater, I love m^ father ; meinen SSatcr is the object. Exceptions : 1: When a stress is to be laid upon the object, it may be placed in the beginning of the sentence : as, ^en ^omer lefe id) mit SScrgnugen unb IBcwunberung, Ho- mer I read with plesure and admiration. 2. The verb is sometimes thrown to the end of the sentence;* then the object, naturally, comes be- fore it. \^ Rule III. The Substantive, in the Genitive case, not being the objectf, generally stands after the word, by which it is governed : as, 2)er @o^n meine§ S^euube^, the son of my friend. But it is found 1. Before the substantive that governs it, when it bears an emphasis. £)e§ SSatcr§ ©cgen hamt ben ^inbcm ^aufer, aber ber SJiutter gluc^ reiJTet fie nieber, a fa- ther's blessing builds houses to the children, but a mo- ther's curse pjills them down again. 2. Before aH jt'clives : as, £)C§ SScrbred)en§ fc^Ulbig, guilty of the crime ; bc^ 2obe6 ivuvbig, worthy of the praise ; bcr (£Orqe unwertl), undeserving of the care. 3. Before some prepositions.:]; Rule IF. Tlie Dative has its place after the verb, and if there be an objertJAe case, beside^s, before the latter. * See Sect. IV. of this Chapter, t The genitive may be the object, when it is governed by the verb. See p. 393. Rule II. J See p. 335-337. Likewise p. 457. Sect. 2. Noun Substantive, [442] 443 ©r ^iU bem 3)ianneba6 SSuc^, he gives the book to the man. The dative, bem 5Uiannc, here stands between the verb, and the object. 3Vhen it is to be marked with an en)phasis, it should be moved from its place, either before the verb, or after the object. The first is the most powerfiil : as, ^ent SD^anne ^iht cr t>a6 ^UC^ : the second does not so much alter the force of the sentence, cr gtbt t»a§ SSud^ bent SDlaitnc* — If the object be a monosyllable, or short word, and the dative case consist of more s\llables, the former should be put first, because a long word finishes the sen- tence better than a short one : for example, Qt fagtc e§ bcm SSatcr, he told it to the father — eg is the object, and comes before the dative. It is remarkable, that the ob- ject, being a case of a personal, or reciprocal pronoun* is generally put before the dative, though the latter should be of no greater extent, and likewise proceed from one of those pronouns. For example : 3?d) f)abc es ihm QCfagt, I have told it him ; er ^at ihn 7nir QCjeigt, he has pointed him out ^o me ; tt>ix em^fel^len uns dir, we recommend ourselves to thee. The words here printed in Italicks, are dative cases, those immediately before them, in Roman type, the objective accusatives.* Rule V. The Accusative serves to some verbs as the case of person, when there is another accusative of the thing, or object. The former is then placed in the same manner as the dative, according to the preceding rule. Examples : ^6:) nenne ben '^axm greunb, I call the man friend ; ic^ {)eijTe einen fold)en9J?ann etnen vg)elbcn, I call such a man a hero ; er \i\}XX ben ©em^roniuS Viz 0les: cJ^enfunfl/ fae teaches Sempronius arithmelick. * Compare Sect. III. of this Chapter: and Exercises, p. 166, note 1. 444 [443] Arrangement of Words. Part 11. Chap. 5. Should the subject, the object, and the case of per- son meet together, either before, or after, the verb, they would follow in this order : subject, case of person, ob- ject. For example, before the verb: Sa bct ^oniQ bcm gcinbc ben grieben angebotcn \)ai, since the kin« has of- ferer! peace to the enemy. After the verb : 2Cuf bicfc SBcifc tjcrfd^afftc (Sdfar fcincn grcunbcn ®cnu9tf)uung unb bcna^im feinen gcinbcn aUe ^offnung i\xx 9Jac^e, in this manner Caesar procured satisfaction for his friends, and deprivtd his enemies of all hope of revenge. Rule VI. The Dative and Accusative cases, governed by adjectives, stand after the same.* Rule VII. The Vocative case may be put any where, cither before, or after, the verb, at the option of the speaker. SECTION IL POSITION OF THE NOUN ADJECTIVE. • Rule I. The Adjective, being joined with a substan- tive, precedes the same : as, ©utcr SBSciH/ good wine ; baS f^one ^inb, the pretty child. Sometimes, it is placed after the substantive, by way of apposition, serving for a relative sentence ; as, ^ct IWimjlcr, nid)t wcnigcr gcredjt, aB jlaatSflug, tt)at ab= lc§, urn bicfetn ereigniffe vorjubcugcn, the minister, not less just than politick, did every thing to obviate this event. Here the adjectives, being put after the substan- tive, occupy the place of a relative sentence : nJcld)Ct * Sec p. ^7%. R. III. 2. and p. S74. 3. Stiii, 2. Noun Adjective, [444] 445 nid)t vrcmgei: gered)t aU faat^fiuQ vrar, who was not less just than politick. Rule 11. When tht adjective is not united with a sub- stanlive (nor turned into a substantive itself — for thus it would have all the riglrtsof the latter), it is considered as the object, and put after the verb : as, ;^er ?[)^ann ijl o;[xi\ or before it, with an emphasis, QUtij! btr?0^ann* Rule TIL The numerals rank before other adjectives, preceding a substantive : as, £)rei; 0;aU, i\)X\x&)t 5!}^ens= fC^en, three good honest men. When cardinal and ordinal numbers meet before a sub- stantive, it seems indifferent, which is put first ; whe- ther, for instance, it be, t)te brct) crflen, the three first; or, tie CVftcn bre^, the first three. This applies also to the words, tie antern, the others, and bie le^tctt, the last, which may either be put before, or after, the car- dinals. Perhaps adjectives of a superlative sigfiification may be, generally, included in this observation. Exam- ples: 3!5ie bret) (e^ten, or bte le^ten brep, the three last; bie »ier anbern, orbteanbern mer, the other four; bie fed^ bejlen, or bie kjlen fec^§, the six best ; W 5ef)tt fcl)6nj!cn, or bie fd)6nj!en je^n, the ten finest, it is to be noticed, that the emphasis, in these instances, falls upon the word, which is put last — Th»' word.s, Ci\it, all ; manege, several ; MXtXt, many ; jeber, each, stand before the numerals, and the adjectives. Rule IV. Adjectives usually follow the cases they govern : as, 2!)tefer Sl)re WUrbig, worthy of this honour ; be§ SSerbrec^en^ fc^ulbig, gmltv of the crime ; 5e]J)n (S^leit lang, ten yards long ; bret) gug btelt, three feet broad ; fed)6 ^funb \&)VOZX, weighing SIX pounds. Tht^y are, likewise, frequently put after, when they are connected with uouns that are governed by prepositions : as, @6 tft 446 [44^1 Arrangement of Words Part 11. Chap, 3. 5Ur Unterl^altung fci)X nu^lic^, it is very useful for en- tertainment ; bic ©cfutit)t)eit ijl jur ©lucffcUgfcit un* Ctttbe^tlic!^, health is indispensably necessary to happiness. SECTION III. POSITION OF THE PRONOUN. Rule. The pronoun either stands in the room of a substantive, or is connected with it, in the character of an adjective ; and has, accordingly, either the posiliou of the one, or of the other. Therefore, when used substantively, it may serve as the subject, and as the object, in a sentence, the collo- cation of which is seen in the first section. The personal pronouns never occur otherwise, than as substantives ; and the demonstratives occasionally assume that quality. When the latter are employed as adjectives, they occupy the place of the article, and go before any other word, that may be joined with tlie substantive: as, ^icfc t>rcp gutcn iicutc, these three good people ; jenc vicr erficil tapfctn 5Dldnncr, those four first brave men. The word aU/ however, may precede them. The personal pronoun, in the accusative, or objective case, is commonly put before the dative : as, ^r gibt C§ mir, he gives it to me — c§, the objective case, be- fore the dative mir* @d)t(fc fie i^m, send them to him — fie, them, precediug \\)Xti, to him.* The dative is found before the object : as, (^\h mtr C^ ; but not so frequently as after it, and then it is often contracted,! * Refer to p. 443. t Seep. 428. Sect, 3. The Pronoun, [446] 447 as, mix c§, into mirg, bir ce, into bfrS, zud) c§, into eud)§, (not so properly il)m§, i^r6, for i{)m i^,i\)t e60 Farther, the personal pronoun, in the dative or accu- sative, is sometimes placed before the subject, when the verb is at the end of the sentence. Sjgenn mix baS ©lucf gunffig if!, if fortune is propitious to me ; mil bid) teill SSater lizht, because thy father loves thee. The truth is, that the small personal pronouns are put as early, in a sentence, as may be, I suppose, from a fear of their making too faint an impression, if removed to any dis- tance from the beginning. The relative pronoun finds its place, naturally, at the beginning of that part of the sentence, to which it belorgs. The word all, may, sometimes, stand before it. SECTION IV. POSITION OF THE VERB. Rule I. The Indicative Mood sidLVids after the subject, and before the object. Except: 1. Tlie instances, when the subject is placed after, and the object before it, which are mentioned in the first section. 2. When the verb must be at the end, that is to say, not only after the subject, but also after the object, and all words connected with the same. This is necessary : (1) When the member of the sentence, to which the verb belongs, commences with a relative pronoun, as, bcr> tVCldjer, tver, n?a0 ; or a relative adverb, as, t^ai)iX, from es 2 448 [447] Arrangement of Wordt, Part II. Cfiap. 3* whence ; t>arum, for what ; watum, n)C§()alb, or ttJc6t)aW ben, WeStDegen, for which reason, for what, wherefore*; t)On VDanncn, from whence; ttH)/ where; and the coro- pounHs of njo, as, tt)o\)on, wo\)tx, womit, tDorauS, Sec, Examples: £)cr ©c^dftfledcr tfl ju fi)d^cn, welch^r bie SSeforbcrung ber SSugenb jum 3"^^*^ hat— ih^i writer is to be estet^med, who has the promotion of virtue for his object. ;3cl) fcnttc ctnett 9J?ann, der ftd) mit Sflcd^t meinen grcunb nennt — \ know a man who justly calls himself my friend. Wer bcm gaf!cr unb beffcn Stci^eti /o/g-f, bcreitet fid) einc fc^mcrjlic^ic 9leuc, he w ho follows Vfc^, an i its charms, prepares to himself a painful re- pentance. The verb, in the foregoing examples, is at the end of that member of the sentence, to which the relative pronouns, bcV/ t0il6^iX, Wcr, belong. It is thus with the adverbs alluded to: for instance, ^cr Drt, wo id) l^CUte mcincn greunb sah—\\\e place where to-day I saw my friend. Wohin man 'i)a^ 2Cu9e X^uxwendet, erblicft man ntd)t§ 0(6 Slcnb, wherever one turns one's eye, one perceives nothing but misery. The verb fal), and tt?cns= bet/ are put last, in consequence of n?0/ and wol^itU (2) The verb goes to the end, after interrogatives, (whether pronouns, adverbs, or conjunctions), wheit they form indirect questions. Examples : @r fragt m\&), tver bicfen SO^orgen be\; 3l)ncn wflr— he asks me, who was with you this morning ? wiffcn ©ie, welches S3uc^ er f)z\xU in bem ©artcn /a«— do you know what book he read to-day in the garden ? fagen @ie mix, wasjur * The relative signification of these words must be dis- tinguished from the other meanings which ihey bear, ei- ther as adverbs, or conjunctions. 2)at) eS ftc^> jugctragcn A«f — I cannot tell how it has happened ; ic^ moc^tc wtJTcn, ob \?iele Sculc bep jcfeiger f)eiJTcr SKittcrung auf bem gclbe fepn werden— I should like to know, whether, during the present hot weather, many people will be in the field. S55ic, and ob/ constitute indirect questions, and the verb is ut the end. (3) After conjunctions, conditional, causal, and con- secutive. They are : 2Cl^, bc\30r, bi§, ba, bafem, hOfi mit (in order that); bag ; auf t)a^ (in order that); el)e ; fall^, im gaUe (in case that) ; Qleid^tDie, inbcm ; im= magen, (since, because; old); nad)bem ; nun (when it signifies, since, after— nuu e§ einmal 9cfd}el)cn {)!, since it once has been done) ; ob, obfc^on, obglcid^, ob«)Of)(, feit, and feitbem ; ftntcmal (since, whereas; old); fo (when it means, if); fo balb, or fo balb aU ; fo langc, or folangeaB; foweit, orfowcitaB; mil; ircnn, trentis gleic^, tt)cnnfd)on; tx)ie, wimol)l, wofern, tt)o nid^n To these is to be added the comparative conjunction je, which, beginning the prior member, moves the verb to the end.f Examples : Als tt ben %ufxni)x in ber @tabt bemerkte — when he perceived the tumult in the city ; be- vor ic^ ben 2Salb erreic^t Aa^^e— before I had reached * It is probably understa§ 58ud^ (efen toiil, if he will read that book; where it would be wrong to let the infinitive follow after the verb, as, WettU er tt)iU ba6 S5uc^) (cfem The coninnrtions, ba§/ and tt)enn, are occasionally understood, without being ♦'xpressed.* Being thus ab- sent from the sentence, they forfeit their power of mov- ing the verb to the end. Rule If. The Subjunctive Mood, is, in the arrange- ment of words, under the same regulations, as the indi- cative. When it denotes a wish, or surprise, it often be- gins the sentence : as, ®ebe e6 bet ^itnrml, may heaven grant it : moc^tc bie , that the sun would shine ! ^attz td)6 bocl) ntd)t gcglaubt, I should not have thought it ! Always, when the conditional con- junction, wenn, if, is omitted : 5Bare id) i)kx gcwcfen, had I been here ; for, wenu ic^ t)kv gewcfen wdre, if I had been here. Rule III. The Imperative precedes the personal pro- nouns, that serve to it as subjects. 8;obe bit, praise thou ; loBc er, let him praise ; (obcrt fie, let them praise. Rule IF. The Infinitive comes after the object, and the other words of a sentence, except the indicative, and subjunctive, when these, for reasons assigned before, are put last. Examples; (gr tt)unfd)t bie Sateinifd)e @))ra=: d)e gruubtid) ^U lemen — he wishes to learn the Latin language accurately; biefer ^anti Unn (^ngUfc^, gran:? jofifd), Deutfc^, unb tjerft^iebene anbere (Sprad)en won Suropa reden — this man can speak English, French, German, and several other tongues of Europe, ^et^ nen and reben, are infinitives. * See Gr. p. 385, 3. and p. 426. 452 [451] Arrangement of Words. Part II. Chap. 3* This rule affects the future tenses, beci^use lliey are composed of an iiifinirive, and the tliird auxiliary. That infinitive, namely, is placed in the same manner, as in the examples above staled, that is t<> say, after the object, and other words: as, ^6:) werde mor3en bic ©CQCnt) he- sehen — 1 shall to-morrow take a view of the country. S5cfcf)en is the infinitive, belonjiing to the auxiliary ttJCVbc, with which it constitutes the future tense; but this connection does not alter its position, in the sen- tence. — When the future, in the indicative, or subjunc- tive mood, is to go to the end, the infinitive, which com- poses it, must be put before the auxiliary: as, SJlail Qlaubt, bag bcr ^aifer mit ben granjofcn gricbcn ma6)in WetbC/ it is thought that the Eniperour will make peace with the French. Here the infinitive, mad)en, is before the auxiliary \T)erbe» When the future tense of the pas- sive voice is in that situation, the auxiliary verb, in the indicative, or subjunctive, is often put before the infini- tive, which is done to prevent, by means of the inter- vening participle, the close reiteration of iDCrbctt: for example, ^i) crwarte, ba^ tjcrfc^iebcne ©ad)cn itad) unfcrm Jpm\t wcrbcn gcbrad^t wcrben, I expect, that several things will be brought to our house. Another expedient I have seen used by modern writers,* that of substituting the infinitive of the second auxiliary, fcpn, for Werben^ Bui this is taking an improper liberty with the language, by forcing upon it a foreign idiom : for the auxiliary, belonging to the passive voice, in Ger- man, is not fet)n, but wcrbcn* * Cafcntaine, in hisitlcinciKomane, vol. i. has this pas- sage: ^ber ^enncd1 roei^ id), ba^ \cb rcraditet unb gctja^t fepn werbe. li niay, however, be said, that, in this in- stance, the parti(iples, pcradltet and gcba^t, are used as mere adjectives, (see Gr. p. 326) ; then the observation, in the text, would not apply. Sect. 4. The Verb. [452] 453 Sometimes, two infinitives stand together, of which one governs the other ; and the governing one should be put after that, which is governed : as, ^r WOUte fte md)t herein fommen lafTen, he would not let them come in. Here, laffett, the governing infinitive is preceded by the other, {)crcin fommen, which is governed. But this rule is not always observed, as the following example proves : @r ^at {l)n fd)on mef)r aU 5ef)n mal muffen f)6rcn,* be has heen obliged more than ten times to hear him — which should he, {)6rctt muffen* The infinitive is found, now and then, at the very be- ginning of a sentence, and in that position bears a strong emphasis : as, fommen WiU id) jwar, come, indeed, I will ; aha fc^rciben i?rtrf id) nid}t, but write I must not. The infinitive may be employed, in a substantive ca- pacity,t as the subject, or object: and is, then, placed according to these qualifications. Rule V. Tiie verbs compound separable must here be noticed. Tl)e particle is separated from the verb (when this is not at the end), and placed after the object, and and other words,| including even a relative, or interme- diate, member of the sentence, ^d) nel^mc '^\)X ®Z^ fd)enf mit ^anfbarfeit an, I receive your present with gratitude; verb anne()men, to receive — the particle ait^ at the end. @ie Umtxi in 2Cnfe{)uncj t){efer @ai)c bait) uhtXtin, they soon agreed with respect to this matter; verb ubereinfommen* 9'lel)men (Bic t>a6 SSuc^) mit, take the book with vou ; verb mitnel^men^ When the verb, * From CeUin^'^ ^?ifOrtDn, p. '279. In the Dutch lan- guage, in which the same poifition of words prevails, as in the German, the governing infinitive is constantly put k^ fore that, which is governed. ^ t See p. 420. I Jlefer to p. 305. 454 [453] Arrangement of Words. Part II, Chap, t in consequence of a pronoun, or a conjunction, is brought to the end of the sentence, tlie particle is not divided from it: as, £)a id) S^t ®cfd)enf mit ^anfbar^: fcit annet)mc, as I receive your pre'sent with gratitude. The verb annef)me stands last, on account of the con- junction fca, and remains, for this reason, united with the particle. — The infinitive mood, and preterite participle 3iave their places after the object, and at, or near, tlie end of the sentence ; therefore, the particle is not sepa- rated, except by ju, in the infinitive, and by gc, in the preterite participle : as, mit5uncl)mcn, mitgcnommcn* 3U/ however, does not always accompany the infinitiye. — From what has been said, it appears, that the separa- tion principally occurs in the indicative, subjunctive, and imperative moods. SECTION y. POSITION OP THE PARTICIPLE, Rule I. When the participle (either present, or pre- terite) is used as an adjective, it has the privileges of the same, in the position of words. Rule II. The present participle is always preceded by the case it governs: as, X)k aUc§ belcbcnbc (Sonne, the sun animating every thing ; t»ic glcifd) frcffcnbcn 3^^ierc, the animals that live upon flesh.* Rule III. The preterite participle, combined with the auxiliary verbs, has its station after the object, aud other words; and is, therefore, generally found towards the • See i>. 325. Sect. 5. The Participle. [454] 455 end of the sentence. @r ijl in ftonbou Qewcfen, he has been in London— ijl QCWCfctl, the participle gewefcn at the end. ^d? ^abc \)t\XU t)a6 S5uc!^ gelcfcn, I have read the book to-day— l^abc gclcfcH^ @r wirb mit SRec^t ein grower 50lann gcnannt, he is justly called a great man. If the auxiliary, by the power of some pronoun, or con- junction, be removed to the end, the preterite participle stands before it : as, ^ic %i)akx\, tt)eld)e \)on t»em £)ic^* ter gef(!^i(bert Wcrbcn, the deeds that are depicted by the poet. The auxiliary, tvetbcn, at the end, because of the pronoun tt)cld)C; the participle, gcfc!^iltctt, before it. Sci) weifi c6, mil id) ten ^am felbjl 9efc|)cn t)aU, I know it, because I have seen the man myself. SQSeK, conjunctiou, brings the verb i)abz to the end, and the par- ticiple, gcfet)Cn, precedes it.— Should it so happen, that an infinitive also is in the sentence, then the arrange- ment may either be thus, participle, infinitive, indicative (or subjunctive), nad}bem id) ba§ S5uc!) gctefcn f^aUw vrerbc, after I shall have read the book; or the verb definite, that is to say, the indicative, or subjunctive, may be put before the participle, and infinitive, m^ bem x^t)a^ fS\x&) werbe gekfcn l)aben. I think, it may be left to the judgment of every individual, which of these two ways should, upon difi:*erent occasions, [have the preference. SECTION vr. POSITION OF THE ADVERB. Rule /.- An adverb, joined to an adjective, must al- ways remain before it: as, iBt^t gut, very good; nid)t fd)led)t, not bad. 456 [455] Arrangement of Words, Part IL Chap. 3. Rule II. When the adverb belongs to the verb, it is put after the latter, aiu), in general, also alter the ob- ject, dx bc^anbelt ben ©egenf^anb t>ortreffIid), he treats the subject exrellenti)' ; VOrtrcfflic^) is the adverb. The verb being at the end of the sentence, the ad- verb, as well as the other words, must naturally stand before it. Nor can the adverb, with propriety be placed after the infinitive, or preterite participle. Moreover, unless the verb be at the end, the adverb cannot be suf- fered between the subject, and the verb. Hule III. The adverb, being moved from its place, towards the beginning of the sentence, generally receives an emphasis: as, ^c^ i)abc ^cute bag S3ud? QClcfen, I have to-day rea» This practice, which had justly been corrected, by giv- ing to the preposition the same rank with the adverb, upon grammatical principles, has of late been revived ; and adopted by those, who were not aware of the ground, on which it had been altered. Rule III. From Iheuce it may be transferred, before the object, for the purpose of emphasis : ^d? i)abe au§ 2)cutf^Iant) cincn SSricf er|)aUen— here the words, au§ ^CUtfd)Iant», acquire energy from their position. But the stress is most forcible, when the preposition is placed in front of the sentence : 2(u6 2)eutfd)lanb ^abc 16) mm S5ncf tx1i)a\Un,from Germany I have received a letter. Rule IV. It cannot be inserted between the subject and the verb, unless it solely belongs to the former : as, 2)er 5(Jlann mit bem blaucn 9locfe \}Ckt c§ 9ct{)an, the man with the blue coat (that is, wearing a blue coat) has done it. Sencr mit bem ^cgen 1:)at ben 5!Korb bcgangcn, that one with the sword, (that is, he who has the sword), has committed the murder. It is not said, that the first has done it with the blue coat, or that the second has coip- mitted the murder with the sword : this would be a false construcJion. But, from the collocation of the words, it i» to be understood, that the one, who wears a blue coat, is charged with a certain deed, and the other, who has a sword, has committed a murder. Therefore, if the preposition, with its case, is not exclusively referred Sect 7' T!ie Preposition, [458] 459 to the subject, it cannot be put, where we see it, in the examples adduced. Rule F. If both adverb, and preposition meet in the same member of a sentence, the adverb should come before the preposition, especially, when the former con- sists 6nly of one, or two syllables : for example, @r fd)reibt gut mit biefer geber, he writes well with this pen ; n)ir get)en]^eute auf bie '^o,^, we go a hunting to-day; fie rcifetcn eiligburd) Sonbon, they passed hastily through London ; er tt)irb tnorgen ju mir f ommen, he will come to me to-morrow. The adverbs gut, \)i\xXz, eilig, mor^ gen, here stand before the prepositions. SECTION VIII, POSITION OF THE CONJUNCTION. Rule 1. The conjunction is, in general, placed at the beginning, and before the subject. Rule II. Some conjunctions force the verb to the end of the sentence, as has been slated in the fourth section.* They are : %U, be^or, bi§, 'iia, bafem, bamit, aufbag, €f)e, faU§, 9leic^)n)ie, xxi^txa, m galle, je, nad)bem, nun, ob, obfd)on, obgleic^, obwo^l, felt, feitbem, fin== temal, fo, fo balb, fo balb aB, fo lange, fo lange al§, fo VDeit, fo xctxi ala, VDeil, wenn, tt)enn gteid), ivenn fc^on, tPie, wiefern, in raiefern, wiewoi^t, n?ofern, n?05= nic^t* Rule III. Others, when at the beginning, make the subject go behind the verb. They are: ^a, then; * See p. 449. K R 2 460 [459] Arrangement of Words. Part II Chap. ^' balder, therefore; bann, barauf; barum, for that rea- son ; t^emnad), bennod), jcbod), iebennod), ferner, folgss lid), t)in9e9en, inglctc^en, !aum, mit()in, nod^, fo, wberbieg, lUrigcn^* ^a fam bet 50?ann, then came ihe man; miti)m irrt fid) bein S5ruber, consequently your brother mistakes. Excepting ba, and mit{)in, all the rest may likewise be put after the verb : as, ^er ^IJ^iJttn glaubt ba|)er, the man thinks therefore ; id) JWeifle jcs? bod), I, however, doubt, gcrncr, folgUdt), ^ingcQen, tn9lcid)en, ubcrbicg, ubrigcn^, may even stand between the subject and the verb : ^er SScrfaffer fcmer )ii\)a\XpXttf the author, moreover, maintains. — %\^o, bod), Ctttsf tt)Cber, WJeber, jwar, are to be added to the foregoing ; for, when they begin a sentence, they may, like these^ bring the subject after the verb, though it is not neces- sary.* It is right to say, 2(tfo ber ^rubcr l^at gcfc^ric* ben, and, alfo 1c)(d ber SSruber gefd)ricbcm Likewise thus : ^cr SSrubcv IjclX alfo gefd)rieben, and ber SSrubcr alfo \)Cki gcfd)ricbcn* By this transposition, the stress of the sentence may be varied, which is no small advan- tage in composition.— The word namlid), namely, which should be considered as a conjunction, may be included among those last mentioned ; but, when at the begin- ning of a sentence, it never has the power of removing the subject after the verb. Rule IV. The conjunctions, 2(ber, but, and %\x^, also, may stand any where in the sentence.f At the beginning, 2(bcr mcin S5rubcr Weigcrt ftdb/ *^"t my bro- ther declines it. After another conjunction, ^a aber mcitvaSruber fid) trcigern After an adverb, g^un aber bcficl)lt C§ ber ^onig, but now the King commands it ; or after a preposition with its case, 50?it biefen 2:eutett ♦ Sec p. 438. t 9(ud[j is mentioned, p. 438. Sect. 8. The Conjunction, [460] 46l aber Um id) md)t§ anfangen, but whh ihese people I can do iiolhing. And it makes no alteration in the in- fluence of oilier words, upon the conslltulion of the sen-* tence. Those, for instance, which move the subject after the verb, retain the same qualification, though abet be inserted after tiieni ; as appears from the preced- ing examples. It may farther be placed after the sub- ject, £)te granjofcn aber ^aben ben ©ngldnbern ben ^rteg erfldrt* After the object, X)k granjofcH 1;)ahm ben (Sngldnbern t)m ^rteg aber erfldrt* When not in tlie beginning, it commonly gives energy to the word that precedes it. The personal pronouns are, generally, put before it, when the verb has quitted its original place: as, T)a er aber nic^t fommt, but since he does not come ; iici^ n)unfd}en wir aber md)t, but this we do not wish ; t>(i^ ©elb t)er(ange 16:) aber, but the money I demand.— What has been remarked of aber, may, almost entirely, be applied to and) ; though perhaps, if we speak cau- tiously, we should say, that au6:) has nearly, but not quite the same licence of position. It is, moreover, pos- sessed of the power, when placed at the beginning of a sentence, of bringing the subject after the verb, which power aber has not. SECTION IX. POSITION OF THE INTERJECTION. The position of the interjection is arbitrary ; it may be placed wherever it presents itself, according to the feeling, and impulse, of tfle speaker, or writer.* Sec Exercises p. 20 1, n. 3. THE END. 46<2 Editions of Books, quoted in this Work, SBtclanb* (Bammtlidi)^ SSScrfc. Sci^^ig, bet; ©ofc^en, 1794—1797. a§ ^(ctnob, a small thing, a trinket, jewel, should have been mentioned. The regular plural of it, is ^leiltobe ; but sometimes it is made ^(cinobiett, which must be presumed to come from a different singular, such as tie ^(ctnobie, (of the first declension), now out of use, or to have sprung from the Latin Clenodium, of the middle ages. P. 169. It ought to have been remarked concerning the numerals, which are said to govern the adjective in the fourth form, that this, in reality, only applies to ©in, eine, eitt, throughout the singular, and to the ob- lique cases of 3wet), and T)XiX), in the plural, as they are exhibited in that page. The cardinal numbers, in ge- neral, seem to have no effect upon the adjective, but to leave it, before the substantive, in the second form : for example, ^ret) ftarfe 5Qldnttcr, three strong men ; t)ter fc^warje ^ferte, four black horses ; fed)§ junge SD?at)= d)en, six young girls. P. 383, In this place, where the use of the Tenses is spoken ot^ it would have been proper to notice an inac- curacy, which not unfrequently occurs, even in respec- table writers. The tenses, that bear a reference to one another, should correspond, as they do in Latin: but this is not always attended to. In this instance, 50^att glaulJte, bap C§ XOa\)X feg, they thought it was true—they do not correspond, and this is a fault : for glaubte is the preter imperfect, and fep the present. They should both Omissions. be imperfects, as they are in English, thought — was,ihus, Wlan glaubtc, baf e§ tt)af)r tnare. (5r be^auptet, ic^ taavt ba geVDCfcn, lie maintains that I have heen there. This is again wrong, bcl^ClUptCt being the present tense, and ware the preterimperfect, (1 consider, ht re, waxt by itself, not as it forms the compound tense, trdre QCtDC^ fen)/ which should be changed into fe^, in order to make it correspond with the foregoing present — ©r bt^auptrt, id) feg ba gewefen^ I read, at this mon^ent, in a German publication, the following passage: 9Bir btlUgten e§ aber fogleid) bamal6 nidjt, bag .g)crr SS* mel}rerc frembartige Unterfud^ungen einge[d;oben ^abe, but we did even at that time not approve of il, that Mr. V. had inserted se- veral heterogeneous inquiries. ^iUigten, preterimper- fect, and t)abz, present tense, do not agree : the latter should be {)attC* Another example t (Sr fagt, baburcl) lafae ct bic ©elegenkit ttcrloren, e6 todre aber ttad)]j)er cisr ncm anbern gelungen, he says that he, by that means, has lost the opportunity, but that another has afterwards succeeded— {)abc and wdl'C are at variance ; the latter should be fet)» 465 Errours of the Press, P. 173, at the lop, read Declension of Adjectives, for, of Substantives. P. 203. read thus the number of the page, instead of 03. P. 333, at the lop of the page, read 333 for 233. P. 385. 1. 1. bag, for bag* Printed by J. B. G. Vogel, 7, Castle-sr. Falcon-sq. London. INDEX Page About, nearly, 425 Absolute cases, 400, and 428 Accent, 66 Full Accent, • • • 73 Demi Accent, 82 Accentless Syllables, - - • • • 83 Accusative Case, • • 399, 400, 414, 428 Address, 202, 212, 376 Adjectives, 160, 372, 414 First Form, igi Second F 381 Personal Pronouns, 200, 416 Reciprocal, 201 Possessive, 209, 416 Demonstrative, 213, 417 Relative, 218, 417 Miscellaneous,. . • 295 Index. Page Pronunciation of Letters, 29 Upper Saxon Pronunciation, T Lower Saxon Pronunciation, • 10 Best Pronunciation, •. ^ 11 Proper Names, 151 Prosody, 87 Punctuation, • 23 Quantity (in Prosody), 87 Reciprocal Pronouns, j- 201 Reflective Verbs, 295 Regular Conjugation, * 253 Relative Pronouns, 218, 417 (5elb|l, 226 ©0, 357, 427, 440 ©oae n, 247 ©Ont'trti, 428 Subjunctive mood, 384 Subsequent member, 427, 439 Substantive Noun 103,369 Syntax, 363 Tenses, 383 Termination, inn, 117 Ultt; 318, 341 Upper German, • 2,3 Upper baxi'M Pronunciation, • 7 Verb, 228 Auxiliary Vei bs, 228J Regular Verbs, 253 Irregular Verbs, ' 265 Verbs Nemer, • • 291 Reflective Verbs, 295 Impersonal Verbs, 301 Verbs Compound, 302 Verbs governing Cases, 391 'Bon, • 370 Vowels, 30, 84 2Benn, conj. omitted, 385, (2), 426, 427, 441, (13) mm, 421 2Doaen, 246 UJN1V11JKS1TY UF (JALIFOKMIA LIBKAKY THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW APft 22 Vj io j..1ar-65Ul REC'D LO MAR 3 '65-1' |Sep'65VS '.-♦ {IJG 3lte%'4P^